(gift of CLASS ACC_ (hth GIFT OF BOHEMIAN CLDB A CYCLE OF CELESTIAL OBJECTS SMYTH AND CHAMBERS Hontron HENRY FROWDE OXFOBD UNIVEESITY PBESS WABBHOUSE 7 PATERNOSTER ROW Frontispiece SIDEREAL CHROMATICS. A CYCLE OF CELESTIAL OBJECTS OBSERVED, REDUCED, AND DISCUSSED BY ADMIRAL WILLIAM HENRY SMYTH, R.N., K.S.F., D.C.L. REVISED, CONDENSED, AND GREATLY ENLARGED BY GEORGE F. CHAMBERS, F.R.A.S. OF THE INNER TEMPLE, BARRISTER-AT-LAW. Author of "A Handbook of Descriptive Attronomy;" "A Digest of the Law Relating to Public Health; " A Digest of the Law Relating to Public Libraries and Museums ; And other Works. SECOND EDITION. AT THE CLARENDON PRESS. 1881. [All rights reserved] S 4 Astron. upi. / r ASTRONOMY DEPT. [Original Dedication, 1844.] TO SIR JOHN FREDERICK WILLIAM HERSCHEL, BART.. &c. &c. &c. AS A TESTIMONY OF THE HIGHEST ADMIRATION AND ESTEEM ; A MEMORIAL OF LONG-CONTINUED FRIENDSHIP ; AND A GRATEFUL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF IMPORTANT ADVICE IN THE PURSUIT OF PRACTICAL ASTRONOMY : AND AS A HEART-FELT TOKEN OF RESPECT FOR THE MEMORY OF HIS EXCELLENT FATHER WHOSE INDEFATIGABLE ZEAL, NEVER-FAILING RESOURCES, DEPTH OF INQUIRY, AND ALMOST UNRIVALLED QUICKNESS OF CONCEPTION, HAVE RENDERED HIS LIFE AN ERA IN ASTRONOMICAL SCIENCE THIS CYCLE OF CELESTIAL OBJECTS IS MOST RESPECTFULLY INSCRIBED BY HIS FAITHFUL FRIEND, WILLIAM HENRY SMYTH. 701074 PKEFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. THE circumstances under which this edition appears are some- what peculiar, and need a little explanation. Admiral Smyth's original Cycle of Celestial Objects, published in two volumes in the year 1844, was a book which attained a world-wide renown, and therefore naturally it passed out of print within a few years of its publication. Towards the close of his long and distinguished career the Admiral made various arrangements for the issue of a second edition by a very experienced observer, connected with him by ties of a special character. In Mr. Isaac Fletcher the book would have had as Editor an experienced observer, whose name would have been thoroughly acceptable to the astronomical world. Mr. Fletcher accepted the duty that was cast upon him, and during several years systematically collected materials for the revision of the work. In his hands, however, it made no great amount of progress, because in the year 1868 he exchanged in reat part his scientific career for a political one by becoming Member of Parliament for Cockermouth. This had the not un- natural effect of hindering both observatory and literary work. Finally, his lamented death in 1879 put an end for the while to the prospect of any new edition of the Cycle being published under the supervision of the original Author's relatives or imme- diate friends. It is no matter of concern to the public how it came about that the surviving representatives of Admiral Smyth eventually charged me with the interesting but serious reponsibility of publishing a new edition of the book. Suffice it then to state that in the autumn of 1879 I acquired the copyright of the work, all the original wood-blocks, and, what was of great value, all the MS. viii Preface to the Second Edition. notes, memoranda, private letters, and unpublished drawings col- lected by Admiral Smyth and Mr. Fletcher during- the long period of 35 years. I need hardly say that the labour of digesting these materials and of interweaving them with the print of the first edition has been great. It will be for the public to say how far it has been accomplished with success. I should never have embarked on the scheme had I not believed in the existence of a widespread desire on "the part of astronomers to see issued a new edition of a book which without doubt powerfully stimulated a taste for Astronomy amongst amateurs in England during the quarter of a century following its appearance; The programme which I set before myself was this : so to revise, prune, and amplify Admiral Smyth's " Bedford Catalogue," as to provide a Telescopist's Manual for Refractors up to, say, 8 inches of aperture, and to embody the progress of the science up to 1880, just as the original edition might have been con- sidered fairly complete for 5 inches of aperture up to 1845. To carry out this programme involved a twofold task: (i) to cut down here, expand there, and revise everywhere Admiral Smyth's printed matter. This has been done in a very searching manner. (2) To compile from works relating to the Southern hemisphere a body of objects as nearly similar in general cha- racter as might be to those which Admiral Smyth had gathered together for the Northern hemisphere. This second branch of my duties has been carried out as well as I could do it, but I am far from saying that I am satisfied with the results. The reasons for this are easily found. The Southern heavens have not been explored in the persistent way in which the Northern heavens have been during the last half century, observers in the Southern hemisphere being few and far between. These remarks are I think sufficient for the purposes of a Preface. In the Introduction will be found some more specific details as to the principles which have guided me in my revision, and as to the materials which have been made use of. I have done nothing yet in the way of preparing a new edition Preface to the Second Edition. ix of Admiral Smyth's first volume, which he designated "Prole- gomena." It is at present an open question with me what to do as to that volume, I having already covered most of the ground which it occupies, and much more besides, in my own Handbook of Astronomy. It is a pleasant task in bringing a book to an end to thank one's friends for assistance given. So much help has been generously afforded me from all parts of the world that I find it difficult to individualise the helpers. But two, and they strangers to me personally, and foreigners, stand out beyond all others ; namely, Mr. S. W. Burnham of Chicago, U.S., and M. Jedrzejewicz of Plonsk in Poland. Mr. Burnham has not only furnished me with an almost inexhaustible supply of double star measures of great precision and late date, but he has read all the proof sheets and made innumerable suggestions. Of these some are being treasured up for a future edition, having come to hand too late for use in this one. M. Jedrzejewicz has supplied me with numerous measures of double stars, many of which were made as recently as 1 880, and belong to objects often neglected by observers. They were there- fore peculiarly acceptable to me as enabling me to fill up gaps, which otherwise must have remained for this edition unfilled. I have only to add that I have done my best to secure accuracy in the printing of the book, and I trust that few errors of moment will be found to have crept in. I shall at all times be very glad to receive corrections and suggestions for the improvement of future editions. . JF. e Norihfield Grange, East-Bourne, Sussex, April, 1 88 1. CONTENTS. PAGE PBEFACE ........... \ii LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS . . xiii ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA ....... xiv INTRODUCTION xv CYCLE OF CELESTIAL OBJECTS FROM o h TO xxiv h i ANALYTICAL INDEX . 68 1 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. Coloured Plate, " Sidereal Chromatics " Frontispiece PAGE Fig. i. 31 M. Andromedae 16 2. Ursa Major and Polaris . . . . . . . . -33 3. 33 #. VI. Persei . .60 4. 19 $. V. Andromedee 62 5. 156 #. I. Persei . ,-r - . . 67 6. 60 # . VII. Persei 102 7. 26 $. IV. Eridani 104 8. i M. Tauri . . .146 9. 1 Orionis 151 10. Orion 164 11. 2 $ . VI. Geminorum 192 12. 64 Ijl. IV. Puppis 217 13. 67 M. Cancri 241 14. 57 #. I. Leonis 256 15. "A Pious Fraud." A. D. 267 . . . . . . . . 267 16. The Position of 27 #. IV. Hydra 271 17. Ursa Major 286 18. 97 M. Ursae Majoris 292 IQ. 65 and 66 M. Persei ...-,. ,. ... 298 20. 195 $. I. Ursae Majoris . ' , . - ... . .... ,. : _.,,; .;. . . - . 319 21. Group of Nebulae in Virgo . . -. .,..._ ... .' . . 341 22. 43 I- Virginia . . . 347 23. Orbit of 7 Virginia as found by Sir J. Herschel in 1832 . . *. 351 24. Orbit of 7 Virginia as found by Admiral Smyth in 1843 . . . 354 25. 60 M. Virginia and other nebulae . . . . . . . 357 26. 75 1$. II. Virginia 362 27. 64 M. Comae Berenicis 366 28. C Ursae Ma joria 379 29. 3 M. Canum Venaticorum 389 30. Ursa Minor 419 31. 5 M. Librae 429 32. 80 M. Scorpii 451 33. Variable Stara near 80 M. Scorpii . . . . . . 452 34. 13 M. Herculis 468 35- 36 Ophiuchi 483 36. 92 M. Herculis 490 37. 14 M. Ophiuchi 498 38. 37'^. IV. Draconis . . .512 39. 22 M. Sagittarii ' . . 532 40. Lyrae 540 41. nM. Antinoi 544 42. 57 M. Lyrae 549 43. 56 M. Lyrae * . . 561 44. 27 M. Vulpeculae 585 45. &* Capricorn! / .; . . 597 46. isM. Pegasi . ; .-.'.. 631 47. 2 M. Aquarii . . . . . . .'..".. . 633 48. 30 M. Capricorni . . * . 635 49. 52 M. Cephei .'.-;". 668 50. 30 y. VI. Cassiopeiae ' . . .... 674 51. Miss Herschel's Telescope . . ... . . . - .675 ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA. Page 3. No. 3, The word "single" has been inserted by the printer in the wrong place. It should stand opposite the name BUKNHAM. Doberck's angle seems obviously erroneous, o 4- 7. Add: Burnham 169-9 ... 7-8 ... 1880-59 6. 12. Add: Burnham 95-8 ... 0-71 ... 1880-59 IO. 24. Add: Burnhara 82.3 ... 27-5 ... 1880-58 u. 28. Add: Burnham 223.2 ... 6-8 ... 1880.59 20. 22. 42. 46. Add: Jedrzejewicz 159-9 5'3 1880-14 Add: Jedrzejewicz 359-5 ... 1.37 ... 1880-10 22. ,, 47. Add: Burnham 3 2 7-3 ... 432 ... 1880-60 23. 48. Add: Burnham 116-9 3 8 '3 1878-67 There is an excessively faint star of mag. 1 3 nearer than Smyth's discovered by Burnham. Pos. 314; Dist. 37"; 1878-67. 28. 61. Dele " Burnham says " &c. f "WilKnn &1 o // 30- 64. Add: < !s ea broke' >C ' D -* 41 ' 5 " f 22 '3 '" 1874-40 CD is 2. 101. o // 30- 65. Add: Russell 0-4 ... 5-6 ... 1880-40 30- ,, 66. The Decl. should be 57 44-9'- // 3 1 ,, 68. Add: Deinbowski 349-9 ... 52-4 ... 1874-80 36. 73. Add: Jacob 125-6 ... 9-7 ... 1846-90 36- 37- 75. 78. Add: Dembowski 99-1 ... 69-2 ... 1874-40 The star mentioned here is that given as No. 77. 85. A very faint star of mag. 14 or 15 has been seen by Hall. Pos. 63; Dist. 22"; 1876-00. o // ,, 4 1 - 88. Add: Burnham 32-1 ... 11-4 ... 1878-21 43- 94. For 2. 151 rend 2. 153 and add : Burnham 67-8 ... 7-8 ... 1 880-61 43- 95. Add: Stone 59-0 ... 4-8 ... 1877-85 Burnham 61-1 ... 4.3 ... 1879-03 45- 100. Add : Gledhill 195-2 ... 3-3 ... 1873-90 46. 103. For the star presumeably Smyth's B, Burnham's figures should be: 172-8 ... 308-0 ... 1879.75 47- 104. Add : In Pos. 84; Dist. 223"; 1878-70 there is a 9 th mag. star which Burnham finds to be a close double, Pos. 27; Dist. 1-5"; - Epoch 1878-01. The companion is of about the 1 2 th or i8 th mag. O // 53- ,, 119. Add: Jedrzejewicz BC 94- 1 ... oblong ... 1880-12 60. 133. The observer's name is left out ; it should be SMYTH. 64. 138. The angle of AB is decreasing, not increasing. // .. T3. 1fi9 A (\A __ "Rn vnlia.in \ f To*7A.I C is of mag. 10 and D of mag. 12. The duplicity of C was dis- covered by I. W. Ward of Belfast. Burnham notes that there is a 13 th mag. star about 20" from C in the direction 228. ,,230. ,, 533. For " white " read " wide." 253. 595. The precession is Decl. should be 15-49". 285. 679. Add: Hunt 203-5 ... 384-9 ... 1881-12 ,,348. 849. Add: Russell 181-3 ... 1-39 ... 1880-44 ,,410. 981. Add: Russell 185-0 ... 5-5 ... 1880-44 ,,422. ,,1006. Add: Russell 189.3 ... 0.90 ... 1880-44 ,,511. 1216. For " Difference of R.A." read " Distance." 555- ,,1303. Add: Russell 53-1 ... i'-i5 ... 1880-45 642. 1513. For " 2. 802 " read " S.'8o2." INTRODUCTION. THE many English observers who during the last thirty odd years have been familiar with Admiral Smyth's method of arranging his materials, will find that in the formation of this large extension of the " Bedford Catalogue " I have proceeded as closely as possible on the lines laid down by my predecessor. This new edition, though the materials are fused into a consecutive series of objects arranged in strictly regular progression through the 24 hours of Right Ascension, comprises two essentially distinct masses of matter, namely, (i) Admiral Smyth's own objects with his notes thereon, and (2) my additions with my notes thereon. The Admiral's historical, antiquarian, and scholastic remarks on everything which could possibly be used as a peg for such remarks constituted a striking and attractive feature which I have re- tained more or less intact, but have made no attempt to imitate. It follows therefore that the objects selected by me have few annotations, and those only of a purely astronomical character. In dealing with Admiral Smyth's objects I have done my best to revise every item of information; to strike out passages which were quite erroneous or out of date; and to bring up to date every state- ment which needed such treatment. I have omitted here and there non-astronomical comments the space occupied by which I thought might be more profitably utilised, and I have struck out altogether a few objects which seemed to me devoid of interest to those for whom this work is primarily intended. Perhaps I might have done well to have struck out a larger number of objects. This is a matter which will be taken into consideration hereafter. The additions which I have made have been selected with the idea in my mind that the Admiral had omitted a large number of Herschelian clusters and nebulae and Struvian double stars which undoubtedly de- served a place in these pages. 1 have likewise added a certain number of isolated objects which seem particularly -to deserve the attention of xvi Introduction. amateurs, such as remarkable coloured stars, and remarkable variable stars. These additions have greatly enlarged the scope of the original Catalogue. But its extent has been still further augmented by reason of the fact that I have brought within its range the whole of the Southern Hemisphere, selecting Southern objects as nearly as possible on the footing on which I might presume that Admiral Smyth would have proceeded had he ever tried to compile a Southern "Bedford Catalogue," so to speak. These additions have involved a vast amount of thought and labour, and I am very far from confidently asserting that the results will prove wholly satisfactory. The fact that I have had to make my selection without any personal knowledge of the objects themselves, and without the advantage of any help from observers who have seen them, has rendered my labours necessarily difficult. Nothing would afford me greater pleasure than to be brought hereafter into communication with a few observers in the Australian Colonies, for instance, able and willing to furnish me with the means of revising and improving my selection. But it is not alone in the matter of selection that some Southern help is needful. There has been practically no Double Star work carried out on the other side of the globe since Sir John Herschel's sojourn at the Cape from 1834 to 1838. The consequence is that such a thing as a well-observed Southern binary does not exist. Indeed, as regards double stars, there are an immense number in the Northern hemisphere which have been entirely neglected. It is a matter for regret that what few double star observers there are in England should so generally devote their energies to the unnecessary multiplication of observations of stars which do not very urgently need to be observed. I have done my best to ransack all the published sources of information relating to double stars and nebulae, and I hope it will be found that few modern details respecting these which have been made public of late years and which deserve record in such a book as the present have escaped my notice. The number of works which have been consulted in the pre- paration of this volume is so great, that it would be hopeless to attempt to particularise them. In selecting my additions, I have as regards the double stars commonly limited myself to objects whose principal component was at least as bright as the 7 tlx magnitude, the companion being at least as bright as the io th magnitude and the distance under 30"; but a departure from , Introduction. xvii these restrictions has occasionally been deemed expedient. In the case of clusters and nebulae I have rarely taken any object not marked by Sir John Herschel as at least " p B," meaning " pretty bright." But I have sometimes departed from this rule where an object was stated by him to possess some specially remarkable features, or happened to be one of those included by Sir ~W. Herschel in his Class I, "Bright Nebulae," or Class V, " Very Large Nebulae/' Some miscellaneous improvements have been introduced into the book which I trust may enhance its usefulness. For instance, in the case of all the nebulae the reference number of Sir J. Herschel's General Catalogue published in the Philosophical Transactions for 1864 is given, but I have not made a corresponding use of Sir J. Herschel's General Catalogue of Double Stars published in vol. xl. of the Memoirs of the Royal Astronomical Society, for the reason that its numerous deficiencies render it of little or no value. It is a great pity that the Society, when spending its money on what was intended to be a general and complete Catalogue of Double Stars, did not make it such by finishing Sir J. Herschel's MS. instead of printing it in an unfinished form. The places of the objects have been for the most part taken from Smyth, or from Sir J. Herschel's 2 Catalogues of Nebulae and Double Stars ; they have been brought up by myself to the year 1890, and have approximate precessions for 1890 appended thereto. In certain cases the calculations were performed for me by Mr. "W. H. St. Q. Gage, F.K.A.S., of Exeter College, Oxford, but I have gone over all the calculations myself, and have no reason to fear that any important errors have crept in. In certain instances where better places were at command than those obtainable from the sources named above, I have availed myself of such better places, but I have not deemed it worth while to indicate them except in these general terms. In designating the objects, I have in all cases followed Admiral Smyth in respect of his own objects, except in one or two instances in which he had clearly made mistakes. In designating my additions, I have taken Greek letters in all cases where a star was known by a Greek letter. I have next given the preference to Flamsteed's numbers; then to Lacaille's numbers r besides which there are a few reference numbers from other Catalogues, such as the "Brisbane," the "B.A.C.," "Bir- mingham's Bed Stars" (Scientific Trans. Roy. Irish A cad. vol. xxvi. 1877), and so on. Nebulae which had been classed by Sir AV. Herschel b xviii Introduction. are given with his Classes and Numbers. Nebulae first observed by Sir J. Herschel are given with his numbers (with the letter h. attached) as published in the Philosophical Transactions, 1833, and the Cape Observations. Nebulae observed at Parsonstown and included in the very valuable and interesting Catalogue lately published by the present Earl of Rosse in the Transactions of the Royal Dublin Society have an old English 1ft appended, in the title line of each entry. The Parsonstown notes should be studied by all possessors of large telescopes who devote their attention to nebulae. In selecting measures of Double Stars for insertion in this work I have endeavoured to exhibit results separated by tolerably equal intervals of time when the materials for doing so existed. Other things being equal, the interval chosen has been 10 years, but strict adherence to this plan has frequently been. impossible. Of all matters with which I have had to deal, that of the magnitudes of the stars has been the most troublesome by far. In many cases I have retained Smyth's magnitudes because I found them ; yet, also in many cases, I have altered them where it appeared on sufficient evidence that they were flagrantly erroneous. Smyth's magnitudes are for all the larger stars taken from Piazzi. Magnitudes substituted for Smyth's are generally given within brackets. A word must be said about the magnitudes of the additional objects. In the case of double stars selected from Struve I have often disregarded Struve's magnitudes, altering them by means of Mr. Knott's well-known Table, which I here subjoin. SMYTH. 6 6J 7 71 8 8| 9 9* 10 ii 12 13 14 15 16 Sir J. Herschel's magnitudes in the case of his Southern Doubles STRUVE. SIE J. HERSCHEL. ARGELANDER. 5-7 6.4 5-9 6-3 7-o 6.4 6-5 7-4 6-8 6.9 7-8 7-5 7-4 8-2 8-0 7-9 8-8 8-6 8-3 9-5 9-0 8.9 10-1 9-4 9-3 10-4 9-4 10-0 n-3 IQ.O 10-4 n-7 io-6 107 12-5 II. 2 10-9 13-3 ii.8 io9 14-5 12-4 10.9 15-9 13.0 Introduction. xix I have left very much as I found them, except that where he has assigned different magnitudes on different nights as recorded by himself I have often taken a mean. In regard to star magnitudes generally, it is much to be wished that astronomers could be brought to agree on some philosophical method of estimating them based in some way on direct photometric experiments. The system proposed by Dawes * has much to recom- mend it, and I wish that a few influential observers would combine and try further experiments with a view to its general adoption. Struve's notation is objectionable on two grounds : (i) its arbitrary basis, viz., his telescope, which has since been distanced by many others ; (2) its decimals, which give a sham appearance of minute precision which is quite unattainable in a general way. For instance, who can dis- tinguish between a star of mag. 10-7 and one of mag. 10-8 ? As regards the colours of the components of double stars, I have usually retained those given by Smyth, notwithstanding that they are often very fanciful, and often defined with undue minuteness. Here, again, system is wanted, and Admiral Smyth's endeavour, by publishing his book on Sidereal Chromatics in 1864 to introduce method, deserves more encouragement than it appears to have received. At the risk of seeming presumptuous I will say that I think the illustrious Struve often went too far in his minute definitions of colours. Is not his terrible adjective Olivaceasubrubicunda a justification for saying this ? Admiral Smyth made use of various abbreviations to indicate the names of observers. Such as I found I have in many cases retained, but I have endeavoured to dispense with them as much as possible. The following Table may here be given, but of course it does not in- clude a great number of simple abbreviations in every day use in ob- servatories. A very full list of these will be found in my Handbook of Astronomy. In the Cycle : Bris. = Brisbane Catalogue of Southern Stars. y. = Sir W. Herschel. h. = Sir J. Herschel (nebula). *h. = Sir J. Herschel (double star). H. = Sir J. Herschel, General Catalogw of Nebulae, 1864. * Monthly Not, vol. x. p. 167, June 1851 ; vol. xii. p. 80, Feb. 1852; vol. xiii. P- 277, 1853. b2 XX Introduction. Lac. = Lacaille, Catalogue of Southern Stars. M. = Messier. P. = Piazzi. &. = Earl of Rosse, Observations of Nebulae, 1848-78. 2. = F. G. W. Struve. 0. S. = 0. Struve. B. = Bode. In the case of Double and Multiple Stars the Stars are lettered with the letters of the alphabet, the brightest being called A, the next B, the next C, and so on. But in some cases where a pair of Stars have long been familiarly known by these letters and a very minute companion has afterwards been detected close to A or B &c., such companion is designated little a, little b, &c. As a reminder to Double Star observers of the way in which angles of position are noted by astronomers the following woodcut will be useful: It should be remarked that the outer circle, which is graduated from o to 360, represents the method of recording angles of position of Double Stars now universally employed. "Within this circle however the circumference of the block is divided into 4 quadrants of 90 each, accoiding to the system adopted by Sir "W. Herschel but abandoned *,bout 1830 at the instance of his son, in consequence of "the continual Introduction. xxi and most annoying mistakes" which in practice were found constantly to occur under the system of reading by quadrants. For the convenience of those who are disposed to take in hand the work of Double Star observations I give on p. xxiii the observatory form of registry used by Mr. Fletcher, but borrowed by him from Admiral Smyth, who in turn copied from Sir J. Herschel *. I have not made any. attempt to supply illustrations of the objects given in this work beyond reprinting such as came to me from Admiral Smyth. Perhaps however if I receive encouragement to do so I shall give in future editions a further number of woodcuts. But it must be borne in mind that the delineation of clusters and nebulae by means of wood engravings is rarely attended with accurate and satisfactory results. By way however of affording some help to the reader in regard to this subject, I have in all cases given references to tolerably good published engravings t, so far as they are included in the list prefixed by Sir J. Herschel to his General Catalogue in the Philosophical Transactions for 1864, as extended by Dreyer in his valuable Supplement, published in the Transactions of the Royal Irish Academy, 1878. I have already made some allusion to the fact that the present Earl of Rosse has lately published in the Transactions of the Royal Dublin Society a very valuable and interesting series of Notes, accompanied by rough wood- cuts, of an immense number of clusters and nebulae re-observed at Parsonstown between 1848 and 1878, embodying and superseding the Notes published by the late Earl of Rosse in the Philosophical Trans- actions for 1844, 1850, and 1861. In dealing with the Southern hemisphere, so far as for my purpose it was necessary to meddle with names of stars and boundaries of con- stellations, I have followed as closely as possible the B.A.C. and the Maps of the S.D.U.K. I had at one time thought of revising everything connected with the uranography of the Southern hemisphere on the lines sketched out by Dr. Gould in his Uranometria Argentina, pub- lished at Buenos Ayres in 1879, and I procured a copy for the purpose, but this was found likely to prove a task of greater labour than I cared to undertake, at any rate until I saw how Dr. Gould's ideas as * Memoirs E. A.S., vol. v. p. 92. f The reader should here be reminded that all Sir J. Herschel's own engravings of clusters and nebulae are not only inverted but are reversed right and left, owing to their having been drawn with the observer placed ' front- view' -wise to the telescope. xx ii Introduction. to the Reform of the Constellations were received by the astronomical world generally. Dr. Gould's remarks by way of criticism on the names and boundaries of Constellations and on the lettering of con- spicuous Stars, which will be found in Chap. iii. of the 4to. volume belonging to the U ranographia, Argentina already alluded to, pp. 48-79, are very forcible in their way, but his endeavours to build up a sub- stitute for what he would pull down have like many "Reform" efforts landed him in a very ocean of confusion. Dr. Gould's uranographical experiences might have been very serviceable to me if I could have found my way about through his Notes in Chap, v. of the said book. I made many attempts to do this, but the labour was so great that I shrank from it. The constellations having been cut up into slices and pieced together again in all manner of ways by the enterprising Doctor, were next printed page after page in no visible order whatever, either alphabetical or meridional ; moreover many of the stars having been re-lettered, the difficulty of finding any particular star in what Dr. Gould calls his " Catalogue " is absolutely herculean. But I did not so much want to refer to the "Catalogue ;" I wanted rather the "Notes" which are printed in another part of the book, and therefore even when after much trouble a star was found in the "Catalogue" it was a matter of some minutes more to dig up the "Note." I leave the reader who may have access to a copy to judge of the time it would have taken me to have collated all my Southern objects with the Uranometria Argentina. On the subject of the Southern constellations generally I will give here an extract from a letter dated Sept. 8, 1880, which I received from Mr. E. J. Stone, now Radcliffe Observer, but who, as is well known, was at the Cape for some years. I had consulted him as to the nomenclature of the Southern constellations, intending to follow as well as I might be able any advice he gave me. Mr. Stone said: "I have practically followed the B.A.C. in my nomenclature. Baily followed Herschel's advice after Herschel found that no sweeping changes in Lacaille's system would be acceptable." Stone in effect said, " Meddle not with him that is given to change," and this conservative idea so warmly commended itself to me that I have implicitly acted upon it. Number for Reference. Right Ascension. Decl. N.P.D. N Instrument used. Date. Star's Name. 18 = 18 (dec. of year) Diagram. Quadrant. Magnitudes. Colours. A = TJ C = I> = Face to Microm. Position. Distance. Remarks. Power. o dec. w igs to be taken alternately. + + + + + Rev. Pts. dec. >' .B. The + and readii 1 1 1 1 z; Mean Z = i Sums < ( * f Sky Wind Steadiness Definition of Star Sid. Time of Obs. General ( Pos. Judgment < of Obs. ( Dist. Observer Div. by Parts ~ from n in direction nfsp Seconds rrr Zero of Position. Determination of Place. Star runs along the ) position wire at \ .'. Zero for position Z h m s Clock (or Clock + 24*0 + Hour Circle, ) + if East-West; I Computation of Distance. if read on to 24 h , i always Instrument Correction True R.A. or* Declination Circle, ) + North South j Instrumental Correction True Declination A CYCLE OF CELESTIAL OBJECTS. 1. 39 $. I. CASSIOPEIA. (2. 3O62,) R. A. 28 I Free. + 3-06 JWVb -LI - > 1 TEC/ ft Position, Distance. &\j \j\j Epoch, o -// STRUVE, W. 87.5 082 1831-71 DAWES 1934 ... 0-95 ... 1841-86 MADLER 237-0 ... 1-16 .., 1851-18 DEMBOWSKI 263-6 . i- 4 8 ... 1862-73 DEMBOWSKI 283-9 1-39 1871-55 BURNHAM 3034 i-57 1880-57 A binary star in rapid movement. A 7, yellowish white ; B 8, bluish. The period is at present uncertain. Madler, 146^; Schur, 112?; Doberck, 104?. The eccentricity of the orbit is smaller than usual with binary stars. Schur puts it at 0-5. Close to 2. 3057 and not far from /3 Cassiopeise. 2. a ANDROMEDJE. (2. 13 App. II.) I. a ANDROMEDJE. h. m. s. R.A. 2 41 Decl. N 28 29 '2 (I. 13 App. II.) s. Free. + 3-07 IP N 20-06 Position, Distance. O 11 HERSCHEL,W. ^59.4 ... 55-5 ... 1781-56 DAWES 264-2 ... 65-5 ... 1830-68 SMYTH 266-9 6 4 8 ..* 1837-74 BURNHAM 2720 ... 70-2 ... 1879-19 A Nautical Almanac star, with a minute companion. A 2, white ; B li, purplish. The increase of angle and distance in this object may be charged to the B 2 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. sf movements of the large individual in R.A. and Decl., with an allow- ance for errors of operation in so difficult a star. [" Rectilinear motion." Gledhill] The extensive northern constellation of which this star is now the lucida, was one of the old 48 asterisms, and its components, as optical means advanced, have been thus registered : Ptolemy , . . 23 stars. Hevelius .... 47 stars. Bulialdus. ... 26 Flamsteed , , , 66 Bayer .... 27 Bode ..... 226 is conspicuously figured near her father, mother, and lover, in 'the bonds which Aratus says she carried to Heaven ; and has fteeii; also designated Virgo devota, Mulier catenata, and Per sea. The Arabians, whose tenets prohibited their drawing the human figure, represented her as a sea-calf : but the principal star was called Sirrah, and Alpherat, from Sirrat-al faras, the horse's navel, it having for- merly been quartered on Pegasus, whence it was taken to decorate the tresses of the lady.. "Warm imaginations perceive a resemblance to chains, by drawing the eye from 51 and 54 of Flamsteed, on the lady's left foot, over x between the feet, to T on the right calf; and from Alamak on the right foot, through x and f to $ on the left knee. Owing to the derange- ments which the inadvertence or ignorance of the celestial map-makers have occasioned, there is no little confusion in this particular, for Flamsteed' s Nos. 51 and 54 Andromedae are < and v Persei, though placed exactly where Ptolemy wished them to be on the lady's foot : so also a in this asterism has been lettered 6 Pegasi by Bayer, and /3 has been the lucida of the Northern Fish. Sirrah is useful in alignment, or the mode of finding from a few stars with which a spectator is familiar, others which are unknown to him. Thus, an imaginary line drawn from the belt of Orion, which all the world knows or ought to know, through Aries, will lead to the head of Andromeda. Certain brackish rhymes then state :. And on, from where the pinion'd maid, Her cruel fate attends, Wide o'er the heavens his fabled form. Wing'd Pegasus extends. From Alpherat down to Markab's beams, Let a cross line be sent, Then will four stars, upon the horse, A spacious square present. Of this notable square, Alpherat (a Andromedae) and Scheat (/3 Pegasi) form the northern side, while Markab (a Pegasi) and Algenib (y Pegasi) mark the southern ; and these are useful in extending the alignment to other sought objects..- v ";'; B. A. o h - 2 m - >m, 3. 316 B CEPHEI. (2. 2 ) h. m. s. 8. B.A. 3 13 Free. + 3-07 o / ff Decl. N 79 6-0 N 2O-O6 Position. Distance. Epw o STRTJVE, W 341-5 0-81 1830 STRUVE, 0. 338-4 ... 0.74 ... 1840 SECCHI 324-9 0-38 i857 TALMAGE 295-6 0-30 1865 DOBERCK 3I5-8 .. not stated ... 1877 BURNHAM ... 1880 A very difficult double and single binary star. A 6 J, yellow ; B 7, deeper yellow. The angle is decreasing, and the distance after decreasing for many years is now perhaps increasing. B.A. m. & 3 18 CASSIOPEIA: Free. + II. Decl. 1ST 58 32*6 3-10 20-06 Position. Distance. Epoch,. BCRNHAM 324-6 ... 297 ... 1879-54 A bright star. A 2j, whitish; B n^, dusky. This object is called Caph, from Kaff-al-Khadib, the stained hand, a name from which a scientific friend supposes, that although now only the lueida cathedra or bright star on the couch-frame one of the hands may have reached it in the earlier designs. But the Arabians applied the term Kaff, a flat hand, to the whole asterism, whose five brightest stars repre- sented the thumb and fingers, coloured as if stained with henna, after the Oriental custom. This general name came to be fixed upon ft. A glance from the Pole-star to a Andromedae, passes through Caph, nearly in mid-distance : or a line from between y and b, the following stars in the wain of the Great Bear, carried over the polej strikes upon it, at a similar distance beyond Polaris : In yonder stars, which form a Ooss, lo, Caph precedes the whole, A Cross more glorious than that which decks the austral pole. 5. 1 Birm. CASSIOPEIA. B.A. 3 38 Decl. N 63 20 '4 Prec. + 3-06 // N 20-05 A red star of mag. 8J. Sir J. Herschel, "ruby;" Birmingham, 1873, "slight red;" Copeland, 1876, "deep red," 9. B 2 4 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 6. 147 $ HI. ANDROMEDA, (H. 9; .) III. h. m. s. 4 17 8. IPrec. + 3-09 o / // N 25 17-9 N 20-05 Position. Distance. Epoch. M 142.9 63-5 .- 1879-57 B.A. Decl. BUBNHAM A double star in a coarse cluster, occupying the spot where I looked for Sir W. Herschel's faint nebula. A 10, and B TI, both pale blue. It lies on the crown of Andromeda's head, and about 3 S. of a. I saw none of the nebulosity alluded to by Sir "William in his registry of 1784, but a perceptible glow in a tolerably rich and darkened field was indicative of nebulous matter. This part was followed by 3 principal stars nearly in a line at almost equal distances, and each with a companion n$. The third being the smallest and closest, is here taken. Another double star follows in the upper part of the field at about 3 m A R.A. ["There is a small star near B. Pos. 105; Dist, 12"." Burnham.~\ 7, 34 PISCIUM. (2. 5.) IV. B. A. 4 23 1 Prec. + 3-07 / n Decl. TS 1O 31' 9 | K" 20-05 Position. Distance. Epoch. STBUVE,W. 162-7 ... 8-03 ... 1830-32 SMYTH 165.0 ... 7 ... 1838-77 A neat double star. A 6, silvery white; B 13, pale blue; and they point to some small stars in the sf quadrant. This fine object, though numbered to Pisces, is astern of the leading Fish's tail, and near the wing of Pegasus ; and 4 S. a little preceding~the bright star y Pegasi, From the delicacy of the comes it is so excessively difficult to measure, that I only mark a mean of careful estimations. [" Probably fixed." Burnham.] 8. 22 ANDROMEDA. V. fa. m. a. s. B.A. 4 36 Ded, M" 45 27'6 Prec. + 4-00 - N 20-05 Position. Distance. Epoch. SOUTH BC 85-3 ... 5-0 ... 1825-99 SMYTH BC 84^0 ... 4-9 ... 1838-92 A star leading to a distant pair. A 5, white; B 8, pale yellow, and C 9, bluish. A is in the Galaxy, between the left hand of Andromeda, B. A. <$* 4 m - o 11 - 9 m> 5 and the head of Cassiopeia ; and it may be fished up by a line through y and a of the latter, at three times the interval between them in distance. It is here introduced as a pointer to the charming double star B C (=2. 3) in the wp quadrant, on a line 351 and A H.A. = i8 8 . It is in a fine field with several stars between the individuals. From measure- ments in 1783 by 1$., and in 1826 by South, it is clear that the position is stationary. I+L's distance was 3'5", but as this was based on an allowance upon the apparent magnitude of the large star, no exact infer- ence, as to change in this element, can be drawn. 9. y PEGASI, VI. y PEGASI, b. m. s. s. B.A. 7 34 IPrec. + 3-08 / n Decl. N 14 34'3 N 20-05 Position. Distance. Epoch. o n SMYTH 30 181 ... 1835-07 BURXHAM 285-5 162-3 1879.54 A Nautical Almanac star, with a distant companion. A 2\, white; B [n], pale blue, with a small com&s in the sp' } a line from B carried through A, leads to two small stars in the sf quadrant. In Tycho Brahe's catalogue this is erroneously placed in the constellation Pisces ; but it is on the extreme of the wing of Pegasus, whence it obtained the name of Algenib, from the Arabic Jendh-al-faras, the horse's wing. A comparison of the distance between this star and Regulus, by ancient and modern astronomers, shows Ptolemy to be out 12' 18". To find this star by alignment, lead a line from the Pleiades through Aries, or look about 14 S. of a Andromedse, where it will be identified by its lustre. ["There is a small star near B. Pos. 199- 3; Dist. 20" + ." Burnham.] 10. 35 PISCIUM. (2. 12.) VII. h. m. s. s. B.A. 9 18 Decl. N 8 12-6 Prec. -f 3-08 n N 20-04 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL.W. 148-9 ... 12-50 ... 1782-68 SMYTH 150-1 ... n-6 ... 1832-04 DUXER J 49-5 n-66 . ... 1868-31 A neat double star. A 6, pale white ; B 8, violet tint. This is a fine object. "![. describes it as being in "lino austrino" of the constellation ; but by the S.D.U.K. map, it is on the S. tip of the tail of the preceding Fish. A line from a Andromedee through y Pegasi, extended about 6 to the S., strikes upon 35 Piscium. There is no doubt as to its fixity. 6 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 11. 2315 h. PHOENICIS. (H. 27.) Prec. + 3.03 B.A. 31 Decl. S 39 49-5 20-4 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " v B ; v L ; vmi E ; tri-N ;" which means : " very bright ; very large ; very much irregularly extended ; tri-nuclear." In his Cape Obs. Sir John calls it " a very long irregular crooked ray with 3 nuclei, the second of which appears to consist of stars." He saw it to be at least 25' long and 3' broad. Engraved in Cape Obs. PI. iv. Fig. 8. V, 12. 318 B. CEPHEI. (2. 13.) h. m. s. R.A. 57 o Decl. N 76 20*0 Prec. -f 3.23 N 20-05 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE.W. 124-0 ... 0-53 ... 1831-50 STRUVE, O. 125-5 ... 0-64 ... 1840-58 SECCHI 102-2 ... 0-69 .. 1857-52 GLEDHILL 101-0 ... 0-5 ... 1873-91 A double star. A 7, yellowish white; B 7-J, yellowish white. A de- crease in angle seems certain ; and 0. Struve thinks that an increase in distance has taken place, but the measures of distance are so discordant as to make this latter idea very doubtful. 13. 38 PISCIUM. (2.52.) VIII. h. m. s. s. B.A. 11 44 Decl. 3ST 8 15-8 Prec. + 3-08 n N 20-03 Position. Distance. Epoch, o // HERSCHEL.W. 244.9 4' ' 1782-68 HERSCHEL,W. 235-4 4' 1802-67 SMYTH 235-9 - 4' 8 1837-89 WILSON 239-7 ... 4-5 ... 1873-86 A very neat double star on the following tip of the preceding Fish's tail, following No. 10 nearly on the parallel. A 7^, light yellow; B 8, flushed white. This elegant pair was thought to be binary by its dis- coverer 1$., from his measurements. JjjI/8 observations appeared to give a retrograde motion, which sub- sequent astronomers have not confirmed. Those sage astrologers who dubbed Pisces a most malignant sign, ought to have contemplated this beautiful object : had this been done, every notion of stellar unpropitious- ness and malevolence must have vanished. R A. o h - ra - o h - i6 m - 14. I CETI. IX. b. m. s. s. R.A. 13 50 c Decl. S 9 26-1 Free. + 3-06 // N 20-02 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HEBSCHEL, J. 14-2 ... 45 ... not stated. SMYTH 12 ... 45 ... 1838-82 BUENHAM 15-2 ... 62-0 ... 1879-87 A wide double star on the N. extreme of the tail ; whence it was called Dheneb Kditos shemdli, the northern branch of the Whale's tail. A 4, bright yellow; B [n], deep blue. This is an excessively difficult object, being only discernible after long attention. The position and distance are therefore only the result of estimation. The companion is rated as of the 1 2 th magnitude by Sir J. Herschel. There is a small star near the vertical, in the sp quadrant. The object may be found by a line carried through a Andromedse and y Pegasi, and extended to about 2 4 S. of the latter, where it will be seen as the N. E. apex of a nearly equilateral triangle formed by t, rj, and ft Ceti. 15. 4 Birm. ANDROMEDA. h. R.A. 14 5 c Decl. N 44 5'9 Free. + 3.14 N 20.02 A fine red star of mag. 8, first noted by Kriiger as " Intensif roth/ (A.N., 1231). 16. 42 PISCITTM. (2. 27.) R.A. 16 44 Decl. N 12 52-3 Prec. + 3-09 20-00 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE, W. 344.9 ... 31 .'6 ... 1828-76 SMYTH 341.5 ... 35 ... 1833.95 GLZDHILL 338-1 ... 29.0 ... 1873-89 A delicate double star following y Pegasi at about 2 in the sf quarter. A 7, topaz yellow ; B 13, emerald green. It is in the boundary, but not in the figure of the Fishes ; and though not close, has an elegant aspect from the strong contrast of its colours iii so barren a field of view. [" Rectilinear motion. The changes are probably due to the proper motion of the principal star." GledkilL] 8 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 17. 47 TOUCANI. (h. 2322 ; H. 52.) h. m. s. K.A. O 19 9 c Decl. S 72 41-6 Free. + 2-72 N 19.99 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: M vB; vL; vmCM;" which means: u a globular cluster; very remarkable object ; very bright ; very large j very much compressed in the middle/* In his Gape Otis. Sir John says: "A most magnificent globular cluster. It fills the field with its outskirts, but within its more compressed part I can insulate a tolerably defined circular space of 90" diameter, wherein the compression is much more decided and the stars seem to run together ; and this part I think has a pale pinkish or rose colour." The diameter of the whole cluster, exclusive of stragglers, he puts at 6' or 8". In the cluster there is a double star of mag. 1 1. (Pos. 226; A R.A. from centre of neb. =6-5*) Gould says: "Perhaps the most impressive object of the kind in either hemisphere ; appears of the 4^ mag. to the naked eye/ 1 " Engraved in Cape 06s., PI. iii. Fig. i. 18. 22 h. CASSIOPEIA (h. 22 ; H. 55.) XI. b. m. B.A. 21 c Decl. N 70 46'9 Prec. + 3-41 19.97 A large and straggling group of small stars, between the Lady's foot- stool and the knee of Cepheus ; a line from the y of one asterism to the y of the other, and \ the distance from that of Cepheus, hits 22 h. The place here given is that of a coarse double star, the components of which are of the 8 \ and 1 1 magnitudes, both greyish, in the following portion of the mass ; and which is, in a manner, insulated. It was first registered by Sir J. Herschel, and described as a very loose but pretty rich cluster. [" Merely a rich field of stars/' Brodie.] 19. 79 $. VIII. CASSIOPEIA. (h. 24; H. 63.) h. m, s. s. B.A. 23 45 c Decl. N 59 16*9 Prec. + 3-30 N 19-95 A loose cluster thus described in Sir John Herschel's Catalogue of 1 864 : " Cl ; v L ; p K, ; 1C; st 9 1 3 f which means : " a cluster ; very large ; pretty round ; little condensed ; stars of mags. 9 to 13." The 9 th mag. star here alluded to is in about the centre of the cluster. About midway between j3 and y Cassiopeiae. R A. o h -"i9 m o h - 25^- 9 20. 12 CETI. XII. R.A. 24 25 B Decl. S 4 33-9 Free, -h 3-06 N 19-94 Position. Distance. Epoch. BURNHAM j f '^ 2 - *'? ) lg 8 (AC 110-2 ... 212-9 ) A triple star, or rather, a double one with a distant companion, above half-way in a line shot from y Pegasi to /3 Ceti. A 6, topaz yellow ; B 15, bright blue; C n, dusky, other telescopic stars in the field. This is a beautiful, but most difficult test object. It lies between the "Whale's tail and the Southern Fish, nearly mid-distance of two stars to the np and sf, but trending towards the parallel, the following individual being of the II th magnitude, and the largest. Piazzi remarks: "Pro- bably ii a of Mayer, the sign of the decimation being wrong, as in the 9 a , neither of which are found in a northern sky." ["B Visible in strong moonlight, 1866, with an aperture of rodie.] 21. 49 PISCITTM. (2. 32.) XIII. h. R.A. 25 4 Decl. N 15 25 '7 Prec. + N 19-94 Position, Distance. Epoch. STBUVE, W. 1077 ... 13-2 ... 182874 SMYTH 109.5 ... 15 ... 1835-87 GLEDHILL 106-8 ... 16-4 ... 187394 A delicate double star, nf y Pegasi about 4. A 7, silvery white ; and B ioj, cerulean blue. Though quartered in Pisces this very deli- cate object is actually between the wing of Pegasus and the right hand of Andromeda : and this, though a minor one, is among the many errors calling for a reform of the constellations. It is followed nearly on the parallel by a yellow star of the 7-8 magnitude, which must be the one alluded to by Piazzi in Note 0. 92, though the distance is nearer 50 than 30 seconds. The companion to A is so minute as to vanish under the slightest illumination ; the details are therefore merely estimated. [The evident change is ascribed by 0. Struve to the proper motion of A.] 10 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 22. A CASSIOPEIA h. m. g. R.A. 25 41 Decl. N 53 54 '9 Position. E. (O. 2. 12.) 8. Prec. + 3-25 N 19-93 Distance. Epoch. // STEUVE, 0. 303-7 . 0-48 1844.84 . STRUVE, O. 3!5-o 0-65 1870-18 DEMBOWSKI 318-7 .. 0-57 ... 1877-03 HALL 320-1 0.41 1879-10 A double star. A 6; B 6^. There is clear evidence of the angle having increased. 23. )3 TOUCANI. h. m. s. s. K.A. 26 30 Prec. + 2-78 / // Decl. S 63 34-0 N 19.91 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J. 172-2 .. 27-7 ... I835-75 A double star. A 5 ; B 5. Described by Sir J. Herschel "superb object." A 7|- mag. star follows at 73 s and 3^' to the S. 24. 51 PISCIUM. B.A. Decl. m. s. 26 43 6 20-0 (2. 36.) s. Prec. 4- 3-08 as a XV. 19*92 Distance. Epoch. 1782-68 1822-87 1833-20 1835-91 1852-86 1873-86 Position. o 11 HERSCHEL, W. 89-4 ... 22-4 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 82-8 ... 25-8 STRUVE, W. 82-3 .., 27-4 SMYTH 82-5 ... 276 MADLER 81-0 ... 28-2 WILSON and SEABROKE 82-7 ... -28 4 A fine double star in a line about one-third the distance from y Pegasi to rj Ceti. A 6J, pearl white; B 9, lilac tint. This is in the centre of that part of the kheit, or ribbon, of the sign Pisces which is near the tail of the preceding fish ; and my observations for position and distance are highly satisfactory. A comparison with II .'s measures would indicate a sensible increase of distance between the two stars, as well as a retro- cession of the orbital angle; but from the concordance of recent measures, it may still be questioned whether the position has not been stationary. Indeed, when we recollect that ll . first classed these interesting objects, and made the instruments wherewith to grapple their details, we can only admire how well they stand such rigorous comparisons. [" A difficult star to observe. The angle has probably decreased." GledhilL] E. A. o>. 25- o h - 28 m - 11 25. 52 PISCIUM. XVI. h. m. s. &. B.A. 26 49 c Decl. N 19 41-3 Free. + 3-12 n N 19-92 Position. Distance. Epoch. BURNHAM 305-8 ... 38-1 ... 1879-57 A double star, between Andromeda's right arm and the back of Pegasus ; and nearly midway of a line from y Pegasi to f Andromedse. A 6, fine yellow; B [12], deep blue. This is a delicate object. It is followed at about 12 s by a pale star of the 12 th magnitude. The object was first discovered by Sir J. Herschel. Piazzi has remarked in his note on 50 Piscium, "cujus declinatio 19 n' (Bradley) omnino non invenitur :" and Baily has shown, in his edition of the " British Cata- logue," that No. 50 does not exist, but that this star, No. 52, was the individual observed and registered by Flamsteed in 1692. 26. 28 h. CASSIOPEIA. (h. 28; H. 71.) XIV. s. R.A. 26 53 c Decl. N 62 40 '0 Free. + 3-36 // N 19-92 Position. Distance. Epoch. o -n SMYTH 228 ... 6 ... 1837-97 A neat double star in a cluster. A 10, and B il, both pale grey. They are near the centre of an elegant and rich but somewhat straggling field of stars ; and being too small to admit of light, their position and distance are only estimated. The vicinity is strewed with stars from the io th to the 15 th mags., of which the most clustering part is about 8" or 9' in extent. It is closely nf K in the throne of Cassiopeia, a beautiful individual of a bright yellow colour and 4 tb magnitude. [" Worth nothing as a cluster." Brodie.] 27. SOTLPTORIS. (*h. 3375.) Ti. m. s. B.A. 28 22 Decl. S 35 34*9 Pret. + 2-96 N 19-90 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, J. 170 ... 4 est. ... 1834-66 STONE 165-8 ... 6-1 ... 1877.80 A double star. A 6 : B 7i. 12 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 28. 113 P. O. CETI. (2. 39.) XVII. b. m. R.A. 28 52 o Decl. S 59-3 Free. + 3-05 // N 19-90 Position. Distance. Epoch, o // STRUVE.W. 45-5 ... 20-0 ... 1830-24 SMYTH 44-6 ... 19-6 ... 1832-87 DEMBOWSKI 45-6 .., 19-9 ... 1865.80 A neat double star, between the "Whale's tail and the chetil of Pisces, on a line striking from j3 Ceti through a Andromedse, and about one-third of the distance. A 7, cream yellow ; B 9, smalt blue. This is a fine object, being nearly mid-way between two stars, one in the sf quadrant, and the smallest in the np. My measures were taken under favourable circumstances, and may be deemed good. Piazzi tells us that in Flam- steed's asterism, a companion of the 9 th magnitude follows this star, by 1 1 -2 s of time, which he could not find. There is, however, at about the same distance, and to the N., a star of this character, although rather smaller. Is the follower, then, variable I [Secchi and Dembowski independently found A itself to be a close double. Pos. 241-8; Dist. 0-89; 1877-80;, according to Burnham.] 29. 7T ANDROMEDA. XVIII. h. R.A. 31 Decl. N 33 6 '8 Prec. + 3-19 N 19-88 Position. Distance. Epoch. SMYTH 173-9 ... 35-6 ... 183290 MAIN 172-3 ... 34-4 ... 1867-64 BURNHAM 172-8 ... 35-1 ... 1878-70 A fine double star, between the shoulders of the chained Lady. A 4^, fine white ; B 9, blue, and they point to two small stars at a distance in the sf quadrant. A line carried from a Pegasi to a Andromedse, and extended 6 beyond, strikes upon TT. Ptolemy was right in stating it to be upon the shoulder ; but as the figures of the constel- lations are drawn on many modern celestial maps with the fronts towards the observer, IT then appears to be situate on the breast. It is well described by Piazzi: "duplex comes io ce magnitudinis se- quitur o-6 s temporis circiter ^ min. ad austrum." This object was first registered as a double star by J^. ; but though he pronounced his distance of 34-20" to be inaccurate, it must have been pretty near the truth, for subsequent measures indicate about the same. R. A. o h - h - 13 $0. R.A. Bed. h. m. s. 33 26 ANDROMEDA. Prec, + 30 15'5 3-18 BURNHAM Position. o I94-4 XIX. N 19*85 Distance. Epoch. 229-1 ... 1879-54 A bright star with a telescopic companion to the sj). A 3, orange ; B [10], dusky; with 3 small stars in the southern part of the field. It is on the right shoulder of Andromeda, though the old Catalogues term it "clarior in sinistra scapula," as an accepted interpretation of the contested eV TG> pfrap HEBSGHEL, W . 275.5 .. . 561 ... 1781-97 SMYTH 2797 .. . 61.5 ... 1851-92 BUBNHAil 2798 .. . 62-5 ... 1878-65 XX. A Nautical Almanac star, with a companion. A 3, pale rose-tint ; B [9^], smalt blue. This object is in the right breast of Dkdt-al-Ku'csa, the Lady of the Throne ; and it also obtained the names of Lucida Cassiopeia and Schedir ; the last being probably a corruption of Al-sadr, the breast, by the frauiers of the Alphonsine Tables. The Arabians 14 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. having no passion for delineating the human form, made a dog of Cepheus, and its female of Cassiopeia, retaining the Sedes Regia, or throne of the latter ; but the Cards fosmina meant no disrespect. Cassiopeia, one of the ancient 48 asterisms, formed by 5 bright stars disposed something like an M, is a well-known circumpolar con- stellation, next to her husband Cepheus, and on the opposite side of the pole to the Great Bear. The earlier Arabians considered the whole as a large hand, of which the bright stars constituted the finger-points, and in which was even included the nebulous group in the left hand of Perseus. Successive ages have yielded these numbers : Ptolemy ... 13 stars. Hevelius .... 38 stars. UlughBeigh . . 13 Flatnsteed . . . 55 Tycho Brahe" , . 46 Bode . . . . .134 There has been much idle discussion as to the orthography of this lady's name, whether it should be written Cassiopea, after the Latins, or Cassiepea [or Cassiopeia] from the Greek KacnneTma ; and the result has left either to the writer's choice utrum horum, &c. In- the early illus- trations to Hyginus she is bound to her throne, or rather to a seat with a sort of gibbet-back, very much like the scaffold called i tre pezzidilegno by the Italians. Thus secured, she cannot fall out in going round head downwards, pursuant to sentence. Sir W. Herschel has tabulated the comparative lustre of the stars in this constellated group, and the statement will be found, in Phil. Trans., vol. Ixxxvi. Shedir used to be thought variable. Ijl/s observations in 1796 make a and y of the 3 rd magnitude, and /3 3-2 in lustre of the stars in Cassiopeia ; and its brightness is marked y in Ptolemy. Certainly when Sir J. Herschel called my attention thereto, it was smaller than /3 or y of the same constellation. " That the fluctuation in splendour of this star," he writes, "should have heretofore escaped notice, is not extra- ordinary, since the .difference between its greatest and least brightness can hardly be estimated at so much as half a magnitude," Its period is stated at about 200 days, but in July, 1839, it was positively brightening and better defined than the other two. [Schmidt declares that the variability of this star is a myth.] To find this star from the northward;, project a ray from Ursae Majoris through the Pole-star, and' it will pass through the middle of Cassiopeia, at nearly an equal distance on the other side of the pole. "The circumvolution is well marked; when Ursa is at its lowest position 'below the pole, Cassiopeia is near the zenith, and vice versd. If Shedir is required from the southward, resort to the galley rhyme : From alpha Ceti, to the east of Al'mak, towering rise, You'll mark on Cassiopeia's breast where Shedir decks the skies. - - J R A. ( 34 m - o h - 36 m . 15 33, 18 I. V. ANDROMEDA, (h. 44; H. 105 ; &.) XXII. h. m. s. K.A. 34 23 Decl. N 41 5'1 Prec. + 3-23 N 19-83 A large faintish nebula of an oval form, with its major axis extending N. and S. It is between the left arm and robes of Andromeda, a little to the np of 31 Messier; and was discovered by Miss Herschel in 1783, with a Newtonian 2-foot sweeper. It lies between two sets of stars, consisting of four each, and each disposed like the figure 7, the preceding group being, the smaller; besides other 'telescopic stars to the S. This was registered by IjjL as 30' long and 12' broad, but only half that size by his son ; and there was a faint suspicion of a nucleus. [Engraved, Bond, Trans. Amer. Acad., N.S., vol. iii. p. 86; but Lord Rosse remarks :. " Far too bright and sharply defined in Bond's drawing."] 34. 146 P. O. CETI. XXIII. h. ttu s. s. B.A. 35 6 Decl. S 4 57^3 Prec. + 3-05 N 19-82 Position.. Distance. Epoch. o BUBNHAM 290-0 ... 65-0 ,.. 1879-89 A wide double star to the N. of the Whale's tail, over which an imaginary line from TJ Ceti to a Pegasi passes, at near 9 from the former. A 6^, pale topaz ; B 9, violet-tint, several other stars in the distant parts of the field. This object, though coarse, is pleasing, from its contrasted colours : it was seen and thus described by Piazzi : " Alise 9 ae magnitudinis 3-2" temper is prsecedit, |- min. ad boream." 35. 31 M. ANDROMEDA. (h. 50 ; H. 116.) XXIV. s. R.A. 36 47 Decl. N 40 40-1 Prec. + 3-24 - N 19-80 An overpowering nebula, with a companion about 25' in the south vertical. It is of an oval shape, light, brightening towards the sf edge of the general mass, and of a milky irresolvable nebulosity ; but though 16 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. described " in cingulo Andromedse," is between the robes and left arm of the Lady, and certainly below the girdle. There are numerous tele- scopic stars around; and 3 minute ones are involved in the glow, but which can have no connection with it, and are doubtless between our system and the nebulosity. The axis of direction trends sp and nf ; and it may be caught by a good eye, on a very fine night, by running a fancied line from y Andromedse to ft Andromedge, and from thence carry- ing a rectangular glance to a distance of about 6 J. It can also be struck upon by a ray from y Ceti, over ft Arietis, and through ft Andromedae, to 6^ beyond. This is the oldest known nebula ; for though it attracted but little notice till the 17^ century, it was seen, at least, as far back as 905 A.D. Simon Marius re-discovered it, if such a term can be applied to an object seen with the naked eye: in his rare work De Mundo Joviali that astronomer ac- quaints us, that he first examined it with a telescope on the 15 th Dec. 1612; he was astonished at the singularity of the pheno- menon, but expressly says that he leaves to others to judge whether it was a new discovery or not. It was therefore by an oversight that Halley ascribes the discovery, in 1661, to Bu- lialdus (Ismael Boulliaud); who himself mentions its being known as Nebulosa in cingulo Andro- tnedce, and that it had been noticed 150 years before by an expert though anonymous astro- nomer. The tenuity of its boun- dary offering no definition for exact comparison, has made the several attempts to figure it So conflicting as to mislead. Marius describes it as resembling the FlG - * 3* M. ANDROMEDA. diluted light of the flame of a candle seen through horn, Halley mentions that it emits a radiant beam, Cassini calls it & peu-pres triatigulaire, Le Gentil considered it round for some years, then oval, but always of an uniform light in all its parts, while Messier represents it as resembling two cones, or pyramids of light, opposed by their bases. RA. o h - 36 m - 17 From such statements, Boulliaud and Kircher thought this wonderful object appeared and disappeared, like Mira ; and Le Gentil had no doubt of its undergoing changes in form. But probably this discordance is a consequence of the means employed. Le Gentil, by his paper of 1749, seems to have used telescopes of various sizes, in order to see it very clearly " non seulement pour servir a la reconnoitre, inais encore pour voir si dans la suite elle ne seroit point sujette a quelque variation, soit dans la figure, soit dans la position;" yet 15 years afterwards Messier differs from him, by assigning a greater brilliance to the centre than to the edges, which latter accords better with my views of it, than do our apparent mean places. It is, however, remarkable that Messier examined this giant nebula with a 4-j-ft Newtonian, and then turned the instru- ment upon -y Andromedse " qui en etoit fort pres " to compare its light with that of the star, on a beautiful night of August, 1764 ; but he makes no mention of the duplicity, or contrasted colours, of that lovely star. Sir William Herschel gave this a rigid scrutiny, and concluded it to be the nearest of all the great nebulae. " The brightest part of it," he says, " approaches to the resolveable nebulosity, and begins to show a faint red colour ; which, from many observations on the magnitude and colour of nebulae, I believe to be an indication that its distance in the coloured part does not exceed 2000 times the distance of Sirius." Does not exceed that distance ! That is so far from us, that light, which is endowed with the swiftest degree of motion yet known, flying along at the rate of 186,660 miles in a second of time, or about it millions of miles in a minute, would require upwards of 6000 years to traverse the awful interval : as to that type of terrestrial velocity, so often cited, the cannon- ball, with its 5oo-miles-an-hour pace, it would have no chance of passing the same space under nine or ten thousand millions of years. "What an overwhelming idea does such an astonishing conclusion give of the All- wise and Omnipotent Intelligence ! The companion was discovered in November, 1749, by Le Gentil, and was described by him as being about an eighth of the size of the prin- cipal one ; he adds, " elle ma paru exactenient de la meme densite que Vancienner The light is certainly more feeble than here assigned. Messier whose Xo. 32 it is observed it closely in 1764, and remarked that no change had taken place since the time of its being first recorded. In form it is nearly circular. [" Huggins finds a continuous spectrum, but cut off at the red end. It seems therefore not gaseous : if stellar, it is strange that comprising such extremes of feebleness and condensation, it can be resolved with certainty nowhere, the nucleus only showing a granular texture in great instru- ments. There is some deep mystery here." WebbJ] [Engraved in Trans. Amer. Acad., N. S., vol. iii. p. 86. Bond.] c 18 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 36. 78 1$. VIII. CASSIOPEIA, (h. 52; H. 120.) XXV. h. m. s. s. K.A. 37 7 o Decl. N 61 11-2 Free, -f 3-45 N 19-80 Position. Distance. Epoch. o BUBNHAM 68-0 ... 16-4 ... 1879-49 A small double star, in a loose cluster of about 30 of the p th and io th magnitudes, occupying all the field; but there being no star-dust, or nebulosity intermixed, the firmament appears unusually dark between them. The most conspicuous object is the double star here recorded, of which A is of the 81 magnitude, and B of the u tn , both pale. This cluster, which is on the seat of Cassiopeia, and exactly half-way between y and K, was discovered by Miss Herschel in 1784 ; and described by Ij[. as " taking up 15 or 20 minutes." 37. ft CETI. XXVI. h. s. g. K.A. 38 Decl. S 18 35-4 Free. + 2-99 N 19-78 Position. Distance. Epoch. . SMYTH 221 ... 542 ... 183672 A Nautical Almanac star, with a distant companion in the sp quadrant. A 2^-, yellow; B 12, pale blue [uncertain, Knott], and there is a 9 th magnitude star in the sf t following by about a minute of time. This star is in the S. branch of the Whale's tail, whence it obtained the name of Dheneb Kaitos jentibi. But it has been more widely noticed as Diphda, from JDifda 1 al thdni, or the second frog, pertaining to an original Arabian constellation, of which the first frog was JDifda al auwel, the same with Fom-al-hut, or a Piscis Australis. From various compa- risons of their lustre, /3 Ceti is certainly larger than a ; they were both registered y, or 3 r< * magnitude, by Ptolemy: but it seems to have been increasing in brightness. A fancied line between a Piscis Australis and a Ceti passes over /3 Ceti, in about mid-distance. E. A. c- 4i m - 19 38. 175 P. O, ANDROMEDA. (2. 1 App. I ) h. m. s. B.A. Decl. XXVII. h. m. s. O 40 30 s. Prec. + 3*20 o // // N 30 20-6 N 19-74 Position. Distance. Epoch. O // T. 237-6 ... 45-0 1783-02 ., and SOUTH 236-0 ... 46-4 1821-95 235-8 ... 46-4 1836 12 233-5 ... 4 6 ' 2 1865 79 233-1 ... 467 1875- 76 HEBSCHEL, W. HERSCHE SMYTH MAIN BELLAMY A wide double star, ii following 8 on the Lady's right shoulder. Both individuals are of the 8 th magnitude, and pale yellow. B is Piazzas No. 176; the pair is not a fine one. The very slight decrease of angle may imply motion. 39. PHOENICIS. h. m. s. R.A. 40 31 Decl. S 42 30-4 Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 63-0 A double star. A 8 ; B 9. " This is a very remarkable star. The colours of both individuals are alike, viz. a very high orange, almost red." (Sir J. Herschel.) (*h. 3395.) s. Free-. + 2-87 N 19-74 Distance. Epoch. 8-9 ... 1836-6 40. 181 P. 0. CASSIOPEIA. h, m. s. R.A. 41 45 Prec. / Decl. N 50 50-6 Position. Distance. o .. HERSCHEL, W I40-5 - 2-0 SOUTH 147-6 .. . 2-57 STRUVE, W. 144-9 .- . 2-19 SMYTH 146-8 .. . 2-4 MADLER I46-5 - . 2-24 DUNER 148-1 2-21 (S. 59.) XXVIII. + 3-34 N 19-73 Epoch. ... 1782.66 ... 1825-14 ... 1832-33 ... 1836-94 ... 1851-52 ... 1871.94 A close double star, between Andromeda's knee and the head of Cassiopeia, just following a line projected from K through a, and carried 5 beyond the latter. A 8, flushed white ; [B 8], white. As IjjL saw them "very unequal" in 1782, and "difficult to be seen," the small star may be variable ; the redness he imputes, was probably owing to causes already alluded to. IjJ. marked his observation as "very exact" in his manu- script ; a slow change of position was therefore inferred by his son : and subsequent observations bear this out. C 2 20 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 41. . V. CETI. (h. 61, 2345 ; H. 138.) 8. Prec. + 2-96 XXX. h. m. s. B.A. 42 13 o / Decl. S 25 53-7 JN 19-72 A long narrow nebula, preceding the clumsy stern-frame of Cetus, but close to the boundary assigned to Apparatus Sculptoris. It is of a pale milky tint, and trends sp and nf with its brightest portion towards the S. There are several small stars in the field, of which the nearest preceding is of the 9 th magnitude, and reddish. A line drawn from the 8 th magnitude star in the np quadrant, to the 8 th in the nf, will be parallel to the axis of the nebula, which owing probably to the inferiority of my means I could not make out to be of the extreme length figured by Sir J. Herschel. This singular object was discovered by Miss Herschel, in 1783. A line shot from a Andromedse through (3 Ceti, and carried about 7 to the S., where Fom-al-haut will appear nearly at right angles with it, marks the site of the nebula. 42. 77 CASSIOPEIA. (2. 60.) XXIX. R.A. O 42 26 Decl. 57 13-9 Position. HERSCHEL, W. 62-1 STRUVE,W. 80-2 SMYTH SMYTH MADLER DOBERCK 87-8 95-8 1 1 2-0 150.2 Prec. -|- 3'45 N 19-71 Distance. Epoch. II-2 1779.63 10-8 1819-80 9-8 ... 1830-91 9-1 1843.19 7-6 ... 1855.51 5-7 1877-76 A neat binary star, in the cestus [i.e. armlet] of the seated Lady, forming the apex of a right-angled triangle with a and /3. A 4, pale white ; and B 7^, purple. This superb physical object was discovered to be double by 1$ . [The estimates of colour vary much, and the latest and best authen- ticated are A, yellow and B, red.] By BJ.'s re-examination in 1803, a rapid angular velocity was detected. Sir J. Herschel, in his discussion of 1831, said he would not then decide, on account of the uncertain determination of the distances, whether the motion thus established was orbital or parallactic. But as he added, that the small star, in all probability, would be on the parallel, or in the act of changing quadrants from nf to s/in the beginnii of the year 1835, I carefully watched, both before and after, and R. A. o h - 42 m - o h - 45 m. 21 the prediction verified. These double-star orbits are really among the most interesting subjects which modern research has to occupy itself about; and their investigation offers a beautiful field for the amateur astronomer. [The elements of this star's orbit are still very uncertain in spite of our having 100 years' observations at command. Doberck's period is 222? ; Griiber's 195? ; and Duner's 43. 65 PISCIUM. (I. 61.) K.A. Decl. h. m. s. 43 58 27 6-7 Position. o HERSCHEL,W. 300-9 SMYTH 298-5 DUNEB 298-6 Free. + 3-20 N 19-70 Epoch. 1783-I5 1838-17 1872-33 Distance. n 4-0 + 4-5 4-3 A close double star, which, though classed in Pisces, is placed by the map artists on the right arm of Andromeda ; where it may be struck upon about half-way between TT and rj. A 6, and B 7, both pale yellow. [Knott says both equal, and of mag. 6.] This fine object was discovered by IjjL He again measured its position in 1802, when the results seemed to warrant the assumption of a slow retrograde orbital motion ; but this is not confirmed by the later observations. By assembling the observations in one view, H. arrived at the conclusion that the decrease might be 0-117 per annum; and supposing the star to revolve uniformly in a circle, its period would be 3077 years. My measures, however, drawn through a similar comparison, yield only 0-06 per annum, and infer an annus magnus of a much longer period. [Very little, if at all, unequal in magnitude. W. Struve ; Webb.] 44. 159 #. I. CASSIOPEIA, (h. 71; H. 158; R.A. Decl. m. 45 o 46 50 57-9 Free. + 8, 3-35 19-66 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: I" c B; p L; R; 2 st 10 nr ; " Avhich means : "Considerably bright ; pretty round ; 2 stars of the 1 o th magnitude are near." It makes a very >btuse-angled triangle with the stars in question. Its diameter is about [20", and it is "almost planetary" in character. 22 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 45. 20 1$. VI. SCULPTORIS. (h. 74, 2354; H. 162.) h. m. R.A. 47 20 o Decl. S 27 10-9 Free. + 2-93 // N 19-63 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "0; B; L; IE; st I2...i6;" which means : " a globular cluster; bright; large; little extended; the stars are chiefly from the 12 th to the 1 6 th magnitudes." 46. 36 ANDROMEDA. (2. 73.) XXXII. 36 ANDROMEDA. (2. 73.) b. m. s. s. R.A. 49 4 Free. + 3-19 o / H Decl. N 23 2O N I9-60 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J. 307-1 .. 0-90 1830-78 STRUVE, W. 307-8 .. 0-84 1832.14 SMYTH 322-9 .. I-O 1843-12 STRUVE, 0. 335-9 . i-33 -. 1854-70 SCHIAPARELLI 355-8 .. . 1-27 ... 1877-01 A very close double star, a miniature of ?] Coronse, in the Lady's right elbow, and closely np of 77. A 6, bright orange; B 7, yellow. This beautiful golden pair is very difficult, being designated by 2. aurece vicinissimce. But the earliest measures I met with are those of H., from a com- parison with which I am led to infer that there is a decided direct orbital motion. As this was an object which demanded every assistance under high powers and most of my positions were made with an eye-piece magni- fying 600 times I resorted to the recommendation of Sir J. Herschel, before alluded to, of applying a central paper disc to improve the sepa- rating power ; and, in this instance, I think it was an advantage. [Closely np r\ in the direction of f. Doberck finds a period of 349^.] 47. y CASSIOPEIA. xxxin. h. in. s. s. R.A. 50 4 o Decl. N 60 7'2 Free. + 3-57 N 19-58 Position. Distance. Epoch. SMYTH 347 ... 350 ... 1837-68 A bright star with a distant telescopic companion. A 3, brilliant white ; B 1 3, blue. This fine star is on the right hip of Cassiopeia, and [ RA. o h - 47 m - --o h - 53 m - 23 the following part of the field has a scatter of small stars from io tn to 1 3*h magnitudes, so as almost to make a cluster. To find this star by alignment, project a glance from e Ursse majoris, the inner individual of the Greater Bear's tail, through the Pole-star, and at nearly a similar distance beyond, it will meet with y Cassiopeia. 48. M ANDROMEDA. XXXIV. h. m. s. s. R.A. 50 39 3 Decl. N 37 54-2 Prec. + 3-30 N 19-57 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // SMYTH 115 ... 45 ... 1833-88 CHALLIS 110-5 49' 2 1842-67 A most delicate double star. A 4, bright white; B 16, dusky grey. On the Lady's back, and just below the girdle ; and it may be found by carrying a line from y Pegasi through 8 Andromedse, and extending it 8 or 9 beyond, to the N.W. An object of extreme difficulty. Following this on the parallel, at about 2o m , is a very neat double star, of the 8 th and n th magnitudes, and about 12" apart: this might have been considered an object of some delicacy, but tried after \L appears quite staring, and its colours, pale yellow and green, are very decided. 49. 2367 h. TOUCANI. (H. 183.) h. m. s. R.A. 52 29 o Decl. S 73 3'8 Prec. + 2-08 N 19-53 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " ; v B ; S ; IE; st B . . . 15 ;" which means : " a globular cluster ; very bright ; small ; little extended ; its stars are from the 1 3 th to the 15 th magnitude." A close compressed knot of stars with outliers. This is 23 Dunlop. 50. 251 P. O. PISCIUM. (2. 80.) XXXV. h. R.A. 53 45 Decl. S 11-4 Prec. + 3-07 N 19.51 Position. Distance. Epoch. c SOUTH 296-4 ... 18-8 ... 1825-17 SMYTH 301-8 ... 18-5 ... 1838-03 MADLER 305-5 ... 18-5 ... 1853-09 WILSON and SEA BROKE 312-9 ... 20-0 ... i'874-93 A neat double star, bearing both illumination and high magnifying 24 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. powers. A 8, pale orange ; and B 9, clear blue. This, though assigned to Pisces in the Palermo Catalogue, belongs to the Whale, being in the space between the tail of Cetus and the ribbon of Pisces, at about one- third the distance of ft Ceti from ft Andromedae, and nearly in the line ; being one of the amor-photos, of which an asterism to be called Testudo wasprP sed - Piazzi records this object double : "Duplex. Comes 9 ae magnitudinis prsecedit i" temporis parumper ad boream." From South's measures compared with my own, I inferred a sensible direct orbital motion = 0-4 per annum; and this has been since con- firmed. 51, 164 B. ANDROMEDA. Prec. h. m. s. B.A. 53 49 Decl. 44 7'5 Position. o STRUVE.W. 192-4 DUNR 193-5 Distance. // 7-6 7-6 (2. 79.) s. + 3-35 N 19-51 Epoch. 1832-45 1872-03 A double star. A 6, very white ; B 7, bluish white. 52. 26 CETI. (S. 84.) K. A. h. m. 58 9 s. Prec. + 3-07 T>ort1 "NT o n // Aft -ft XXXVI, Position. o HEKSCHEL, W. 255.4 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 255-3 SMYTH 252-6 SEABROKE Distance. // 17-0 15-7 16-4 Epoch. 1782-75 1821-87 1833-86 1873-93 A neat double star, close to No. 50, in the vacant space between the Whale's back and the ribbon of Pisces ; being exactly in mid-distance between y Pegasi and f Ceti. A 6J, pale topaz ; B 9 J, lilac tint. There would appear to be no material change ; so that the present conclusion is, that the connexion is merely optical. The distance be- tween the stars, therefore, on the assumption of a scale by their respective magnitudes, must be wonderfully vast. E.A. o h - 53 m --- i h - o m - 25 53. 294 Lac. PHOENICIS. (*h. 3415.) B.A. 58 54 Decl. S 41 14-5 Prec. + 2-77 // N 19-40 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HEBSCHEL, J. 157.5 ... i est. ... 1834-6 A very close double star. A 7 j B 8. 54. \ PISCIUM. (2. 88.) XXXVII. h. B.A. O Decl. N HERSCHEL, W. HERSCHEL, J., SMYTH SECCHI TALMAGE m. 59 o 20 and PISCIUM. s. 47 53-O Position, o 170-0 SOUTH 161-0 160-4 159-8 159-7 (2. 88.) Prec. + N 8. 3.2O I9-38 X Epoch. 1779-83 1822-38 I833-97 1858-04 1874-91 Distance. rt ... 27-5 ... 30-3 30-2 30-0 29-8 A fine double star, both 5^ magnitude, and silvery white. On the dorsal fin of the Northern Fish, with a very small star following ; and about one-third the distance of a line drawn from a Andromedae to y Ceti. An easy object for a moderate telescope, B being i/f 2 . H. and S. thought the distance might have increased, while the position had retrograded : but my observations tend to show fixity, which has been confirmed by [later observations]. 55. 77 PISCIUM. 2. 90. XL. 77 PISCIUM b. m. s. R.A. 1 8 Decl. N 4 19-3 Position. HERSCHEL, W. 85-2 SMYTH 82-5 WILSON 83-3 :. (2. 90.) Prec. + 3-09 // 19-37 Epoch. 1782-69 1835-88 I873-93 Distance. // 29-6 32-1 33-3 A fine double star, in the centre of the kheit, or ribbon, connecting the two Fishes ; and it may be found at rather less than a third of the distance from 77 Ceti towards /3 Andromedse. A 7^, white ; B 8, pale lilac. These are nearly in the middle of the line of stars running from the Whale's crest, which Yitruvius (lib. ix.) assures us the Greeks named Hermedone ; the which, saith the French commentator, rneaneth, les delices de Mercure ; but according to B. Baldus, De Verborum Vitruvian- orum, d'c., it is merely a knot in the ribbon of Pisces. 26 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 56. u CASSIOPEIA. XXXIX. h. m. s. R.A. 1 O 37 o Free, -f 3-56 Decl. N 54 22 '8 Position. Distance. Epoch. A coarse triple star in the Lady's right elbow, whence, conjointly with 0, the Arabians termed it Marfak. A 5^, deep yellow ; B 14, pale blue, with a minute comes s/; and C n, bluish. There are several small stars in the field. This star is in the British Catalogue ; but Baily could not find a perfect observation of it by Flamsteed. It has, however, so rapid a course through space, that it should be constantly watched, as its displacement by proper motion is the largest yet detected among stars not closely double, and having no obvious peculiarity. This is a statement of the several values : // // Pia,zzi R.A. + 5-70 Decl. -1-65 Baily +5-82 1-55 Argelander ... +5' 8 1-55 Just 1 8' S. of jut is a star which, though of the 6 th magnitude, is not in Piazzi. It is followed nearly on the parallel, about n 8 off, by a 9 th magnitude, and both are remarkable from being red, of a decided but not deep tint. This object may have had something to do with the mistakes of Flamsteed respecting fx, alluded to by Baily. To find this star by alignment, draw a line from /3 through a, and extend it as far again as the distance between those two, and //, will be seen just above, with 6 following it. [The two red stars mentioned above may be identical with 14 and 15 Birmingham, but those stars are farther from jut Cassiopeia? than Smyth's statement implies. Birmingham's 6-3 mag. is i 28' S. of ju. His mag. precedes this i m 43 s .] 57. /3 PHOENICIS. (*h. 3417.) R.A. 1 1 11 Decl. S 47 18-3 Prec. + 2-70 19.35 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J. 17-6 ... 30 est. ... 1834.76 A conspicuous star with a small companion. A 3^ ; B n. E. A. i h - o m - h. .m. 27 58. 64 $, VIII. CASSIOPEIA. (H. 204.) XLI. h. R.A. 1 m. s. 1 24 Decl. N 61 0-3 Free. + 3-70 N 19-34 ' A lucid but loose cluster of small stars principally 9 th to 14 th magnitudes, preceded by a 6 th on the robe below the right hip of Cassiopeia ; and it will be caught up, at about one-fourth of the distance, on a line from y towards e. ["Not worth looking at." Brodie.] 59. rj CETI. XLII. h. m. s. R.A. 1 33 Decl. S 1O 45-9 Position, o BURNHAM 304-5 Prec. + 3*00 N 19-30 Distance. 225 Epoch. 1879-89 A bright star with a companion, in a barren field. A 3^, yellow ; Bio, [lead coloured], only two other distant stars in view, one of which is in the sf, and the other in the nf quadrant. It is on the monster's flank, towards the tail, as implied by Dheneb-al-Jenubi ; where it has been mistaken for the Eana Secunda of the Arabs ; but which is /3 Ceti. As this star is useful in the neighbouring alignments, it may be identified by being exactly at right angles with a line shot from a Piscis Australis and carried 8 beyond /3 Ceti : and it is on the same vertical with (3 An- dromedse. A is only marked as of e magnitude in Ptolemy; while Tycho Brahe and Flamsteed make it 3. Had I not adopted Piazzi's magnitudes for my initial star, I should certainly have put this in the 4^ degree. Can it be variable 1 60. j8 ANDROMEDA. XLIII. R. A. 1 Decl. N 3 s. 34 BURXHAM 35 2-3 Position. 294-0 Prec. + 2-32 19.28 Epoch. I879-55 A bright star with a distant companion. A 2, fine yellow; B [10], pale blue, and there are [according to Burnham, 6 small stars in Distance. H 304 28 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. the field, within 300" of A]. The delineations of the Northern Fish and the body of Andromeda here create much confusion; as the Arabs named /3 Andromedee, Jenb-al-muselselah, or the chained woman's side, and also Batn-al-hut, or the fish's belly. This star, once in the Fish's head, is now placed on the Lady's right hip, over the Northern Fish's mouth, whence it was called Mirach, from the mantle or apron round her ; but it became the Mirce of the Alphonsine Tables, which term was replaced on Scaliger's suggestion by Mizdr, girdle ; an amendment, however, that confounded it with f Ursse Majoris. There has been some difference of opinion as to its comparative brilliance. It is certainly rather dim for the above rating, and Ptolemy enrolled it as y only in lustre ; but Ulugh Beigh and all the moderns have ranked it of the 2 nd magnitude. This star was of importance, as forming the 28 th and last Lunar Mansion, called Al RisJici, the cord, because the vertical bight of the Fish's khe'it formed its boundary. The famous Mandzil-al-Kamar, i.e. Lunar Mansions, constituted a supposed broad circle, in Oriental astronomy, divided into 28 unequal parts, corresponding with the moon's course, and therefore called the abodes of the moon. This was not a bad arrangement for a certain class of gazers, since the luminary was observed to be in or near one or other of these parts, or con- stellations, every night. Though tampered with by astrologers, these Lunar Mansions were probably the earliest step in ancient astronomy. An imaginary line drawn from a Ceti, through the two stars in the head of Aries, will strike upon Mirach ; or it will be at a right angle N. of the line carried from j3 Pegasi to a Andromedae, and extended as far again westward : or in the directions of the poet : From Markab run a line beneath th' imprison'd Lady's head, And over delta on her back to Mirach 'twill be led. 61. PHOENICIS. h. m. s. B.A. 1 3 46 c Decl. S 56 49-7 Prec. + 2.54 N 19-28 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, J. 244-0 ... 6-2 ... 1835-80 A double star. A 5^; B 10. Burnham says that this is not double. E.A. 3 UU 29 62. PISCITTM. (2. 99.) h. R.A. 1 Decl. m. s. 7 46 o / 24 O'O Position. o SMYTH 226-5 WILSON 226-0 Free. + 3-24 N 19-18 Distance. Epoch. 9 7-6 183479 1873-89 XLVI. A pretty close double star. A 6, orange; and 613, flushed [=reddish]. This beautiful object is on the ventral fin of the Northern Fish, at a little more than half the distance from y Pegasi towards a Trianguli; and though marked " objectum subtile " by S., it is steadily seen through my telescope. But it is singular that Piazzi says of it, " Duplex. Comes in eodem verticali, admodum exigua et ad austrum." He certainly could hardly have seen it double with his instrument, as it now is ; but the acolyte may be variable. 63. R.A. Decl. ; PISCIUM. m. s. 7 59 o / 6 43-7 Position. o HERSCHEL, W. 67.4 SMYTH 63-8 STRUVE, O. 64-0 WILSON and SEABROKE 63-7 (2. 100.) s. Prec. + 3-11 N 19-18 Distance. // 22-1 -. 23-4 23-6 .. 24-7 XLVII. Epoch. 1781-88 1839-05 1851-89 1873-89 A neat double star. A 6, silver white ; B 8, pale grey. This fine and easy object is on a bend of the band which joins the two Fishes. The large star may be variable. Ptolemy calls it 8 in lustre, and he is followed by Ulugh Beigh, Tycho Brahe, and Jlevelius. Baily says, " This star is stated, in the British Catalogue, to be of the 4 th magnitude ; but in the original observations it is nowhere stated to be more than the 5 th ; and in one place it is marked as the 6 th , but afterwards altered to the 5 tb , which I have retained." f Piscium slightly precedes an occult line drawn between /3 Ceti and a Trianguli, and is nearly in the mid- distance. [" Probably a very slow orbital motion manifests itself." G-ledhill. " Query A var. up to mag. 4." Webb.] 30 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 64. 37 CETI. (2. 3 App. I.) XL VIII. h. m. s. B.A. 1 8 51 Decl. S 8 30-7 Prec. + 3-01 N 19-16 Position. Distance. Epoch. MAIN A B 332-1 ... 48.3 ... 1865-80 A wide quadruple star. A 6, white; B 7^, light blue; C 8, yellow; and D 10, violet. This fine, though coarse, object is on the monster's tail joint, over rj to the nf t and preceding by a little more than 2. It appears that the position has remained unaltered. A line drawn through A B points to a fine double star rather low down in the np quadrant, and there are several other stars in the field ; a pretty bright one following at a A R.A.=26 S . The second set, observed by me, or CD, form a miniature of the first pair, and are 77 1$. iv. They precede A by about 32 s , and are 15' to the N. of it; they were thus, when first registered by I. : Position. Distance. Epoch. 333-4 .-. J 9- 10 ... 1782-73 From observations by South in 1825 we may conclude that no sensible change occurred in the distance of C D in 52 years, but that there might have been a slow direct motion in the angle. [A possibly variable.] 65. AC TOUCANI. (*h. 3423.) b. m. s. s. K.A. 1 12 1 o Decl. S 69 27-7 Prec. + 1-98 N 19-07 Position. Distance. Epoch. O It HERSCHEL, J. 16-4 ... 4.7 ... 1836.78 SANTIAGO OBS. 17-5 ... 4.4 ... 1850-88 SANTIAGO OBS. 17-0 ... 6-4 ... 1851-89 A double star. A 6; B 10. The Santiago distance for 1851 is probably a misprint. 66. 42 $. VII. CASSIOPEIA, (h. 97; H. 256.) XLIX. h. B.A. 1 Decl. N m. s. 12 16 o / 58 12-7 Position. SM-S Prec. + N s. 372 19-06 Epoch. 1879.54 Distance. a 13-8 BURNHAM A minute double star, in a cluster between the Lady's right knee K.A. I 111 31 and her elbow. [A and B, both 8J.] A brilliant aigrette-shaped group of large and small stars. In the centre is the fine double star before us. There is a star of the 7 th magnitude at the sf verge of the field, which is very bright and white. The cluster is close to <. [" Insignificant as a cluster." SrodieJ] 67. 108 $. I. PISCIUM. (H. 264; R.A. Decl. 13 34 2 38-6 Free, -f N 3-09 19-03 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschers Catalogue of 1864: " c B j v L ; i R ; p B * f;" which means : " considerably bright ; very large ; irregularly round ; a pretty bright star follows." Dreyer has a note on this object which is not easily intelligible. He says that H. 264 = 250 1$. III., not 1 08 I. I., and that the B. A. should be increased 30 s , and the Decl. 1 i' ; at least his note implies this. 68. 35 CASSIOPEIA. h. R.A. 1 13 43 Free. / Decl. N 64 4'9 Position. Distance. o // SOUTH 352-9 ... 5-3 SMYTH 352-5 - 49-7 S'9 1 19-03 Epoch. 1824-84 1830-89 A wide double star, on the lower part of the Lady's drapery, and the following of 4 stars describing a lozenge. It may be fished up by carrying a line from d towards the Pole-star, and intersecting it at rather less than 5. A 7, white; B 9, flushed, and there are two other brightish stars in the field. 69. 42 CETI. b. m. s. B.A. 1 14 11 Decl. S 15-2 Position. STRUVE, W. 333.6 SMYTH 332-8 MADLER 340-0 SECCHI 339-7 SEABROKE 346-2 PLUMMER 349.3 .. (2. 113 Free. ) N 8. I9-OI Epoch. 1831-61 1834-84 1842.75 1856-48 1872-07 I877-37 Distance. . "1-24 1-2 . 1-36 . 1-16 ! i 1 .^ LI. 32 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. A close double star, in the space between the Whale's back and the kheit, or band of Pisces, about 10 N. of rj Ceti, on the line towards a Trianguli. A 6, bright white ; B 8, white. A beautiful object, but very difficult to measure in distance. It seems to have a direct angular movement. [But " great discrepancies are found in the recorded obser- 70. !//> CASSIOPEIA. (2. 117.) LII. h. m. R.A. 1 18 s. 10 Prec. + s. 4'i5 Decl. N 67 33 3 N 18-90 HERSCHEL, W. Position. AB 102-2 Distance. H ... 33-4 Epoch. ... 1782-66 STRUVE, W. j BC 253-3 ... 32-2 ) 3-0 1 i 1831-04 SMYTH BC 252.6 \" 3 *o ! 1836.28 SECCHI j FLAMMARION BC 256.4 ::: 2 d 5 l 2. 9 1858-82 ... 1877.12 ... 1877-34 A fine triple star, close to the lower part of the Lady's throne, and in a line between Polaris and 6 Cassiopeise, at rather less than a third of the distance from the latter. A 4^, orange tint; B 9, blue; C n, reddish. This object was first seen triple by 2. A B are only optically double, having experienced no change in position or distance. Whether B and C are bodies physically connected, remains for future observers to determine. They form a delicate test. [" B C probably binary. The magnitude of A is variously given." GledhilL] 71. a URS^3 MINOBIS. 2. 93. XLIV. a URS^3 MINOBIS. (2. 93.) h. m. s. s. R.A. 1 18 14 Prec. + 22-02 r n Deel. N 88 43-3 N 18-96 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, W. 202-9 1781-50 SMYTH 2IO-I 1 8.6 ... 1838-16 SECCHI 212-4 18.4 ... 1859-95 DUNER 212-4 -.. 18-5 1870-90 A Nautical Almanac star, at the tip of the Little Bear's tail, with a B. A. i h . i4 m i h - i8 m - 33 companion in the sp quadrant. A 2^, topaz yellow ; B 9!, pale white. A is " Polaris," and from its perpetual apparition in this hemisphere, the most practically useful star in the heavens, whether to the astronomer or the seaman ; and the want of such a constant reference at the opposite pole is severely felt. Piazzi devoted much labour to obtain all the conditions of this remarkable star, and prudently concluded that, in consequence of the great and inconstant precession in the immediate vicinity of the pole, it is difficult to separate the proper motions in space from that element : it was also narrowly watched for the detection of parallax, from 1802 to 1804, at each season, in January, July, April, and October, and it was deemed that an absolute quantity of 1-31" was fairly deduced. It was first classed double by II . [An increase of angle seems probable, but the observations are far from consistent.] A is marked 2-3 magnitude from the rule I have adopted, otherwise it is not even a very bright 3 rd size. It was ranked y by Ptolemy, and Copernicus adopted it ; but Tycho elevated it to the 2 nd magnitude ; and Kepler, who in the Rudolphine Tables speaks of it as vulgo Polaris, rates it the same. At present it is only i^ from the polar point, and by its northerly precession in declination will gradually approach to within 26' 30" of it. This proximity to the actual pole will occur in A.D. 2095, but will not recur for 12,860 years. The period of the revolution of the celestial equinoctial pole about the pole of the ecliptic is nearly 26,000 years ; the N. celestial pole therefore will be, about 13,000 years hence, nearly 49 from the present polar star, The alignment rule for finding this star is so well known that it scarcely demands repeating : yet it may be as well to remind the reader, that an imaginary line through the two well-known pointers, a and /3 Ursce Ma- joris, nearly passes over it ; and once found, it will not readily be mistaken, or for- gotten, since, to the naked eye, it appears always in the same place. In the alignment of the heavens, it may assist rough estimations to assume the distance between the Pointers at 5, and that between the Fra- 2. URSA MAJOR AND POLARIS. Pointers and Polaris at about 30, which, though not the true distance*, will serve as a gazing scale. The diagram shows the direction, no^ the D 34 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. distance, of the Pole-star. From Polaris, lines of direction may be led to most of the great stars around. Hence the poetaster : The ever watchful Kokab guards, while Dubhe points the Pole; The Pole at rest, eees Heaven's bright host unwearied round him roll. The use of the Pole-star in navigation is recorded to have been introduced by Thales ; but as it was very anciently called Phcenice, and that philosopher also resided in Phoenicia, it was probably derived from the mariners of that nation, and has ever since been the " lode-star " of seamen. Aratus mentions it as a sure sea-guide, or beacon ; saying, in voce Germanici Certior est Cynosura taraen sulcantibus sequor. Dryden has happily described the infancy of navigation : Kude as their ships were navigated then, No useful compass, or meridian known; Coasting they kept the land within their ken, And knew no north but when the Pole-star shone. Among our own seamen, the Stella Marts, or Pole-Star, and its companions, have immemorially been under requisition. Recorde tells us, in the Castle of Knowledge, 300 years ago^ that navigators used two painters in Ursa, " which many do call the Shafte, and other do name the Guardas, after the Spanish tonge.' r Richard Eden, in 1584, pub- lished his Aite of Navigation, and therein gave rules for the " starres," among which are special directions for the two called the Guards, in the mouth of the " borne," as the figure was called. See (3 Ursse Minoris. In the Safeguard of Saylers, 1619, are detailed rules for finding the hour of the night, by the "guardes:" and the Bears generally were regarded as rustic time-pieces, whence Shakspeare, in the Gadshill affair, makes the carrier exclaim, "An't be not four by the day, I'll be hanged : Charles's wain is over the new chimney, and yet our horse not packed ! " As to the Little Bear, the whole animal is swung round by the tail every twenty-four hours : whence the general name for the pole was- Kotb, which means the spindle or pin fixed in the under-stone of a mill, around which the stars typifying the upper stone turn. I more than once attempted to fix the place of a little star, called Blucher by some of the savants, which precession will hare now brought within 2' of the pole. But being only of the io th magnitude it is ,a difficult object to touch in R.A., and there is a wide companion still smaller. A nebula, like a dull star, is perceivable near it, and is H. 2043, Polaris&ima; so called from its proximity to the pole. [R.A. (1860), I0 h. gm. 8s*; Decl. + 89 53-2. The precision in B. A. for 1880 is 87.'- per annum, a quantity so large that I hesitate to attempt to bring up the place to 1890, especially as the R.A. altered more than 7 hours between 1830 and 1860. E.A. i h - i8 m i h - i9 m - 35 Arctos Minor, or the Lesser Bear, is not mentioned by Hesiod or Homer, therefore was probably not yet admitted among the constellations in that shape : indeed, Cynosura was more likely to have been represented by a dog. Jacob Bryant, dreaming of Philistines, considers the word as having been borrowed by the Greeks from Cohen Ourah. Thales is reported to have formed it, from perceiving the seven principal stars make a similar figure to the well-known wain of the Great Bear; but reversed with respect to each other : whence Aratus assures us that both the Bears the magna minorque ferce of Cvid were called a/utafa, or waggons, by the Greeks. But instead of the obtuse-angled projection of the Great Bear's stern, the Lesser Bear's tail curves gradually till it reaches the Pole-star. It is, however, a perplexing asterism, from the number of hours of E,A. it extends over, and its components have been thus registered : Ptolemy ... 8 stars. Heveliua . . . .12 stars. Tycho Brats' . .20 Flamsteed ... 24 Kepler .... 21 Bode 75 It appears that Ursa Minor was a favourite constellation among the Arabians, who called the Pole-star Jedi, or the Kid ; and ^Al Kaukab-al-shemdli, the Northern star, an appellation originally given to /3, which in Ptolemy's time was nearer to the pole than a. On the Cufico-Arabic globe described by Assemani the asterism is written Al Dubb-al-ashgar : and in the Alphonsine Tables it is corruptly termed Alrucaba, which term has been discussed by Grotius, Hyde, and Ideler, as grounded in Hebrew, Chaldaic, or Arabic. We are told that the pole was also termed Al Kiblah, because of the obligation in Mahometan prayer to know which way the head is. To find the kiblah in an unknown place they looked to Polaris, and could thereby readily orientize themselves. To this necessity we are considered to be indebted for the astronomy of the Abbaside Caliphs. [Dawes proposed this object as a general test for small achromatics. An aperture of 2 in with a power of 80 should always show B, if the eye and the telescope are good.] 72. 151 $. I. PISCIUM. (h. 117; H. 307; &.) b. m. s. R. A. 1 19 1 o Decl. N 8 57'6 Prec. + 3' 1 4 N 18-88 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : 11 v B ; p L ; m b M ; 4 S st nr ; " which means : " very bright ; pretty large ; much brighter in the middle ; 4 small stars are near." D 2 73. A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 404 Lac. SCULPTORIS. (*h. 3436.) 8. Prec. + 2-80 h. m. R.A. 1 22 Decl. S 30 47-7 Position. o HEBSCHEL, JT. 121 N 18-79 Distance. Epoch. 10 ... 1834-74 A double star. A 7^, yellow; B 9, blue. 74. 48 $. VII. CASSIOPEIA. (h. 124; H. 330.) LIII. B.A. Decl. 22 9 61 8. 9 43.2 Prec. + N 3'97 18-78 An open cluster, on the Lady's leg, and nearly in mid-distance from e towards y. It is a gathering of large and small stars, with glimpses of star-dust of considerable extent, and irregular figure ; but a few of the principal individuals assume a form not unlike that of an hour- glass. There is no particular compression or condensation of the stars to suggest the existence of a central force ; yet the group is sufficiently separated to indicate its forming a peculiar system of its own. [Designated by Smyth "124 H" (i.e. of the 1833 Catalogue), but I have preferred to prefix the earlier designation.] [" Too open to be deemed a cluster at all." Brodie.] 75. 85 P. I. PISCIUM. R.A. 1 22 36 Decl. N 7 23-5 Position. Prec. + 3-13 N 18-77 Distance. LIV. Epoch. SOUTH 98-3 ... 69-7 ... 1825-00 SMYTH 98-7 ... 68.3 ... 1836-99 A star with a distant companion, in the space between the Fishes, in front of the Ram; and nearly half-way from rj Ceti towards a Triun- guli. A 7, yellow; B 8J, pale blue. It is a coarse object, in a poor field. 76. 100 I R.A. Decl. I. CETI. (h. 128 ; H. 342 ; &.) LVI. h. m. s. 1 25 50 S 7 26-3 Prec. -f 3-00 N 18-67 A tolerably bright round nebula, of a pearly tint, just above the R A. i h - 22 m - i h - 27 m. 37 "Whale's back ; die covered by Sir W. Herschel. The field is very in- teresting, for nearly S. of the little nebula is a neat double star, the components of which are of the 9 th and n* 11 magnitudes, the latter in the sf quadrant; and there are three other telescopic stars on the Northern verge. A line from the pair above to the minute star below would fall just before the nebula. 77. 131 2. CASSIOPEIA. h. K.A. 1 Decl. N m. s. 25 55 / 60 7'7 s. Free. + 3-88 N 18-66 STROVE, W Position. Distance. Epoch. 142-3 ... 13.6 ... 1830-27 A double star. A 6 J, yellowish ; Bio. 78. 103 M. CASSIOPEIA. (h. 126; H. 341.) 8. Free. + 3-91 LV. h. m. s. R.A. 1 25 56 Decl. N 60 7-1 Position. Distance. o // STROVE, W. 142-3 ... 13-6 SMYTH 1409 ... 14*4 N 18-66 Epoch. 1830-27 1832-66 A neat double star (=2. 131) in a cluster, on Cassiopeia's knee. A 7, straw coloured ; B 9, dusky blue. This is a fan-shaped group, diverging from a sharp star in the nf quadrant. The cluster is brilliant from the splash of a score of its largest members, the four principal ones of which are from the 7 th to the 9 th magnitude; and under the largest, in the sf, is a red star of the 8 th magnitude. i/, and a little N. of b, on the Lady's knee. 79. 2421 h. HYDRI. (H. 356.) h. m. s. B.A. 1 27 4 Decl. S 74 6-3 Free. + 1-32 N 18-62 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " B ; S ; R ; p s b M * ; r ; " which means : " bright ; small ; round ; pretty suddenly brighter in the middle, where there is a star ; resolveable." 38 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 80. 33 M. TRIANGHTLI. (H. 352; .) LVII. b. m. B.A. 1 27 38 Decl. N 30 6-8 Free. + 3 35 N 18-61 A large and distinct, but faint pale white nebula, in the precincts of Triangulum, between it and the head of the Northern Fish ; with a bright star a little np, and 5 others following at a distance, between which and the object, there is an indistinct gleam of mere nebulous matter. It was discovered by Messier in 1764; and to 1$. had a mottled aspect under his 7 ft reflector, in 1*783 : but afterwards applying a larger telescope, he resolved it into stars "the smallest points imaginable." By a method of turning the space-penetrating power of his instrument into a gradually increasing series of gauging powers, he considered the profundity of this cluster must be of the 344 th order : i. e. 344 times the distance of Sirius from the earth. About 4 from a Trianguli, and just N. of a line run from that star to b Andromedse. [One of Lord Kosse's " spirals." Sir J. Herschel noted the great size of this object : nearly ^ in diameter from N. to S. " Only fit for low powers, being actually imperceptible, from want of contrast, with my 144" Webb.} [Engraved in Phil. Trans., 1850, PI. xxxvi. Fig. 5; Phil. Trans., 1861, PI. xxvi. Fig. 10.] 81. 100 PISCIUM. (2. 136.) LIX. h. m. s. B.A. 1 29 1 c Decl. N 11 59-8 Prec. + 3-17 N 18-56 Position. Distance. Epcch. HEKSCHEL.W. 85-0 ... 15.8 ... 1783-59 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 804 ... 16-0 ... 1821-91 SMYTH 78.9 ... 15.9 ... 1833-86 TALMAGE 78.0 ... 16-3 ... 1865.78 WILSON and SEABBOKE 79.2 v ... 16-4 ... 1873-89 A neat double star. A 7, white ; B 8, pale grey. This fine object is on the ribbon under the tail of the Northern Fish ; a line from a Arietis through y, the first and third of the Ram's head, hits upon 100 Piscium, at about 8 S.W. of y. The above measures perhaps show a slow np sf, or retrograde, orbital change. [Closely np ir.] E. A. i h - 27 m - i h - 3o m - 39 82. 281 y. I. SCULPTOBIS. (h. 2423; H. 361.) b. m. s. R.A. 1 29 10 Decl. S 29 58-3 Free. 4- 2-78 N 18-56 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "vB; vL; vmE, 1183; sbM; *34'5; 6-55;" which means: " very bright ; very large ; very much elongated in the direction of 118-3 with the meridian ; suddenly brighter in the middle ; has a star in the nf quadrant at an angle of 34-5 and at a distance of 6- 5 s of time." 83. 40 CASSIOPEIA IiVIII. b. m. s. B. R.A. 1 29 43 c Decl. N 72 28 -8 Free. + 4-68 N 18.54 Position. Distance. Epoch. O H SMYTH 240.5 ... 42 ... 1834.95 BUBNHAM 237-2 ... 53-5 ... 1877-49 A double star between the feet of Cassiopeia and Cepheus, where a line from b carried a littie E. of ^ and about 5 further, will strike it. A 6, yellow; and B [n], pale blue. This is a delicate though wide object \ and is one of the principal members of Custos Messium, an asterism placed by Lalande between Rangifer and Cassiopeia, in poorish punning compliment to his friend Messier, the " comet-ferret." It is in a poor field, but about 10' or n' to the sp is 2/s curious nebula No. 2 [ = H. 373]; and nearly following it, about 4 s , is a pair of minute stars lying across the parallel, about 10" apart 84. 2426 h. PHOENICIS. (H. 369.) h. R.A. 1 30 15 Decl. S 42 6-1 Free. + 2-61 N 18-52. A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "B; pL; mE; gpmbM;" which means : " bright ; pretty large ; much extended ; gradually pretty much brighter in the middle." This is 479 Dunlop. 40 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 85. 123 P. I. PISCIUM. (2. 138.) LX. 11. Ill* B.A. 1 30 17 Free. + 3-13 Decl. N o 7 5-0 N i8-53 Position. Distance. Epoch. Q // STRUVK, W . 20-0 . 1-46 1830-23 SMYTH 269 . 1-4 ... 1843-10 SECCHI 2 9 .I .. . 1-46 ... 1857.89 DOBERCK 30-8 .. i-34 ... 1877.91 An interesting close double star, in the space between the two Fishes and the meander of the ribbon, nearly half-way on a line from /3 Arietis towards r? Ceti. A 6, yellowish; B 8, pale white, a third star following at some distance; probably Piazzi's "sequitur alia 6 a e mag- nitudinis 8' circiter ad Boream." [No doubt a binary. There is evidently a progressive increase in the angle.] 86. 74 M. PISCIUM. (h. 142 ; H. 372 ; &.) h. m. 8. B.A. 1 30 47 o Decl. N 15 13-5 Free. -f 3-21 N 18-50 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Hersehel's Catalogue of 1864: ; F; vL; E; v g, psmbM; rr;" which means: "a globular cluster ; faint ; very large ; round ; very gradually, then pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle ; partially resolved some stars visible." A spiral nebula. Engraved, Eosse, woodcut, Phil. Trans., 1861. 87. 76 M. PEBSEI. (EL 385; &.) LXII. h. K. A. 1 35 2 Decl. N 51 1-8 Free. + 3-33 N 18-35 Position. Distance, Epoch. BURNHAM 228-7 ... 33-7 ... 1879.54 An oval pearly white nebula, nearly half-way between y Andromedse and b Cassiopeise ; close to the toe of Andromeda, though figured in the precincts of Perseus. It trends N. and S., with two stars preceding by n & and 5o 8 , and two following nearly on the- parallel, by 19* and 36 s ; and just np of it is the double star above registered, of which A is 9, white; and B [10],. dusky.. When. firsjt discovered, Mechain considered it as a mass of nebulosity; but Messier thought it was a compressed cluster; E.A. 41 and 1$. that it was an irresolvable double nebula. It has an intensely rich vicinity. ["Curious miniature of M. 27 and like it, gaseous, p a little the brighter." (Webb.) 27 M, it will be remembered, is the "Dumb-bell nebula."] 88 145 P. I. PISCIUM. (2. 145.) s. Free. + 3-31 N 18-35 h. m. s. R.A. 1 35 8 Decl. N 25 1T4 Position. o 29.2 Distance. LXI. Epoch. SMYTH 29-2 ... 12 ... 1836-87 A neat double star in a barren field over the horn of Aries, which is readily found by carrying a line from /3 Arietis, the middle star in the Ram's head, to /3 Andromeda?, at somewhat less than one-third of the distance : a thwart line from /3 through a Trianguli passes just to the S. of it, 5^ from a. A 6 J, cream yellow ; B 1 3, blue, and there is a small blue star near the vertical of the np quadrant. 89. 6 ERIDANL R.A. 1 35 37 p rec . + 2-25 Decl. S 56 45'2 N 18-34 Distance. Epoch. 3-6 ... 1835.00 A double star. A 6 ; B 6J. " A superb double star." (Sir J. Herschel.)^ Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 122-3 90. 251 CETI. (2. 147.) h. m. s. s. R.A. 1 36 18 Prec. + 2 96 / jf Decl. S 11 51-6 N 18- 3 i Position. Distance. Epoch. jy STRUVE, W. 86-0 3-5 1822-30 DAWES 87-5 .- 3-9 1836-97 SECCHI 88-5 3-6 ... 1855-89 DEMBOWSKI 88-2 4-0 1877-81 A double star. A 5^, white ; B 7 J-, yellowish white. The changes 42 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. indicated by th observations are so slight that it seems hardly safe to infer an increase both in angle and distance. This star is designated x' by Struve and in Sir J. Herschel's general catalogue, but improperly so, it would appear. 91. 46 $. VII. CASSIOPEIA, (h. 145; H 387; &.) LXIII. b. m. s. s. R.A. 1 36 28 o Decl. N 61 20-2 Prec. + 4-06 N 18-30 A cluster of stars from the io tn to the 14*^ magnitudes, just below the Lady's right knee ; and nearly in mid-distance between 6 and . It is somewhat of a triangular shape, and about 2' or 3' in diameter ; the hypothenuse is well denned by the three brightest stars in the field, of which the central one is orange-coloured, and of the 8J magnitude, perhaps Sir W. Herschel's " ruddy :" from analogy it is between us and the components of the cluster. 92 146 h. CASSIOP. (Neb.=h. 146 ; H. 388 ; Star^OS. 35.) LXIV. h. m. s. R.A. 1 36 36 o Decl. N 55 19 -4 Prec. + 3-85 N 18-30 Position. Distance. Epoch. Of/ SMYTH 120 ... 10 ... 1835-74 STKUVE, 0. 114-2 ... 9-9 ... 1850-13 DEMBOWSKI 108-6 ... 10-2 ... 1869-32 A double star. A 8, pale white; B 12, dusky. In a loose cluster, between the weapon of Perseus and the elbow of Cassiopeia, one-third the distance from a of the latter to a of the former constellation : and it may be fished up by carrying a line from K Cassiopeise through y to double the distance beyond. It consists of a gathering of small stars, of io (h to 13* magnitude, divided into two distinct groups; one s/of A, and the other nf. It is a neat but difficult double star, whose angle of position and distance were estimated. E. A. i h - i. !&. ^QI 43 93. 155 2. PISCIUM. h. B.A. 1 Decl. N m. s. 38 25 o / 8 56-3 Free. + 3-15 N 18-23 Position. Distance. STRUVE, W. DAWES DAWES 332-8 3^9-9 328-8 4.6 4-6 4-5 Epoch. 1830-60 1842-91 1853-98 A double star. A 8, white ; B 8, white. 94. 31 $. VI. CASSIOP. (Neb. = H. 392; Star = 2. 151.) LXVI. R.A. Decl. h. 1 N m. 38 o 60 s. 39 41 3 Free. + X 8. 4-<>5 I8.23 SMYTH Position. Distance. o // 70-2 ... 8 Epoch. 1833-70 A neat double star, in a cluster near the Lady's right knee ; it may be found by drawing a line from a through b, and carrying it about 2^ further. A 9, and B io, both bluish. This object is in an elegant field of large and small stars, from a certain degree of brilliance down to infinitesimal points ; but without any disposition to form, except that the larger members incline towards a parallelogram in which there are several coarse pairs. In the sp quadrant of this cluster is a fine ruby star of the 8 th magnitude. [Webb appears to have failed to see this ruby star. It is not men- tioned by Birmingham.] 95. SCULPTOBIS. (*h. 3461.) h. K.A. 1 m. 40 s. 29 Free. + 3. 2'80 Decl. S o 25 36-2 N 1 8- 1 6 HERSCHEL, J. Position. Distance. 69-6 ... 5-5 ... Epoch. 1836-62 A double star. A 6, white ; B io ; dull red. 44 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 96. 163 2. CASSIOPEIA. h. R.A. 1 43 17 Decl. N 64 18 '1 Free. + 4- 2 2 N 18-06 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE,W. 33-6 ... 34-9 ... 1831-75 A double star. A 6^, golden red ; B 9, blue. Webb says that the colours are " exceedingly remarkable." 97. 179 P. I. ABIETIS. (2. 174.) LXVII. h. m. s. R.A. 1 44 4 Decl. N 21 43-9 Prec. + 3-30 N 18-03 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, W. 167-4 ... 3.0 ... 1782.98 SOUTH 172.4 ... 3.3 ... 1823-98 SMYTH 169-9 2 '4 1836-11 DUNB 167-5 ... 2-8 ... 1871-11 A close double star, on the Ram's horn, about i J from /3 on a line towards (3 Andromedae. A 6, topaz yellow ; B 8, smalt blue. South' s observations encouraged an opinion of orbital motion =+ 0-12 per annum. But my observations do not confirm this, any more than do those of 2. Nor do I think the stars are approaching each other, for the early distances of IJL, estimated by diameters of the stellar discs, were but approximations, since, exclusive of that important element the magnifying power, it would alter according to atmospheric and other circumstances at the time of observation. As an example of the method, we may here give the remarks for this star's distance : " With 227, about J diameter of L j with 460, full ij, or about i|- of L, when best seen." [2 np ft. This is Flamsteed's i Arietis : Smyth has departed from his usual custom in preferring a Piazzi number to a Flamsteed one.] 98. h. m. s. R.A. 1 44 11 o Decl. S 11 13-8 Prec. -f- 2-95 N 18-02 Webb notes that this star forms a fine pair with 182 P.I. A 5, pale yellow ; B 7-J, bluish. But he has fallen into some error in regard to the identity of this object with 2. 147, called, it is true, by Struve x 1 . Struve's x 1 precedes the above, io m in R.A., and is more to the S. E.A. i h - 43 m - ih- 46^. 45 99. CBTI. LXIX. CBTI. b. m. s. s. B.A. 1 46 2 Free. + 2-95 o / // Decl. S 10 52-8 N 17-95 Position. Distance. Epoch. // SMYTH 40.4 165 ... 1835-87 BURNHAM 40-6 ... 185 ... 1879-89 A bright star, with a distant companion, in a poor field. A 3, topaz yellow ; B 9, white, with a small star to the nf. This object is in the midst of the Whale's body, whence it was called batn Kditos, the belly of Cetus, by the Arabian astronomers. It is on the line from 6 towards TT, and about one-third of the distance from the former ; and a ray carried from v through f will stretch out to (3 Andromedse. [The estimates of the magnitude of A vary much ; Lalande, Argelander, Heis, 3 ; J. Herschel, 4-9; Bessel, 5.] 100. 101 P. I. CETI. (2. 178.) LXVIII. h. m. s. s. B.A. 1 46 11 Decl. N 10 16-0 Free. + 3-17 N 17-94 Position. Distance. Epoch. o STRUVE.W. 193.3 ... 3-0 ... 1828-96 SMYTH 194-1 ... 3-6 ... 1834.99 A close double star. A 7^, and B 8, both lucid white. This beautiful object, though catalogued of the "Whale, is on the fore leg of Aries ; with a distant telescopic star near the vertical sf, and another near the parallel, but the field is otherwise barren. It will readily- be fished up, by drawing an imaginary line from a Trianguli through y Arietis, and carrying it about 8^ to the southward, or nearly as far beyond. 101. 65 ANDROMEDA. LXX. b. m. s. *. B.A. 1 46 41 Decl. N 40 ll'l Free. + 3-57 N 17-92 Position. Distance. Epoch. O H BURNHAM 355-4 ... 60-2 ... 187984 A most delicate double star, on the Lady's right leg, about 3 from y Andromedse, a little S. of the line from that star towards /3. A 5|, yellow; B [12]. This is designated by Sir J, Herschel as "a fine 46 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. specimen of a nebulous star." It is singular that it was marked nebulous by Flamsteed. It sometimes had a burred aspect to my gaze, and the companion was only caught by intense attention, and then only by evanescent glimpses, being a minimum visibile for my telescope : its posi- tion and distance are therefore only estimated. Is the intense blue which some of these mere points of light present, an optical illusion ? The acolyte being of the last degree of faintness, it was necessary to avert the eye. H. accounts for the success of this stratagem, by supposing the lateral portions of the retina to be less exhausted than the central ones. [" Not seen nebulous in 8|- in refractor." (Brodie.) " I could not per- ceive any nebulous surrounding to the large star." BumhamJ] 102. 241 B. ANDROMEDA. (2. 179.) B.A. Decl. 1 46 41 N 36 47-0 Position. STBUVE.W. 160-4 DUNR 159-9 Free. + 3'5o N 17-99 Distance. Epoch. 3.4 3-4 1831-04 1871-43 A double star. A 7, white; B evidently fixed. , white. The components are 103. a TBIANGULI. h. m. . s. B.A. 1 46 48 Decl. N 29 2'6 Position. BUENHAM 182.3 LXXI. Prec. -f 3-40 N 17-93 Distance. 228 Epoch. 1879-85 A bright star with a telescopic companion. A 3^, yellow; B n, lilac. This object is at the preceding angle of Deltoton, and, except a lot* mag. star near the sf vertical beyond B, is in a barren field. It is the apex of a large oblique-angled triangle, the base of which is formed to the np and nf by /3 and y Andromedse : and it is also 6 beyond a Arietis, on a line brought from y Ceti. It was named by the Arabians Rds al Mothallath, or " Caput Trianguli." Though small, Triangulum, Deltoton, or Trigonus, is one of the ancient 48 asterisms, and is supposed to have derived its name from the Egyptian Delta ; but others insist that the Triangle alludes to Trinacria, or Sicily; R.A. i n - 46- i h - 47 m - 47 an island favoured by Ceres, and whence her planet was revealed to Piazzi. The members have been thus numbered : Ptolemy ... 4 stars. Flamsteed . . . 16 stars. Bayer .... 5 Piazzi 25 Hevelius . . . 9 Bode 33 Several very old illustrations delineate Deltoton as an equilateral triangle, with a star at each angle " in unoquoque angulo unum " but it has latterly been drawn as a scalene figure. Anciently there was only a single triangle, but Hevelius took three other stars between it and the head of Aries, to form Triangulum minus : the figure, however, is dis- continued. A line drawn from /3 Arietis to y Andromedse passes the lucida Trianguli, at about one-third of the distance. 104. V ABIETIS. (2. 180.) LXXII. 7 ABIETIS. (2. 180.) b. m. s. s. B.A. 1 47 29 Free. + 3-27 h. / II Decl. N 18 45-3 N 17-89 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL.W. 356-0 ... 10.17 ... 1779-68 SMYTH 359-8 ... 8-8 ... 1837.93 STRUVE, 0. 356.4 ... 8-60 ... 1851-82 DOBERCK 358-6 ... 8-32 ... 1877-89 A neat double star, the duplicity of which was discovered by Dr. Hooke in 1664. A 4^, bright white; and B 5, pale grey. This fine object is placed at the lower bend of the Ram's horn, where it precedes /3 and a ; it is followed in the nf, but nearly on the parallel, and about 3-5' distant, by the 9 th magnitude star which that astronomer describes. From observations made by IjjL, he concluded the orbital angle to have increased ; but the subsequent measures indicate little or no change. It is certainly a beautiful pair, in a powerful instrument. " What would Cassini say," demands Ip., "if he were to view the first star of Aries, which appeared to him as split in two, through a telescope that will show TJ Corona Borealis and h Draconis to be double stars ?" Dr. Hooke mentions that the telescope shows some stars, which appear single, to consist of two or more, so close, that to the naked eye both the images falling upon one single filament of the tunica retina make but one impression upon .the brain. " Of this kind," he continues, " the most remarkable is the star in the left horn of Aries, which, whilst I was observing the comet which appeared in the year 1664, and followed till he passed by this star, I took notice that it consisted of two small stars very near together : a like instance to which I have not else met with in all the heaven." Thousands are now known J 48 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. y Arietis has been called the first star in Aries, because it was once the nearest to the equinoctial point : it was named Mesartim, owing to an erroneous deduction by Bayer from the word Sartai, a corruption of Al Sharata'in, which is the next star. [" Small change in angle and distance probable." (Gledhill.) But I would rather limit this remark to the distance, which seems clearly to be diminishing, the angle remaining practically unchanged.] 105. 105 13. I. h. m. E.A. 1 47 Decl. S CETI. (h. 165, 2443 ; H. 431 ; 8. Prec. + N s. 39 o 14 16-7 2-91 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "c B ; p L ; IE; psmb M ;" which means : "considerably bright ; pretty large; little extended; pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle." Seen at Parsonstown " more extended than Sir J. Herschel describes it." 106. K.A. h. m. R. 1 48 33 /3 ABIETIS. Prec. -f LXXIII. Decl. N 20 16-2 s. 3*29 N Position. Difference of R. A. Epoch. SMYTH 198 ... 7.4 ... 1835-99 A bright star with a distant companion, in a barren field near the tip of the Ram's horn, being the middle one of the three stars known as the Ram's head. A 3, pearly white; B n, dusky; there is a still smaller star in the sf quadrant. This object was named Sheratan or Sharata'in, the dual of shara{, a sign, signifying y and ft, the two bright stars in the head of the Ram; with an interval between them and a, says Kazwini, of two Jcaus, by eye-measurement : said kaus being used as synonymous with the astronomical ell of 2. An imaginary line from the Pleiades to a Pegasi passes between them in the mid-distance of that line. 107. 56 ANDROMEDA. B A. 1 49 37 Decl. N 36 42 -2 Distance. Position, MAIN 301.5 A pair of stars between the Triangle and the Lady's right knee, both Prec. -f 3-52 N 17-81 Epoch. 1865.81 LXXIV. B.A. 47 m. _ I; m. of the 6 th magnitude, and both yellow. These stars are suspected of physical connection, principally on the ground that their identity of movement in space implies their union in some vast system. Their proper motions have been inquired into, and the following results registered by Baily : A ( = 203 P.I.) E. A." + 0-06 Decl/- o-oi B( = 204P. I.) + 0*24 + 0-04 This object is readily identified by carrying a line from TT Andro- medae through /3, and extending it about 10 beyond the latter ; and it is also nearly in mid-distance between y Andromedse and a Trianguli. [2. in 1836 noticed the preceding star to be smaller and always deeper in colour, but Webb reversed this statement in 1850, and Sir J. Herschel agreed with Webb.] 108. 209 P. I. PISCIUM. (2. 186.) LXXV. b. m. s. R.A. 1 50 12 Decl. 18-2 Free, -f 3-08 N 17-78 Epoch. 1831-12 1833-83 1846-11 1863-85 1876-99 1878-87 A close double star, on the sf extreme of the Fishes' kheit, or ribbon ; and it lies on a line shot from f Piscium to a Arietis, at about a third of the distance. A 7, silvery white; and B 7^, white. This is a very fine object, resembling rj Coronse. [" There can be no doubt that this double star, discovered by 2., is a binary system." DawesJ] Position. Distance. o STRUVE, W. 6 4 -7 ... 1-23 SMYTH 62-9 1.5 STRUVE, 0. 68.2 ... 0-82 DAWES 85-1 - -3 SCHIAPARELLI Single Single BURNHAM 169-0 0-31 109. 32 ^. VII. ANDROMEDA. (h. 174; H. 457; &.) R.A. 1 51 14 Free. + 3'54 Decl. N 37 7'6 N 17-74 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "Cl; vvL; Ki; stL and sc;" which means: "a cluster; unusually large; rich; the stars large and scattered." 50 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 110. 584 Lac. HYDBI. (*h. 3475.) a. Free. + 1-95 N 17-72 h. m. 9. 1 51 42 o / B.A. Decl. S 60 40-8 Position. Distance. Epoch. HEESCHEL, J. tf-6 ... 3-3 - 1837-31 A double star. A 7 ; 67. Lies nearly mid-way between a Hydri and a Eridani. 111. LXXVI. h. m. B.A. 1 51 s. 47 Free. + 8. 3'33 o / // Decl. N 23 3'6 N 17-72 Position. Distance. Epoch. O n HERSCHEL, W. 48-0 . 36.6 ... I779-83 SMYTH 45-6 .. 36-9 ... 1830-96 BURNHAM 45-5 37-5 ... 1880-12 A fine double star, on the root of the Ram's horn ; pointed at by a line through y and /3, and is the apex of an oblique triangle of which a and /3 form the base. A 5j, yellowish white ; B 8, blue. 112. 112 ]. I. ABIETIS. (h. 181; H. 463; .) LXXVII. h. m. s. s. B.A. 1 53 18 Free. + 3-28 Decl. N 18 28-3 N 17-66 A round nebula, closely following y on the neck of the Ram, where it may be fished for on a line carried from a Trianguli 4! below A. Arietis. It is large and pale, but brightens in the centre. IJ[. classed it in November, 1785, and considered it "not easily resolvable;" but still H. distinguished it through a thick cloud. It lies among some small stars, the most conspicuous of which form a curve across the S. part of the field. [" Large but very faint." Brodie.] 113. 191 2. CASSIOPEIA. B.A. Decl. 53 23 N 73 18-8 Position. o STRUVE, W. 190-6 DUNER 191.3 A double star. A 6, white Duner calls B " cendree." Prec. + N 5-06 Distance. Epoch. 5-6 ... 1832-15 5.3 ... 1868-32 B 9, blue. Stars presumably fixed. R.A. i h - 5i m - i h - 54*. 51 114. 222 P. I. ABIETIS. (2. 196.) LXXVIII. h. m. s. R.A. 1 53 48 Decl. N 20 31-4 Position. (AB 53 SMYTH j A C 165 (AD.S59 rAB 50-0 ... E.NOTT ] AC 166.3 (AD 0-8 BURNHAMAD O-7 Free. + a. 3-30 I7-63 Epoch. 1834-99 1862-95 1880-03 Distance. n ; ! ... 165 > a-5) 37-3 \ ... 183-6 ) 183.8 A quadruple star, in mid-distance between a and y, under the Ram's ear, lying nearly at right angles with the vertical. A [9, blue] ; B [12], deep blue; C 10, lilac; and D [6, topaz yellow]. This is an exquisite object, but most difficult to observe. Still, it forms an admirable test to try the light and distinctness of a telescope. [" AB is probably unchanged : the distance between AC has diminished, while that between A D has considerably increased." Gledhill. 1 no alter- ation in AD.] [I have revised Smyth's note so as to embody his son's corrections mentioned in .Edinburgh Obs., vol. xiv. p. 346.] 115. 101 #. I. CETI. {h. 183; H. 470; &.) b. m. s. s. K.A. 1 54 11 o Decl. S 6 29 6 Prec. + 3-00 N 17-62 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; L ; m E 163 ; mb M ;" which means : " considerably bright ; large; much extended in the direction of 163 with the meridian; much brighter in the middle." 116. 197 2. TRIANGULI. h. m. . s. R.A. 1 54 35 Decl. N 34 45 "7 Prec. + 3-50 N 17-56 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE 233-6 ... 18-3 ... 1833-48 MADLER 232-8 ... 20.9 ... 1853.09 GLEDHTLL 233-0 ... 22-1 ... 1873-96 A double star. A 8, white ; B 9, ashy. " The changes are due to the proper motion of the larger star." 2 np B Trianguli, of mag. 3^-. E 2 52 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 117. a PISCIUM. (2. 202.) LXXXI. h. m. s. K.A. 1 56 21 Decl. N 2 14'0 Free. + 3-09 - N 17-53 Position. Distance. Epoch. o HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 335-8 ... 5.40 ... 1821-89 SMYTH 333'4 3-8 ... 1838-87 MADLER 3 2 9*7 3 +* *' ! ... 1834-83 PI. xxv. Fig. 5.] Trans -, 1861, 150. b. m. s. R.A. 2 34 15 Decl. 33 ABIETIS. (2. 289.) s. Prec. + 3-48 N 15-69 26 35'4 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, W. HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH SMYTH WILSON and SEABBOKE o 2-8 0-2 25-5 29.1 28.5 29.1 cv. 1779-74 1822-08 1832-12 1873.94 A fine double star, over the back of Aries, but in the space assigned to Musca ; lying nearly mid-way between the Pleiades and j3 Andromedse. A 6, pale topaz ; B 9, light blue. There may exist a slow orbital motion, but the inference that the stars are receding from each other cannot be supported, as 1$. marked his distance "inaccurate." [" 9 seems very small." - Webb.] 151. 66 13. VIII. CASSIOPEIA. (H. 578.) B.A. Decl. h. m. B. 2 34 18 61 4-5 Prec. 4-57 15-68 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "01; L; sc st, one 10;" which means: "a cluster; large; stars scattered, one of them is of the io th magnitude." 152. 34 M. PERSEI. (h. 248; H. 584; &.) 8. Prec. + 3-83 N 15-70 h. m. s. B.A. 2 34 57 Decl. N 42 15 '7 BURNHAM Position. 249-3 Distance. 20-2 CVI. Epoch. 1880-05 A double star in a cluster, between the right foot of Andromeda and the head of Medusa ; where a line carried from Polaris between c Cassiopeiae and a Persei to within about * of the parallel of (3 Persei will meet it. A and B, 8th magnitudes, and both white. It is in a scattered but elegant group of stars from the 8 th to the 13* degree of brightness, on a dark ground, and several of them form into coarse pairs. E. A. 2 h - h - m. 69 This was first seen and registered by Messier, in 1764, as a "mass of small stars;" and in 1783 was resolved by Sir W. Herschel with a 7 ft reflector: with the 2o ft he made it "a coarse cluster of large stars of different sizes." By the method he applied to fathom the Galaxy, he concluded the profundity of this object not to exceed the 14 4 th order. [" Just perceptible to the naked eye ; a very grand low-power field, one of the finest objects of its class." JFe&&.] 153. 12 PERSEI. h. m. s. B.A. 2 35 18 CVII. Decl. N 39 43 '7 Prec. + 3-76 N 15-62 Position. o Distance. Epoch. O H HERSCHEL, "W. BC 212-0 ... 21-98 ... 1782-30 SMYTH BC 209-8 ... 22-9 ... 1833-85 MAIN BC 204.4 23* 1 1863-80 A pointer to a double star (=2. 292) in the nf quadrant, with A RA. io s , preceding the head of Medusa ; and a line led through K and y Cassiopeise passes over it between /3 Persei and y Andromedae. A 6, yellow ; B 7 Y> P a ^ e Dme ) G 8, lilac. Its fixity may be held to be proved ; and it must be rated as an optical object, or one which is casually juxtaposed in the heavens. Still the components must be within a distance of each other which imagination may compass, since their relative brightness is ap- parently so nearly the same. A bright star, distant upwards of 4' in the sp quarter, is South's C; and still nearer to A is a pair of io th magni- tudes, on the parallel with each other. 154. 84 CETI. (2. 295.] B. A. 2 35 35 Decl. S 1 9-8 Prec. + 3-05 N 15-60 Position. o STRUVE, W. 334-6 SMTTH 334.5 SECCHI 330-6 DOBERCK 325-O Distance. Epoch. CVIII. 4-85 ... 1831-90 5 - 1833-97 4.57 ... 1858-03 475 ... 1877-84 A very delicate double star on the Whale's under-jaw ; between a and f Ceti. A 6, pale yellow; B 14, lilac, with several minute stars in the field. My observations, from the difficulty of the object, are little better than estimations. [A slow retrograde motion seems probable.] 70 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 155. 63 . I. CETI. (h 254, 2493; H. 589; .) h. m. s. R. A. 2 35 40 Decl. S 8 43-5 Free. + 2-94 N 15-60 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "B; pL; R; mbM*i2;" which means : " bright ; pretty large; round; much brighter in the middle, where there is a 12 th mag. star." 156. PERSEI. (2. 296.) CIX. R. A. 2 36 41 Decl. N 48 45 '8 Prec. -I- 4-03 N 15-55 Position. Distance. Epoch. o ff HERSCHEL, W. AB 290-0 13-52 1782-64 STRUVE, W. AB 294.6 ... 15-4 ... 1832-20 WILSON and SEABROKE ( A B 296-0 (AC 215-3 ... 16.5 ) ... not taken \ 1873-93 BURNHAM AC 218-5 ... 68-8 1879-54 A triple star in a rich field on the Hero's right shoulder ; and nearly in mid-distance between /3 Persei and 6 on the knee of Cassiopeia. A 4, yellow; B 13, violet; C n, grey. Ijf. mentions a third star within i' towards the S. ; but both he and 2. measured the object only as double. 157. 77 M. CETI. (h. 262 ; H. 600 ; CX. h. m. s. R.A. 2 37 3 Decl. S O 28-3 Tree. H- 3-06 N 15-51 A round stellar nebula, near 8 in the Whale's lower jaw, and about 2\ from y on the line towards e, or S. by "W. This was first classed by M. in 1780 as a mass of stars containing nebulosity. It is small, bright, and exactly in a line with three small stars, one preceding and two following, of which the nearest and largest is a 9 th magnitude to the sf. There are other minute companions in the field; and the place is differentiated from y Ceti. This object is wonderfully distant and insulated, with presumptive R.A. 2h- 35 m - 37 m. 71 evidence of intrinsic density in its aggregation ; and bearing indication of the existence of a central force, residing either in a central body or in the centre of gravity of the whole system. Sir W. Herschel says, "From the observations of the large io ft telescope, which has a gauging power of 75-82, we may conclude that the profundity of the nearest part is at least of the 910^ order." That is, 910 times as far off as the stars of the I st magnitude ! [But this is highly imaginative, to say the least of it. The Earl of Rosse noted this as a spiral neb. Engraved in Phil. Trans., 1861, PI. xxv. Fig. 5; Rosse, Dublin Trans., 1879, PI. i. Fig. 600.] 158. 7 CETI. (2. 299.) h. m. s. K. A. 2 37 36 Decl. N 2 33 5 CXI. Position. o STRUVE, W. 283-2 SMYTH 289-0 SMYTH 285-7 MADLEB 292-0 PLUMMEB 291-1 Distance. // 2-83 2-6 3-7 2-73 Epoch. 1825-43 1831-85 1843-16 1858-07 1877-31 A Nautical Almanac star, in the Whale's mouth, and closely double. A 3, pale yellow ; B 7, lucid blue, the colours finely contrasted. With my instrument this beautiful object is certainly not so very difficult to measure ; I consider \i fixity established. The Arabian astronomers applied the name of Kaff-al-jidhma, the maimed hand, to a group of stars forming the Whale's head ; and which, though limited by Ideler to a, 8, A, jz, and f Ceti, has been latterly applied exclusively to y. There are vestiges showing that the Orientals had a large asterisin here in very early times, probably before Cepheus and the Ethiopian plague were thought of. A line from ft Andromedse through ft Arietis, the centre of the three stars in the Ram's head, points nearly upon y Ceti at about 25 beyond, or as far again; and it is nearly in mid-distance between y Pegasi and ft Orion is. [Dembowski calls B olive-green; whilst Webb in 1850 marked it " tawny."] 72 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 159. 160 P. II. TBIANGULI. (2. 300.) CXII. B.A. 2 38 4 Decl. N 28 59 '9 Position. o SMYTH 297-8 MADLEB 299-8 TALMAGE 304.3 PLUMMEB 299-9 Prec. -h 3-53 N 15-46 Distance. Epoch. 2-9 2.71 2.79 : 1831.88 1843.62 1865-89 1877-02 A close double star, very near the wing of Musca, and forming the apex of a nearly equilateral triangle with the two brightest in that insect. A 8, B 8, both cream-white. This lovely object is in a barren field. [Gledhill says " probably binary," but the evidence is not very con- clusive.] 160. 64 $. I. CETI. (h. 264; H 604; &. s. Prec. + 2-95 CXIV. K.A. 2 40 35 Decl. S 8 2-3 15-35 An oval nebula, on the strange pectoral fringe of the Whale's neck, at rather more than a quarter of the distance from c to a. It is pale though distinct, and brightens towards the centre. To insure the identity of so delicate a spot, it needs only be raised a little in the inverted field, when three equidistant stars of the 8 th magnitude will appear on the northern verge. There are several very small stars in the field, under a moderate power. [" Very faint in 8J in refractor." (JBrodie.) Seen at Parsonstown to have a dark streak on the N. edge.] 161. 48 $. V. FOBRACI& (h. 2495; H. 610.) h. m. s. R.A. 2 41 37 Decl. S 30 43-9 Prec. + 2-55 15-27 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue, of 1864: "vB; L; vmE 151; vbMN;" which means: "very bright; large; very much extended in the direction of 151 with the meridian; very much brighter in the middle, indeed there is a nucleus there." R.A. 2 - 43 m. 162. rj PERSEI. (2. 307.) h m. t. . 2 42 40 Prec. -f 4-33 o . jy N 55 26 3 N 15-22 Position. Distance. Epoch. o jf. W , 290-1 36-00+ ... 1779-72 r., and SOUTH 299-9 ... 28-96 ... 1821-94 300-4 ... 28-4 ... 1838.78 cxv. R.A. Decl. HEBSCHEL, W. HERSCHEL, SMYTH A fine double star, on the Hero's head, and nearly in mid-distance of a line projected from a Persei, and carried between 8 and Cassiopeioe. A 5, orange ; B 8-J-, smalt blue ; the colours in clear contrast. A very neat object. There are distinctly 9 stars in the group, of which the principal, as Professor Barlow remarked, having three small stars nearly in a line on one side, and one on the other, forms a miniature representation of Jupiter and his satellites. The leader of this family precedes A a little below the parallel, or N. of it, in the inverted field, with a A R.A.= i5 8 . This star is 179 P. II., or 9 Hevelius ; and was under no small confusion as to its identity in the British Catalogue, until Baily's cor- rectives duly installed it 15 Persei 77, No. 348. And he adds: "In the British Catalogue it is stated to be of the 6^ magnitude : but in Halley's edition it is called the 4 tn . On consulting the original entry in the MS. book, I find it is there also noted as the 4 th ; which I have here adopted." It is certainly bright for Piazzi's rating, but I see no reason for altering it, since it is less lustrous than 6 or y Persei, its neighbours of the 4 tn magnitude. 163. R.A. Decl. STRUVE, W. SMYTH (2. 311.) Prec. + N 1 8. 3'33 I5-I9 Epoch. 1829-89 ... 1835-89 ... 1856-77 ... 1856-55 1870-01 Distance. 3-06 3-i | 25 > 2-94 24-8 CXVI. AB 119-6 AB 121-6 A C 109-9 SECCHI JAB 121-3 ( A C 110-3 GLEDHILL A B 121-2 A neat triple star, on the haunch of Aries, closely on the line and about one-third the distance from /3 Arietis, the middle star of the Ram's head, and Aldebaran. A 5, pale yellow; B 8J, flushed; and C n, dusky. 1$ . says, the smaller stars are " both mere points," neither of which can be seen " except with considerable and long-continued attention ;" but they are comparatively so easy in my instrument, that they may have become brighter. It is remarkable that a MS. remark of 1$., adduced by 74 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. his son, describes C as " easier to be perceived" than B. If this was the case in 1782, the object merits watching, for variability. [Gledhill considers that there is " certain direct motion in AB," but I &o not think this is yet established beyond a doubt.] 164. B.A. BUBNHAM 41 ARIETIS. Prec. CXVII. 30 h. m. 2 43 Decl. N 26 48 5 Position. Distance. AB 265-8 ... 21.2 AC 203.5 .-. 34- AD 230-2 ... 125.9 N 3-51 15-17 Epo.h. 1879.40 A coarse quadruple star, in the south wing of the Fly, and forming its lucida. A 3, white; B 13, deep blue; C n, lurid; D 9, pale grey. Piazzi's note to this star (=186 P. II.) mentions a couple of distant companions utraque 9 ae magnit. too far off to be very interesting. Musca Borealis is a little asterism to the N.E. of the Ram's head, and is known by three stars of the 3 rd and 4 th magnitudes. It seems to have been composed from informes by Bartschius, the scientific son-in- law of Kepler ; for which reason, perhaps, it was afterwards retained by Hevelius, though reluctantly. To identify the object here treated, let a line from a Bootis be passed under the Pleiades and meet another carried from a Andromedae over a Trianguli ; it will pass Lucida Muscse in the mid-distance. 165. v PORNACIS. (*h. 3532.) h. m. s. s. Prec. -f 2-39 Decl. S 37 52-2 Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 150-6 STONE, 0. 145-6 A double star. A 6| ; B 8. N 15-13 Distance. Epoch. // 8 est. ... 1837-9 5-3 .-. 187773 166. y l FORNACIS. h. m. s. R.A. 2 44 59 Decl. S 25 0'7 Position. o SMYTH 171 157-5 Prec. + 2-66 N 15-18 Distance. Epoch. 45 - 1837-94 1879-95 CXVIII. A star with a delicate companion. A 6, pale white; B 12, light blue R. A. 2 h - 43 m 2 h - 46 m - 75 This object is followed, a little N. of the parallel, A R.A. = 25 S , by a star of the 8 th magnitude. This star is close under the Whale's paw, but in the precincts given to Fornax Chemica by La Caille. Bode, in altering the type of this asterism, says, " J'ai trace* au lieu de ces instrumens, la delineation d'uue des experiences de 1'immortel Lavoisier." A line from a Ceti through 17 Eridani, carried a little more than as far again to the S., strikes y Fornacis. 167. 85 B. PERSEI. (2. 314.) h. m. B.A. 2 45 2 o Decl. N 52 32 2 Free, -f 4-19 N 15-07 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE, W. 295.4 ... 1-45 ... 1830.46 STROVE, 0. 297-0 ... 1-71 ... 1841.44 MADLER 297.9 ... 1-56 ... 1852.26 SECCHI 300-7 ... 1.46 ... 1857-62 STRUVE, 0. 300-2 ... 1-45 ... 1872-18 A double star. A 7f, white ; B 8, white. Gledhill says, " Probably binary," but the proof seems to me rather slender. 168. 20 PERSEI. (2. 318.) CXIX. h. R.A. 2 46 44 o Decl. W 37 53-5 Free. -f 3-75 N 15-12 Position. Distance. Epoch. c STRUVE, W. 236-8 ... 14-0 ... 1829.14 SMYTH 236-5 ... 13-9 ... 1832-04 BURNHAM 236-1 ... 14-0 ... 1878-15 A double star sp the larva, or mask of Medusa; which may be found by carrying a line from a Persei through /3 Persei and about 3 to the S. ; and a perpendicular to that point will cut 20 Persei at nearly ij to the E. of it. A 6J, pale white; B 10, sky-blue. This is a neat test object. [A itself is double. Pos. 158-7; Dist, 0.34"; 1878-70. Burnham}. [Closely follows 16 Persei, a star of the 5 th mag.] 76 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 169. 191 P. II. CEPHEI. (2. 320 ) cxx. b. m. s. B.A. 2 51 30 Decl. N 78 59 Free, -f 7-74 N 14-70 STBUVE, W. SMYTH Position. , 226-1 225.8 Distance. a 4-4 5-2 Epoch. 1831-60 I834-9 1 A double star, with two telescopic companions at a little distance. A 6, orange; B roj, smalt blue. A charming object discovered by 2. This star is in a strange corner of the / boundary of Cepheus, but in the part where Le Monnier squeezed in an asterism (" Rangifer *') between the Ethiopian monarch and the Cameleopard, to commemorate his opera- tions in Lapland, in 1736. It is about 10 from the Pole-star, on a line leading from thence to /3 Persei. [This star is reckoned by B. A. C. and other authorities to be within Cassiopeia.] 170. e ABJETIS. (2. 333.) CXXIII. Prec. + N 1 3-42 14 62 Epoch. Distance. .. 0-51 .- 0.5 0-87 .. 1-36 1827.61 ... '835-77 ... 1856-57 ... 1877-09 h. m. s. B.A. 2 52 55 Decl. N 20 54-0 Position. o STRUVE, W. 186.4 SMYTH 193.5 SECCHI 1967 WILSON and SEABROKE 200.7 A very close double star, at the root of the tail. A 5, pale yellow ; and B 6J, whitish. When discovered by 2. he described it as " Inter omnes nostras fortasse vicinissima." And H., writing to me in 1831, asks, " Have you tried e Arietis ? My 2o ft , with power 480, has fairly separated it. I do not say it will always do so." It must, however, be widening, for I have divorced them myself latterly, though they generally hung in contact at my earlier attempts. [Both angle and distance appear to be slowly increasing.] Arietis is readily found, mid-way on a line drawn between the Plei- ades and a Arietis; and a ray shot fromyPegasi between /3 and y Arietis, in the Eam's head, and led as far again, strikes e. [2. thought both stars variable.] R A. 2 h . 5i m 2 h - 56 m - 77 171. 220. P. II. PEBSEI. (2. 331.) CXXII. h. B.A. 2 m. s. 53 2 Prec. -f s. 4-24 o / Decl. N 51 54-9 N 14-60 Position. Distance. Epoch. // SOUTH 85-3 ... 12-9 1823.97 SMYTH 84-9 12.4 1835-10 MAIN 85-0 I2.I 1863.08 A neat double star, on the nape of the Hero's neck, slightly preceding a line carried from /3 Persei to Polaris, at one-third of the distance. A 6, silvery white ; B 8, sapphire blue. 172. Q EBIDANI. b. m. s. s. B A. 2 54 5 Prec. + 2-28 o / fl Decl. S 40 44-8 N 14-55 Position. Distance. Epoch. ff HEKSCHEL, J. 81.5 8-6 I835-77 STONE, O. 84-4 .. . 8-5 ... 1877.83 A double star. A 5 ; B 6. " One of the stars probably varies to some extent." (Gould.) 173. 104 B. PEBSEI. (2. 336.) h. m. s. s. B.A. 2 54 44 o Decl. N 31 58-6 Prec. + 3-63 N 14-50 Position. Distance. Epoch. STBUVE, W. 8.5 ... 8-2 ... 1831-17 MADLEB 7-2 ... 8-6 ... 1844-95 SECCHI 7-2 ... 8-3 ... 1858-03 STBUVE, 0. 7.3 ... 8.8 ... 1868-77 A double star. A 7, yellow ; B 8J, blue. Gledhill says : " Angle unchanged ; distance augmented ; " but the latter part of this statement seems to me rather premature. 174. a CETI. CXXV. h. m. s. s. B.A. 2 56 31 o Decl. N 3 39-5 Prec. + 3-13 N 14-39 Position. Difference of K. A Epoch. SMYTH 2*58 ... 29-6 ... 1833-85 A Nautical Almanac star, in front of the lower jaw, with a distant 78 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. companion. A 2-|, bright orange; B 10, pale grey. This is a curious object under a moderate power, on account of a decided blue star in the field, N. of it, of the 5j magnitude. a Ceti is numbered among the insulated stars, and is called Menkab, corrupted from Al minkhir, the nose or snout, a name which the Arabians applied, with greater propriety, to A. ; but though rated of equal magnitude with /3 Ceti, it is not now so large. A line from Pollux by a Bootis, carried nearly as far again, brings the eye to a Ceti ; which star, with a Arietis, forms the lower points of a gigantic W, of which Aldebaran, the Pleiades, and ft Persei make the upper portion. The poet says : To know the bright star in the Whale, the lower jaw which decks, From fair Capella send a glance through Pleiad's beauteous specks ; And bear in mind this cluster fine, so admirably seen, From Cetus' head to th' Charioteer, lies just half-way between. The figure of this asterism, a veritable monstrum marinum, with its long legs, ears, proboscis, missile tongue, and carnivorous jaws, ought rather to have retained the name 'O/36y, Pistrix, as given by Hyginus, than Kfjros, Cetus. Lubienietzki, in his TJieatrum Cometicum, 1667, attempted to lop off some of these redundancies ; but in fishifying the animal he has given him so capacious a mouth and throat, that aMunchausen's ship might well have sailed in. Indeed, the leading distinctions of a whale seem to have been overlooked by all the celestial delineators. Although this fish, as shown in Morell's edition of Aratus, 1559, is a very queer-looking creature, yet it is better drawn than some later figures, in that it has no legs ; but as it is so furnished in the MS. of Cicero's translation of Aratus in the British Museum, it is evident that the monster is connected with the tale of Andromeda. Cetus, is, how- ever, the most extensive constellation of the firmament, occupying the large space to the S. under Pisces and Aries ; and it was one of the standard old 48 asterisms. Its constituents have been thus numbered : Ptolemy ... 22 stars. Bayer .... 27 stars. Copernicus . . 22 Hevelius ... 46 Tycho Bralie" . . 21 Flamsteed . . 97 Kepler ... 25 Bode .... 301 The Arabians appear to have given great attention to this fish. From a fancied resemblance of the stars of the head to the Kaff-al-Khad'ib in Cassiopeia, they designated a, 8, A, ju, and , Kaff-al-jidhmd, the maimed hand; the five stars on the body TJ, 6, T, f and v were al-na'dmdt, the ostriches; and < i, 2, 3, and 4, which are nearly in a straight line across the tail, were called c.l-nidhdm, the necklace. 175. E. A. 2 b - 56 m - 3*. i^ 52 ARIETIS. (2. 346.) 79 CXXVI. R.A. 2 58 59 Decl. N 24 49 '5 Position. ( A B 265-7 SMYTH J A C 355 (AD 85 AB 269-5 AC 357.1 BUENHAM AD 82-5 Prec. + 3-50 N i' 4 -2 5 DUNEB Distance. 0-8 5 105 0-64 5-'4 102-8 Epoch. 1835-88 1872.26 1872-68 188003 A quadruple group, between the Ram's tail and the Fly, followed nearly on the parallel by a small dusky star. A is 6^-, bright white ; B 7, pale blue; C 15, blue; and D 13, lilac : the details of the latter two being, of course, mere estimations. It may be picked up by running the eye from 41 Arietis the lucida of Musca towards the Pleiades, in which direction it lies, at about one-third of the distance. A line led from y Pegasi between a and /3, in the head of the Ram, and carried nearly as far again, also hits this object. [Knott thinks C brighter than stated above ; brighter in fact than D.] 176. 109 % R.A. Decl. I. ERIDANI. i. m. s. I 59 21 S 26 28-7 (h. 283; H. 645.) s. Prec. -f 2-60 N 14-22 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " c B : p S ; vl E o ; r ; S* nr ;" which means : " considerably bright ; pretty small ; a very little extended in the direction of the meridian ; resolveable ; there is a small star near." 177. h. m. s. R.A. 3 1 2 Decl. N 40 31 9 ft PERSEI. Prec. + 3-88 n N 14-12 CXXVII. BUBNHAM Position. I92. 9 Distance. n 8l-8 Epo.h. 1880-05 A variable star, with a companion in the sp quadrant, and two others [in the s/, both of about mag. 12, and both about i' from A, according to Burnham.] A 2 to 4, whitish; B [10], purple. This star is generally known as Algol, a variation of Al-ghul, the monster or demon ; so harshly depicted in Hevelius's map of this 80 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. asterisra. This ominous name was mightily noted in Astrology, and to its influence poor Padre Vitalis, in his dismal Jeremiad, attributed the then unhappy lot of the kingdom of Naples. Sedillot wrote rhdl for ghul, but he adopted so singular a mode of expressing Arabic words, that it is not always easy to find out what he meant to denote. Algol is the most remarkable of the periodic stars, since its changes of light occupy but 2 d io n ; and this is best observed at the recurrence of the diminished light, because when brightest it is the more difficult to determine, from its varying in brilliance at different times. The most feeble light lasts about 2O m , from the examination of which, Argelander concludes that the period of Algol is not quite constant. The first who observed these variations was Montanari; and in 1694 Maraldi ascer- tained that it changed from the 2 nd to the 4 th magnitude. It varies from the 2 nd to the 4 th magnitude in 3jb and back again to the 2 nd in the same time, and so remains for the rest of the period, retaining its brightness. [For further particulars see my Handbook of Astronomy, 3rd ed., p. 499.] To find Algol by alignment, project a ray from Orion's belt through a Bootis, and carrying it something more than double the distance, it will hit the head of Medusa ; or, lisping in numbers, Thus belt of Hero, eye of Bull, so surely mark the place Where Algol shines, 'bove three faint stars, in fell Medusa's face. These same stars collectively, were formerly called the Gorgons. 178. 94 CETI. CXXIX. b. m. s. i. R.A. 3 7 9 Dec!. S 1 36-5 Free. + 3-04 N 13-74 Position. Distance Epoch. o // SMYTH 260.0 ... 5-0 ... 1836-75 BUBNHAM 2509 ... 57 ... 1877-70 A most delicate double star, on the tip of the cameleon-like tongue with which the celestial Whale is often figured ; it will be struck by a line thrown from a Arietis, in the Ram's head, through a Ceti, and carried about 6^ beyond. A 5^, pale cream-colour ; B 1 6, dusky. Sir J. Herschel registered the acolyte as of the 19*^ magnitude. But as, after several toilful trials under the best circumstances, I caught a view which, though most evanescent, and under an averted eye, was sufficient to catch a guess by, I have assigned its brightness at the point which is fixed upon as the minimum visibile of my telescope. It must, however, be esteemed among the intensiva of faintness, and has been repeatedly sought in vain, with the same instrument. This acplyte, if not physically connected with A, must be almost inconceivably beyond it B.A. 3 h - i m - 3 h - ;m. 81 in the vast profundity of those remote regions which may be but the beginning of the Universe. 179. 12 ERIDANI. (*h. 3555.) h. R.A. 3 7 23 c Decl. S 29 26-0 Free. + 2-52 N 13-72 Position. Distance. Epoch. HEBSCHEL, J. 310-0 ... 5.3 ... 1836-31 JACOB 310-0 ... 3-3 ... 1856-16 STONE, O. 316-0 ... 2-44 ... 1878-81 A very fine double star. A 3^- ; B 8. 180. 25 I^. VI. PERSEI. (h. 290; H. 658; &.) CXXVIII. h. m. s. B.A. 3 7 26 Decl. N 46 49 '4 Prec. + 4-10 1ST 13-79 A very extensive and compressed cluster, on the right side of Perseus, in a rich portion of the Galaxy; and it has a gathering spot, about 4' in diameter, where the star-dust glows among the minute points of light. This elegant sprinkle was registered, in December, 1786, by IJL, who says, " the large stars are arranged in lines like interwoven letters." [" A low power shows a very faint large cloud of minute stars (H., 12-15 m.) beautifully bordered by a foreshortened pentagon of larger ones." Thus described at Parsonstown Nov. 23, 1848: "Coarse cluster strongly honeycombed. Would probably look annular with eccentric eyehole if it were far enough to be a nebula."] 181. 362 2. CAMELOPARDI. h. m. s. R. A. 3 7 30 Decl. N 59 37 '8 Prec. + 4-69 N 13-71 Position. Distance. Epoch, o // STRUVE, TV. AB 142-3 ... 6-9 ... 1831-54 MAIN 141-0 ... 7-2 ... 1863-22 DEMBOWSKI AC 271-7 ... 35.3 ... 1866-1 A double star. A 8J, very white ; B 8J, very white. [C 10.] Other stars near make this a beautiful field. G 82 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 182. 369 2. PEBSEI. R.A. Decl. N 40 4-7 Position. STBUVE, W. 28-8 DAWES 26-5 DAWES 26.0 MAIN 25-8 Free. + 3'88 N 13-61 Distance. // 3-2 3-8 3-5 3-6 Epoch. 1829.55 1840.15 1854-08 1864.24 A double star. A 7, yellowish white ; B 8, bluish white. 183. 2518 h. EBIDANI. (H. 670.) s. Prec. + 2-19 N 13-50 h. m. s. B.A. 3 10 46 Decl. S 41 29'7 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : i "vB; R; gmbM;" which means: "very bright; round; gradually much brighter in the middle." 184. 487 Dunlop EBIDANI. (h. 2521; H. 685.) b. m. s. B.A. 3 13 20 Decl. S 41 30-1 Prec. + 2-19 - N 13-33 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " ; v B ; p L ; K ; mb M ; er ;" which means : " a globular cluster ; very bright ; pretty large ; round ; much brighter in the middle ; easily resolveable." 185. 1069 Lac. BETICULI. h. m. s. B.A. 3 13 27 Decl. S 64 51-1 HEBSCHEL, J. Position. o 102.3 Prec. + 0-95 // N 13-32 Distance. Epoch. 197 ... 1836-49 double star. A 7 ; B 9 J. Gould rates B at 8J mag. E. A. h - i6 m . 83 186. 6161 Lai. ERIDANI. (*h. 3565.) b. m. s. s. R.A. 3 13 43 Prec. + 2-73 / // Decl. S 18 57-6 NT *"> 1 T X 3 3 1 Position. Distance. Epoch. o it HEBSCHEL, J. 110-4 5-7 .- I835-78 STONE, 0. in 6 5-9 ... 1876-0 A double star. AS; B 9. The R.A. given above is believed to be not very accurate. Gould's place gives 3^ I3 m 39 s for 1890. 187. T 4 ERIDANI. CXXX. h. m. s. s. R.A. 3 14 37 Prec. + 2-66 o / // Bed. 3 22 9*5 N 13-26 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // SMYTH A C 240-8 150 ... 1836-90 JACOB AB 287-0 5-4 .- 1857.95 CINCINNATI OBS. AB 287-1 4-7 ... 1877.86 BUBNHAM AC 236-2 159-9 ... 1880-02 A bright star with a [near and a] distant companion, in the second reach of the Eiver being one of no fewer than nine stars designated by the letter T in Bayer's Map of Eridanus. A 3^, light orange; [B 10; C n]. This object is in a barren field, and the large star seems over- rated, since it appeared more than once diminished to nearly a 5 th magnitude ; but the lowness of its position renders the case doubtful, from variable refraction. [B was discovered by Capt. Jacob. Burnham mentions 3 other stars at 40", 123", and 130" respectively, all visible he thinks in a 6" 1 refractor.] 188. R. A. Decl. 37 P. III. PERSEI. k Prec. + s. 25 49 49 '1 s. 4-20 13-19 A 6 th mag. orange star noted by "Webb for having a fine blue com- i panion in a beautiful field. Near a, S. and a little p thereof. It is 1035 B.A.C. Persei. 189. a PERSEI. CXXXI. R.A. h. 3 m. s. 16 28 Prec. + 4-25 Decl. N o / 49 28-2 N II 13-13 Position. Distance. Epoch. BUBNHAM 195-4 .- I65-7 ... 1875- A Nautical Almanac star, with a companion, in a rich galaxy field. G 2 84: A Cycle of Celestial Objects. A 2j, brilliant lilac ; B 9, cinereous ; they are followed at a little dis- tance by many small stars. [Knott says: "No trace of Smyth's 9* h mag. star. There is a star of that magnitude which precedes a by 30", a little N. of the parallel, and a faint triangle of 14 th mag. stars in the. sj) quadrant."] It is now placed in the Hero's left side, but as it was called Mirfak, the elbow, or morevfully Al mirfak al thureyyd,\hQ elbow of the Pleiades, to distinguish it from the other elbow, the figure may have once been differently situated : still its other Oriental name, Jenb JBershdwush, signifies the side of Perseus (Bershdwush ntpo-cvs), the p being lost in Arabic. Chrysococca calls it n\fvpa Tlfpa-dovs', and it must be from the word Jenb that it was corrupted to Algenib, the style and title of y Pegasi, an equivoque complained of by Sir J. Herschel. A fancied line projected from the Pole-star to the Pleiades passes through the left knee of Perseus, and points in the mid-distance to Mirfak ; which is also gained by a line from Castor to Capella onwards ; or by that which the rhymester points out : A ray from Algol to the Pole with accuracy guide, Near, but behind it, Mirfak shines in Perseus' manly side. Perseus, whose mythological story is too well known to require repetition, is one of the old 48 asterisms, and is placed in a very brilliant part of the Via Lactea, nearly opposite to the three stars forming the tail of Ursa Major, on the other side of the pole, and directly N. of the Pleiades. The number of his stars may really be called infinite, on gazing with a powerful telescope ; but of his constituents, whose mean apparent places are tabulated, the numbers run : Ptolemy ... 29 stars. Hevelius .... 46 stars. TychoBrahe'. . 33 Flamsteed ... 59 Bayer .... 38 Bode 196 This asterism, in the Arabo-Latin Almagest, is designated Cheleab, which Grotius refers to kelb, a dog, but others to hullub, the harpago, or hooked weapon in the Hero's hand *. 190. 46 P. III. AB1ETIS. (2. 381.) CXXXII. h. R.A. Decl. STRUVE SMYTH STRUVE HALL 3 N W ,0. 16 59 20 34-3 Position. . 93-7 87-6 91-1 90-2 Prec. 4- N 3-47 13-02 Epoch. 1827-16 1834-19 1843.71 1878-10 Distance. // o-75 0-8 0-94 0.85 A close double star, just following the tail of Aries, at about one-third * Some of our crusaders must have better etymon for "club," than the clw-ppa imported this word ; for it is assuredly a and kluppel cited by Dr. Johnson. R.A. h - :6 m - a - 20 m . 85 of the distance between 8 Arietis and the Pleiades. A 8, pearl white; B 9, yellow. This exquisitely delicate object is in a line with two distant stars of the io tb magnitude in the sp quadrant, and there is another small one in the nf. The elongation was not immediately detected ; and the focus was slightly distorted to examine the outline of the spurious disc. This, if well managed, is often of great use on such occasions. 191. 106 #. I. ERIDANI. (h. 2523; H. 692 ; .) h. m. s. s. R.A. 3 16 59 c Decl. S 15 47'3 Free, -f 2-78 // N 13-09 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "pB; cL; iR; gbM; *7, f7'5 s , 211;" which means: "pretty bright ; considerably large ; irregular round ; gradually brighter in the middle; a 7 th mag. star follows at 7 -5 s , at an angle of 211 with the meridian." The bright star precedes, not follows, according to the Parsonstown observations, Jan. 9, 1877. Pos. = 2O9; Dist. 244". 192. 548 Dunlop ERIDANI. (h. 2527; H. 697.) b. m. s. R.A. 3 18 28 c Decl. S 37 37-2 Prec. -h 2-29 13-00 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " v B ; c L ; vl E ; vsvrnb M N ', " which means : " very bright ; con- siderably large ; very little extended ; very suddenly very much brighter in the middle so as to present a nucleus." 193. 2 (Hev.) CAMELOPARDI. (2. 385.) h. R.A. 3 20 8 c Decl. N 59 33'O Prec. + 4-77 N 12-89 Position. Distance. Epoch. o " // STRUVE, W. 161-3 ... 2-35 ... 1829-94 A double star. A 4^, yellow ; B 9^, white. 194. 60 J b. m. s. 194. 60 $. I. ERIDANI. (H. 709; &.) R.A. 3 20 55 Decl. S 21 44-2 Prec. + 2-66 N 12-83 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864:- 86 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. " v B ; S ; E 90 . . . 180 ; smb M N ; np of 2 ; " which means : "very bright; small; elongated in the direction 90 to 180; suddenly much brighter in the middle and with a nucleus ; this is the north preceding one of 2 nebulae." The other nebula is 959 $. HI, and is "very faint and very small." It follows at 1 8 s and is 26" to the S. 389 2. CAMELOPABDI. XI. IU. > R.A. 3 21 18 Decl. N 58 58 '9 Position. STRUVE, W. 6i-8 DAWES 62.7 GLEDHILL 63-3 Prec. + 4-74 12-81 Epoch. 1831.00 I854-75 1873-94 Distance. 2-80 2-82 2-7 h. m. s. B.A. 3 21 36 A double star. A 7 J, white ; B 8i, purplish. 196. 4 (Hev.) CAMELOPABDI. (2. 390.) s. Prec. + 4-51 // N 12-79 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE, W. 159-6 ... 15-0 ... 1832-04 A double star. A 5, greenish white ; B 10. 197. 88 #. VIII. PEBSEI. (h. 301; H. 717; .) Decl. N 55 3-9 h. m. B.A. 3 24 36 o Decl. N 36 56 7 Prec. + 3-85 N 12-58 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " Cl ; v L ; ab 60 st ; " which means : " a cluster ; very large ; comprises about 60 stars." 198. 396 2. CAMELOPABDI. h. B.A. 3 Decl. W STRUVE, W. MAIN m. s. 24 40 58 23-7 Position. o 241-8 241-3 Prec. s. + 4-72 N 12-65 Epoch. 1829-57 1863-80 Distance. n 20-3 20-1 A double star. A 6J, white ; B 8J, white. 199. E. A. 3 h - 2o m - 3 h < 27 m . 401 2. TAUBI. s. Prec. -f- 3-60 h. m. s. B.A. 3 24 42 Decl. STRUVE, W. MAIN 27 11-7 Position. o 270.0 267.2 A double star. A 7, white ; B X 12-58 Distance. Epoch. ii'i ii-o , white. 1830-96 1866.10 87 200. B.A. Decl. 400 2. CAMELOPABDI. 26 20 o 59 6 Position. o 282.5 288.5 293-4 295-0 302-4 Prec. Distance. X STRUVE, W. 282.5 I *5 2 M ABLER 288.5 ... I-08 STRUVE, O. 293.4 ... i-oo GLEDHILL 295-0 ... 1-2 HALL 302-4. ... 0-68 A double. star. A 7^, yellowish white ; B 8 J, bluish white. "Certain 4-81 12-46 Epoch. 1829.94 1845-45 1862-23 1873-96 1879-2 change in angle and distance. Probably a binary." (GledhilL) 201. 7 TAUBI. h. m. s. B.A. 3 27 55 / Decl. N 24 5-7 Positio HERSCHEL, W. A C 66-7 STRUVE, W. JAB 269-9 (AC 63-0 SMYTH ( AB 265-0 (AC 61-9 SECCHI AB 256-8 GLEDHILL AB 232-0 WILSON and SEABROKE A C 60-6 (2. 412.) Prec. + 3-54 X 12-35 Distance. CXXXIII. Epoch. I783-77 19.83 0-69 22-40 0-7 21-8 0-42 0-4 22-9 A triple star, on the back of Taurus, about 3 Pleiades. A 6, white ; B 6J, pale yellow; C n, bluish, and very difficult object. A and C point to a comes in the nf quadrant. Sir "William Herschel did not observe that A was double. It may have opened since. [It seems certain that A B form a binary, but the relations of C to A B are not by any means clear.] 1830-38 1830-92 .. 1833-21 .. 1856-35 .. 1873.94 1874-00 to the np of the This is a fine 88 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 202. 98 P. III. ERIDANI. (2. 422.) CXXXIV. b. m. s. B.A. 3 31 8 Decl. N O 13'9 Free. + 3-07 // N 12-20 Position. Distance. Epoch. SOUTH 225-2 ... 5-81 ... 1824-02 SMYTH 231-8 ... 5-9 - 1834.93 SBCCHI 237-3 ... 6-37 ... 1857.06 BUBNHAM 243.2 ... 6-4 ... 1878-87 A delicate double star, on a line with a Ceti and /3 Orionis, and nearly one-third the distance : /3 and a Tauri also point upon it. A 6|, yellow ; and B 9, pale blue. This object is between the Bull's chest and the northern branch of the Eridanus, in the part where the Abbe Hell (who also placed Herschel's telescope among the celestials) squeezed in his Harpa Gfeorgii, to compliment a sovereign of these realms; having niched from Eridanus about 30 or 40 stars, some of the 4 th magnitude, for the purpose. [Direct motion certain, but the observations in distance are very contradictory.] 203. 574 Dunlop ERIDANI. (h. 2559 ; H. 739.) h. m. s. g. B.A. 3 31 18 o Decl. S 35 22-9 Prec. -f 2-31 // N I2-I2 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "vB; L; R; psbM;" which means: "very bright; large; round; pretty suddenly brighter in the middle." 204, 425 2. PEBSEI. h. m. s. s. K.A. 3 33 9 Decl. N 33 45'1 Prec. + 3-77 n N 11-99 Position. Distance. Epoch. SOUTH io3.7 ... 3% ... 1823.98 MADLEB 103.9 ... 3.3 ... 1841.79 SECCHI 101.9 ... 2.8 ... 1857-64 WILSON and SEABROKE 99.3 ... 2-61 ... 1877.16 A double star. A 8, very white ; B 8, very white. Webb writes : " a true ' pair,' a little p 40 Persei, 6th ma g." R.A. 3^ 3 im. _ 3 h. 34 m. 89 205. 97 P. III. CAMELOPARDI. b. m. s. s. R.A. 3 33 38 c Decl. N 59 36 '8 Free. + 4-87 N 11-95 Position. Distance. Epoch. KNOTT 34-3 ... 55.6 ... 1863.00 A double star. A 6, orange with scarlet glare ; B 9, blue. 206. 58 $. I. TAUBI. (h. 2566; H. 746.) b. m. R.A. 3 33 42 c Decl. S 23 22-9 Free. + 2-60 N 11-95 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "B; pS; E; psmbM;" which means: "bright; pretty small; ex- tended ; pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle." Precedes the Pleiades 2, a little to the S. 207. 34 B. TAURI. (2. 427.) h. m. R.A. 3 33 55 Decl. N 28 25 '1 Free. + 3-64 H N 11-94 Position. Distance. Epoch. c STRUVE, W. 208-6 ... 6-7 ... 1831-09 DUNER 208-6 ... 6-6 ... 1868-65 A double star. A 7, white ; B 8, bluish white, Duner's colours agree in the main with Struve's. 208. 2569 h. ERIDANI. (H. 748.) h. m. R.A. 3 34 20 c Decl. S 35 48-9 Free. + 2-29 // N 11-90 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue, of 1864 : " ; v B ; p L ; psb M ; rr ; ' which means : " a globular cluster ; very bright ; pretty large ; pretty suddenly brighter in the middle ; partially resolved some stars visible." 90 209. A Cycle of Celestial Objects. B.A. 3 34 40 Decl. 39 B. TAURI. (2. 430.) s. Prec. + 3-16 N i"i-88 Distance. o / 4 46-0 Position. o // STRUVE, W. 55-3 ... 26-5 JAB 55-4 - 26-4) I AC 301-0 ... 37-7 i BURNHAM Epoch. 1831-23 1878-03 A triple star. A 6, very yellow ; B 9^ ; C 10. A and B at any rate are fixed. 210. 107 $. I. ERIDANI. (h. 2570 ; H. 752 ; &.) CXXXVII. Prec. + 2-70 h. m. s. R.A. 3 35 17 Decl. S 18 54-9 N 11-87 A milky-white nebula, between the two northern reaches of the River ; it is pale, but distinct, round, and bright in the centre. It lies nearly midway between and preceding two distant stars, sf and nf, the three forming an obtuse-angled triangle ; there are only a few glimpse stars besides in the field. To fish it up, run an imaginary line from the coarse double star 40 Eridani through y, and extend it exactly as far again as the distance between those two points. [" Very faint in 8^ refractor." JBrodie.] 211. 40 PERSEI. (2. 431.) h. m. s. s. B.A. 3 35 24 Prec. + 3-79 o / n Decl. 1ST 33 36-7 N 11-83 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STRUVE, W. 237-0 19.77 1828-15 SMYTH 238-2 20-6 1834-92 SMYTH 237-8 ... 20-1 1852-12 BUBNHAM 238-0 19-9 1877-88 CXXXVI. A delicate double star, on the wing of the Hero's right ankle, if one of the talaria may be so called. A 6, pale white ; B 10, ash-coloured. The identity of this star has created some little confusion, since several astronomers, among whom are even Flamsteed and Piazzi, have designated 38 and 40 Persei under the letters o 1 and o 2 : but Baily has shown, in his edition of the British Catalogue, that 40 Persei is the "parvula supra o" in the Historia Ccelestis ; and that 38 Persei is the E. A. 3 h. 39 m 91 Greek 'o piKpov, while the other is the English o of Bayer. It may be found by running a line from ft Persei a little to the "W. of the Pleiades, and it will pass over 40 Persei at something more than half the distance. It is also struck by a ray carried from the cluster in the sword of Orion, over a Tauri, and extended a little more than as far again. 212. R.A. 3 38 39 Decl. N 24 7 '4 Position. MAIN 33i.i BUBNHAM 329-8 19 PLEIADUM. Prec. + N 11-61 Distance. Epoch. CXXXVIII. s. 3'55 6 4 -6 66-7 1863-08 1879-86 A delicate double star, in the cluster on the shoulder of Taurus. A 5, lucid white; and B 10, violet tint. This object, though wide, is fine ; being Taygeta, a leading one of the seven sisters, whose name appears to have been of some weight in Sparta. In this group, Celeno and Electra appear to be affected with proper motions, similar in denomination though not in amount : yet they are ioj 7 apart, on an angle = 353. 213. 562 Dunlop ERIDANI. (h. 2581 ; H. 769.) a. Prec. + 2-26 b. m. s. R.A. 3 39 16 Decl. S 36 28-4 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " ; v B j pm E ; pgb M ; " which means : " a globular cluster ; very bright ; pretty much extended ; pretty gradually brighter in the middle." 214. 15 PLEIADUM, (2. 444.) s. Prec. + 3-55 N i'i-6i Distance. Epoch. h. m. s. R.A. 3 39 20 Decl. N 22 48 2 STRUVE, W. SMYTH Position. 338-9 342-0 3-27 5 1832-34 1835-03 CXXXIX. A double star, in the cluster on the Bull's shoulder. A 8, bright white ; B 14, fine blue. 92 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 215. 443 2. PERSEI. h. m. s. R.A. 3 39 28 o Bed. N 41 8-6 Prec. 4- 4'0i N 11-54 Position. Distance. Epoch, o n STRUVE, W. 44-2 ... 9-0 ... 1830-86 A double star. A 9, white ; B 9^, white. 216. 768 H. TAUEJ. h. m. s. K.A. 3 39 38 o Decl. N 23 25-5 Prec. + 3-54 i-53 Temped variable nebula near the star Merope in the Pleiades. The above place is from Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864. On Oct. 19, 1859, Tempel observed in Taurus an object which he took to be a new telescopic comet. The next evening, however, finding it still in the same position, he was able to determine that it was not a comet, but a nebula. On Dec. 31, 1860, it was seen again by Tempel and Pape, though with some difficulty. Auwers describes it as triangular in form, and 1 5' in extent, but he thinks that it might have escaped notice owing to its proximity to a bright star Merope, one of the Pleiades. Schia- parelli, at Milan, trying a new telescope on Feb. 25, 1875, saw this nebula very clearly, and was much surprised at its size. He noted it to extend from the star Merope, beyond Electra and as far as Celseno. Maxwell Hall has seen this object well with a 4 in refractor in Jamaica. He estimates its dimensions at 45' by 30'. Tempel only makes it about 35' by 20'. Schonfeld has doubted the fact of variation. He thinks that this and other nebulae suspected to be variable being very feeble, large, and diffused, are influenced in their visibility by differences of magnifying power, the varying transparency of the air, and the con- dition of the observer's eye, so that the aperture of the telescope is a less important factor than it usually is. In spite of the novelty involved in the idea of a nebula being variable, it seems quite clear that several such exist. See my Handbook of Astronomy, 3 rd ed., p. 543. 217. 23 PLEIADIUM. CXL. h. R.A. 3 39 48 Decl. N 23 36 '4 Prec. + 3-54 N i'i-53 KA ->li. ^nm. _ -?h. /i/^ni QQ XJL. ^ oV O T" */-> Position. Distance. Epoch. SOUTH BC 119-7 ... 34.5 ... 1823-99 BURNHAM BC 122-4 3 6 7 ... 1878-70 A bright star on the Bull's shoulder, pointing to the small pair in the S. of the field. A 5, silvery white ; B 8, purple ; and C 9, pale blue. This object Merope is in a fine neighbourhood, as viewed under a moderate magnifying power, being near the middle of the Pleiades. [Burnham finds A double. Pos. 11-2; Dist. 18-1"; 1878-67.] [In close proximity to this star (optically at any rate) is Tempel's variable nebula (= H. 768).] 218. 77 TAUBI. (2. 8 App. I.) CXLII. h. R.A. 3 m. s. 40 56 Prec. -f- s. 3'55 / n Decl. N 23 45-9 N n-45 Position. Distance. Epoch. c u SOUTH 288.7 116-4. 1824 SMYTH 289.2 115-6 1836-97 MAIN 288.9 118-2 1868.82 Alcyone, a Nautical Almanac star, with a distant companion, in the midst of the Pleiades, called by the Arabians Jauza, the wall-nut, and Neyyir, bright, or lucida of the Pleiades. A 3, greenish yellow ; B 7, pale white. Piazzi marked this " duplex," but the comes could only be 151 P. m. This star has usually been considered as the one described under the 3 2 na O f Taurus, in Ptolemy, and there marked e in brightness. But Baily says, " I do not think this star can be TJ Tauri, on account of its magnitude : yet it is singular that the brightest star in the Pleiades should not have been noticed by Ptolemy*." The Pleiades constitute a celebrated group of stars, or miniature con- stellation, on the shoulder of Taurus ; their popular influences have been said and sung for many ages. Hesiod mentions them as the Seven Virgins, " of Atlas born ; " and in the ancient MS. of Cicero's Aratus, in the British Museum, they are finely represented by female heads, inscribed Merope, Alcyone, Celaeno, Electra, Taygeta, Asterope, and Maia, under the general title Athlantides, while the illustrations to Julius Firmicus in 1497 represent them as well -grown women. The moral may be, that Atlas himself first rigidly observed these stars, and named them after his daughters. But various are the appellations under which they have been known. Theon likened them to a bunch of grapes ; Aratus says they * The occultations of this star, and h 1839, by my excellent friend Lord Chief Pleiaduin, by the dark limb of the Moon, Justice Tindal ; who thus elegantly occu- were well observed on the ipth March, pied the evening of an assize-day at Bedford. 94: A Cycle of Celestial Objects. were called firrdiropot ; Manilius clusters them as glomeralile sidus ; the Arabs said they were Aih-ihurayya, or the little ones; the French designate them poussiniere; the Germans, Gluckhenne; the Italians knew them as le gallinelle ; the Spaniards term them the cabrillas, or little nanny-goats, which is the key of the Duke's query to Sancho ; and several schools called them the brood-hen, under the representation of a hen and chickens. There has also been much discussion as to the number of the individuals in the group, some of the ancients having advanced that there were seven, and others resolving to count only six, in the spirit of Ovid's oft-cited Quse septem dici, sex tamen esse sclent. The "lost Pleiad" is, however, rather a poetical than an exact expression, for in moonless nights I never had any difficulty in counting seven stars in the so-called Hexastron, with the naked eye ; and indeed this is nothing to boast of, for many people may enumerate even more, though few will equal Mbstlin, the discoverer of the new star of 1604, who, as Kepler avers, could distinctly see 14 stars in the Pleiades, without any glasses. Still, if we admit the influence of variability at long periods, the seven in number may have occasionally been more distinct ; so that while Homer and Attalus speak of six of them, Hipparchus and Aratus may properly mention seven. But they have a singularly brilliant light for their magnitudes, whence the unassisted eye becomes dazzled. The ancients allotted to them only seven stars ; but in modern catalogues their numbers have run thus : Kepler .... 32 stars. Hook 78 stars. Galileo .... 36 Jeaurat .... 103 De la Hire ... 64 F. De Rheita . . 188 An imaginary line through the wain of the Great Bear, passing a Aurigse, leads to the Pleiades; or, from the S., a line from Sirius, carried over Orion's belt, meets them. An interest in the Pleiades is strongly excited by Job's beautiful allusion to God's power, in the p th chapter of his book. "We are held to deal largely in chronology when, by reducing the occasus matutinus of these stars twenty-five days after the autumnal equinox to this time, we find that [2426] years have elapsed since the death of Thales ; but here we have recorded evidence of their being well noticed more than 3000 years ago ! Look also to the 38 th chapter, where, in convincing Job of ignorance and imbecility, the Omnipotent demands, Canst thou bind the sweet influences of the Pleiades, or loose the bands of Orion ? Canst thou bring forth Mazzaroth in his season ? or canst thou guide Arcturus with his sons? Knowest thou the ordinances of Heaven ? canst thou set the dominion thereof in the earth? E.A. 3^. 4 o m - 95 Now this splendid passage, I am assured, is more correctly rendered* thus : Canst thou bind the delightful dainties of Cheemah ? Or the contractions of Ch'seel canst thou open? Canst thou draw forth Mazzaroth in his season? Or Ayeesh and his sons canst thou guide ? In this very early description of the cardinal constellations, Cheemah denotes Taurus, with the Pleiades ; Ch'seel is Scorpio ; Mazzaroth is Sirius, in the "chambers of the south;" and Ayeesh the Greater Bear, the Hebrew word signifying a bier, which was shaped by the four well-known bright stars, while the three forming the tail were considered as the children attending a funeral. St. Augustin, in his annotations on the above passage, assures us that under the Pleiades and Orion, God com- prehends all the rest of the stars, by a figure of speech, putting a part for the whole ; and the argument is, The all-powerful Deity regulates the seasons, and no mortal can intermeddle with them, or presume to scan the ordinances of Heaven. This beautiful group of stars also attracted very early attention in Greece ; and Hesiod, in the opening of the second book of Works and Days, has a truly astronomical passage upon the Pleiades, nearly 1000 years B.C. It is thus rendered by Cooke : There is a time when forty days they lie, And forty nights, conceal'd from human eye, But in the course of the revolving year, When the swain sharps the scythe, again appear. Among the classical ancients the heliacal rising of the Seven Stars was esteemed the most favourable season for setting out on a voyage, though rain and storms were frequently then prevalent, whence Ideler thinks they merit the appellation of Schiffahrts-gestirn. Some savants tell us, that from the custom of letting fly a pigeon on the occasion, for auspices, they were named the Pleiades, or doves : others say the designation is derived from TrAeli/, to sail ; while another class insist that it is derived from TrXe'oy, full, from the genial bearings of the asterism. Thus etymo- logists dock and stretch words, and limbs of words, after a Procrustean fashion, to suit their own theories, a practice by which they fall into many a trap, even more fatal than that which assumed the Mount Sier of Ezekiel for Monsieur, over-the-way. Of this system of convertible terms and changeable terminations, which form the etymological battery, a notable expose^ occurs in Townsend's scourging of Sir W. Drummond ; from which we may instance the group in question, Succoth Benoth, or * On this point see my Handbook of Hartu-ellianum as an improvement on Astronomy, 3 rd ed. p. 481. The version what originally appeared in this place in above is by Drach from Smyth's Speculum the ist ed. of the Cycle. 96 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. Pleiades, on the back of " Tur, Tor, Tau, whence is derived Turris, Topa-ts, Tapcros, Tvptroy, Tavpos, and Taurus" the Bull. By the way, Aldebaran was called Taliyu-n-nejm, as following or driving the Pleiades : can this have engendered the tally-ho of earthly chases 1 I have elsewhere remarked, what a capital hit a sharp wit might make between AlmacKs famous ball-room, and the beautiful double star Al'mak, which being on Andromeda's right foot may be assumed to symbolize dancing. 219. 80 $. VIII. PEBSEI. (H. 775 ; 2. 446 ; s. Prec. + 4-49 N i'i-48 h. m. s. B.A. 3 41 3 Decl. N 52 19 '5 STRUVE, W. SMYTH Position. 252-7 255-0 Distance. 8-54 9-5 CXLI. Epoch. 183074 1836-79 A delicate double star in a cluster over the Hero's left thigh, and about one-third of the distance between y Persei and Capella. A 8, light yellow ; B n, pale violet. The large individual is placed equatorially between two small stars, and the secondary advances into the sp quadrant, forming a fine object. 220. 1237 Lac. DOBADUS. (*h. 3592.) B.A. 3 41 45 Decl. S 54 36-9 Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 11.3 SANTIAGO OBS. 6-0 Prec. + 1-52 N i'i-37 Epoch. 1836-99 1851-93 A double star. A 6, yellow ; B 10, pale blue. Distance. H 6-0 6.1 221. 30 TAUBI. (2. 452.) h. B.A. 3 42 14 Decl. W 10 48-2 Position, o HERSCHEL, W. 72.7 STRUVE, W. 57-9 SMYTH 58-5 Prec. 4- N 11-34 Distance. Epoch. 11-27 8-89 9-0 1782-69 1830-71 1839-90 A delicate double star, on the left shoulder-blade of Taurus, indicated B. A. 3 n - 40 m -- s h - 42^- 9T by a line clrawn from Tauri, in the S. horn, under a Tauri, and continued as far again. A 6, pale emerald; B 10, purple. [Smyth subsequently stated in the Speculum Hartwdlianum that B was of mag. 9, and the colours not " so decidedly strong as they were 1 8 years before." He would have entered them as " A, greenish ; B, lilac."] H. has shown, from the existence of some error in ITs observations, that "no conclusion respecting the motion or rest of this star can be formed." 222. 27 PLEIADUM. (2. 453.) CXLIV. h. m. s. a. R.A. 3 42 37 Decl. N 23 43 Prec. + 3'55 N 11-32 Position. Difference of R. A. Epoch. o s. SMYTH 238-2 ... 11-5 ... 1832-96 A bright star with a distant companion, bringing up the rear of the Pleiades. A 5, intense white ; B 9, pale blue. Here the principal star is Atlas, which is marked in 2.'s Catalogue of 1827 "fortasse cuneus;" I was therefore induced to give it a rigid examination, at various times, under my fullest powers, but always made the disc perfectly round. On the arrival, therefore, of the Dorpat Catalogue, in 1837, I was not at all surprised to find that in 1836-74, 2. gazing at this star with a power of 800, records, " Stella simplex in optima nocte." Yet, as the same excellent astronomer had undoubtedly seen it double, with a visible line between the two individuals, it should be closely watched. These were his measures : Position. Distance. Epoch. o // 107-5 .-- 0-79 ... 1827-16 [All Madler's efforts to render certain the duplicity of this star failed. Burnham too has been unsuccessful in all his attempts to detect signs of duplicity ; and thinks that Struve fell into some error. But Hartwig at Strassburg, on the occasion of its occultation by the Moon on Jan. n, 1876, noticed that it did not disappear instantaneously.] 0. Struve, in examining the neighbouring star 165 P. ILL (0. 2. 64), with the refractor of 14-9^ aperture, detected it to be double, the com- ponents being of the 8 th and io th magnitudes, and 10" apart. H A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 223. h. m. s. B.A. 3 44 33 Decl. S 37 57'8 Position. f EBIDANI. g. Free. + 2-21 N 11-17 Distance. Epoch. HEKSCHEL, J. 1997 A double star. A 5; B 8.5 ... 1836-52 Sir J. Herschel calls this object " superb." Gould says that probably the following star of this pair is variable. 224. PEBSEI. (2. 464.) CXLV. B.A. Decl. SMYTH KNOTT BUBNHAN A delicate quadruple star, in the Hero's right foot, and about 7^ N. of and slightly / the Pleiades. A 3^-, flushed white; B 10, smalt blue; C u, blue; D 12, ash coloured. This is an elegant group, to which Sir J. Herschel added a fifth star, C, of the 17 th magnitude, at 25" distance in the np quadrant, [Knott's mags, are, B 10-5; D 10; E 9-8 ; C 14.] The object gave some trouble, since IjL's register is only for three individuals. 3 47 13 Free. -1- 3 76 O f * N 31 33-4 N 10 9 8 Position. Distance. Epoch. o n (AB 206.6 . 13-2 ) AD 198.1 . 82.9 ... 1832-19 ( AE 185 . 121 ) f AB 207.5 . '3'8 \ \AC 290.4 . 32-8 ( 1860-80 IAD 1970 . 90.2 I VAE 184.6 122. 1 / JAB 207.2 12-8 1879-58 (AC 286-0 . 32-5 1879-10 225. 32 EBIDANI. (S. 470.) h. m. B.A. 3 48 Decl. S 3 HERSCHEL, W. STRUVE SMYTH DCNER JEDRZEJEWICZ 9. 46 16'8 Position. 343-4 349-7 347-7 348-5 Free. + 3-00 N 10-87 Distance. Epoch. 4-3 1781.81 6-7 - 1825-00 6-6 . 1843-16 6.6 1870-64 6-7 .- 1880.03 CXLVII. A very neat double star, between the chest of Taurus and the River ; R.A. m 44 -- 99 and a line carried from y Eridani to the following part of the Pleiades, passes it at rather better than a quarter of the distance. A 5, topaz yellow ; B 7, sea-green [or blue] ; the colours in brilliant contrast. We may conclude that there has been little or no change, though the star is sufficiently easy for the results to have been more coincident. 226. 6 PERSEI. (2. 471.) b. m. R.A. 3 50 Decl. N 39 28 4J/5 Prec. + s. 4-00 10-74 Position. HEBSCHEL, W. 8-5 SMYTH 9-1 Distance. n 8.0 8.4 ... Epoch. 1780-59 1832-83 CXLVIII. A neat double star, under the right knee of Perseus ; where it will be struck by a line led from the Pleiades due N. through f Persei, and continued a little more than as far again : i. e. about 1 6 in the whole. A 3^, pale white ; B 9, lilac. This is a fine and delicate object. Subsequent observations confirm its fixity. There is a third star in the sf, about 90" distant. As the components of e Persei were not too faint to bear a trifling loss of light, I successfully employed a method of separating them which was suggested to me by Sir J. Herschel, viz. a central paper disc, of 2 in diameter, on the object-glass. [Webb has several times noted B to be small for its reputed magnitude.] 227. y 1 ERIDANI. R.A. Decl. ERSCHE UKNHA3 h. m. s. 3 52 53 3 13 49-3 Position. L, J. 233.6 I 238-4 Prec. + "NT s. 2-79 10-56 Epoch. not stated. 1878-88 Distance. H 45 5i-6 ... CXLIX. A Nautical Almanac star, with a companion, preceding the bunch of r's with which Bayer's map is disfigured; to be readily identified by shooting a ray from Procyon through the cluster in Orion's sword, and extending it nearly as far again to the E., or by a like process with a Aurigse and the Hyacles. A 2j, yellow; B 10, pale grey. It is H 2 100 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. in the S. part of the upper reach of the Eiver; and there is a third star, of the II th magnitude, in the sp quadrant. y 1 Eridani is called Zaurak, from the Neyyir-al-Zaurak, or bright star of the boat, of the Arabians : and being at the flexure of the River, as well as large and bright, seems to be the one alluded to by Hipparchus, Patav. Uranolog., as that which the equinoctial colure passed through in the time of Eudoxus. The same colure, however, could not have contem- poraneously passed through the right hand of Perseus. 228. 213 P. III. TAUBI. (2. 479.) CL. h. m. s. B. A. 3 54 22 o Decl. N 22 53-4 Prec. + 3*54 N 10-44 Position. Distance. Epoch. SMYTH j^" 8 ' 1 - / 2 j 1835-" ( B C 240-0 ... 60 ) DUNEB AB 128-2 ... 7-0 ... 1871-17 A delicate triple star, in the neck of the Bull, at about one-third of the distance from the Pleiades towards the Hyades, and slightly to the N. of the line drawn between them. A 7^-, white; B 8, grey; C 12, blue. [3 / the Pleiades, a little S. There seem grounds for supposing C to be variable.] 229. 258 I. I. HOBOLOGII. (H. 793; &.) h. B.A. 3 54 47 o Decl. S 51 3-9 Prec. + 4-48 // N 10-42 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "vB; S; iF; bM; r; * inv. ; " which means : " very bright ; small ; irregular figure; brighter in the middle; resolveable; there is a star involved in the nebula." 230. 53 1$. IV. CAMELOPABDI. (H. 801; &.) CLI. h. m. B.A. 3 57 30 o Decl. N 60 37-6 Prec. -f- 5-10 N 10-28 A bright planetary nebula, of a bluish white tint, about 60" in B.A. 3 h: 52 m - 4 h - i*"-' 101 diameter, on the hind flank of the Cameleopard. It is in a rich field of small stars, and was registered by ^. as an object whose light was uniform and definition abrupt. It is a curious body. [Thus described at Parsonstown, Nov. 15, 1873 : " Exquisite Planetary nebula. Star of mag. 14 in the centre surrounded by faint nebulosity and that again by a bright ring. Many stars in the field (diameter 8'). Diameter of nebula 56" by 54"."] [The decl. above is from H.'s Catalogue of 1864. Smyth made it less ty 5'.] [" Too faint to be worth looking at in 8^ refractor." Brodie.'] Closely following the N. vertical of this object, and about J from it, is a beautiful and brilliant field of stars, the compact portion of which is 47 1JI. VII. Many of the components of this group are in pairs, the brightest of which is a neat double star, both of the ^^ magnitude, ard decidedly red. 231, 485 2. CAMELOPABDI. b. m. s. S. B.A. 3 58 15 c Decl. N 62 3 '4 Prec. + 5*20 N 10-16 Position. Distance. Epoch. c STBUVE, W, 303-3 ... 17-9 ... 1830-24 DUNEB 303-4 ... 17-8 ... 1871-86 A double star. A 6, white ; B 6 , bluish white. B is, according to Struve, slightly inferior to A in brightness. 232. 179 B. TAUBI. (2. 495.) b. m. s. B- A. 41 27 Decl. N 14 52-0 Prec. + 3-37 N 9-92 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STBUVE, W. 216-1 ... 3-6 ... 1830-43 STRUVE, O. 220-5 ... 3-9 ... 18729 A double star. A 6J, yellowish white ; B 9^, bluish. 233, 60 BJ. VII. PEBSEI. (H. 809; ft.) CLII. b. m. s. B.A. 41 47 c Decl. N 49 12 -8 Prec. + 4' 40 N 9-95 A pretty compressed oval group of small stars in the left knee of 102 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. Perseus, nearly mid-way between A and fi, in the space extending from a Persei to a Aurigee. It is a well-marked object, with a crown of larger ones around, somewhat in the form of the letter D, and is in a very rich vicinity of splashy groups of stars, one of which to the nf is magnificently radiated, and formed like a badge of knighthood. This figure will identify 60 1$ . VII., an object which however insignificant and dim a blot it may appear is a myriad of worlds, for a powerful instrument reveals even thousands of stars in it : and various late operations show that we have not yet arrived at our maximum of optical process. But J. Harris, F.R.S., tells us, even in 1729, that he does 'not " think our telescopes will be much farther improved ! " ["Only a ring of small stars visible in 8^ in refractor. Nothing resembling this sketch." (Brodie.) Seen at Parsonstown to occupy exactly the field of an eye-piece which was 13' in diameter.] h. m. a. R.A. 42 20 Decl. N 30 28-8 234. 69 $. IV. TAURI. (h. 311; H. 810; .) CLIII. 8. Prec. + 375 N 9-96 A nebulous star over the Bull's neck, about J th the distance of a line between the / portion of the Pleiades and a Aurigse. In the large reflectors this object presents an extraordinary aspect, but with my telescope looks only burred. It was first registered by II . in November, 1790, thus: "A most singular phenomenon; a star 8 th magnitude, with a faint luminous atmosphere of a circular form, about 3' in diameter. The star is perfectly in the centre, and the atmosphere is so diluted, faint, and equal throughout, that there can be no surmise of its con- sisting of stars, nor can there be a doubt of the evident connection between the atmosphere and the star." From this wonderful aspect IJJ. draws the following consequences. Granting the connection between the star and the surrounding nebulosity, if it consist of stars very remote which give the nebulous appearance, the central star, which is visible, must be immensely greater than the rest ; or if the central star be no bigger than common, how extremely small and compressed must be those other luminous points which occasion the nebulosity 1 As, by the former RA. 4 h - jm. _ 4 h. 6m. 103 supposition, the luminous central point must far exceed the standard of what we call a star, so, in the latter, the shining matter about the centre will be much too small to come under the same denomination ; we there- fore either have a central body which is not a star, or a star which is involved in a shining fluid, of a nature totally unknown to us. 1$. maintained at first, that all nebulae were stellar masses ; but it will be obvious to those who have studied his condensation system, after the palinody of 1791, that he adopted the last opinion on further experience. This luminous matter seems more fit to produce a star by its condensation, than to depend on the star for its existence ; but, after all, it may be, that the star happens to fall in a line with the centre of the nebula, so as to be connected optically but not physically. (See 19 IjjL VI., R.A. i5 h i m 57 s , post-) [" No nebulosity visible in 8" 1 refractor." (Brodie.) On the other hand, described at Parsonstown, Nov. 16, 1873, as "an 8 th mag. star in a nebulous atmosphere which is irregular in brightness, being somewhat denser sf and somewhat fainter np. There is a 16 th mag. star about 10" N. of the N. edge. Diameter from N. to S. 114"." D' Arrest with a 4^ in refractor found the nebulous atmosphere very conspicuous.] [Engraved in Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. ii. Fig. 31 ; Phil. Trans., 1861, PI. xxv. Fig. 17.] 235. 510 2. ERIDANI. b. m. 8. . B.A. 46 30 DecL N 26-6 Prec. + 3-08 N 9-53 Position. Distance. Epoch. STKUVE, W. 300-5 ... 107 ... 1831-02 A double star. A 7, very yellow; B 10. 236. M PERSEI. CLIV. /it PERSEI. b. m. . *. K.A, 4 6 48 Prec. + 4-36 O f // Decl. N 48 7'7 N 9'53 Position. Distance. Epoch. o . H HERSCHEL, J. AC 231-2 9^9 1821-94 SMYTH A C 230-5 9 2 '7 1832-10 STRUVE, 0. A B 349-2 15-0 1851-10 BURNHAM A B 348-6 14-8 1878-15 A star with a distant companion, on the left knee of Perseus, and nearly in mid-distance between a Persei and a Aurigse A 4^, greenish yellow; B 12; C 10; some others at a distance in the sp quadrant 104 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 237. 61 $. VII. PEBSEI. (H. 820; B.A. Decl. h. m. 4 6 52 50 57-5 Free. + 4-52 N 9-50 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " Cl j B ; v R i ; c C ; " which means : " cluster ; bright ; very rich ; considerably compressed." Webb calls it : " a good low-power object ; larger stars in curves." " The stars have rather a tendency towards a spiral arrangement. 30' sf is a very red star of mag. 9 J." (Parsonstown, Oct. 13, 1872.) 238. B.A. 39 EBIDANI. (2. 516.) b. m. s. i 4 9 10 Free. CLV. Bed. S SMYTH SEABBOKE 31-6 10 Position. o 154-0 I5 1 ' N Distance. 6-3 2-85 9-32 Epoch. 183207 1874-00 A delicate double star, under the nf bend of the Eiver, at one-fifth of the line which the eye carries from y Eridani to y Orionis, or nearly 6 from the former, where it is so insulated as to be readily identified. A 5, full yellow; B u, deep blue and nearly points to an n th magni- tude in the sf quadrant. [Alias A Eridani.] 239, 26 IjJ. IV. EBIDANI. (h. 2618; H. 826; &.) CLVI. B. A. 4 9 10 Free. + 2-79 Decl. S 13 1-3 - N 9-32 A planetary nebula under the nf bend of the River, about 4^ from y Eridani in the direction of /3 Orionis. A splendid though not very conspicuous object, of a greyish white colour ; it is somewhat like a large star out of focus, with a planetary as- pect. ll . remarked that it was slightly elliptical, with an ill-defined disc ; and concluded it might probably be a very compressed cluster of stars at FIG. 7. 26 9 . IV. ERIDANI. . ,. m, ,. . , aperture of my telescope only permitted the object to appear spherical ; but the conjectural disclosure is the same. There are several telescopic RA. 4 h - 6 m . --4 h - 13^- 105 stars in the field, of which two of the 8 tb magnitude in the sp quadrant point exactly upon it, as in the annexed diagram, where the nebula is shown under its best aspect, highly magnified. [Lassell describes this as being the most interesting and extraordinary object of the kind which he had ever seen.] [Engraved in D' Arrest's Dissertation, 1861, PL ii. Fig. 9; Lassell, Mem. R.A.S., vol. xxiii., PI. ii. Fig. 4.] 240. 40 ERIDANI. (2. 518.) CLVII. 40 ERIDANI. (2. 518.) b. m. s. t. R. A. 4 10 12 Free. + 2-90 / Decl. S 7 46-7 N 9' 2 5 Position. Distance. fl SMYTH AB 107.6 83-9 ... STBDVE, 0. j A B 105.8 - 82.3 > (BC 135-7 4-99 ' BUBNHAM BC 121-8 3-28 ... Epoch. 1837-09 1874-10 1880.09 A very [remarkable ternary] star, in the nf reach of the flexous River, designated Keid, from the Arabic al-Kaid t the egg-shells ; being rather better than a degree to the sf of o Eridani, or Be'id, the egg, so called from its whiteness, and forming, with the stars around, Az-ha-l-na'dm t the ostrich's nest. A 5, orange colour; B 9^, sky blue; [C ii] ; other stars [2] follow in the field [but do not belong to the system]. This object is remarkable for the great amount of its proper motion. That there is a physical connection between these stars is strikingly shown by the fact that their relative position scarcely changed a second between 1783 and 1837, although the greater individual performed so large a proper move- ment as nearly 250" to the S.W. The values of the proper motions assigned to A by Argelander are : B.A. -2.19"; Decl. -3-45". [Alias o* Eridani. Many observations concur to show that the distance of A B is diminishing, but the angle seems stationary. It is remarkable that Smyth makes no explicit mention of C, though it was discovered by E[ . C is endowed with a retrograde- motion amounting to about i per annum, and the distance is slowly diminishing.] 241. y TATJRI. CLIX. h. R.A. 4 13 31 o Decl. N 15 21-7 Free. + 3-39 N 9-00 Position. Difference of B. A, Epoch. o s. SMYTH 291 ... 17.8 ... 1835.17 A bright star with a distant telescopic companion, in the Bull's 106 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. nostril. A 3^, fine yellow; B n, pale blue, preceded by another small star in the sp quadrant. This is Hyadum primus, or the leader of the Hyades, which, as the name implies, was esteemed a showery group ; whence the pluviasque Hyadas of Virgil, and the moist daughters of Spenser. The family of Atlas was mentioned at rj Tauri, but the Hyades were considered to be another batch of his daughters ; though some, to lessen his burthen, dubbed them the Dodonides, or nurses of Bacchus. The ancients were not agreed as to their number, for while Thales merely reckoned the two eyes, a and e, Euripides counted three, and Hesiod five. Though the identity of this star must be pretty well established, it may be stated, that it lies about one-third of the distance from the Pleiades to the cluster in Orion's sword. But we learn from the poetaster that this direction is almost needless ; for Among these gorgeous hosts aloft so gloriously shown:, The Hyades, and Pleiades, to all who seek are known. Pliny gives the name Palilicium to the Hyades, while others have made it proper to Aldebaran, because they rose heretofore at Rome, on the feast day of Pales; and Ovid lumps them together as Sidus Hyantis. The group was also called Y-psilon the Pythagorean symbol of Human life from its shape ; and from thence the Roman V, a and being the extremes, and y the angular point. From a notion, either that the same letter resembles a pig's jaws, or that Aldebaran with the Hyades were like a BOW with her litter, the Latins designated them Suculaz. Cicero, however, thinks the name a corruption, from having mistaken the Greek word ws, pigs* for veiv, to rain. 242. (f) TAURI. CLVIII. b. m. . B.A. 4 13 34 o Decl N 27 5'4 Free. + 3-67 ^ N 9-01 Position. Distance. Epoch. o , . // HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH' 240-4 ... 56-8 ... 1821-95 SMYTH 241-8 ... 55-9 ... 1832-86 MAIN 243.4 5 2 '7 1863-08 DEMBOWSKI 245-7 537 l8 73-7 A wide double star, in. the upper part of the Bull's neck ; within the mid-distance from Aldebaran towards e Persei. A 6, light red ; B 8, cerulean blue. E.A. 4 h - i3 m - 4 h - 15. 107 243. 1419 Lac. ERIDANI. (*h. 3642.) b. m. R.A. 4 15 13 o Free. + 2-22 N 8-86 Decl. S 34 9-1 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HEKSCHEL.J. 157-6 ... 5-8 ... 1837-90 STOKE, O. 160-9 7' 1 187605 A double star. Ay; B 10. Near 41 Eridani, a 3 rd mag. star. 244. 839 H. TATJRI. (&.) h. m. s. . K.A. 4 15 32 o Decl. N 19 15-7 Free. + 3-49 N 8-83 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " ! ! ! ; v F ; S ; variable (Hind) ;" which means : " an exceedingly re- markable object ; very faint ; small ; found by Hind to be variable/' On Oct. u, 1852, Hind discovered, at the Regent's Park Observatory, a small nebula about i' in diameter, with a central condensation of light, in the position noted above, and therefore about i J distant from Tauri. From 1852 to 1856 a star of the 10* magnitude almost touched the ??/ edge of the nebula ; this star was first noticed on the night of the dis- covery of the nebula, and from the fact that it had escaped observation on many previous occasions when the same locality had been under examination, Hind was induced to suspect its variability a suspicion which eventually was shown to be well founded, as the star has now dwindled down to the 1 2 th mag. But the most singular thing remains to be told: namely, that on Oct. 3, 1861, D' Arrest of Copenhagen found that the nebula had totally vanished. This statement was not credited at the time, on account of its apparent improbability, notwithstanding the known reputation of the observer who made it ; and it was assumed, too hastily, that some error of observation had crept in, though D* Arrest's good faith was not at all questioned. On Jan. 26, 1862, Le Verrier turned the large Equatorial of the Paris Observatory (of 12-4 aperture) on the place of the nebula; not a single trace, however, could be obtained of it either by Le Yerrier or by his assistant, Chacornac, and on the following night Secchi, at Rome, was similarly unsuccessful ; thus was confirmed beyond a doubt the statement of D' Arrest. Chacornac, whilst engaged in 1854 in forming a chart of the stars in the neighbourhood of the nebula, saw it, but in going over the locality again in 1858, with a much more powerful instrument, he did not see it, though the reason why he did not announce the disappearance is not stated. 108 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. Hence Hind infers that the disappearance of the nebula took place either during 1856 or some time in the course of the following year. On Dec. 29, 1861, the nebula was again seen in the i5 in refractor at Pulkova, and by March 22, 1862, it had so far increased in brightness as to bear a faint illumination. But on Dec. 12, 1863, Hind and Talmage carefully looked for it with the telescope with which it was originally observed, and failed to establish any trace of its visibility. The telescope in question (Mr. Bishop's) has only half the aperture of the one at Pulkova. Various attempts, but none of them very conclusive, have been made at Parsonstown with Lord Rosse's 6 ft Reflector to detect this object. The dates of these attempts were Oct. u, 1872; Dec. 12, 1876; and Jan. 9, 1877. Other observers, including Dreyer, Copeland, and Tempel, have also recorded negative testimony. 0. Struve, however, claims to have seen traces of it from time to time. I am not aware of any very recent attempts to ascertain whether this nebula continues visible or not, 245, Y TATJRI. (2, 528.) CLX. X TATJRJ. (* 528.) h m. & s. B.A, 4 15 53 Prec. + 3 63 o / A Decl. N 25 22 2 N 8 90 Position. Distance. Epoch. o H SMYTH 25'1 ... I9'3 ... 1831-93 MAIN 2 4 .I ... 19.2 ... 1863.05 A neat double star, at the back of the Bull's ear; where with v it forms what the Arabians termed Al Kelbein, or the two Dogs. A 6, white ; B 8, pale sky-blue. The alignment of x is not difficult : a ray being shot from a Geminorum through /3 Tauri, the tip of the Bull's northern horn, and extended about 15 further, towards the Pleiades, strikes upon it ; a line from ft Orionis through a Tauri, carried half that distance beyond the Bull's eye, also hits it. 246. RETICULI. h. B.A. 4 m. a. 16 26 Prec. + 0. O-64 Decl. S 63 31-3 N H 8-74 HEESCHEL, J. Position. Distance. O H 6-1 ... 6-4 Epoch. I835-87 A double star. A 5 J ; B 9. Gould considers A variable to the extent of ^ of a unit of magnitude, B. A. 4 h - i8 m - 109 247. 633 2. PERSEI. R.A. Decl. m. 17 o 34 15 3-8 Free. Position. STRUVE, W. MAIN 19-5 19-5 3-87 8-69 Epoch. 1831-25 1868-82 A double star. A 6, white ; B 8, white. 248. 62 TAURI. (2. 534.) CLXI. R.A. 4 17 22 Prec. + 3'6o o / // Decl. N 24 2-8 N 8-70 Position. Distance. Epoch. o jj HERSCHEL, W. 291-2 28-0 1782-90 SMYTH 290-0 28-6 1835-98 DUNER 390-3 28-9 1868.34 A neat double star, on the tip of the Bull's left ear, at rather more than one-third of the distance from the Pleiades to f . Ay, silver white ; B 8J, purple ; and there are several small stars in the field. This is a fair object for a moderate telescope. There seems to have been no ap- preciable change during an interval of 53 years from 1782 to 1835; though Piazzi's remark "Duplex. Comes 8 ae magnit. prsecedit r8" temporis, 10" circiter ad Boream" interposes a mystification. 249. R.A. Decl. 2635 h. DORADUS. (H. 844.) h. m. s. s. 4 17 32 S 55 12-2 Prec. + 1-33 N 8-67 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; v L ; vg, svmb M ; i5 9 d in R.A. ;" which means : " bright ; very large ; very gradually, then suddenly, very much brighter in the middle ; its diameter is 15 s of R.A." This may be 338 Dunlop. 250. /c 1 TAURI. (2. 9 App. I.) h. m. s. a. R.A. 4 18 38 Decl. N 22 2'5 Position. o STRUVE, W. 172-6 MAIN 172-4 JEDRZEJEWICZ 172-8 Prec. + 3-55 N 8-58 Distance. Epoch. 339 -. 1836-21 339 ... 1866-09 339 1879-60 and *c 2 form a wide pair as above. The former star is of mag. 5 J, 110 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. and yellowish white ; and the latter of mag. 6, and white. These stars may be connected, but there is no proof of this. The minute pair between K 1 and K 2 is .2. 541 rej., as to which Dembowski gives: Pos. Dist. 5-0"; Epoch, 1873-7; mags. 11-2 and n-6. 324; 251. 1 CAMELOPARDI. h. m. 8. R.A 4 19 23 Decl. 53 33-3 Position. (2. 550.) Prec. + 4-71 CLXII. 8-22 Distance. Epoch. 1800-00 1822-05 1838-09 1871-38 PlAZZI 2990 ... 12-0 HEBSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 306-5 ... 10-45 SMYTH 30 7- 9 ... 10-4 DUNB 308-2 ... 10-2 A neat double star, between the animal's hind hoofs ; and nearly in mid-distance between a Persei and d on the head of Auriga. A 7^, white ; B 8J, sapphire blue. The object consists of Piazzi's 83 and 84 of Hora IV. ; and though the process of obtaining a position and distance from the observed R.A. and Decl. can hardly be expected to give a result absolutely exact, the Palermo observations merit grave consideration. 252. 548 2. TAUBI. B.A. b. m. s. 4 21 55 Decl. N 30 7-5 Position, o 35-8 35-6 STBUVE, W. MAIN 8. 3-77 Prec. N 8-33 Distance. Epoch. 14-1 ... 1831-40 14.3 ... 1868-82 A double star. A 6-J-, yellowish ; B 8 J, bluish. 253. TAUBI. R.A. Decl. 22 o 15 6. 16 43-1 STRUVE, W. MAIN JEDBZEJEWICZ Position, o (2. 10 App. I.) 9. Prec. -f 3-41 - N 8-30 Distance. Epoch. CLXIII. 345-9 346-4 337-3 ... 1836-13 337- 1 ... 1866-09 337-3 ..- 1879-16 A wide pair of stars on the Bull's face, where it forms the southern vertex of a small triangle with a Tauri and the Hyades. A 5, pearly white ; B, which is 6 2 , 5^, yellowish. From an apparent identity in the values and signs of proper motions in space, the components of this object are suspected of being in physical connexion ; and imagination is con- E.A. jgm. _ 4 h. i in i Ill founded at the probable period of the annus magnus, should the idea ultimately prove correct. [Jedrzejewicz, writing in 1880, remarks: " La suppositon de W. Struve de la conjonction physique de deux etoiles si eloignees se confirme tout a fait."] Baily thought it probable that Ptolemy observed 1 and 2 as one star, and of course a fixed star. 254. 1464 Lac. SCTJLPTORIS. (*h. 3650.) h. m. *. R.A. 4 22 55 Decl. S 40 46-4 Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 184-1 <. 2-02 Prec. N 8-25 Distance. Epoch. 4-9 ... 1836.91 A double star. Ay; B 255. 217 $. I. AURIGA. R.A. 23 (h. 315; H. 853; .) CLXIV. s. Prec. + 3-92 Decl. N 35 1-8 N 8-29 A round pale nebula, between the legs of Perseus and Auriga, of a slight cream-colour. It is so faint that probably I should have overlooked it, but for H. having described its place so exactly, as " inclosed among six stars." Its approach is announced by a star of the 8 th magnitude, in the np quadrant. [Brodie thinks the " cream-colour" idea very ridiculous.] [Engraved in Phil. Trans., 1861, PI. xxv. Fig. 8.] 256. 80 TAURI. R.A. Decl. m. 23 s. 51 3ST 15 23'9 STRUVE, W. SMYTH SMYTH DAWES WILSON and SEABBOKE BURNHAM Position, o 12-9 13-9 15.2 10-6 14-7 7-4 (2. 554.) s. Prec. + 3-40 Nfl-TT CLXV. Epoch. 1831.18 1839-16 1843-11 1859-15 1870-07 1879-00 3 S.W. of a Tauri. Distance. n ... 1-74 ... ... 1-8 ... 1-41 ... ... 1-29 ... ... 0.57 ... e, and about ij c A 6, yellow ; and B 8, dusky. [A small orbital movement seems probable, and a diminution of dis- tance certain, but the observations are remarkably discordant.] 112 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 257. 552 S. PERSEI. R.A. h. m. s. 4 23 52 Decl. N 39 46 '3 Free. + 4-07 N 8-17 Distance. Epoch, o // STRUVE, W. 114-4 ... 8-9 ... 1831.05 A double star. A 6, very white ; B 7, very white. Position. o 114.4 258. 57 PERSEI. CLXVI. R.A. 4 25 40 Decl. 1ST 42 49 '7 Position. o HEBSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 198-9 SMYTH 199-8 DEMBOWSKI 198-9 Free. + 4-19 N 8-10 Distance. a IIO-I 110-3 113-6 Epoch. 1821-91 1833-08 18737 J A wide double star, in the left ancle of Perseus, with several small stars in the field, of which a remarkable one of the n tn magnitude is to the np of A, and seems to have escaped the eye of ]J[. A and B are both of the 8 th magnitude, and white. [Several later observers rate these stars at 6 and 6^, or 6J and 7, and call them yellow.] Nearly in mid- distance of a line run from a Fersei to /3 Tauri, at about 10 from the former. 259. 559 2. TAURI. h. m. R.A. 4 27 Decl. 17 47 Position. STRUVE, W. 278-6 DAWES 278-8 DAWES 276-6 DUNER 278-4 Free. + 3-46 N 7-91 Distance. 3-o 3-06 2-78 2-73 Epoch. 1830-67 1840-09 1854-16 1871-79 A double star. A 7 -J, very white ; B 7 J, very white. Between a and Tauri, rather nearer a, and following the line which might join them. B. A. 4 h - 23 m ---4 h - 29 m - 113 260. 58 PERSEI. CLXVII. 58 PERSEI. R.A. Decl. h. m. 8. 4 29 2 N 41 2-3 Prec. -f N s. 4-12 H 7'80 STRUVE, W. SMYTH Position. BC 29.6 BC 29-8 Distance. 11.71 n.8 ... Epoch. 1828-72 1843-18 58 Persei, a star on the left heel of Perseus, is an insulated object, assumed as a pointer to the distant pair in the sf quadrant [ = 2. 563], with A K.A. = 4 s . A 5^, orange tint ; B 7^-, greenish ; and C 9, lilac. A line led to the N.W. from the preceding star of Orion's belt through y Orionis and 35 further, strikes upon it ; and it precedes the mid- distance of a ray shot from a Persei to /3 Tauri. The double star is 65 IjJ . III., and there is another couple in the sj) part of the field, of the io tjl and 1 1 to magnitudes, at about the same distance from A as the other pair. The measures of B and C have been very accordant. 261. a TAURI. CLXVIII. b. m. s. R.A. 4 29 36 Decl. N 16 17-5 Position. STRUVE, W. 36-0 BUBNHAM 35-2 Prec. S. + 3 N f '43 71 Epoch. 1836-00 1877.9 Distance. H IO9.O A Nautical Almanac star, with a telescopic companion, in the southern eye of Taurus. A i, pale rose-tint; B 12, sky-blue; a magnitude as- signed on deliberate comparison, for I was surprised on readily seeing it with my 5 ft telescope of 3f iu aperture. [In consequence of the proper motion of the larger star the distance of AB is increasing. A third star has been added by Burnham with the i8J in refractor of the Dearborn Observatory. Pos.= ii2; dist. 30". Considering that this companion is "exceedingly faint" with 18^ inches of aperture I will say no more about it.] Aldebaran is readily found by the eye, from being exactly between y Orionis and the Pleiades. The stars in Orion's belt also point nearly in its direction ; and it is moreover easily distinguished by its red colour. The rich appearance of its vicinity has been thus eulogized by the brackish poet : In lustrous dignity aloft, see alpha Tauri shine, The splendid zone he decorates attests the Power Divine : For mark around what glittering orbs attract the wandering eye, You'll soon confess no other star has such attendants nigh. Taurus is now the second in the zodiacal march, though only 4000 I 114 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. years ago he led the celestial signs, and continued to be their leader for 2000 years. The principal star is Al-debardn, the hindmost, because he drives the Pleiades, whence the name of /Stella dominatrix, and Tdliyu-l-nejm, were also applied; but it was most popularly known among the Arabians, with whom it was no favourite, as 'a'in-al-thaur, the bull's eye, though it was placed at a little distance from the animal's head in the ancient configurations. (See No. 241, ante.) It is a red star, and I have repeatedly seen it apparently projected on the disc of the moon, even to an amount of nearly 3 seconds of time, at the instant of immersion, when occulted by that body. This phenomenon seems to be owing to the greater proportionate refrangibility of the white lunar light, than that of the red light of the star, elevating her apparent disc at the time and point of contact. All these suppositions, however, are purely arbitrary, as other stars are liable to a similar affection; and notwithstanding that the call of the Astronomical Society for observations of the occultations of Aldebaran for 1829 and 1830 was zealously responded to from various parts of Europe, nothing satisfactory was elicited. Of 6 observers at the Greenwich Observatory, 5 distinctly saw the projection on the lunar limb ; and the majority of corresponding astronomers saw the star either projected or hanging on the moon's edge : but there were several practical men who saw nothing remarkable. The fact, however, of the singular phenomenon is admitted, but subject to much diversity of opinion as to its cause ; for it cannot be traced either to the character of the telescope employed, to the observer, or to the weather during the observation. To those who have not the Memoirs of the Astronomical Society at hand, an extract from one of my reports may be illustrative : "October igth, 1829. I saw Aldebaran approach the bright limb of the Moon very steadily ; but, from the haze, no alteration in the redness of its colour was perceptible. It kept the same steady line to about f of a minute inside the lunar disc, where it remained, as precisely as I could estimate, two seconds and a quarter, when it suddenly vanished. In this there could be no mistake, because I clearly saw the bright line of the Moon outside the star, as did also Dr. Lee, who was with me. The emersion took place without anything remarkable : the dark limb not visible. Telescope 5-foot achromatic, 3f aperture, power 78 ; adjusted on the star." Dr. Lee was watching with a smaller instrument. IjjL measured the apparent diameter of this oculus Tauri as 1-50"; and others have attempted a substantive measurement. Its ruddy aspect has long been noted, and old Leonard Digges, in his Prognostication Everlasting, 1555, pronounces that it is "ever a meate rodde." Indeed, all late observers agree in its redness ; but Virgil wrote Candidus auratis aperit quum cornibus annum Taurus E. A. 115 winch golden horns must rather refer to ft and f, the two bright stars on the tips, than to the " horns of triumph" of the Scholiast. To account for this constellation comprising only half the animal, the mythologists have it, that as he personates the bull which swam away with Europa, his flanks are immersed in the billows. This is very much like the Dutch effigies behind a tree ; but it does not well explain why Taurus, Pegasus, or Equuleus are deprived of their hinder parts. Ovid, indeed, throws a doubt upon the gender of this sign, by making it the transformation of lo, but in either case it is still the munus amoris, in which the heathens delighted. The classical astronomers are, however, very weak in their mythological derivations and zodiacal origins. In the rare zodiac gold mohurs struck by Jehangir Shah in 1618, Taurus is represented as a complete though spiritless animal, with the gibbous hump common to Indian oxen : but on the silver rupees of the same monarch, the half animal is drawn in a bold butting attitude, exactly as described by Manilius. Yet Aratus must have seen that of Eudoxus differently placed, for he puts the Pleiades in the knees. Some of the Romans represented the animal as whole; since both Vitruvius and Pliny speak of cauda Tauri as being formed by the Pleiades, to the derogation of those young ladies. But the Arabians retained it merely as a section, calling o, or Flamsteed's No. i, the first star in A I Khat, the slash, or section. Taurus is one of the old 48 constellations, and contained the Fourth Mansion of the Moon. It is a very rich asterism, and its components have been thus tabulated : Ptolemy ... 44 stars. Ulugh Beigh . . 43 Tycbo Brahe . . 43 Bayer .... 48 Hevelius . Bullialdus Flamsteed Bode 51 stars. 52 141 394 262. R.A. Decl. 88 TAURI. 29 36 o / 9 56 1 Prec. CLXIX. + 3-28 N 7-70 HERSCHEL and SOUTH SMYTH DEMBOWSKI Position. 299-0 300-4 299.0 Distance. 69.4 68-5 69-3 Epoch. 1822.88 1832.93 1874.4 A star with a distant companion, in the right fore-leg of Taurus, being about 6 below a Tauri, where it forms the vertex of an acute- angled triangle with that star and y Orionis. A 5, bluish white ; and I 2 116 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. B 8|-, cerulean blue. Some minute stars follow A, and there is one of the 9 th magnitude in the np quadrant. 263. 2 CAMELOPABDI. (2. 566.) s. Free, -f 4-71 CLXX. h. in. 8. B.A. 4 31 13 Distance. f \j\j Epoch. - i'- 5 8 . 1-94 ... 1829.79 1836-28 ... 1853-19 ... 1875-09 Decl. N 53 15 '4 Position. o STRUVE,W. 31 1 -7 SMYTH 308-7 JACOB 303-7 WILSON and SEABROKE 294.3 A close double star, between the animal's hind hoofs. A 5^, yellow ; B 7-1-, pale blue. An attentive observer will pick it up by casting a line from Polaris between a Aurigse and (3 Persei, leading it about 9 from the former ; and it will be intersected by another line, drawn from a Persei to 6 in the head of Auriga. Struve recorded it " vicinse ;" but it is certainly wider and easier of measurement than those usually so classed by him. It may, however, be increasing its distance, albeit my observa- tions afford no direct testimony of the fact. [There is evident retrograde motion, but whether the distance is altering is uncertain.] 264. a DOBADUS. (*h. 3668.) s. Free. + 1-28 N f 54 h. m. . B.A. 4 31 37 Decl. S 55 16-4 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J. 108.5 ... 82-3 ... 183601 A star with a distant companion. AS; B n. 265. 4 B. AUBIG^I. (S. 572.) h. m. s. s. B.A. 4 31 41 Prec. + 3-69 Decl. N 26 43-7 N 7'53 Position. STRUVE, W. 210-3 DUNER 204-6 JEDRZEJEWICS 204.7 Distance. // 3-1 3-4 3-7 Epoch. 1830-56 1871-63 1880-20 A double star. A 7, yellowish; B 7, yellowish. R.A. 4 n ' 35 m, 117 266. 1551 Lac. BETICULI. (*h. 367O.) K.A. 4 32 27 Decl. S 63 3'1 Position, o HERSCHEL, J. 95-6 Free. + 0-62 - N f 4 8 Distance. Epoch. H 30 est. ... 1836-92 A double star. A 6^, yellow ; B 8, pale blue. 267. B. A. Decl. TAUBI. h. m. s. 4 32 52 o / N 15 (S. 11 App. I.) t. Free. + 3-41 35-0 Position. o STRUVE, W. 192-3 MAIN 192-4 JEDKZEJEWICZ 192-6 X Distance. H 427 429.8 429.2 7-44 Epoch. 1836-22 1871-22 1879-32 o- 1 with of the io tn magnitude, makes A the apex of a scalene triangle. An imaginary line led from 8 Orionis, the third star in Orion's belt, close over /3 Eridani, touches 62, at about 3 W. of the said /3. [2^ preceding (3.] 277. R.A. CO AURIGA. h. m. a. 4 51 47 Decl. N 37 43 '4 (2. 616.) s. Free. + 4-05 N 5-90 Distance. CLXXIV. Epoch. 7.89 7.0 5-9 1822.90 1833-88 1863-12 Position, o HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 352.0 SMYTH 352-6 MAIN 350-0 A neat double star, preceding the hip of Auriga ; and about orte- 1 bird down a line passed from a Aurigse to the Hyades. A 4, pale red ; B 8, light blue. Though this fine object is well defined, from the dis- parity of size in the pair it is not at all of the easiest measurement : yet there are few double stars of which the results are more coincident. The star rz/this object, 5 Aurigse [=0. 2. 92], has been found to be a most delicate double star by 0. Struve, the components being 6 th and io th magnitudes, and 2-8" apart : it should be remarked, however, that the acolyte is 2.'s " io tn ," which in some cases cannot be estimated at less than my 15 th . 278. R.A. 4 52 23 o / Decl. N Position. o STRUVE, W. 179-9 SMYTH 180.4 SECCHI 1 76-4 GLEDHILL 173-2 258 P. IV. ORIONIS. (S. 622.) b. m. s. s. Free. + 3-10 N 5-85 Epoch. 1832.09 1833.92 1858-08 1876-07 Distance. // 2 ' 6 4 2-4 2.41 2-7 CLXXVI, A fine double star, just preceding Orion's right knee ; and at rather RA. 4 h - 5 o m ---4k- 54 m. 121 more than a third of the distance from /3 Orionis to a Tauri, where it is intersected by a line passed from (3 Gerainorum through y Orionis. A 8, white; B 9, pale grey. [Probably moving.] 279. 257 P. IV. TATJB1. CLXXVII. h. m. s. i. R.A. 4 52 44 Decl. N 14 22-5 Prec. + 3-39 N 5-80 Position. Distance. Epoch. SOUTH A B 304.4 ... 3^.4 ... 1822-09 MAIN AB 304-1 ... 40.5 ... 186305 BURNHAM }f* 3 J' 4 . 39-0 j I882 Epoch. 1825-10 1834-15 1836.25 1858.33 1875-09 1878-32 A fine double star, at the lower part of the back of the animal's neck. A 5^, light yellow ; and B 9, pale blue ; while in the np quadrant, about 2' distant, is the little star mentioned by Piazzi, " 2 ad Boream, 2" tem- poris praecedit, alia io ae magn." This object is 19 Hev. Camelopardi. [The above changes are partly due to proper motion, and it is an open question whether they are not wholly so due. 0. S. thinks that 10 or 20 years will decide the point. Bull, de VAcad. St. Pet., vol. xix.] To find this object look about 10 on a line carried from Polaris between a and /3 Aurigee : a line from /3 Draconis carried through the Pole-star also reaches it at the same distance beyond. 295. 4 IJL VII. TAURI. R.A. s. 42 (h 349 ; H. 1030 ; &.) Prec. Decl. N 16 34-1 SMYTH BUBNHAM Position, o 60.7 60. 1 Distance. 25.0 19.9 + 3-45 N 4-68 Epoch. 1837-73 1880.07 CLXXXIV A very delicate double star preceding a tolerably condensed cluster, over the right arm of Orion. A 8, yellow; B n, bluish. This object is an outlier of a rich gathering of small stars, which more than fills the field; it was registered by IjjjL under an estimation of 20' or 25' of diameter, but he did not notice the pair. However, Sir J. Herschel thus describes it: "Large rich cluster; stars 12 to 15 m.; fills field. Place that of a D *. The most compressed part is 42.58 foil, the D *, and 3' E. A. 4 m- _ 5 h. ;111 127 south of it." Described by D'Arrest as "Em ausserordentlich reicher Hauf " an extraordinarily rich cluster. The whole may be fished up by carrying a line from 6 Orionis the fore- most star in Orion's belt, through y Orionis, and there intersecting it by another from a Tauri, due E. towards y Geminorum. 296. 652 2. ORIONIS. h. m. s. s. R.A. 5 6 5 Prec. + 3-09 o / . Decl. N O 53-8 N 4-67 Position. Distance. 1 * .. STRUVE, W. I84-3 - 1-71 i! A double star. A 6^, yellowish ; B 8|, white 297. i LEPORIS . (2. 655 ) h. m. s. s. R.A. 5 7 10 Prec. + 2-79 / // Decl. S 12 O'O N 4-59 Position. Distance. ] n HERSCHEL, W. 359-5 12-3 i STRUVE, W. 337-6 12.8 i MORTON 335-4 13-4 i BURXHAM 337-3 12-2 i Epoch. 1830-18 CLXXXV. Epoch. 1782-69 1832-25 1856-08 1879-14 A fine and delicate double star, in the Hare's left ear ; where a line from a Orionis through e the middle star of the belt and extended rather more than as far again into the S/W., will pick it up. A 4^, white; B 12, pale violet, with a reddish distant star nearly N". Little of a decided character can be deduced from the observations of so difficult a star. [The observations are still very discordant ; even those of recent years, what few there are.J 298. p 1 ORIONIS. (2. 654.) CLXXXVII. h. R.A. 5 m. s. 7 32 Prec. + . 3-13 O t U Decl. N 2 43-7 N 4-55 Position. Distance. Epoch. n SOUTH 62-0 1825-12 STRUVE, W. 63-5 ... 7-05 1832-05 SMYTH 61.8 6-S 1835-89 SEABROKE 63-3 ... 7-1 1874-09 IUUB4UB%rJkA ^O*O ' / * /T^^P A pretty double star, between the right arm and thigh of Orion ; in a 128 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. line with the stars of the belt, preceding it by exactly double its length. A 5, orange ; B [9], smalt blue the tints are so decided as to bear out 2/s remark, " colores insignes." There has been no appreciable change in 50 years. There are several other small stars in the field, of which two bright ones in the sp quadrant form a coarse pair, at an Z from A = 240, with A K. A. = 2 9 s . A natural index for the future detection of proper motions in the star p, is offered us in its just preceding and being nearly equidistant between two small stars, the one N. and the other S. of it. 299. K LEPORIS. (2. 661. CLXXXIX. h. B.A. 5 m. s. 8 9 Decl. S 13 4-2 Position. STRUVE, W. SMYTH WROTTESLEY MAIN STONE, 0. 358-6 359-5 359-5 3-6 357-6 Free. + 2-77 N' " Distance. Epoch. n 3-05 ... 1832-23 3-7 ... 1835-02 3-2 ... 1857-90 2-16 1862-05 2.46 ... 1877.95 A close double star, at the root of the animal's left ear, and which may be readily fished up about 5 S. of /3 Orionis, on a line run from y Orionis through the latter. A 5, pale white ; B 9, clear grey, pointing towards a distant star on the N. verge of the field. From these results, the general fixity of the components might be inferred ; but I do not place great confidence in my measures, which were troubled with variable refractions. 300. 14 AUKEG2G. (2. 652.) CLXXXVIII. s. Free. + 3-90 h. m. s. K. A. 58 14 o / Decl. 32 33-6 STRUVE, W. SMYTH Position. JAB 22 5 . 4 (AC 342.3 AB 224.5 A C 340 WILSON and SEABROKE j A B 22(5 * 3 ( A C 348.4 A fine triple star, over Auriga's right knee; about 15 down on the line which runs from a Aurigaa to ft Orionis. A 5, pale yellow ; B 7|, orange; C 16, purple. A and C point to a distant fourth star in the np quadrant. - ii ^ ^y i. Di tance. Epoch. // ... 14-65 j 1830-55 12-57 ) ... 13-5 I { 1832.81 ... 15 J , ... 14-94) I ... 12 } 1877-15 E.A. 5 h - ;m. _ 5 h. gm. 129 2. discovered the delicate companion C, which had escaped the gaze of sill other observers, and requires the most careful attention even to be perceived by occasional glimpses, but when seen, has a peculiar deep purple tint, which strikes singularly on the eye from so excessively minute an object. [Webb noted B to be lilac in 1850.] 301. a AURIGA. CLXXXVI. b. m. s. s. R.A. 58 33 Decl. N 45 53 '5 Free. Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL,W. AE 151-4 ... 169-0 ... 1780-69 HEBSCHEL, J., and SOUTH A F 348.0 ... 454-2 ... 1821.22 SAB 317-5 ... 78.1) AC 183-2 ... 126.2! AD 315-8 ... 143-21 AE 146-1 ... 158-0 1 A Nautical Almanac star, with several distant companions, on the right shoulder-blade of Auriga. A i, bright white; [B 14; C 12^; D ii ; E 10.] Here the principal star is Capella, a name considered to allude to the goat and kids which Auriga, the waggoner, has charge of; but it is some- times called el-dyyuk, a word of doubtful origin and signification. The Arabs distinctly termed it the Guardian of the Pleiades : and many astronomers treated it as a single constellation, under the name of Hircus, or Capra, the goat. Capella is a brilliant object, and one of those stars which Piazzi attacked with the hope of detecting parallax. Sir W. Herschel measured its diameter, and concluded it to be 2-5". Sir J. Herschel says, "I have a strong impression that Capella, within my recollection, has increased in brightness." W. Struve was of the same opinion . Auriga is one of the original 48 asterisms, though it has gone by divers other denominations, as Heniochus, Myrtillus, Elasippus, and Erichthonius. It is thought to have been the Horus of the Egyptians ; but there is a want of apparent connection between the goat, kids, and carter, and the potent son of Isis. The Arabians drew a mule, instead of the human form ; but they knew the latter figure also, and called it MumsiJd-l a' inan, or holder of the reins. Auriga has been thus tabulated : Ptolemy ... 14 stars. Bullialdus , . . 27 stars. Ulugh Beigh . . 13 Hevelius .... 40 TychoBrahe . . 27 Flarasteed ... 66 Bayer .... 32 Bode 239 The goat in this constellation has been recognised as Amalthsea, the 130 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. nurse of Jupiter, and mother of the *Epim, Haedi, or two stars f and ?) in the arm of Auriga, emphatically termed " horrida et insana sydera :" with a third star they form an isosceles triangle. The Hsedi were regarded by mariners of yore as affording presages of the weather : and they were so much dreaded, that they are said to have closed navigation at their rising. Hence, in an Epigram of the Anthologia, Callimachus says : Tempt not the winds, forewarned of dangers nigh, When the Kids glitter in the western sky. Capella, the shepherd's star, is a brilliant insulated object, and there- fore of easy alignment. A line drawn from Polaris perpendicular to the line of the Pointers, and on the opposite side to Ursa Major, passes, at 44 distance, through it. It will also be found by a ray projected through a and 8, the two most northern stars of the Great Bear's body, into the irregular pentagon formed by Auriga. If looking from the southward for it, take the rhymester's advice : From Rigel rise, and lead a line, through Bellatrix's light, Pass Nath, upon the Bull's north horn, and gain Capella's height Where a large triangle is fonn'd (isosceles it seems), When beta is with delta join'd to lustrous alpha'* beams. 302. /3 ORIONIS. (2. 668.) CXC. h. B.A. 59 15 c Decl. S 8 19-9 Prec. + 2-88 N 4-40 Position. Distance. Epoch, o // HERSCHEL, W. 200.7 ... 9.53 1791-60 and 8 1-81 STROVE, W. 199-8 ... 9-14 ... 1831-53 SMYTH 199.4 ... 9.5 ... 183207 WILSON and SEABEOKE 201-8 ... 9.5 ... 1873-93 A Nautical Almanac star, double, in the Hero's right foot, at the commencement of the flexuous Eridanus ; it is familiarly termed Rigel, from the Arabic Rijl-al-jauzd, the giant's leg ; and Recorde assures us it was called "Algebar by the Arabitians." A 1, pale yellow; B 9, sapphire blue. This splendid object is somewhat difficult to measure on account of the component's disparity in magnitude and the brilliance of the large star*. [Mitchel found a distant companion of mag. 13 which Burnham places as follows : Pos. 1*5; Dist. 44-4"; Epoch 1877-80.] [Webb always sees in A a blue tinge. Knott says : " Its blue tint is one of the finest in the heavens."] * Dawea has shown me a diagram which piece charged with a magnifying power he made of this delicate object, with a of seventy times. This same little in- 2 ft telescope, of ly^" 1 aperture, made strument showed the companion to Pola- by Dollond, having a pancratic eye- ris distinctly. R.A. 5 h - 8 m - 5 h - io m - 131 ft Orionis has been designated Rd'i al-Jauza in Arabian astrognosy, as shepherd of the Jauza, whose herds, or thirst-allaying camels, are represented by a, y, 8, and K. Zahn tells us, in his Oculus Artificialis, 1702, that Francis Grindel observed through his telescope that two stars in the right foot of Orion were surrounded with great splendour, as though emulous of the Sun ; and that a phenomenon resembling them in splendour cannot be found in the whole firmament. Now, as I cannot conceive either A. or r to have been thus shining in the field with /3, I can only impute the remark to a spurious image in a bad instrument, coloured by the same enthusiasm which showed Padre de Kheita the seamless coat of our Lord and a chalice in this same asterism. Independent of the " nautis infestus Orion " character of the constel- lation, Kigel had one of his own ; for it was to the astronomical rising of this " marinus aster" in March that St. Marinus and St. Aster owe their births in the Komish calendar. It is easy to find. A line run from the head of Leo through Procyon, arrives at Eigel ; as does one from a Geminorum, by a Orionis; and the locale of the star is thus expressed : With glittering gems Orion's belt, his sword, his shoulders, blaze; While radiant Eigel on his foot pours forth its silver rays. This was one of the stars selected by Count d'Assas de Montardier, a captain in the French Navy, for his investigations of parallax; and he concluded he had detected an amount of from one to two seconds. But as he merely observed its appulse and disappearance behind an iron frame fixed on a mountain at different periods of the year, it would be difficult to prove such a quantity, right or wrong, even if the frame were absolutely immovable during the intervals, and insensible to the varia- tions of temperature. 303. 20 P. V. TATJBI. (2. 670.) CXCI. Epoch. 1830-53 20 P. V. TATTBI. (2. 670.) h. m. s. a. B.A. 5 10 18 Prec. + 3-f o / II Decl. N 18 19-0 N 4-; Position. Distance. ft STRUVE, W. 2-32 SMYTH 168.5 2-1 MAIN 174-7 3-6 1862-10 A neat double star, on the Ball's southern horn ; where a line run from the cluster in Orion's sword, and extended as far again to the N., passes upon it. A 8, and B 8 ; both bluish, and lying between two stars in the sp and one in the nf quadrant, and nearest to the latter. Struve styled A, alba ; but in noticing so slight a difference of shade, K 2 132 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. even on so small an object, it is requisite to know to what degree his field of view was illuminated, and in what manner. It is possible that colour may interfere with our exact perception of size, which points out the necessity of obtaining greater accuracy of expression in the language of sidereal astronomy. 304. 16 AURIG^B. (O. 2. 103.) B A. 5 10 5*6 Decl. N 33 14 '7 Free. + 3-92 N 4-27 Position. STRUVE, 0. 56-5 DEMBOWSKI 57-0 BUENHAM 54-3 Distance. // 4-5 4-3 ... 3-9 - Epoch. 1848-02 1867.40 1878-65 A double star. A 5: B n. 305. 25 P. V. TAUBI. (2. 674.) s. Free. + 3-54 N 4-24 Distance. Epoch. h. m. s. B.A. 5 11 Decl. N 20 6-9 STRUVE, W. SMYTH Position, o 147-3 148-4 10-5 IO-O 1828-19 1839.76 CXCIII. A neat double star, in the middle of the Bull's southern horn ; and about 1 1 along a line projected from a Tauri towards j3 Geminorum. A [6JJ bright white; B [9^,] bluish ; and there are other companions. 306. 1780 Lac. COLUMB^I. (*h. 3740.) h. m. s. B.A. 5 11 19 Decl. S 36 46'7 HERSCHEL, J. A double star. A 7 ; B Position, o 284.7 Free. Distance. 30 es*. 2-19 n 4-22 Epoch. I835-99 R.A. 133 307. A AURIGA. (AC = 2 3 App. II.) h. m, s. K.A. 5 11 22 Decl. SOUTH SMYTH STRUVE, 0. FLETCHEB BUBNHAM 40 -6 Free. + 4-16 N 4-23 Position. M* 30-2 22.7 AB 197-6 AC 13-6 Distance. Epoch. I02-I 1825-10 102-8 1835.88 109-7 1852.14 I2I-8 1877.13 4-4) .. 121-5} .. 1879.28 CXCII. A star with a distant companion, on the "Waggoner's loins ; and rather more than 6 down a line drawn from a Aurigae to y Orionis. A 5, pale yellow; [B 13]; C 9^, plum colour. As IjJ. described it merely "mul- tiple, 2 within 30," it is impossible to identify them in the group of small stars of the galaxy wherein they are placed. [A little coarsely- double star about 3' distant in the nf quadrant, not far from the parallel, is South's C. ( = Pos. 81; Dist. 193".) "The motion is rectilinear." GledhilL] 308. 33 . VII. AURIGA, (h. 350; H. 1067.) CXCIV. B.A. Decl. b. m, s. 5 12 9 N 39 13-7 Free. + 4-13 N 4-16 Position. o BUBNHAM 42-8 Distance. H 33-3 Epoch. 1879.59 A very delicate double star in a group, on the Waggoner's loins. A 7^, pale white ; B [n], dusky. A fine field of small stars in a rich neighbourhood, with but little disposition to form. The most prominent member is a bright orange-coloured star of the 7-8 magnitude, forming a scalene triangle, with two others to the sf ; near it, in the np quadrant, is the delicate pair above estimated, while on the N. verge of the field is a triplet of lo* 11 magnitude stars. IL describes it as a pretty compact cluster, " with one large star, the rest nearly of a size ; " but he makes no mention of the strong colour seen both by his son and myself. It is about 7 on the line from a Tauri towards y Orionis, or nearly one -sixth of the-; distance between those stars. 134 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 309. T ORIONIS. CXCVI. R.A. 5 12 16 Decl. S 6 57 '6 Position. Free. + 2-91 N 4-15 Distance. Epoch. AB 250-1 ... 36-0 \ HALL -{AC 59-8 ... 36-0 ... 1876-2 Bb 49-3 ... 3*7* AB 249-1 ... 36-2 \ BURNHAM A C 60-0 ... 36-1 V ... 1877-9 Bb 50-6 ... 4-0 J An extremely delicate quadruple star, on Orion's right instep ; where it is the vertex of an obtuse-angled triangle, formed with /3 Orionis and /3 Eri- dani. A 4, pale orange ; B [14], blue ; C 1 2, lilac ; [b 16]. A B and C lie nearly in a line sp and nf. The duplicity of B was discovered by Burnham. 310. 681 2. AURIGA. h. m. s. B.A. 5 12 26 Decl. N 46 51 '3 Position. Free, -f 4-46 N 4-13 Distance. Epoch. STRUVE, W. 180-5 ... 23-4 ... 1831-95 BURNHAM 180-8 ... 23-2 ... 1878-90 A double star. A 6J, yellowish white j B 9, bluish white. 311. 37 P. V. TAURI. h. m. s. R.A. 5 12 45 (2. 680.) Free. + 3'5<5 cxcv. N 4-10 Distance. Epoch. 8-7 ... 1827-85 9-0 ... 1830-81 Decl. N 20 1-2 Position. o STRUVE, W. 201-7 SMYTH 204-1 A very delicate double star, in the middle of the Bull's southern horn at nearly one-third of the distance between f and Aldebaran. A 7, deep yellow; B n, bluish. It is the last of a curious series of 6 stars nearly in the same declination ; the one immediately preceding it being 25 P. Y. 312. 28 R.A. 5 Decl. S HERSCHEL, J. BURNHAM LEPORIS, m. s. 15 44 21 21-2 Position. 295 283-3 (*h. Prec. 3750.) + 2-56 N 3-86 E och. 1835-9 1879-1 Distance 3 est. 4-2 A double star. A 6 ; B ioj. Described by Sir J. Herschel as " most beautiful." K.A. 5- 17 m, 313. 23 ORIONIS. (2. 696.) 135 CXCVII. B.A. 5 17 3 Decl. N 3 26-3 STBUVE SMYTH MAIN Position. o 28-2 27.9 28.4 Free. + 3-15 - N 3-77 Distance. Epoch. 31.7 .. 32.3 .. 31-1 .. 1835-17 1862-05 A neat double star in Orion's right arm-pit. A 5, white ; B 7, pale grey. This is a fine object for telescopes of moderate power. Taking all the probable errors of observation into consideration, there is perhaps no appreciable change, notwithstanding that 1$. in 1782 gave the distance as 26-1". [3 S. of y, a little p it.] 314. 70 P. V. LEPORIS. (*h. 3752.) R.A. Decl. h. m. s. 5 17 15 S 24 53'3 Free. + X s. 2-46 HERSCHEL, J. STONE, 0. Position. JAB 110.3 I AC 106-1 AB 105.0 Distance. // ... 3-3} ... 58-8 } 3-5 Epoch. ... 1837.30 ... 1877-0 A triple star. A 6 ; B g\ ; C. 9. 315. h. m. s. B.A. 5 17 25 Decl. N 56-8 700 2. ORIONIS. s. Free, -f 3-09 N 3-70 Distance. Epoch. 4-5 ... 1831.48 A double star. A 8%, white ; B 9, white. Position. o STBUVE, W. 5.2 316. 698 2. AURIGA. h. m. s. 5 17 54 o / R.A. Decl. N 34 44'8 Position. STBUVE, W. 346-1 Free. + 3-98 N 3-66 Distance. Epoch. 31-1 ... 1831-23 A double star. A 6-5, yellow ; B 8 j, bluish. 136 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 317. Ill TAUEI. CXCVIII. h. m. s. B.A. 5 17 59 Decl. N 17 17'1 Position. o HERSCHEL, W. 273-8 SOUTH 2 7 I> 3 SMYTH FLAMMARION BURNHAM Free. + 3-47 N 3-66 Distance. Epoch. 50.4 ... 1783-16 61-7 ... 1825-06 63 ... 1832.95 75.2 ... 1877-13 74-8 ... 1879-06 A star with a distant comes, below the middle of the Bull's southern horn, in a poor field ; and in the mid-distance between y Orionis and /3 Tauri. A 6, white ; and B 8 J, lilac. [The distance is increasing owing to proper motion.] 271-2 271-5 270-7 318. 88 B. ORIONIS. (2. 701.) s. Free. + 2-87 h. m. s. R.A. 5 18 2 Decl. S 8 31-2 K 3-65 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STRUVE, W. 145-9 ... 5.9 ... 1830-48 A double star. A 7, very white ; B 9, ashy. 19. rj ORIONIS. h. m. s. 8. R.A. 5 18 56 Prec. + 3-01 1 M Decl. S 2 29*9 N 3-58 Position. Distance. Epoch. o DAWES 88- 7 0.94 1848-11 JACOB 83- 7 o-75 I853-99 DUNR 88-0 0-84 1869-19 DEMBOWSKI 84-7 ... I-O2 1873-70 DOBERCK 87-3 ... I-I2 1878-08 BURNHAM 81-9 1-06 1879.10 A close double star, discovered to be such by Dawes in 1848. A 4, white ; B 5, purplish. The measures are very discordant. 320. 129 Dunlop HYDRI. (h. 2827 ; H. 1117.) Prec. + 0-41 h. m. s. R.A. 5 18 58 Decl. S 69 19-7 3-57 A cluster thus described in Sir JY Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : R.A. 5 h . i; m - 5 h - i9 m - 137 " Cl ; L ; p Hi ; i R ; st 1 1 ... 16 ; " which means : " a cluster ; large ; pretty rich ; of an irregular round outline ; composed of stars from the n th to the 1 6 th magnitudes." 321. y ORIONIS. cc. h. m. s. s. R.A. 5 19 13 c Decl. N 6 15-0 Prec. -J- 3.21 N 3-55 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // SMYTH 150-0 ... 178-0 ... 1838-85 CHALLIS 148-1 ... 180-4 1841-19 BUBNHAM 144-4 X 77'8 1880-00 A bright star, with a minute distant companion, on Orion's right shoulder; and one of Ijf /s insulated objects. A 2, pale but clear yellow ; B 15, grey; a third star precedes by about 34 s , in the sp quadrant. y Orionis was rejected from the Nautical Almanac List in 1830, there being no fewer than four others of this constellation retained as standards : it is called Bellatrix, or the female warrior, and is the smaller of the two upper stars in Orion. The gender of this star puzzles Hood, who knoweth not why it should be female, " excepte it be this, that women born under this constellation shall have mighty tongues." y Orionis is the N.W. star of the 4 at the corners of this asterism, so to speak ; and an ideal line, carried from Sirius over a Tauri to the Bull's ear, passes over it in the mid distance ; the rhymester then directs, From Bellatrix now pass a line, to Betelgeuze the red, And, to the north, three little stars will mark Orion's head. A friend considered my distance as " much too large/' and the colour of A to be "reddish." On referring to Mr. Challis, that gentleman examined the object with the great Northumberland equatorial, and pro- nounced A to be " yellowish." Bellatrix has a small though sensible movement in space; but the doctors differ respecting its amount and direction. 322. /3 TAURI. CXCIX. h. m. s. R.A. 5 19 20 Decl. N 28 31 '0 Prec. + 3-78 // -N 3'53 Position. Difference of E. A. Epoch. SMYTH 2250 ... 14.5 ... 1836-65 A Nautical Almanac star, with a distant companion, and three other 138 A Cycle of Celestial Oljects. small stars in the field, forming a regular figure with the 2 preceding and 2 following (3. A 2, brilliant white; B 10, pale grey. This object, /3, is on the very tip of the horn of Taurus, and therefore at the greatest distance from the hoof. This position gained it the name of Nath, from Al-ndfih, the butting ; and as it is also in the Waggoner's left ancle, it was called Kab'dhi-l-indn, i.e., heel of the rein-holder, and entered on several Catalogues as y Aurigse. In finding Nath by alignment, it must be sought about half-way between the Pleiades and Pollux ; or, following the poet's dogma, a line sent From centre of Orion's belt to where Capella's seen, Will point to the observant eye Nath in mid-way between. 323. 84 P. V. OEIONIS. (2. 708.) CCI. h. m. s. s. R.A. 5 19 28 Decl. N 1 49-4 Prec. + 3-11 N 3-52 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, W. 322-8 ... 2-0+ ... 1782-76 STEUVE, W. 323-2 ... 2-61 ... 1831-81 SMYTH 322.5 ... 2-6 ... 1835-11 MAIN 35'9 ... 2-4 ... 1862.11 A close double star on Orion's right side ; where a line from Orion's belt towards a Tauri passes it at about 4^ below y Orionis. A 8, silvery white ; B 10, grey. This delicate object was placed by 2. in his First Class, " plurium maxima." There are few close double stars whose fixity for upwards of half a century has been more satisfactorily proved than this, so Main's angle would seem to be a misprint. 324. 79 M. LEPOBIS. (H. 1112.) CCIII. h. m. B.A. 5 19 53 o Decl. S 24 36-9 Prec. + 2-47 3-53 A bright stellar nebula, of a milky white tinge, under the Hare's feet, the following edge of whose disc just precedes a line formed by two stars lying across the vertical, and it is followed nearly on the parallel by a 9 th magnitude star. It is a fine object, blazing towards the centre, and was discovered by Me" chain in 1780. It was resolved by IjjL into a mottled nebulosity, in 1783, with a 7 ft telescope; but on applying the 20 ft in the following year, he fairly made it a " beautiful cluster of stars nearly 3 minutes in diameter, of a globular construction, and certainly extremely rich." The mean apparent place is obtained by differentiation E.A. 5 h - I 9 m. __ 5 h. 2I m. 139 from f Leporis, a fine white star, with a red companion of the 7 th mag- nitude in the np quadrant. An imaginary line run from a Orionis before a Leporis and over /3 will hit this object about 4 S.W. of the latter. 325. 39 $.VII. AURIGA. (h. 354; H. 1114; 8.) CCII. h. m. s. s. R.A. 5 20 38 Decl. N 35 13 '3 Prec. + 4'QO N 3-48 Position. Distance. Epoch. O M SMYTH 235 ... 5 ... 1836-79 A minute double star announces this cluster, on the robe under the left thigh of Auriga. A 9J and B n, both grey. The object is a compressed oval cluster of 10 th to 14 th magnitude stars, about 3' in diameter, trending $/"and np, with a pair of io th magnitude stars to the N. ; in a splendid district of the heavens. It is about 1 2 down on the line which the eye projects from a Aurigse towards a Orionis, and is there intercepted by another line drawn from y Orionis through J3 Tauri, and extended 6 beyond. [" Neat little cluster. Its centre consists of about 40 or 50 stars ; the outlying stars are arranged in curved branches," Parsonstown 06s.] 326. \ ORIONIS. R.A. 5 21 3 c Decl. 4- 30-0 Prec. + 3-14 N 3-39 Position. Distance. Epoch. O n KNOTT 322-1 ... 2-5 ... 1863-15 DEMBOWSKI 324.9 ... 2-6 ... 1875-10 A neat double star discovered by Knott in 1863. A 5^, yellow ; B 1 1, blue. A little sp is 2. 712 (Pos. 55; Dist. 2-9"; Epoch 1878-0), which is a double star, mags. 7 and 9, the angle of which is evidently increasing. 327. 10254 Lai. LEPORIS. (*h, 3750.) h. R.A. 5 21 15 Decl. S 19 46-6 Prec. + 2-59 N 3-37 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, J. 315.3 ... 28-7 ... 1837-95 STONE, 0. 317-4 ... 27-9 ... 1877-10 A double star. A 6 ; 69. 140 328. A Cycle of Celestial Objects. COLUMBUS. (*h. 3760.) h. m. s. R.A. 5 21 58 Decl. S 35 26-7 Position, o A triple star, A 6 ; B 7 ; C 1 1. Prec. + 2-13 N 3-32 Distance. Epoch. . 7-3 -. 1835.57 20+ ... 1836-02 329. 38 M. AURIGA. (H. 1119 ; &. s. Prec. + 4-02 CCIV. b. m. s. R.A. 5 22 2 Decl. N 35 44 '1 N 3-39 Position. Difference of R. A. o s. SMYTH 251 ... 14-5 Epoch. 1835.80 A rich cluster of minute stars, on the Waggoner's left thigh, of which a remarkable pair in the following part are here estimated. A 7, yellow; and B 9, pale yellow; having a little companion about 25" off in the s/* quadrant. Messier discovered this in 1764, and described it " a mass of stars of a square form without any nebulosity, extending to about 15' of a degree;" but it is singular that the palpable cruciform shape of the most clustering part did not attract his notice. It is an oblique cross, with a pair of large stars in each arm, and a conspicuous single one in the centre ; the whole followed by a bright individual of the 7 th magnitude. The very unusual shape of this cluster recalls the sagacity of Sir W. Herschel's speculations upon the subject, and very much favours the idea of an attractive power lodged in the brightest part. For although the form be not globular, it is plainly to be seen that there is a tendency towards sphericity, by the swell of the dimensions as they draw near the most luminous place, denoting, as it were, a stream, or tide of stars, setting towards a centre. As the stars in the same nebula must be very nearly all at the same relative distances from us, and they appear to be about the same size, Sir William infers that their real magnitudes must be nearly equal. Granting, therefore, that these nebulae and clusters of stars are formed by their mutual attraction, he concludes that we may judge of their relative ages by the disposition of their component parts, those being the oldest which are the most compressed. To fish up this object, a line from j3 Orionis must be carried north- E.A. h. 141 wards through /3 Tauri, on the tip of the Bull's left horn, and about 7 beyond, where it will be intersected by the ray from a Aurigse to a Orionis. [" Glorious neighbourhood." Webb.] ["Query, if the right place?" Parsonstown Obs. But this query applies to Sir J. Herschel's place, which for 1890 is B. A. 5 h 2i m i7 8 .] 330. 118 TAURI h. m. s. R.A. 5 22 30 Decl. N 25 3 6 Positioi o HERSCHEL, W. 192-7 STBUVE, W. 196-7 SMYTH 195-9 WILSON and SEABBOKE 200-1 JEDBZEJEWICZ 200-7 . (2. 716.) Prec. + 3'68 3' 2 4 i. Distance. ... 5-o ... 4-8 ... 5-o ... 5-0 ... 5-i ccv. Epoch. 1782-94 1829-63 1838-91 1874-10 1880-09 A very neat double star, between the tips of the Bull's horns ; and mid-way between the Pleiades and 8 Geminorum. A 7, white; B 7^, pale blue. 331. 175 Dunlop DORADTTS. (h. 2844; H. 1142.) s. 36 Prec. 0-21 N 3-25 R.A. 5 22 Decl. S 68 4-7 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " ! ; p B ; S ; R ; 4 th of Group ;" which means : " a remarkable object ; pretty bright ; small ; round ; the 4 th of a group." The other members of this group are all very faint. Engraved, Cape Obs., PI. iii. Fig. 2. 332. 109 P. V. ORIONIS. (2. 722. rej.) 2-87 CCVII. R.A. h. m. s. 5 23 25 Prec. + Decl. S 8 28-0 X Position. Distance. CTBNHAM o // 300-3 ... 26-2 3-14 Epoch. l88o.OO A delicate double star, in the space between Orion's right heel and left knee ; where it may be found by drawing a line from the third star in Orion's belt, over the sword cluster, and carrying it nearly as far again beyond. A 7^, pale white; and B 10, blue. This pretty object was 2.'s 142 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 722, but is not placed among his measured stars; being branded in the great Catalogue with " rej" It is in a barren but brightish field, in which an occasional glow seems to verify the "diffused nebulosity" which H/s powerful light-grasping 2o ft reflector saw. 333. j8 LEPOBIS. CCVIII. B.A. 5 23 31 Free, -f 2-57 / .J Decl. S 20 50*8 N 3-19 Position. Distance. Epoch. // HERSCHBL, J. AC 145-9 70 est. ... 1834.94 SAB 288-3 2-68 \ BURNHAM A D 75-0 ... 2c6-3 [ 1879-88 AE 57-6 ... 241.5 ) . [A close double star with distant telescopic companions, between the legs of Lepus. A 3, deep yellow; Bn; Ci2; Dn; E 10.] This star is often called Nihal, but the name is more properly applied to a, ft, y } and 6, the Arabian Al-nihdl, or thirst-slaking camels ; it will be identified by drawing a line from the middle star of Orion's belt, through the sword, and extending it 3 below a Leporis. [Estimates of A's mag. vary. Gould puts it at 3 ; and so Flamsteed and Lalande : but Argelander has 3^ ; Piazzi, and Taylor, 4. About i m 5o 8 preceding this star is a pretty pair ( = /3 3 19) of mags. 7 j- and ioj,of which Dembowski gives : Pos. 231; Dist. 3-9"; Epoch 1876-1.] 334. 96 B. AUBIG.SE. (2. 718.) Free. + 4-60 o m. s. B.A. 5 23 43 Decl. N 49 18 '3 N 3-16 Position. Distance. Epoch. o n STRDVE, W. 74.1 ... 7.8 ... 1829.90 MAIN 74-2 ... 7-7 ... 1863-22 A double star. A 8, very white ; B 8, very white. 335. 31 OBIONIS. (2. 725.) h. m. 8. B.A. 5 23 59 o Decl. S 1 10 '8 Free. + 3-04 N 3-12 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE, W. 87.5 ... 12.7 ... 1829.41 STONE, 0. 88.4 ... 12.7 ... 1879-09 A double star. A 5|, golden; B 11, blue. The colour of A has R.A. 5 h ' 23 m ---sh- 24- 143 attracted the notice of many observers. Lalande called it "rouge;" Schmidt "gelb-roth;" Birmingham, "light orange." The last-named observer remarked on the contrast it afforded to its blue comes iu 1876. 336. 261 t. I. AURIGA. (h. 355; H. 1137; &.) CCVI. R.A. 5 24 9 Decl. N 34 9'6 Prec. + 3'97 N 3-13 A resolveable nebula, on the lower garment of Auriga, about 2-5 m sf 38 M. 1$. remarked that it "seems to have one or two stars in the middle, or an irregular nucleus." This object was next examined by H., who described it as a nebula including a triple star, surrounding them like an atmosphere. The nebula is situated in a rich field of minute stars, with 5 of the io th magnitude, disposed in an equatorial line above, or to the S. of it, and preceded by a bright yellow 7^ magnitude star in the same direction. After intently gazing, under moderate power, the triangle rises distinctly from the star-dust, and presents a singular subject for speculation. [" Very faint : not resolveable in any ordinary telescope." Srodie.] [Engraved in Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. v. Fig. 49.] 337. 32 ORIONIS. (2. 728.) CCIX. h. R.A. 5 24 54 c Decl. N 5 52-0 Prec. + 3-20 N 3-10 Position. Distance. Epoch, o // HERSCHEL. W. 217-8 ... i + ... 1782-05 STKUVE, W. 203-7 I>0 4 - 1830-96 SMYTH 206.2 ... i-o ... 1839-20 JACOB 202-4 I '7 I i 8 53'43 SPORER 188-9 ... 0-44 ... 1877.19 BURNHAM 196-6 ... 0-48 ... 1878-50 A close double star, on Orion's right shoulder. A 5, bright white; B 7, pale white. This elegant object was discovered by IjjjL, and his observations compared with later results show retrograde motion [and a diminution in the distance ; though the observations as set out in full by Gledhill are very discordant.] A line from the leading star of Orion's belt carried towards /3 Tauri passes 32 Orionis at rather more than 6, where it will be seen just to the E. of y Orionis. 144 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 338. 33 ORIONIS. (2. 729.) OCX. R.A. Decl. h. 5 m. 25 3 8. 28 12-5 Positio Prec. + N a. Distance. i. 3 3 M 02 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH STBUVE, W. SMYTH o 26-2 25.6 25-8 26-2 Epoch. 2-02 ... 1822.02 1-87 ... 1831-22 2-0 ... 1838-21 1-7 ... 1872-86 A close double star, on Orion's right shoulder, where it is a little more than one-third of the distance from Bellatrix to the last, or following star of Orion's belt. A 6, white ; B 8, pale blue ; with a distant 8 th magnitude star in the np quadrant. This superb object is not of very difficult measurement, though rated as one of S.'s " vicinse." No change in the angle ; but as Ip . says the stars were only half the diameter of the small star apart, the distance may possibly have increased. [Between y and f, but nearer the former.] 339. 730 2. TAURI. K.A. h. m. s. 5 25 51 Decl. N 16 58-1 Position. o 141-8 STRUVE, W. Prec. + 3-47 N 2-97 Distance. Epoch. 9-8 ... 1831-42 A double star. A 7, very white; B fj, very white. 340. 8 OBIONIS. (S. 14 App. I.) h. m. s. R.A. 5 26 23 Decl. S 22-9 Position. o HEBSCHEL, W. 358-2 STBUVE, W. 359-2 MAIN 359-0 JEDBZEJEWICZ 359-6 Prec. + 3-06 ft N 3-00 Distance. H 52-9 5 2 '7 53-6 52-8 Epoch. 1779-77 1835.70 1863-06 1877-82 CCXI. A Nautical Almanac star, coarsely double ; it is the leader of the three "bullions" in Orion's girdle or belt, and nearly on the equator. A 2, brilliant white; B 7, pale violet. [Burnham has found a very minute companion of mag. 14, in Pos. 227; Bist. 33-8"; Epoch 1878-9. This is /3 558.] E. A. 5 h - 25 m '--5 h - 2; m - 145 The coincidence of these results proves the fixity of the large star, and militates against the large amount of proper motion which has been imputed to it. This star being the leader in Orion's beautiful belt, has been popularly distinguished under various names. Among astronomers it is usually known as Mintaka, from the Arabian Hfintakah-al-jauza, the giant's belt ; which some people also designated al-lekat, the gold grains or spangles. It was also called, with its associates, Jacob's staff, perhaps from the tradi- tional idea mentioned by Eusebius, that Israel was an astrologer. It was also the Golden Yard of seamen, the Three Kings of soothsayers, the Ell-and-yard of tradesmen, the Rake of husbandmen, and Our Ladys Wand of the Papists. The belt points on one side to Sirius, the brightest of all the stars ; and on the other to the Hyades and Pleiades ; and the rhymester points out the individual before us : In the blue va^t, Orion's Belt shines with its bullions three, And of those bright conspicuous gems the first as delta see. 341, 1 M. TAURI. (h. 357; H. 1157; .) CCXII. h. m. s. R.A. 5 27 51 c Decl. N 21 56'6 Free. + 3-60 N 2-80 A large nebula, pearly white, about i N.W. of the star f on the tip of the Bull's southern horn, and on the outskirts of the Galaxy. It is of an oval form, with its axis-major trending np and sf, and the brightest portion towards the S. Sir J. Herschel registers this in his Catalogue of 1833 as a "barely resolvable cluster ;" and figures it with a fair elliptical boundary. He applied his 7, 10, and 2O ft reflectors, and endeavoured to ascertain its relative distance by a modification of their space-penetrating capacity. "As all the observations," he concludes, "of the large telescopes agree to call this object resolveable, it is probably a cluster of stars at no very great distance beyond their gauging powers; its profundity may therefore be of about the 98o ta order." All this shows the difficulty of what to my view is rather a milky nebulosity than a cluster. The powerful telescope constructed by Lord Rosse, however, not only displays the component stars distinctly, but also shows several fringy appendages around, and a deep bifurcation to the S. So do sidereal wonders increase with our optical means. This fine nebula is remarkable as having been discovered by M. Messier the comet-ferret of Louis XV. while observing f Tauri and a comet in 1758, when he caught up a "whitish light, elongated like the flame of a taper." This accident induced him to form his well-known and useful Catalogue of nebulse and clusters, from the observations of himself, La 146 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. Caille, and Mechain, in order to prevent astronomers from mistaking any of those objects for comets ; and the List of 103 which he furnished to the public was considered to have scraped them all together, as far as climate permitted. Whence D'Alembert, speaking of Messier, observed, "on ne peut s'empecher de regretter qu'un Observateur si exact et si plein de zele, n'ait pas et plac dans un climat plus heureux." But the progress of astronomy has not depended upon climate, as the names of Tycho, Romer, Flamsteed, Bradley, Hevelius, Huyghens, Schroter, Gibers, and others of the icpa 1 h. 5 a m. 27 T7 a LEI 52 ORIS. Prec. - 1 s. K 2-64 CCXIII. R. A. 5 h - 2; m - 5 h - 29- 147 Position. Distance. Epoch. O H HERSCHEL, J. 154-8 ... 25 ... not stated. STONE, O. 156-0 ... 35-6 ... 1877-11 A Nautical Almanac star of 1830, with a distant companion, on the body of Lepus. A 3^, pale yellow ; B 9^, grey ; a bright 6 th magnitude in the np quadrant. This object is easily found by alignment ; for a ray carried from e, the central star of Orion's belt, through and its nebulous patch on the sword, as low down as Sirius, falls upon a Leporis ; it is thus recorded in galley-rhymes : Orion's image, on the south, Las four stars small but fair: Their figure quadrilateral points out the timid Hare. This asterism is one of the old 48, and is said to have been placed immediately below Orion, as emblematic of caution and celerity. The Arabians called a, Arneb, from al-arneb, the hare ; it was also, in con- junction with /3, y, and b, named Kursa, from Kursd-l-jauzd, or 'Arsh- al-jauzd, the giant's chair or throne. It is a poorish constellation if such a term may be applied to those wondrous assemblages and has been thus registered : Ptolemy . . . 12 stars. Hevelius . . . 1 6 stars. Tycho Brah6 . . 13 Flamsteed ... 19 Bayer .... 14 Bode .... 66 343. 36 M. AURIGA, (h. 358 ; H. 1166 ; 2. 737; .) CCXIV. h. m. s. s. B.A. 5 29 2 c Decl. INT 34 4-2 Prec. -f 3-96 i N 2-70 Position. Distance. Epoch. c STBUVE.W. 305-0 ... 10-6 ... 1829-24 SMYTH 308-7 ... 12 ... 1836-71 A neat double star in a splendid cluster, on the robe below the Waggoner's left thigh, and near the centre of the Galaxy stream. A 8, and B 9, both white ; in a rich though open splash of stars from the 8 th to the 14 th magnitudes, with numerous outliers, like the device of a star whose rays are formed of small stars. The double star, as H. remarks, is admirably placed for future astronomers to ascertain whether there be internal motion in clusters. A line carried from the central star in Orion's belt, through f Tauri, and continued about 13 beyond, will reach the cluster, which follows < Aurigse by about 2. L 2 148 344. A Cycle of Celestial Objects. A ORIONIS. (2. 738.) h. m. s. s. R.A. 5 29 5 Free. + 3-30 o / // Decl. N 9 51-5 N 2-70 Position. Distance. o n HERSCHEL, W. AB 44.8 ... 5-8 ... STRUVE, W. AB 40-5 4-2 ... SMYTH AB 43-0 4-5 . ... DUNER AB 43-6 4-1 ... JEDRZEJEWICZ A B 43-0 4-3 ... BURNHAM AC 182.7 ... 28.6 ... ccxv. Epoch. 1779.88 1830-81 1843-19 1870-22 1879-30 1880-07 A neat double star, in Orion's ear; where it will be seen at about 5 on a line shot from a Orionis to a Tauri, being the northern of the three small stars forming Orion's head. A 4, pale white; and B 6, violet. [A yellow; Bblue. Dembowski^] This fine object appears to be fixed. This double star, and the two 's in Orion's head, forms, says Kazwmi, an athdfi constituting the V th Lunar Mansion; the peculiar aspect of which gained A the name of Heka, from al-7iek'ak, a white spot. On the early application of the telescope to this spot, Galileo found it to consist of 2 1 stars ; but this definition of it does not seem to have obtained generally. "It is evident," says IjjE., "the whole appeared nebulous to Flamsteed for no other reason than because his telescope had not sufficient power to distinguish them." Hence the term, in capite nebulosa, of the Catalogues. It forms the apex of a triangle, the base of which extends between a and y Orionis. [Gould considers this star certainly variable to the extent of " more than half a unit."] 345. 743 2. ORIONIS. R.A. 5 29 16 Decl. S 4 28'2 Position. o STRUVE, W. 277-7 STONE, 0. 278-2 Free. + 2-97 N 2-60 Distance. Epoch. n 1-82 ... 1830-70 1879-10 STONE, O. 278-2 ... 1-90 ... I8J A double star. A 7 J, very white ; B 8|-, very white. 346. 133 B. ORIONIS. (2. 747.) h. m. s. s. R.A. 5 29 48 Decl. S 6 5-3 Free. + 2-93 N 2-63 RA. 5 b- 149 Position. Distance. Epoch. O H STROVE, W. 223-1 ... 35-8 ... 1833.59 MAIN 223-2 ... 36-0 ... 1871-21 JEDBZEJEWICZ 223-1 ... , 35.9 ... 1879-60 A double star. A 6, yellowish ; B 7, ashy. 347. 38O B. TAUI h. m. s. R.A. 5 29 5O Decl. N 21 55-8 Position, o STROVE, W. 247-1 MADLEB 249-7 DA WES 251-3 MAIN 251-7 TALMAGE 255-8 star. A 8, yellowish ; ] II. (2. Free. 742.) s. + 3' N 2 e. A 60 Epoch. 1828-19 1841-22 1852-64 1863-23 1872-14 slow increase in the Distance. rr 3-i8 3-47 3.26 3-46 3-66 * 8, whit angle is certainly taking place. 348. O 1 OBIONIS. (M.42; h.360; H.1179; 2.748; . CCXVI. Epoch. R.A. Decl. h. 5 S m. s. 29 52 o / 5 27-7 Position. Free. + N Distance. 5. 2 2 '94 64 SMYTH JEDRZEJEWICZ 1834-07 1877-8 , AB 311-1 ... 13-0 \ \ AC 60-2 ... 13-5 f ) AD 344-7 ... 16-7 i I BE 350 ... 5 ' TAB 31-9 ... 8.71 A C 131-6 ... 12-8 I AD 95-6 ... 21-4 I B C 162-7 ... 16-9 | | B D 299-6 ... 19-2 I [CD 241-0 ... 13-3 J A multiple star, the beautiful trapezium in the " Fish's mouth" of the vast nebula in the middle of Orion's sword- scabbard. A 6, pale white ; B 7, faint lilac ; C 7j, garnet ; D 8, reddish ; and E loj, blue. This had the honour of being the object to which the grand 4O ft reflector was first directed by ll., in February, 1787, and by him was designated "quadruple." As a trapezium it was gazed at, measured, and delineated, for upwards of 50 years, when 2. announced it " quintuplex," by the addition of the little star E. Now when we consider the eye of IjjJ., the measures of South, and the rigorous examination of H., this little companion must be looked upon as variable ; indeed nothing can exceed the confidence with which H. assured me of its not being visible when he made the beautiful 150 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. drawing of 1824, confirmed by himself and Mr. Ramage on the 13^ of March. 1826 ; and yet in 1828 it was not to be overlooked but by wilful inattention. [A 6 th star of mag. 12, now known as F, was detected by Sir J. Herschel in 1830, and since then some others have been seen with more or less certainty, and Huggins now puts the number of the constituents at 9. (See the Handbook of Astronomy, 3 rd ed., p. 532.) There being so many stars to deal with, it becomes rather a complicated matter to tabulate angles and distances, and it is best to have resort to a diagram. In the opinion of 0. Struve, no changes in angle or distance have taken place since the earliest observations: he thinks, however, that E and F, and perhaps some of the others, are variable. His measures of AF are: Pos. 131; Dist. 3-8"; Epoch 1870-70.] Ptolemy, Tycho Brahe, and Hevelius ranked 6 of the 3 rd magnitude, as did Bayer in his Uranometria, all evidently supposing the two con- tiguous stars and the bright spot constituted a single star. The effulgent nebula in which it is placed, familiarly called the Fish's head, with its streaming appendages, certainly has an irregular resemblance to the head of some monster of the polyneme genus. Its brilliancy is not equal throughout, but the glare of the brighter parts gives intensity to the darkness which they bound, and excites a sensation of looking through it into the luminous regions of illimitable space, a sensation not entirely owing to any optical illusion of contrast. This supposition must have forced itself upon Huyghens, independently of any recollection of the empyrean heaven of the ancients; and had Voltaire seen the object under powerful means, he would hardly have lashed Dr. Derham for asking whether nebula be not this shining region, seen through a chasm of the 2)rimum mobile. Another wonderful singularity is, that the nebu- lous and apparently attenuated matter seems to recede from the stars of the trapezium, so as to leave a black space around each, between them and the glow, as though they were either repelling or absorbing it. This is a most splendid object under any telescope, but the greater the optical power applied, the more inexplicable does it become. My own telescope showed it to very great advantage, but it is here where the light-grasping quality of reflectors is brought advantageously to bear. Thus in the 2O ft telescope at Slough, Sir J. Herschel gained perceptions of its modification which were not decided to my view. " I know not,'" he says, " how to describe it better than by comparing it to a curdling liquid, or a surface strewed over with flocks of wool, or to the breaking up of a mackerel sky, when the clouds of which it consists begin to assume a cirrous appearance. It is not very unlike the mottling of the sun's disc, only, if I may so express myself, the grain is much coarser, and the intervals darker; and the flocculi, instead of being generally round, are drawn into little wisps. They present, however, no R. A. 5 n - 151 appearance of being composed of stars, and their aspect is altogether different from that of resolveable nebulae." Such, at present, are the only ascertained peculiarities of the wondrous mass. It is pronounced to be of the singular nature termed milky nebulosity by Sir ~W. Herschel. " To attempt," he remarks, " even at a guess at what this light may be, would be presumptuous. If it should be surtnised, for instance, that this nebulosity is of the nature of the zodiacal light, we should then be obliged to admit the existence of an effect without its cause. An idea of a phosphorical condition is not more philosophical, unless we could show from what source of phosphorical matter such immeasureable tracts of luminous phenomena could draw their existence and permanency: for though minute changes have been observed, yet a general resem- blance, allowing for the difference of telescopes, is still to be perceived in the great nebulosity of Orion, ever since the time of its first discovery." This illustrious astronomer was, at first, inclined to consider all the nebulae as resolveable, but this milky instance, with that in Andromeda, contradicted the notion, and led him to inferences respecting nebulous matter, and its possible gradation to stars by condensation, so as to form a distinct and plausible theory of cosmogony. We are told that this nebula was one of the first-fruits of Galileo's telescope ; but it is certain that Huyghens discovered it by accident in 1656, as stated in his Systema Saturnium, where he notes, "Portentum, cui certe simile aliud nusquam apud reliquas fixas potuit animadverti." From a comparison of the descriptions and dra wings of this object, since his time, great alterations might be inferred; but astronomical delineation was not then suffi- ciently advanced to render the diagrams at all satisfactory, nor were the instruments suffi- ciently powerful. Thus, while one man thinks his 3^ ft tele- scope indicated "myriads upon myriads" of stars in its com- position, Lord Rosse, with the most powerful and perfect in- strument then extant, gained no appearance of resolution. It may therefore be concluded, that the first rigidly accurate representation of it, is that by Sir J. Herschel ; and he who wishes to acquire all the actual knowledge^ we at present possess on the subject, cannot refer to a better FIG. 9. 1 ORIOXIS. A Cycle of Celestial Objects. description than that contained in his paper, published in the Memoirs of the Astronomical Society, vol. iii. "Several astronomers," says Sir John, " on comparing this nebula with the figures of it handed down to us by its discoverer, Huyghens, have concluded that its form has undergone a perceptible change; but when it is considered how difficult it is to represent such an object duly, and how entirely its appearance will differ even in the same telescope, according to the clearness of the air, or other temporary causes, we shall readily admit that we have no evidence of change that can be relied on." To the drawing which illustrates that account, posterity will refer with confidence, in order to " catch Nature in the fact : " meantime, it seems clear, that if the parallax of this nebula be no greater than that of the stars, as one hypothesis assumes, its breadth cannot be less than a hundred times that of the diameter of the Earth's orbit : but if, as is still more probable, at a vast distance beyond, its magnitude must be utterly inconceivable. This luminous spot is so well known to all star-gazers, that it is hardly necessary to add, that a line projected from a Orionis, through f, the third of the belt, will pass upon and the nebula, in the sword- scabbard. The portion called the Fish's mouth, with the well-known trapezium, is rudely sketched in the preceding figure. 2 Orionis, which is 133" from 1 , on an angle=i35, is coarsely double, of the 6 tn and 7 tn magnitudes. At the epoch above named, viz. 1834-07, the components measured 91-5 as the angle of position, and 52" for the distance. [Observations during the last 40 years have given rise to strange discrepancies in the accounts of different observers, both as to the nature and as to the physical appearance of this object. Many have asserted that it has undergone change, but the evidence as to this falls far short of what is needed for absolute proof. Hugging as the result of spectrum observations asserts that it is gaseous /] [Engraved in Cape Obs., PI. viii. Fig. i ; Bond, Trans. Amer. Acad., N.S., vol. iii. p. 96: Lassell, Mem. R.A.S., vol. xxiii. PI. i. Fig. i.") 349. I ORIONIS. (2. 752.) CCXVIII. I ORIONIS h. m. s. R.A. 5 30 3 / Decl. S 5 59 '0 Position, o STRUVE, W. AB 142-2 SMYTH JAB 141-7 ( AC 102.8 DAWES AB 141.2 MAIN AB 139.5 . (2. 752.) s. Prec. + 2- N-?. 93 Epoch. 1831-86 1847-65 1863.06 Distance. ... 48-9 > ... ii-6 II-2 A fine triple star, in a good field on Orion's sword-scabbard j and 5' RA. 29 m> > m. 153 S. of the middle star in the belt. A 3!, white; B [8], pale blue; and C n, grape red. Piazzi says of i, in his Notce y "Duplex: comes 0-4'' temporis sequitur, et vix distingui potest," but his instrument being fully equal to distinguish such a magnitude as that of B, his remark excites a suspicion that it may be variable. There is a glow about this object when viewed under favouring circumstances ; yet I cannot assert that the nebulosity in which it is enveloped is clearly seen. But under proper means it is well worth scrutiny; for nebulous stars are certainly among the most remarkable objects in the heavens, and perhaps should be distinguished from stellar nebulaB in being of a less doubtful character as to the state of condensation, the central matter in such being suddenly vivid and sharply defined. When Sir J. South re-examined this star, in 1824, A and B were con- sidered, from the apparent change of angle in 45 years, to have a direct orbital motion = 4- 0-2 per annum ; but more recent observations do not support the inference. [The synonymes of this as a nebula are 31 1$. V.; h. 361 ; H. 1183.] 350, 362 h. ORIONIS. (H. 1184 ; &. ; 2. 750.) CCXVII. S. + 2-97 N 2-60 Epoch. 1831-21 1840-14 187006 1879.09 A delicate double star in the wide-spread cluster on Orion's sword. A 6, lucid white; B 9, pale blue. The principal members of this group of stars are of the 6 th and 7 th magnitudes, with some smaller; and from their brightness and disposition form a capital test for the light of a telescope. h. R.A. 5 m. 3O S, 4 Free. t Decl. S 4 25-4 Position. Distance. H STBUVE, W. 59' 2 ... 4-3 DAWES 61-8 ... 4i MAIN 61.8 ... 3-7 STONE, 0. 58-6 ... 4-3 351. 43 M. ORIONIS. (H. 1185.) R.A. Decl. 30 6 o / 5 20-5 Free. + 2-95 N 2-6 r A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " ! v B; v L ; E, with tail ; mb M * 8-9 ;" which means : " a remarkable and very bright object ; very large ; round with a tail ; much brighter in the middle where there is a star of the 8-9 magnitude." Engraved, Cape Obs., PL viii. Fig. i ; Bond, Trans. Amer. Acad., N.S., vol. iii. p. 96 ; Lassell, Mem. R.A.S., vol. xxiii. PL i. Fig. i. 154 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 352. 749 2. TAURI. h. m. s. * R.A. 5 30 16 Decl. N 26 51-5 Free, -f 3-74 N 2-95 Position. Distance. Epoch, o " STBUVE,W. 23-4 ... 0-70 ... 1827.26 MADLER 18-9 ... 0.77 ... 1844-04 STROVE, 0. 17-0 ... 0-80 ... 1849-24 ROMBERG 186-9 ' 8 1864.10 A double star. A 7^, very white ; B 8, very white. Slow retrograde motion. 353. 214 Dunlop DORADUS. (h. 289O ; H. 1205.) h. R.A. 5 30 24 D Decl. S 66 57-9 Free. 0-05 N 2-58 A nebula thus described in Sir. J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; S ; R ; * + neb in v L cl f which means : " very bright ; small ; round. There is a double star besides the nebula in a very large cluster." 354. ORIONIS. (34 $. V.; li. 363; H. 1193; &*) CCXIX. h. R.A. 5 30 38 o Decl. SI 16'4 Free. + 3-04 N 2-53 Position. Distance. Epoch. D // BURNHAM 57-0 ... 179-9 1879-90 A Nautical Almanac star, in the centre of Orion's belt, with a distant companion. A 2\, bright white, and nebulous; B 10, pale blue. This fine star, rated a full 2 n(1 magnitude by Flamsteed, is in a neat trapezium of the 8 th magnitude, in a rich vicinity. It is often called Alnilam, from the Arabic Al-Nidkdm, or Nizam, the string of pearls, in allusion to its situation between f and 6", forming, as Kobert Recorde says, the bullions set in Orion's girdle. It may assist the alignment of the vicinity to state that the belt extends exactly 3, or ij on each side of this star. The galley-poet tells us : Our Lady's wand is bless'd by all who watch those gems on high, And centre of that brilliant zone epsilon meets the eye. This beautiful constellation is a wonderful spot; and there is food for the theorist in the brilliant oblique zone exhibited by Taurus and Orion, coming to a full stop at Sirius. R A. h - m h - 2 m - 155 ["No nebulosity seen around A with 8^ in refractor, 1864." SrodieJ] [The Parsonstown Observations are somewhat contradictory. In 1850 and 1852 a nebulosity appears to have been seen ; but in 1874 and 1878 it is emphatically stated that none was seen.] 355. 158 B. ORIONIS. (2. 754.) h. m. B.A. 5 31 14 c Decl. S 6 8-4 Prec. -f 2-93 N 2-51 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STRUVE, W. 287-6 ... 5-1 ... 1830-09 A double star. A 7, white ; B 10, blue. 356. 26 AURIGA. (2. 753.) CCXX. h. m. s. R.A. 5 31 34 Decl. N 30 25-6 Position. o HERSCHEL, W. 272-6 STRUVE, W. 268-0 SMYTH 267-8 DUNER 268-9 BURNHAM AC I13-2 Prec. + 3-85 N 2-51 Epoch. 1782-68 1828-61 1833-09 1870-15 1877-87 Distance. 13-4 12-3 12.3 12-3 25-8 A neat double star, on the Waggoner's left shin ; where a line from the cluster in Orion's sword, led through the middle star of the belt, through f Tauri, will hit it at less than 10 beyond the latter. A 5, pale white ; and B 8, violet. A fine object. [The mag. of Burnham's C is 11-5. A is yellow according to Knott. 3 nf fi Tauri.] 357. 757 2. ORIONIS. h. m. s. . R.A. 5 32 27 c Decl. S 15 9 Prec. + 3-06 N 2-45 Position. Distance. Epoch. O H STRUVE, W. 239-8 ... 1-68 ... 1831-16 STONE, 0. 238-6 ... 1-76 ... 1878-11 A double star. A 8 J, very white ; B 9, very white. This pair is followed at a distance of 35 s by 2. 758, the components of which are placed in Pos. 297; Dist. n"; Epoch 1831-67, and are of mags. 9 and 9j, and both white. 156 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 358. 124 TAURI. (BO = S. 755.) h. m. s. R.A. 5 32 34 Decl. N" 23 15 "5 CCXXI. Position. STRUVE BUBNHAM Free. + 3 64 N, Distance. Epoch. 5-9 1830-55 J 45-7 ) - 5-6 . ... 1879-85 . 79-0 ) B C 315-7 AB 214-8 B C 315-1 AD 175-7 A coarse quadruple star, in the space over the Bull's southern horn. A 8, garnet ; B 8, and C 9, both pale white, and forming a very delicate object ; D 10, bluish. This star does not appear in the British Catalogue, but was well observed by Piazzi, who remarked, " Prsecedit telescopica ad Austrum, nee alia inventa." This group was examined because it happened to be near the spot where I was on the look-out for Halley's comet, on its most welcome return to our neighbourhood, in August, 1835- 124 Tauri is rather more than one-third of the distance from a Tauri to a Geminorum; and about 2 N., very slightly following f on the tip of the right horn. 359. ORIONIS. (2. 761 and 762.) CCXXII. B.A. 5 33 3 Decl. S 2 38-0 Free. + 3-01 N 2-QO SMYTH MAIN Position. Distance. O // r Aa 2.^5-9 - I2 1 AB 84.2 ... 12.5 ! AC 60-8 ... 41-8 I | AD 321-6 ,., 211-5 DE 266-8 ... 8-5 ^DF 21-8 ... 67-8 AB 84-3 ... 12-7 AC 61-2 ... 41-6 Epoch. 1832.20 1863-07 A multiple star, just below the belt of Orion, forming a scalene triangle with f and e. A 4, bright white; an, ash-coloured; B 8, bluish ; C 7, grape red; D 8|, dusky; E 9, white; F 8, pale grey. This is a fine group of 10 members, forming 10 and n 1$. II., where it is denominated "a double-treble star, or two sets of treble stars almost similarly situated;" H. and S. call it "a very pretty double-triple star:" but Professor Barlow, with greater precision, says it is "double-quadruple, with two very fine stars between the sets." E. A. 5 h - 32 m 5 h - 34^. 157 As this is a good object for trying the light and definition of a telescope, and the following of its groups is both delicate and pretty as a quadruple set, the explorer is recommended to examine it when in apparition. Nor need he be very much annoyed with his instrument should he be unable to distinguish the minute comes a ; since it is so small a point of light, that it escaped ever the searching eye of IjL This group may be readily fished up, as it forms the southern vertex of a triangle with the 2 last stars in the belt, as above stated j and it is rather less than a degree from f, in the direction of /3. [Smyth's measures are all in close agreement with those of IjJ. (1779), J. Herschel and South (1823), and ^. (1831).] 360. 45 LEPOBIS. (*h. 3780.) li. m. s. B.A. 5 34 25 Decl. S 17 56-6 Free. + 2-64 N 2-21 Position. Distance. Epoch. I AB 136-0 ... ^ . DEJIBOWSKI I A C 6-2 ... 76-2 > ... 1876-59 ( AD 298 f AE 48.7 .., [AF 310.4 ... ,-- BURNHAM <( Aa 137-8 ... 0-93 j> ... 1878 &c. Bb 359.7 .., LEG 31-8 .., Described by Sir J. Herschel as quintuple, mags. 7, 7, 8, 8, 8. He gave no measures, and the above R. A. &c. only as rough. These particulars, imperfect as they are, excited the attention of Burnham, who examined the group with care. " The group was found to consist really of 6 stars, 2 of them being quite small. The star E is probably the one not noticed by Herschel. The relative places of these stars are given with rough measurements. The star B was at once perceived to have a near companion, and the principal star, A, suspected to be a very close pair, but was not satisfactorily verified until some nights later. The latter is very difficult with my aperture, and the other by no means easily seen under ordinary atmospheric conditions. Taken together the group is a very interesting one. The large stars, A, B, C, and D, are respec- tively 10726, 19728, 10727 and 10725 of Lalande. The system is just visible to the naked eye, and shown on Heis's Star Atlas as 6-7 mag. It is 6 m 35 s exactly following a Leporis." Later observations have led Burnham to assign magnitudes as follows : A 6-8 ; a 8-3 ; B 9-3 ; b 9-7 ; C8; D8-5; 8-5; F 13; G 10. 158 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 361. OBIONIS. (2. 774.) CCXXIII. B.A. 5 35 Decl. S 2 s. 12 6-2 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH STRUVE, W, SMYTH FLETCHER JEDRZEJEWICZ BURNHAM Prec. + 3' 02 N 2-14 Distance. Epoch. ::: 2-62 s-35 -. 1822-61 1831-22 ... 56-0 l 2-64 ... 2-61 1839-19 1851-11 1878-17 1879-17 Position. AB 150-0 AB 151-3 AB 148.8 AC 7.8 AB 149-6 AB 152.1 AC 9-1 A fine triple star, the last or lowest on Orion's belt, formerly one of the Nautical Almanac List, but rejected in 1830. A 3, topaz yellow, and very bright for its magnitude; B 6, light purple; and C 10, grey. The principal star is designated on Piazzi's and other Catalogues, Alnitak, the Arabian al-nitdk, the girdle ; otherwise in conjunction with 8 and e, Minfakah al-jauzd, the giant's belt. Presumably IjjL, in 1780, could not have seen the large star double; and yet it seemed difficult to account for his overlooking so remarkable and elegant a pair, wherefore it has been surmised that the comes was under occultation at the time. Later observations do not countenance this singular idea. [Gledhill considers that the angle of A B is slowly increasing, but the evidence is not very conclusive, it seems to me.] 362, 219 (?) Dunlop DOBADTTS. (h. 2913 ; H. 1235.) B.A. 5 35 36 Decl. S 67 38-7 Prec. 0-16 N 2-13 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; L ; E ; 2 n <* of 3 ;" which means : " bright ; large ; extended ; the 2 nd O f 3 nebulae." The other 2 nebulae are both marked as bright and large: and precedes H. 1235 by 2O 8 ; the other follows it by 13*. Engraved, Cape Obs., PL iii. Fig 5. 363. 34 $. IV. OBIONIS. (h. 365 ; H. 1225 ; .) CCXXIV. h. m. s. s. B.A. 5 36 5 Prec. + 3-28 Decl. N 9 2-0 N 2-09 A planetary nebula, of a bluish white tint, on the nape of Orion's K. A. 5*1. 35**. 5 h. 39. neck ; and about 3^ on the line from a towards the three small stars forming Orion's head. This is a small and pale, but very distinct object, with a faint disc : it is described by H. as " rather oval, and perhaps of a mottled light :" a power of vision beyond what my means afforded. [The adjective "planetary" is not applied to this object in the Parsonstown Observations, but it is twice mentioned as suspected to be a " globular cluster."] It is preceded by several small stars, the foremost of which is coarsely double, and of the 8 th and io th magnitudes. [Engraved, D' Arrest, Dissertation, PI. ii. Fig. 2 ; Lassell, Mem. E. A. S. y vol. xxiii. PI. ii. Fig. 2.] 364. 3115 2. CAMELOPABDI. b. R.A. 5 Decl. W STRUVE, W. MADLER DEMBOWSKI STRUVE, O. m. s. 38 62 44-2 Position. o 35-5 34-5 28-4 ... 28-3 ... Free. Distance. i'-68 1-52 1-48 A double star. A 7, white; B 8, ashy white. the distance have evidently diminished. 5-64 ;/ I- 9 2 Epoch. 1831-63 1845-92 1866-83 1872.31 Both the angle and 365. 102 Dunlop HYDBI. B.A. m. 38 Decl. S 70 s. 7 13-6 [h. 2933 ; H. 1259.) s. Free. 0-63 N 1-91 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "vB; pL; R; gbM; 3 rd of 7 ;" which means: "very bright; pretty large ; round ; gradually brighter in the middle ; the 3 rd of 7 nebulae." These 7 nebulae all have the same degree of declination, and are included within a limit of 2 m io e in R.A. Most of them are very faint. Engraved, Cape, Obs., PI. iv. Fig. 9. 366. 785 2. TAURI. R.A. h. 5 m. s. 39 5 Prec. + 3-71 Decl. N 25 52-0 N M I'8 3 Position. Distance. STRUVE, W. STRUVE, O. AB 348-6 A C 66-4 . 13-8 . . 18-3 . I I Epoch. 1830-74 1846-04 A triple star. A 7, white; B. 8, bluish white; C 12. AC=02 no". 160 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 367. 30 DORADUS. (h. 2941 ; H. 1269.) h. m. s. B. A. 5 39 29 Decl. S 69 9-4 Free. 0-42 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "!!!; vB; vL; looped;" which means :-^ u an extremely remarkable object ; very bright ; very large ; in the form of a loop." Engraved, Cape Obs., PI. ii. Fig. 4. 368. 2007 Lac. HYDRI. (*h. 3796.) 8. Prec. 0-43 N 1-78 h. m. s. R.A. 5 39 34 Decl. S 69 8'8 HEKSCHEL, J. Position. Distance. o ft AB 180 + ... 91 AC 304 ... 12 AD 44 ... 12+ 1 AE 359 18+ j AF 44 ... 20+ 1 AG 132 25 J Epoch. A septuple star. Mags. 8^, 14, 13, 14, 13, 13, 12. A is the chief star in the centre of the great looped nebula in the Niibecula Major. 369. y LEPORIS. CCXXV. h. m. s. R.A. 5 39 53 Decl. S 22 28-7 Position. SMYTH S AB 349- - (BC 345-0 s. 2-52 Prec. + N 1-62 Distance. 92.9 45 Epoch. 1832-06 A wide triple star, in a barren field, in the Hare's left hind foot; where a line passed from 6 Orionis, the preceding star of the belt, through the sword cluster,, and carried 16 beyond, hits upon it. A [3^], light yellow ; B 6^, pale green ; C 1 3, dusky ; and a fourth star, of the 12 th magnitude, follows at A R.A. = 2 I s . This poor object was only examined because, under 50 1$. V., we are told there is a companion within 40' of A, of course meaning forty seconds. This escaped my search ; but on the whole, though y Leporis is of a fine lustre, I have little doubt of B and G being the stars which 1$. classed. R. A. 5 h - 39 m - 5 h - 41- 161 370. 780 2. CAMELOPARDI. h. m, s. B.A. 5 39 58 a Free. + 6-01 Decl. N 65 43 '0 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE, W. IQ3-5 ... 3-7 ... 1831-79 154-8 ... 10-9 ... 1831-60 A triple star. A 7, yellow ; B 8J, blue; C 12. 371, 187 B. ORIONIS. (2. 790.) h. m. s. R.A. 5 4O 36 Decl. S 4 18-2 Prec. -f- 2 .9 7 // N 1-70 Position. Distance. Epoch. STBUVE, W. 89.0 ... 6-8 ... 1830-84 STONE, O. 87.7 ... 6-6 ... 1877-95 A double star. A 7^, reddish yellow ; B 10, blue. 372. 78 M. OBIONIS. (h. 368; H. 1267; W.) CCXXVI. h. m. s. K.A. 5 41 6 o Decl. N 2-1 Prec. + 3-07 N i-55 Position. Distance. Epoch. BORNHAM S AB 2 2 ' 2 '' 5-8 - 1880.03 (BC 85.3 ... 1.74 ... 1878-12 Two stars in a "wispy" nebula, just above Orion's left hip; where a ray from /3 carried between the centre and last stars of the belt, and extended 2 farther, picks it up. A 81, and B 9, both white ; [C 11-5]. This object was found by Messier in 1780, and described as "two bright nuclei surrounded by nebulosity." It is a singular mass of matter trending from a well-defined northern disc into the sf quadrant, where it melts away. The nebula lies equatorially between two small stars, which are nearly equidistant from it, in a blankish part of the heavens ; and in its most compressed portion is the wide double star. [" Very faint but curious." Brodie.] [" The southern star rather the brighter." Knott^] [Burnham found B double. It is No. 559 of his lists.] [Engraved in Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. iv. Fig. 36 ; Eosse, woodcut, Phil. Trans., 1861 ; Eosse, Dublin Trans., 1879, PI. i. Fig. 1267.] M 162 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 373. 52 OBIONIS. (2.795.) Free. + : CCXXVII. h. m. . B.A. 5 42 6 Decl. 6 25-0 Position. N 1-52 HEBSCHEL, W. 200-3 STBUVE, W. 200-0 SMYTH i99'9 KNOTT i9 8> 9 Distance, i -00 + 1-8 1.6 Epoch. 1781-76 1831-23 1838-27 1863-06 A close double star, on Orion's left shoulder; about 2 S.W. .of a. A 6, pale white ; B 6 J, yellowish. This very elegant object may perhaps be altering both in position and distance. 374. 225 P. V. AUBIG^I. (2. 796.) s. Free. + q-8o CCXXVIII. h. m. s. B.A. 5 42 45 Decl. STBUVE, W. SMYTH WILSON, &c. 31 45-0 Position, o 61.1 61-5 63-1 N 1-52 Distance. 3-6 3-8 3-7 Epoch. 1830-79 1832-00 1874-13 A very neat double star, on the Waggoner's left shin; lying in the line formed between /3 Aurigae and 8 Orionis, the preceding star in Orion's belt; nearly in mid-distance between /3 and the three small stars forming Orion's head. A [7^], creamy white; B 8J, pale grey. 375. 594 Dunlop COLUMB^J. (h. 2944; H. 1288.) h. m. s. B. A. 5 43 1 Decl. S 34 17-6 Free. + 2-16 N i-47 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " ; B ; p L ; i B, ; gb M ;" which means : " a globular cluster ; bright ; pretty large ; of an irregular round form ; gradually brighter in the middle." R A. 5 h - 42^ 5 h - 49^- 163 376. 37 M. AURIGA, (h. 369 ; H. 1295 ; &.) CCXXX. h. m. s. B.A. 5 45 2 c Decl. N 32 31-3 Prec. + 3-92 // N 1-32 Position. Distance. Epoch. c BURNHAM 345-8 ... 17-4 .., 1879.85 A double star in a cluster in front of Auriga's left shin. A and B, both of the io th magnitude, and pale yellow. A magnificent object, the whole field being strewed as it were with sparkling gold-dust ; and the group is resolveable into about 500 stars, from the io th to the 14 th magnitudes, besides the outliers. Messier described it as "a mass of small stars, much enveloped in nebulous matter." This nebulous matter, however, yields to my telescope, and resolves into infinitely minute points of lucid light, among the distinct little individuals. It is immediately preceded on the parallel by another small double star : and is about J N.E. of 225 P.Y. Aurigse. [" Even in smaller instruments extremely beautiful, one of the finest of its class. Gaze at it well and long." WebbJ\ ["Wonderful loops and curved lines of stars, as also remarked by D'Arrest." Parsonstown 06s.] 377. 809 2. ORIONIS. h. m. s. B.A. 5 45 3 o Decl. S 1 27-6 Prec. + 3-04 N 1-30 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STRUVE, W. 101-2 ... 25-7 ... 1831-16 BURNHAM 98-3 ... 25-2 ... 1879-02 A double star. A 8, yellow ; B 9, ashy. 378. 816 2. ORIONIS. h. m. s. R.A. 5 49 2 a Decl. N 5 50'1 Prec. + 3-21 N 0-96 Position. Distance. Epoch. o n STRUVE, W. 289-3 ... 4-2 ... 1830-13 A double star.. A 6J, very white ; B 9. M 2 164 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 379. a OBIONIS. CCXXXI. a OBIONIS. B.A. h. m. 5 49 9. 13 Prec. s. Decl. N 7 23 N 0-93 Position. RSCHEL, W. I52'3 tin 155 Distance. 161 1 60 Epoch. 1780-78 I832-75 A Nautical Almanac star, with a distant comes, on Orion's left shoulder. A i, orange tinge; B 1 1, bluish, and the two point nearly upon a pale small star in the np quadrant, at A E.A. 15- 7 s . [Others nearer.- flurnham.] It is called Betelgeuze, from ibt-al-jauzd, the giant's axilla, or shoulder, whence it is also menkib-al-jauzd ; and it has likewise been designated al-mirzam, the roarer. It is the northernmost of the 4 bright stars forming the corners of this constellation, and cannot be mistaken by the most casual observer : moreover, with Sirius and Procyon, it forms a conspicuous triangle, which is nearly equilateral ; while Procyou makes a right-angled one with Betelgeuze and Pollux. It is hardly necessary to diagram this well-known and splendid group. H. pointed out this fine star as being variable and periodic : on his star-list the maximum was stated as above /3 Orionis, the minimum below a Tauri. [Fletcher in 1852 confirmed Herschel, but J. F. J. Schmidt pro- nounces strongly against the idea of variability. "A most beautiful and brilliant gem ! singularly beautiful in colour, a rich topaz ; in hue and bril- liancy different from any other star I have seen." Lassell. " Look at a and j3 alternately; even a small telescope will show the beauty of the contrast." Webb.] Orion may be considered the most beautiful and brilliant of all the con- stellations without disparaging the Great Bear; and when just over our meridian is so well accompanied, as to present the finest view of the heavens in this hemisphere. The principal stars of Orion, when joined by imaginary lines, form two inverted cones, and re- semble a clepsydra, or hour-glass. He is usually represented as a classic warrior; but PaulusVenetus,Z)e ccmpositione Mundi, equips him in knightly E.A. 5 h ' 49 m ' 165 armour, with a huge club in one hand, a formidable human-faced shield in the other, and a long Toledo sword by his side : and this is also the style in which he figures among the illustrations to Julius Firmicus in 1497. As the ecliptic passes nearly through its middle, it is visible to all the world ; while its figure, belt, and pendant sword, so well described by Manilius, render it of easy recognition. No constellation was more noted among the ancients than Orion. As it occupies an extensive space in the heavens, this circumstance may have probably given Pindar his notion that Orion was of a monstrously large size ; and hence the jugula of Plautus, the magni pars maxima ccdi of Manilius, and the jebber of the Arabians. Hood tells us that " the reason why this' fellow was placed in heaven," was to teach men not to be too confident in their own strength. A disciple of the unhappy Lieutenant Brothers proposed to designate the whole asterism Nelson : and in 1807, the University of Leipzig resolved that the stars belonging to the belt and sword of Orion, as well as the intermediate ones, " shall in future be called the constellation NAPOLEON." Was that learned body in possession of a copy of Thomas Hood's treatise ? The present appellation, however, is of too long a standing, and lias too firm a hold on men's minds, to be easily shaken ; and, despite of his origin, it seems "this fellow" must stand. Both the Septuagint and the Vulgate call it Orion, according to the Greeks and Romans. It is mentioned in Job, Ezekiel, and Amos ; and the Mosaicists persist that it represented Nimrod, as mighty a hunter as Orion, and the author of the post-diluvian heresy a . From his terrible and threatening gesture, as much as from his time of rising, he was held to portend tempests and misfortune, and was therefore so much dreaded by the mariners of yore as to give rise to the ancient proverb " Fallit ssepissime nautas Orion." Polybius attributes the loss of the Roman fleet in the first Punic war to the obstinacy of the consuls, who, despite of the pilots, would sail between the risings of Orion and Sirius, always a squally time. The Latin writers are full of invective against plumosus et tristis Orion ; while the niinbosus of Virgil, the nautis infestus of Horace, the aquosus of Pro- pertius, the horridus sideribus of Pliny, and the like sage allusions, fill the imagination with storms, hail, and deluges of rain. This constellation is a rich mine for the practical astronomer, as con- taining a wondrous universe of bright stars, double stars, clusters, and a Orion was designated Khesil, or Kesil, called the grand Council of Trent the by the Hebrews, which the learned say Council of Chesil, to denote that it was a comes from chasel, to be inconstant, to stormy, fickle, and troublesome meeting, stir up, in allusion to the unsettled Has the Australian term of being chiselled weather supposed to attend this constel- any affinity with this ? lation. Hence Rabelais has pleasantly 166 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. nebulae, within itself. The Capuchin De Rheita asserted that, with his binocular instrument, he found more than 2000 stars in it; and where he is not dwelling upon Teutonic crosses and seamless tunics, he will be found worthy of credit. The number of stars whose mean apparent places have been noted, are : Ptolemy .... 38 stars. Bullialdus . . . 61 stars. Ulugh Beigh . . 38 Hevelius .... 62 Tycho Bralie* . . 62 Flamsteed ... 78 Bayer .... 49 ' Bode . . 3 35 ... 1833-19 2.2 ... 1872-40 I5.I ... 1872-2 15-5 ... 1878-0 A close double star in a small cluster, on Orion's left hand. A 7^, and B 8^-, both lucid white; [C 12]. This elegant little group has many glimpse stars thronging about the two lower angles. Enrolled by 2. as lucida acervi. These gatherings occurring indifferently upon the Via Lactea and off it, awaken still more our admiration of the stupendous richness of the Universe, in every department of which there appears such a pro- fusion of creation, if we may so express ourselves of the works of the ALMIGHTY, in which our utmost ken has yet never detected any redun- dancy, much less anything made in vain. 392. 4 MONOCEROTIS. h. m. s. K.A. 6 3 15 Decl. S 11 8-3 Position. o DEMBOWSKI ! AB (AC 244.5 Prec. -f 2-7 S 0-26 Distance. Epoch. // 8-9 ... 1876-8 A triple star. A 6 ; B ioj, blue; C n. B was discovered by Burnham and C by Knott. A little np this object is 3 Monocerotis, found by Burnham to be double: Pos. 354-8; Dist. 1-62"', Epoch, 1875-9; mags. 6-8 and 10-5. 393. 859 2. OBIONIS. h. m. s. B.A. 63 43 Decl. N 5 40-8 Prec. + 3-20 S 0-33 K.A. 6 h - 171 STRDVE, W. MADLER ENGELMANN BURNHAM A double star. Position. Distance. o n 249-0 ... 31-4 248*6 ... 3-2-0 248-4 ... 34-0 2467 ... 34-4 A 8i, yellowish ; B 9, white. Epoch. 1829-70 1845.19 1863-17 187900 An increase in dis- tance seems implied by the above measures, if they can be depended upon. " The change is probably due to proper motion." Burriham. 394. 135 Birm. GEMINORTJM. R.A. h. m. s. 6 4 3 Decl. N 26 2 '3 Free. + s. 3-72 o-35 A red star of mag. 7|. Schwerd, " rothlich," 6; Webb, 1872, "fine ruby colour;" Birmingham, 1873, "very red," 7^; 1875, "fine deep red," 8. 395. 25 VII. ORIONIS. (h. 3804; H. 1376; .) CCXXXIX, B.A. 6 6 15 Decl. o / 5 28'6 Free. Position, o HERSCHEL, J. 358-5 SMYTH 355 Distance. H 5 . 5 + 3-20 S o-55 Epoch. 1830 1833.00 A neat but minute double star, in a cluster, under Orion's left shoulder and in an outcropping of the Galaxy. A 9^ and Bio, both pale yellow. This is a tolerably rich and compressed mass of stars, from the 9 th to the 16^ magnitudes, with numerous stragglers. To fish up this object, pass a line from /3 Orionis through the lower star of Orion's belt, and carry it a little more than as far again to the N.E., where it will strike the cluster at about 4 S.E. of a Orionis. 396. R.A. Decl. 872 2. AURIGA. Free. + s, 15 STRUVE, W. DUNE a 36 10'5 Position, o 217.3 217-5 S Distance. A double star. A 6, white; B 7|, white, ponents is established beyond a doubt. 4-05 0-71 Epoch. 1828-94 1868-49 The fixity of the com- B.A. 69 30 172 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 397. 5 MONOCEBOTIS. h. m. s. s. Free. + 2-93 - S 0-83 "A fine orange star" of mag. 4^. Webb is the authority for the colour, but the star appears in Birmingham's Catalogue (No. 140). 398. 1201 Brisb. DOBADUS. h. m. s. s. Decl. S 6 14-4 B.A. 6 11 54 Decl. S 65 30-3 Prec. -f 0-14 S 1-04 Position. Distance. Epoch. o H HERSCHEL, J.< 114.9 2I> 5 1836-20 A double star. A 7 J ; B 8 J. 399. 4 LYNCIS. (2. 881.) CCXL. h. jn. s. B.A. 6 12 17 o Decl. N 59 25 "1 Prec. + 5'33 S i'-io Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STRUVE, W. 88-9 ... 0-81 ... 1830-28 SMYTH 90-2 ... i-o ... 1837-89 STRUVE, O. 95-6 ... 0-87 ... 1847-52 A close double star, in the animal's snout ; at about 30 from Polaris, on a line through Sirius, and closely N.E. of 2 Lyncis. A 6 and B 7 J-, both white. This elegant but difficult object was discovered by 2., and is one of his vicince. The above measures imply a direct movement in angle ; but the pair is too impracticable to merit reliance on epochs of short periods. It is only from accurate and continued observations that an orbit worthy of confidence will emerge. The Lynx, sen Tigris, is one of the new asterisms formed by Heve- lius, from the stellce informes of the neighbourhood, and added to the old 48 constellations. It is pretty extensive, occupying a vast space between Auriga and the Greater Bear, above the Twins ; but though it contains many beauties for assisted vision, there are few remarkable objects to the naked eye. Hevelius started it with 19 stars, Flamsteed gave it 44, and Bode 149. Hevelius defends the location he has assigned to this animal, and in R. A. 6 L - 9 m - 6 h - i6 m - 173 a set paragraph, De Loco Lyncis, tells us that he cast it between the Great Bear and Auriga, where an empty space was found on the globes, which was wont to be filled up with title and dedication. He acknow- ledges that the 19 components he assigned it are small and insignificant, but thinks that those who would examine the Lynx ought to be lynx- eyed. He formed a symbol for this, as well as for the other asterisms, giving permission to those carpers who dislike them to make new ones if they choose : " Si cuidam Homo forte displiceut, liberum ipsi per me esto, alios characteres effingere," 400. 58 P. VI. MONOCEROTIS. (2. 891.) CCXLI. b. m. s. s. B.A. 6 14 31 Prec. + 3-36 o / // Decl. IT 12 20'2 g Position. Distance. H STRUVE, W. 292-4 ... 21-9 GLEDHILL^ 295-0 ... 20.8 , Epoch. 1830-33 1874-2 A most delicate double star, close to Orion's left hand, and in the Galaxy. A 8 and B [n], both dull yellow; followed at about io 8 by a coarse pair, of the 9^ and lo^ 1 magnitudes, which constitute the No. 895, rejected from 2.'s list. The object is only estimated. Here is another of those cases where illumination is out of the question; but the rock-crystal micrometer enabled me to catch up a tolerably fair angle. The instrument is easily managed after practice. This star, though placed on the Unicorn's horn by various map- makers, is filched from Orion, and in the S.D.U.K. Map is placed on that gentleman's club ; so that in any reform of the heavens, the matter must be gravely looked to. A line from /3 Orionis through e, in the middle of Orion's belt, passed under a on his left shoulder, and extended 7| beyond, will strike upon the little star in question. 401. JL GEMINORUM. CCXLIII. K.A. Decl. 3URNHA h. 6 N M fj. GEMi: m. s. 16 18 22 34 5 Position, 76.7 ... ffORUM. Prec. + S 5. 3 // i- 62 42 Epoch. Distance. // 7 2 -3 A. Nautical Almanac star of 1830, with a distant comes, on Castor's light instep; a glance from Orion's sword cluster through f the lowest 174: A Cycle of Celestial Objects. of the belt, carried closely to the E. of a, and 1 6 beyond, will rest upon /*. AS, crocus yellow; B n [or less Knott], bluish; there are two other companions in the sf, and a group of small stars follow at A E. A. = 2 5 s . This object is known as Tejat post, from Tahydh, a word used by the Arabs, as the name of a constellation formed by the two stars 77 and p, in the anterior feet of Gemini. ["Tint of A very fine. B very small, 5^', 1863." Webb.} 402. 5 LYNCIS. CCXLII. h. m. s. a. R.A, 6 17 12 o Decl. N 58 28 '7 Free. + 5-25 - S 1-40 Position. Distance. Epoch. i:S^"-' " HERSCHEL, W. AC 272-0 ... 88-3 ... 1782-87 SOOTH AC 272-1 ... 95.4 ... 1825-05 BUENHAM J AB W - 30-3 | . 1879 . 86 (AC 272-5 .. 95.9 ) A coarse triple star, on the animal's lower jaw ; it is a little to the N. of a line running from a Auriga towards a Ursae Majoris, and about 1 8 from the former star, where it precedes 6 Lyncis. A 6, orange tinge; B [n], blue; and C 9, pale garnet. lij. overlooked B. Sir J. Herschel, in his Notes, alludes to the difference in distance be- tween his father's measures and more recent ones, saying, " It may be remarked once for all, that there is great reason to suspect a considerable instrumental error in all the measures of that early period, exceeding 40", the result being constantly (or most commonly) in defect, and that not unfrequently to a very large amount. The cause probably lies in the construction of the micrometer used ; and its effect is to throw a great uncertainty on the earlier distances of all stars of the Fifth and Sixth Classes. Fortunately these are the least replete with interest." Here, however, my friend's opinion, and with the utmost deference be it said, is, like one of Homer's prayers, only to be in part received. 403. /3 CANIS MAJORIS. CCXLVI. h. m. s. s. Free. + 2-64 B.A. 6 17 52 o / Decl. S 17 54-2 S 1-61 Position. Distance. Epoch. BURNHAM 339-1 ... 185-2 ... 1879-91 A bright star with a distant companion, on the Dog's fore-paw. R.A. 6 h - 1 6^- 6*- 175 A 2j, fine white ; B 9, dusky grey, and another of the same magnitude in the sj) quadrant. ft Canis Majoris is called Mirzam, the roarer, a term applied to the camel as well as the lion. Al-mirz&m is the name of this star, of /3 in Canis Minor, and of y and a in Orion; the two former being called al-mirzamdni, the two roarers. A line dropped from (3 Tauri, on the northern horn of the Bull, to a Orionis, and from thence nearly the same distance to the S., will fall upon the star under discussion. Where Sirius blazes in the south, and leaves the ship behind, Look west-south-west, just four degrees, and beta there you'll find. 404, 8 MONOCEROTIS. (2. 900.) 8. Prec. + 3-18 S i-59 CCXLV. h. m. s. B.A. 6 17 56 Decl. N 4 38-8 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 25-3 ... 14.3 ... 1823-04 STRUVE,W. 25-8 ... 13-8 ... 1831-74 MAIN 24-3 ... 12-9 ... 1868-21 JEDRZEJEWICZ 25-8 ... 13.9 ..: 1880.19 A neat double star, in the Unicorn's nostril; where a glance from a Tauri, passed closely over the head and shoulders of Orion, will find it at about 7| E. of a. A [4^], golden yellow; B [7], lilac. A fine object. [" Glorious low-power field." Webb.] 405. B.A. Decl. 15 GEMINOBUM. 13 Prec. + 3-58 51-5 S 1-95 CCXLVII. 21 o 20 Position, o HERSCHEL, W. 210-0 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 204-6 SMYTH 205-4 MAIN 205.5 S Distance. H 32-6 3 2.6 33-2 31-0 Epoch. 1782-08 1822-10 1832-04 1863-07 A fine double star, on Castor's right heel ; very nearly in mid-distance of an imaginary line between a Geminorum and y Orionis, where it is the northern member of a trapezium of small stars. A 6, flushed white; B 8, bluish. This object was classed twice over by Sir William Herschel, being 52 and 56 $. V. 406. A Cycle of Celestial Objects. CANIS MAJOBIS. (*h. 3858.) h. m. s. B A 6 21 44 Decl. S 34 57'9 Position. HERSCHEL, J. SANTIAGO OBS. 3I3-8 67-3 Free. H- 2-17 S 1-90 Distance. Epoch. // 3 est. ... 1836-02 6-7 1852-19 A double star. A 7^ ; B 8. Sir J. Herschel calls this a " fine object," and remarks that a 6 th mag. star precedes it to the S. The Declination above is as corrected by the Santiago observers. The Cape Obs. put it at 33. 407. 104 P. VI. MONOCEBOTIS. (2. 910.) CCXLVIII. s. Free. -f .roS B.A. h. m. s. 6 22 4 Decl. N 31-0 Position. STBUVE, W. SMYTH DEMBOWSKI BURNHAM S i 98 Distance, Epoch. 66-1 1831.68 0.78 1825-12 67-8) 0.6 i 1833-14 0-7 1869-1 0-93 ... 1878-2 AB 150-5 B C 1 68-8 AB 151-5 B 170-0 BC 165.6 BC 162.5 A coarsely triple star, between the boundary line of Orion and the Unicorn's chest ; it is about 1 7 from Procyon, on a ray carried to the W.S.W. through Orion's sword cluster and /3 Orionis. A 7^> topaz yellow; B and C 8-J-, both of a plum tinge. B is most exquisitely double. ["A low-power field includes 77, a fine 6 th mag. yellow star, with this pair np, and another sp : a noble spectacle." WebbJ] 408. R.A. BURNHAM 10 MONOCEROTIS. h. m. 6 22 Decl. S 31 3 / L 41 9 Position. Free. AB 256-4 AC 231-0 Distance. 76.9 ) 8c-6i CCXLIX. 2-96 // 2-05 Epoch. 1879-88 A wide double star in an elegant group [ = 25 1$. VIII; H. 1415], on the Unicorn's right fore-knee : it is about 1 2 J in an occult line carried from Sirius a little to the W. of a Aurigae, and directly between /3 in the Lesser Dog and a Leporis. A 6, pale yellow ; B 9, orange, with a E.A. 6 h - 2im- 177 comes to the S. Though this object is a capital one for testing the per- formance of a telescope, it has not been classed among the clusters. Monoceros was introduced into the firmament by Bartschius, among the delineations on his 4 ft globe ; it was, perhaps out of regard to the husband of Kepler's daughter, retained by Hevelius, being now con- sidered as one of his constellations. It is concocted of the stellce informes scattered about in the large space between Orion, Hydra, and the two Dogs, over a portion of the Milky Way. But though extensive it is not conspicuous, few of its gems rising to the 4 th magnitude. It has been pretty well ransacked since its first appearance in the Prodromus Astro- nomice, and many capital pairs, nebulae, and clusters have been reaped. The stars have been thus successively tabulated : Hevelius . F'amsteed . 19 stars. ^ Piazzi Bode 95 stars. 220 , 409. 9 . VIII. GEMINOBUM. h. m. s. R.A. 6 22 57 Decl. N 16 45-5 (h. 389; H. 1417; .) s. Free. + 3-47 S 2-00 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " Cl ; e L ; p R i ; 1C; st L & S ; " which means : " a cluster ; exceed- ingly large ; pretty rich ; little condensed ; its stars are large and small various sizes." 410. 11 MONOCEROTIS. (2. 919.) CCL. h. m. s. 8. R.A. 6 23 29 Free. + 2-9I / Decl. S 6 57-7 S 2-10 Position . Distance. i r AB 130-3 7 2) SMYTH ] AC 1 21.6 9 .6 ... ( B C 102.3 2 8) DUNER I AB 132-3 7-2 ( B C 105-0 2 3 ... BURNHAIT AD 56-1 ... 2 5 8 JEDRZE.TEWICZ BC 104-4 2 7 ... Epoch. 183402 1870.51 187. -24 1878.00 1880.20 A fine triple star, in the Unicorn's right fore-leg : a ray shot from the Bull's eye through y Orionis, and extended rather more than as far again into the S.E., will pick it up in the out-cropping of the Milky Way. A 6|, white ; B 7 ; C 8, both white ; [D 13]. $., who discovered this in 1781, classed it as a "curious treble star," and pronounced it to be "one of tlie most beautiful sights in the heavens;" but the next ob- servers, his son and Sir J. South, registered it quadruple. The several 178 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. measures are so coincident, on comparison notwithstanding that the nearness of magnitudes creates an anomaly of quadrants as to prove the general fixity of the individuals. [" Notwithstanding the striking appearance of connection, motion has not been detected here." Webb.] 411. 921 S. G-EH h. m. s. B.A. 6 25 2 Decl. N 11 19-9 Position. STKUVE, W. 3-8 DA WES 4-3 IINOBUM. Free. + a s. 3'34 n 2-27 Epoch. 1831-38 1848-16 o Distance. // 16*2 16-3 ... A double star. A 6, yellowish white ; B 9, bluish white. On the borders of Gemini and Monoceros. 412. 2 IJ. VII. MONOCEROTIS. (H. 1424; &.) CCLI. h. m. s. s. R.A. 6 25 4 Free. + 3-19 Decl. N 5 i'3 S 2-34 A tolerably compressed cluster, between the Unicorn's fore legs. This is a brilliant gathering of large and small stars, from the 7 th to the 1 4 th magnitudes ; the latter running in rays. It may be found nearly in mid-distance between /3 Geminorum and a Leporis, where it is crossed by a line led from Procyon to the "W., and passed between Orion's belt and his right shoulder, about 2 below y Orionis. [The yellow 7 th mag. star is 12 Monocerotis.] ["Beautiful ; visible to the naked eye."- Webb.] 413. 229 B. AURIGA. R.A. 6 25 10 Decl. STKUVE, W. MADLER MADLER ENGELMANN JEDRZEJEWICZ 52 33-O Position. o 322-4 325-1 323-9 325-3 325-9 E. (S. 918.) s. Free. + 4-81 n S 2-20 Distance. Epoch. it 4-4 1829.26 4-7 1843-26 4-4 1852-28 4.8 ... 1865.46 4-4 1879.28 A double star.. A 7, white ; B 8J, white. B. A. 6 n - 23 m 6 h - 28 m - 179 414. eie (?) Duniop CANIS MAJORIS. (h. 3053; H. 1423.) h. m. s. R.A. 6 25 22 Decl. S 31 12-5 Prec. + 2-27 // S 2'22 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : ' ' p B ; c L ; R ; vlgb M 4' ; " which means : " pretty bright ; con- siderably large; round; very little brighter in the middle; 4' in diameter." 415. 20 GEMINORTJM. (2, 924.) h. m. s. R.A. 6 25 52 Decl. 17 51 -4 Prec. + 3-50 S 2-34 CCLII, Position. Distance. Epoch. o n HEESCHEL, J., and SOUTH 208-9 ... 19.4 ... 1822-05 STBUVE, W. 209-8 ... 20-0 ... 1830-00 SMYTH 209-2 ... 20-4 ... 1833-99 WILSON and SEABBOKE 210-1 ... 20-1 ... 1874-13 JEDBZEJEWICZ 209-7 2 - ... 1878-66 A neat double star, on Castor's left heel, about i^ to the N.N.W. of the bright star y Geminorum ; where a line carried from /3 Orionis over the middle component of Orion's belt will point it out at about 14 beyond a Orionis. A 8, topaz yellow ; B 8^, cerulean blue. [In a fine field.] This is a very fine object. No appreciable change has occurred in 56 years. 416. 3 $. VIII. MONOCEROTIS. (h. 395 ; H. 1429.) h. m. s. R.A. 6 28 46 Decl. 8 26'5 Prec. + 3-27 S 2-51 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " Cl ; v L ; E ; Ri ; 1C;" which means : " a cluster ; very large ; ex- tended ; rich ; little condensed." 180 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 417. 14 MONOCEBOTIS. (2. 938.) CCLIII, K.A. 6 28 48 Decl. N 7 39'5 Free. + 3-25 S 2-62 STBUVE, W. BUBNHAM Position. o 2067 209.9 Distance. // 10.2 10.6 Epoch. 1831-23 1878-20 A most delicate double star, in the Unicorn's eye. A 6, yellowish white; B [12], dusky. This is indeed a difficult object, B being the minimum visibile of my instrument, and only seen by such transient glimpses, that but for a distant pale io tb magnitude star in the sp quadrant, nearly in the same line of bearing, my estimations must have been much wider. There is also a dusky 1 2 th star in the sf, at about 100" from A; so that the whole forms a wide quadruple object. It is nearly mid-way between Procyon and the three little stars which form Orion's head and also of a line passed from a Geminorum to a Leporis in the middle of the Milky "Way. 418. 50 $. VIII. MONOCEROTIS. (h. 396 ; H. 1430.) h. m. s. B.A. 6 29 Decl. S 5 26-5 Free. + 3-20 S 2-53 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " Cl ; v L ; p Hi ; 1C; st S ;" which means : " a cluster ; very large ; pretty rich ; little condensed ; the stars are small." 419. 2337 Lac. CANIS MAJORIS. (*h.3871.) h. m. s. B.A. 6 29 51 Decl. S 29 32 2 Position. HEBSCHEL, J. JACOB STONE, 0. 353-1 354- 2 353-0 A double star. A 7j ; B 8. Prec. + 2-32 S 2-61 Distance. // IO 7-4 7-6 Epoch. 1837-09 1848-1 1877-1 R.A. 6 h - 28- 6 n - ^i m - 181 420. B.A. Dec! 941 2. AURIGA. m. s. s. 50 53 Free. + 4-25 c f ff 11 40-5 S 2-70 it ion. Distance. Epoch. c fj I i.65 ... 1824.58 77 6 i-95 ... 1830-29 79-7 1.67 ... 1844-29 80 2 2-2 ... 1876-09 SOUTH STBUVE, W. MADLER GLEDHILL A double star. A 7|-, bluish white ; B 8^, purplish white. i S. of 50 Aurigse, a star of the 5 th magnitude. There is a distant companion in Pos. 133 j Dist, 28-0"; Epoch 1822-2 (= South 367). 421. y GEMINORUM. h. m. s. 8. R.A. 6 31 21 Free. + SH^ / H Decl. N 16 29 5 | g 2^2 Position. Distance. o // VTTAAf j AB 3^5.5 141-7) CCLIV. Epoch. ~v,~,^~^ ... 1880-03 ( AC 294.7 ... 133-0 } A coarse triple star, on the right foot of Pollux, in a rich field. A 3, brilliant white; B 13, and C 12, both pale plum colour; followed nearly on the parallel, A R. A. = 4O S , by a 9 tn mag. star. This object, with f on the other foot, is called Alhena, from al-hen'ah, a ring or brand on a horse's neck, and the two form the VI th Mansion of the Moon, r) is called UpoTTovs by Ptolemy, as being in the fore-foot, but the name is best applied to H Geminorum, as the aute-foot, or star preceding the feet. The alignment of this star is easy. A ray from (3 Orionis through the middle star of Orion's belt will pass clear of a Orionis to Alhena. The same imaginary line continued, passes close under a Geminorum : it is also about two-thirds of the distance between (3 Geminorum and a Orionis. [Good low-power field.] 422. R. A. h. m. s. 6 31 33 Free. Decl. S 18 34-1 Position, o HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 259-8 SMYTH 260-2 MAIN 261-6 STONE, 0. 262-4 + 2-62 S 2-80 Distance. // 17.2 17-2 17-3 17.4 Epoch. 1821-22 1830-83 1842-82 1877-1 CCLV. 182 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. A neat double star, in the Greater Dog's left fore knee, and about 3 to the S.W. of Sirius. A 6J, pale garnet ; B 8, grey. The pair is followed in the sf quadrant by z> 2 . [3 sp a. Motion in angle seems probable.] 423. 48 I. VIII. MONOCEROTIS. (h. 398 ; H. 1436.) h. m. B.A. 6 32 33 o DecL S 1 22-1 Prec. + 3-04 S 2-84 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " 01 ; v L ; P ; vl C ; st L & S ;" which means : " a cluster ; very large ; poor ; very little condensed ; the stars are large and small, mixed-" 424. 15 MONOCEROTIS. (S. 950.) CCLVIII. Epoch. 1831-67 1835-13 1868-74 1876-10 A delicate triple star, in a magnificent stellar field [=27 ]j[. V; 5 1$. VIII; h. 401 ; H. 1440], between the Unicorn's ears, at one-third of the distance from Procyon towards a Tauri. A 6, greenish ; B 9^, pale grey ; C [12], blue. The bright star is crowned by three pairs, of which the sf is the nearest. A companion in Pos. 139, Dist. 75", was found to be double by Dembowski : Pos. 47; Dist. 3-8"; Epoch 1865-9. 425. 174 P. VI. LYNCIS. (2. 946.) CCLVI. h. m. s. s. 15 MONOCEROTIS. (2. 950.) h. m. s. s. R.A. 6 34 55 Prec. + 3-30 o t ff Decl. N 9 59-8 S 3-02 Position. Distance. o // STRUVE, W. JAB (AC 208-6 I2. 9 .. 2.76) .. 16-5 \ ] SMYTH JAB 206-2 ... 3-5 J 1 ( AC 15 ... 15 ) DEMBOWSKI JAB (AC 2II-O 13-9 3' 02 ( ... 16-2 \ HALL AB 212-6 ... ' 3-05 ... R.A. 6 35 8 o Decl. N 59 33 '3 Prec. + 5-33 S 2-92 Position. Distance. Epoch. SOUTH 136-8 ... 4.06 ... 1825-07 STRUVE, W. 133.5 ... 4.19 ... 1830-58 SMYTH 134-2 ... 4-0 ... 1835-11 MAIN 133.4 ... 3-9 ... 1862-31 E. A. 6 h - i m 183 A neat double star, under the animal's eye, nearly in mid-distance between a Urses Majoris and a Aurigse, where it is crossed by a line passing from Polaris a little to the westward of Procyon. A 7^, bright white ; B i o, blue : the magnitude of the latter star was carefully estimated by my usual method of assuming Piazzi's brightness of A as the standard ; and also by referring directly to the companion of Polaris. 2. from finding it 8-5 in 1827, TO in 1831, and 8-5 again two years afterwards, asks, Num minor variabilis ? The possibility of the comes being variable, awakens considerations of peculiar interest ; it having been surmised, that certain small acolyte stars shine by reflected light, a point which has still to be ascertained. But sidereal science is yet in its infancy, [and this is quite as true in 1880 as it was in 1840]. 426. h. m. s. R.A. 6 35 43 Decl. S 48 7'5 Position. o 317.0 V PUPPIS. Prec. + s. 1-60 HERSCHEL, J. S 3-n Distance. Epoch. 13-4 ... 1836-12 A double star. A 5 J, yellow ; B 7 J, blue. 427. 12 LYNCIS. (S. 948. ) h. ni. s. s. R.A. 6 36 3O Prec. + 5-32 o j Jf Decl. N 59 33 1 S 3-19 Position. Distance. // HERSCHEL, W. ( AB 181-4 ... i. 5 | (AC 302-5 ... 9-3 STRUVE, W. JAB 1 AC 1537 304-2 ... 8.6 \ ... SMYTH JAB 149-5 ... 1-6 (AC 305-6 ... 8-9 f GLEDHILL 1 AC 134-0 306-4 '.'.'. 8.7 1 ... CCLVII. Epoch. 1780-68 1831-10 1839-27 1874-13 A neat triple star, on the animal's cheek, so exactly following 174 P. VI., previously described, that the alineation there given will answer for both. A 6, white; B 6|-, ruddy; C 7^, bluish. By a comparison of the measures it will be seen that the two close stars have undergone great orbital change. C has remained relatively unaltered with the primary. From a rough-cast geometrical treatment of the above measures there results an annus magnus of nearly seven centuries. 184 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 428. 12936 Lalande CANIS MAJOBIS. (/3 19.) h. R.A. 6 37 3 Free. + 2-7 S 3-19 Decl. S 15 54 1 Position. Distance. Epoch. O // '' KNOTT 169.4 ... 4-0 ... 1872.13 DEMBOWSKI 165.0 ... 3-5 ... 1876-26 A double star discovered by Burnham. A 7 ; B 9 J. 429. GEMINORTJM. CCLIX. R.A. Decl. SOUTH SMYTH h. m. s. 6 37 10 KT 25 14-3 Position. ] 93-7 94-1 Prec. + 3-69 // S 3-23 Epoch. 1825-04 1831.98 distance. i-5 110-6 A star with a distant companion, on Castor's right knee ; it is about 26, or rather more than one-third of the distance, from Procyon towards a Aurigse, where a line led from ft Orionis through a Orionis also reaches it. A 3, brilliant white ; B 9 J, cerulean blue. This star is called Mebsuta, from al-dhirtf al mebsutah, the out- stretched arm ; i. e. Castor and Pollux. ["A, strongly yellow, 1849." Webb.} 430. 223 P. VI. PUPPIS. h. RA. 6 38 34 c Decl. S 38 17-2 Prec. + 2-03 S 3-36 Epoch. 1835-38 CCLX. s. 4-33 3'33 Epoch. 1782-80 1831.92 1862-31 I877-3 A wide double star ; it is just to the N. of an imaginary line carried Position. Distance. o // HEBSCHEL, J. 276-1 . 8.4 A double star. A 6i ; B8. 431. 56 AURIGA. h. m. s. R.A. 6 38 48 Prec. / Decl. N 43 41-1 Position. Distance. HERSCHEL, w. o 17-4 // 5 2 '9 SMYTH 17-1 56.8 MAIN 18.7 ... 51.6 HALL 21-1 48-3 E. A. 6 h - 37 m 6 h - 4o m - 185 from a Aurigse eastward through (3, and extended as far again as the distance between those* two stars. A 6, silvery white ; B 8^, lilac. This is an object which, though belonging to Auriga, is in Telescopium Herschelii, an asterisra proposed by the Abbe Hell to commemorate the discovery of the planet Uranus, in this spot, 13*^ March, 1781. It appears to have remained stationary for 50 years. 432. 958 2. LYNCIS. b, m. s. s. R.A. 6 39 1 Decl. N 55 49 "8 Prec. + 5-02 S 3-40 Position. Distance. Epoch. O II STRUVE, W. 256-7 ... 5-07 ... 1830-91 MAIN 257-7 5-7 1863-29 A double star. A 6, white; B 6, white. 433. a CANIS MAJOKIS. CCLXII. h. m. s. R.A. 6 40 18 Decl. S 16 33-7 Position. ! HUNT 47.5 Prec. + 2-64 s 3-50 Epoch. 1879.19 Distance. 1144.0 A Nautical Almanac star, with a small companion, in the Greater Dog's mouth. A i, brilliant white; B 10, deep yellow; other distant small stars in the field ; and a line through the two here cited passes nearly upon that mentioned by Piazzi, "alia 8 e maguit. prsecedit 3" temporis, 3' ad Boream." A, or Sirius, is subject to a large proper motion, namely, 0-5 3" in R. A. and 1-2 3" in Decl. (Argelander.) [Sirius has attracted a good deal of notice during the last few years in consequence of the discovery by Bessel that its proper motion was subject to systematic irregularities, such as to render its path really sinuous and not rectilinear. Bessel did more than this, for he suggested that an invisible companion was the perturbing agent. Peters in 1851 improved upon this idea by calculating a theoretical orbit to satisfy the observations. Finally, in 1862 Alvan Clark in America found a comes, hitherto un- detected. It is not however by any means clear yet that Clark's star is the companion which is required to satisfy Bessel's observations. There are discrepancies which at present cannot be disposed of. More observa- tions are needed, but few telescopes exist capable of furnishing them. Clark used an 1 8^' n refractor. As regards Clark's star Burnham gives : Pos. 48-3; Dist. 10-0", for the Epoch 1880. n. The angle is undoubtedly decreasing. Other companions to Sirius have been reported by Gold- 186 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. schmidt, (Pos. 158; Dist. 103"; Epoch 1878-21); by Marth, (Pos. 114; Dist. 69"; Epoch 1878-21) j and by Secchi, (Pos. 170; Dist. 44"; Epoch 1865-06) ; but Burnham disbelieves in Secchi's star. At the Mel- bourne observatory in 1872 no fewer than 8 small stars were said to have been seen near Sirius by Ellery and others. Altogether we may say that Sirius needs continued and careful scrutiny with large telescopes for a term of years. Gledhill in his Handbook gives a very full account of the modern history of Sirius.] Sirius, the Dog-star, and one of Orion's hounds, is the brightest of all the stars in the firmament, and therefore regarded as their chief; for I have frequently compared it with Canopus, the next in brilliance, when both were nearly on the meridian together, and the latter yielded the palm to Kvcov. From this brilliance there is little probability of its being mistaken for any of its stellar neighbours ; but it may be noted, that a line from the Pleiades through Orion's belt passes, at about 20 beyond the latter, through Sirius. The geometrical diagram here pre- sented to the gaze was not lost to the rhymester : Let Procyon join with Betelgeuze, and pass a Iin3 afar, To reach the point where Sirius glows the most conspicuous star; Then will the eye delighted view a figure fine and vast, Its span is equilateral, triangular its cast. This star derived its Greek name from 2cipto?, in allusion to the brightness, heat> and dryness assigned to it ; though Dr. Hutton gravely informs us that the term is from Siris, which he says is the most ancient appellation of the Nile, for when this star rose heliacally, and became visible to the Egyptians and Ethiopians, their year commenced, and with it the inundation of their fecundating river. As that beneficial flood was attributed to the influence of the beautiful star, it was there- fore worshipped as Sothis, Osiris, and Latrator Anubis ; and was viewed as the abode of the soul of Isis. Jacob Bryant insists, that the word Sirius was borrowed by the Greeks from the Egyptian Cahen Sehor ; and others recognise in it the Mazzaroth of Job ; while Novidius, who gave a scriptural meaning to each constellation, says it alludes to Tobit's dog: "and so it may," ejaculates Moxon, "because he hath a tayle." It is first mentioned as a star by Hesiod, though "Wyllyam Salysbury, 1550, and Hesychius, contend that the name applies equally to the Sun and the dog-star ; and Homer, albeit he does not cite Sirius by name, compares the brightness of Achilles' armour to the pernicious blaze of the dog- star ; Whose burning breath Taints the red air with fevers, plagues, and death. Some of the ancients asserted that a star in the head of the Dog, perfectly distinguishable from Sirius, perhaps meaning y, was designated E.A. 6 h - 4 grey. [There appears to be no change in the angle, but perhaps a slight decrease in the distance.] 447. e CANIS MAJORIS. B.A. Decl. m. 54 S 28 s. 18 49'3 Prec. SMYTH Position. AC 8*4-5 Position. o MACLEAR AB 160-4 BURNHAM 160-2 Difference of R.A. s. 24.1 Distance. // 7-4 7-4 CCLXXIII. s. 2-35 H 4-70 Epoch. 1834-83 Epoch. 1850-10 1878-20 A Nautical Almanac star with a distant companion, on the Greater Dog's body : it will be readily found by running a line from the middle of Orion's belt through /3, the bright star to the W. of Sirius, and o 194 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. extending the same 14 further into the S.E. quarter. A 2 J, pale orange ; [B 9 ;C 7 ]. This star is called Adara, from al 'adMra, the virgins ; o, 77, 6", and e, on the shoulder, tail, and between the tail and legs. Adjacent to these Royer cut away a portion of Cam's Major, and constructed Columba Noachi therewith in 1679. The part thus usurped was called Muliphein, from al-muhlefein, the two stars sworn by, because they were often mistaken for Soheil, or Canopus, before which they rise : these two stars are now a and /3 Columbse. The galley rhymes allude to Royer's robbery Where Canis Major, from the south, th' horizon moves above The stars that deck'd his hinder feet now form the Patriarch's Dove. 448. 14 $. VII. CANIS MAJORIS. (h. 422, 3070 ; H. 1479.) CCLXXII. h. in. s. B.A. 6 54 28 Decl. S 13 33-0 Free, -f 2-76 S 4.73 A tolerably compressed cluster at the back of the Greater Dog's head, principally composed of stars from the 8 th to the II th magnitudes, of which the four principal form the letter Y ; there are also some glimpse stars, but to no great extent. Yet to IJl/s powerful "ken" it appeared to be 20' in diameter in February, 1785. It may be fished up by first finding /u, the object above registered ; when it will appear in the nj quadrant, well within a degree's distance. [" A region rich in stars." BrodieJ] 449. 301 P. VI. LYNCIS. (2. 1009.) CCLXXIV. h. m. R.A. 6 56 55 o Decl. N 52 55 -4 Free. + 4-79 S 4-95 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HEESCHEL, W. 167-4 3-5 1782-87 STRUVE, W. 159-2 ... 2-9 ... 1830-34 SMYTH 159.4 3- 1843-19 SEOCHI 157-0 ... 3-4 ... 1858-27 JEDBZEJEWICZ 156-4 ... 3-2 ... 1880-26 A neat double star, on the animal's neck; where a ray conducted from Polaris to the W. of Castor passes over it at 35 from the pole, or rather more than half-way, on the line between (3 Aurigse and ft TJrsae Majoris. A 6, and B 6J, both white. The measures are more discordant R A. 6 h - 54 m - 6 h - 57**- 195 than might have been expected, [but a slight decrease of angle seems probable]. 450. f GEMINORTTM. CCLXXV. b. m. s. s. R.A. 6 57 35 o Decl. N 20 43-9 Prec. + S 5-06 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HEBBCHEL.W. A B 351-2 ... 91-8 ... 177977 BUB*HAM } A ? 351-6 ... 93-6} I88o .oo AC 83.7 ... 87.3 } A course triple star, on the right knee of Pollux. A 4, pale topaz ; B 8, violet j and 13, grey. This star is called Mekbuda. It is easily seen on running a line between the cluster in Orion's sword and (3 Geminorum, for it passes over f at 9 from the latter star ; and it is near the mid-distance between f Tauri, the tip of the S. horn, and the Praesepe in Cancer. 451. 50 M. MONOCEBOTIS. (h. 425 ; H. 1483 ; .) CCLXXVI. h. m. a. B.A. 6 57 41 Decl. S 8 10 '7 Position. G SMYTH 170 A delicate and close double star in a cluster of the Via Lactea, on the Unicorn's right shoulder. A 8 and B 13, both pale white. This is an irregularly round and very rich mass, occupying with its numerous outliers more than the field, and composed of stars from the 8 th to the 16^ magnitudes ; and there are certain spots of splendour which indicate minute masses beyond the power of my telescope. The most decided points are, a red star towards the southern verge, and a pretty little equilateral triangle of 10^- sizers, just below, or N. of it. The double star here noted was estimated : this was made triple by H., whose 2357 of the Fifth Series it is. It is sufficiently conspicuous as a double star, and though I perceive an infinitesimal point exactly on the vertical of A, I cannot ascertain whether it is H.'s C. This superb cluster was discovered by Messier in 1771, and registered " a mass of email stars more or less brilliant." It is 9 N.N.E. of Sirius, O 2 196 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. or rather more than one-third of the distance between that star and Procyon. 452. 40 IjJL. VIII. GEMINOBUM. (h. 432; H. 1490; .) h. B.A. 7 O 39 o Decl. N 27 21 '7 Free, -f 3-74 S 5-24 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " 01 ; L ; v 1 C ; Scl inv; " which means : " a cluster ; large ; very little condensed ; there is a small cluster involved in the chief one." At Parsonstown on December 12, 1866, 50 stars large and small were counted in the finder. The small cluster is described as " neat and con- sisting of 6 or 7 stars close together and well isolated from the rest." 6 of them were of mags. 10-12, and there were one, or perhaps two, much smaller. 453. 2640 Lac. CABINS. h. m. s. s. B. A. 71 33 Decl. S 59 6-9 Prec. + 0-92 S 5-32 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J. 74-9 ... 2.40 ... 1836-22 A double star, A 6| ; B 7j. 454. 33 $. VIII. MONOCEBOTIS. (H. 1498 ; 2. 1028.) CCLXXVII. h. m. B.A. 735 o Decl. S 10 27-0 Prec. -f 2-83 S 5-46 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STRUVE.W. 302.3 ... 10-9 ... 1831-16 SMYTH 300 ... 15 ... 1833.12 A double star in a loose cluster, under the Unicorn's chest, and about 8 N.E. of Sirius, in a direction pointed out by leading a line from a Tauri over y Orionis, and nearly twice as far again. A 9, yellow; B 12, dusky. This is a scattered group of stars, in an irregular lozenge form, and consists chiefly of three vertical rows, having four individuals in each ; several are of the 9^ magnitude, and reddish. [" A region rich in stars, but hardly to be called a 'cluster.' "Brodie.] E. A. 6 h - 57 m - ; h - 9 m - 197 455. 5 CANIS MAJORIS. CCLXXVIII. b. m. E. s. B.A. 73 55 Decl. S 26 13-1 Prec. -f 2*44 5-53 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // BURNHAM 224-1 ... 265-9 ... I880-00 A star with a distant companion on the loins of Canis Major ; where a line from a Orionis to the S.S.E., through Sirius, intercepts it at 12 below that star. A 3^, light yellow ; B 7 J, very pale; other small stars in the field, and np is the one mentioned by Piazzi, " Alia 9 ae magnitud. prsecedit 45-5" temporis, i' 48" ad boream." [Knott rates B at 9^, and suggests a misprint.] My observations are, of course, not sufficiently nice for an authority, but still they countenance the slight proper motion attributed to this star, both in R. A. and Declination. It is considered variable ; having been registered 2 nd magnitude by Hevelius, La Caille, and Brisbane ; 2 J by Halley ; 3 by Ptolemy, Tycho, and Flamsteed ; and 3^ by Piazzi and Johnson. 8 is called "Wezen, al-wezn, weight, from appearing to rise with difficulty above the horizon, as if chained to the ground. The same sluggishness was applied to a and /3 Centauri, which 1000 years ago, under the 30*^ parallel of latitude, only obtained a meridian altitude of 4. The most general application, however, of the name will be found under e Canis Majoris. 456. CABINS. (*h. 3941.) b. m. s. R.A. 77 50 Decl. S 60 12-5 Prec. + 0.84 S 5-85 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J. 310-4 ... 0-81 ... 1836-92 An exceedingly difficult double star. A 8 ; B 8 J. 457. CANIS MAJORIS. (*h. 3938.) h. m. s. R.A. 7 9 10 c Decl. S 22 42-8 Prec. -f 2-53 S 5-96 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J. 252-6 ... 18 est. ... 1837-09 A double star. A 7^ ; B 8J. 198 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 458. 34 $. VIII. MONOCEROTIS. R.A. Decl. m. 9 o 10 20 5-7 Free. Position. STBUVE, W. 20-3 SMYTH 22-0 MAIN 21-1 Distance. // 19.9 2I-O 20-3 (H. 1506 ; 2. 1052.) CCLXXIX. S 6-07 Epoch. 1831-19 1837-91 1863-12 A neat double star, on the following boundary of a loose cluster in the Galaxy, between the Unicorn and the Greater Dog's head. A 8, and B 8J, both silvery white. This is a very rich field of stars, in the which is a brilliant oval mass, bounded by a sapphire-tinted 6 th magnitude star, in the sf quadrant, and the pair here measured a little N. of it. A line from /3 Geminorum, passed by /3 Canis Majoris to nearly as far again, will find this object posited 9 E.N.E. of Sirius. 459. y PISCIS VOLANTIS. B. A. 7 m. s. 9 42 Free. - s. 0-48 o / n Decl. S 70 19-2 S 6-0 Position. Distance. Epoch. o .. HERSCHEL, J. 301-3 12.8 1836-37 SANTIAGO OBS . 302-5 13- 1851-06 A double star. A 5 ; 67. 460. A GEMINOBUM. (2. 1061.) CCLXXX. h R.A. 7 Decl. N STBUVE, W. SMYTH BARCLAY m. s. 11 46 16 44-3 Position, o 30-9 29-2 47-6 ... Free. + a s. 3'45 a 6-18 Epoch. 1829-86 1838-79 1872-97 o Distance. n 9-5 10-3 9-0 A delicate double star on the left thigh of Pollux, about 12 on a line from Procyon towards /3 Aurigse, in the N.N.W., and rather less than a third of the distance between a, Geminorum and Sirius. A 4^, brilliant white; B n, yellowish. A Geminorum has been placed on the variable class, but I could detect R. A. ; h - 9 m - I3 m. 199 no difference in its brightness as compared with 2 2 Monocerotis, v Orionis, and 2 Lyncis. [This star is not now considered to be variable.] 461. 12 K.A. Decl. . CANTS MAJOBIS. (h. 440, 3076 ; H. 1512.) CCLXXXIV. Free. + h. m. a. 7 12 51 S 15 26-5 3. 272 S 6-27 A tolerably compressed but extensive cluster, on the boundary between the Unicorn and the Greater Dog. It consists of a singular group of very lucid specks, formed of stars nearly all of the io th magnitude. The most compressed portion occupies a third of the field with power 66 ; and it is followed by a solitary yellowish star, of the 8 th magnitude. It can be fished up, under a moderately magnifying eye-piece, at 7^ W.N/W. of Sirius ; where an imaginary line from a Tauri passed over y Orionis will intersect it. \_3f"/ Canis Majoris.] 462 1051 2. CAMELOPABDI. K.A. Decl. h. 7 N m. 13 73 s. 21 16- Free. + S s. T 6- 37 Position. Distance. STRUVE,W.j AB268 '4 (AC 81-5 ... 31 DEMBOWSKI AB 273.5 - l A double star. A 7, white ; B 9 ; 7. 1.22 Epoch. 1831.86 1878-25 463. 8 GEMINOBUM. (2. 1066.) CCLXXXIII. b. m. s. R.A. 7 13 33 Decl. ff 22 11-3 Position. Free. H- 3-59 n S Distance. Epoch. 1822*14 1829-72 196-8 ... 7.2 ... 1838.92 200-0 ... 7-16 ... 1856-11 204-3 - 7-37 - 1878-09 A Nautical Almanac star of the second rank, double, on the right hip SOUTH STRUVE, W. 196.9 SMYTH SECCHI DOBERCK 7-25 7-15 7-2 7.16 7-37 200 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. of Pollux ; it is exactly half-way between the Prsesepe and f Tauri, on the tip of the Bull's S. horn, and nearly on the line from a Geminorum towards Sirius. A 3^, pale white; B 9, purple. This delicate object is rather troublesome to measure in distance, from disparity, but certainly with my instrument is not "one of the most difficult stars in the heavens." This star is known as Wasat, from the Arabic al-wasat, the middle or centre. [A small increase in angle is certain, but the distance appears to be unchanged.] 464. 20 LYNCIS. (2. 1065.) h. m. s. 8. B.A. 7 13 51 Prec. + 4-61 / lf Decl. N 50 19-4 S 6-32 Position. Distance. Epoch. H STRUVE, W. 253-4 - . 15-0 ... 1830-55 SMYTH 253-3 .. , 15-2 ... I835-39 MAIN 2 53-i .. . 14-8 ... 1862.31 JEDRZEJEWICZ 253.9 . 15-1 ... 1878-29 CCLXXXII. A neat double star, on the animal's chest ; and 16 E.N.E. of a Aurigse. A and B, both 7j, and silvery white. The relative fixity of these stars may be considered as established. 465. 19 LYNCIS. (2. 1062.) CCLXXXI. h. m. s. s. B. A. 7 13 53 Prec. + 4'93 o 1 a Decl. N 55 28-6 QJ 6-30 Position. Distance. Epoch. Q HERSCHEL, W. AB 316.9 14-1 ... 1782-86 STRUVE, W. AB 313-8 14-7 ... 1829.51 SMYTH j AC 358-2 . .. 14-6 ) 215-2 \ - 1833.77 MAIN AB 312-5 14-3 1862-31 A coarse triple star, in the nape of the Lynx's neck, nearly in mid- distance of an imaginary line thrown from Polaris to Pollux. A 7, white ; B and C, both 8, and plum- coloured. KA. 7 h - i3 m 7 h - l8 m * 201 466. 30 CANIS MAJOB1S. (17 $. VII; h. 441, 3077; H. 1513.) CCLXXXV. K.A. Decl. h. m. s. 7 14 28 S 24 45-2 Prec. + S Distance. 6-38 SMYTH HEESCHEL, J. BURNHAM Position. Distance. Epoch. AD 73-0 ... 85 ... 1834-83 A B 85-8 ... 8.0) ^ tM ^ AC 73.3 ... 15.0 i !AB 91-0 ... 7-8 \ AC 80-3 ... 14.3 > ... 1880-20 AD 78-0 ... 84-4 ) A star with companions, in a rather large cluster, on the Greater Dog's back; where a line from y Orionis through Sirius, and 12 beyond, will find it. A 6J, white ; D 9. pale grey. The whole has a beautiful appearance, the bright white star A being surrounded by a rich gathering of minute companions, in a slightly elongated form, and nearly vertical position. [Sir J. Herschel's measures are taken from the Cape Obs., p. 191. He simply says : "Triple; chief of a fine cluster." His mags, are 5^, n, 12. Its Cape number is 3948.] 467. 2779 Lac. CAKING. h. m. s. B.A. 7 17 42 Decl. S 52 7-0 Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 16-1 SANTIAGO OBS. 28-3 Prec. + 1-45 - S 6-67 Distance. // 10-5 8.2 Epoch. 1834-98 1852-14 A double star. A 6^ ; 67. This object points to a coarse double star 7' or S' distant. 468. 35 R.A. . VIII. PUPPIS. (h. 3080 ; H. 1521.) s. Prec. + 2-78 h. m. s. 7 18 54 Decl. S 13 2-9 S 6.77 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " Cl ; v L ; p Ri ; 1C; st L ; " which means : " a cluster ; very large ; pretty rich ; little condensed ; the stars are large." Engraved, Lassell, Mem. E. A. S., vol. xxiii. PL ii. Fig. 9. 202 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 469. 61 GEMINOBUM. CCLXXXVI. 8. 3'54 6-87 Epoch. 1781.99 1835-83 1854.18 A coarse double star pointing to a neat pair in the np quadrant, on the loins of Pollux, and about 2 to the S.E. of 6 Geminorum, the alignment of which has been given. A 7^, deep yellow ; B 9, yellowish ; C 8, blue ; D 9, bluish ; and besides these, the field is very rich in small stars. [Neither "Webb in 1855, nor Knott in 1861, could find a star answering to Smyth's B. Smyth's DC constitute 2. 1083.] 470. ?? CANIS MAJOBIS. CCLXXXVII. 61 GEMINORUM. h. B.A. 7 m. 19 s. 6 Free. + Decl. N 20 28-7 S Position. Distance. HEBSCHEL, W. SMYTH < DAWES DC AB DC DC o 46.1 no 42. 4 6.2 ... 60 ... 6.5 ... 6-5 }' h. K.A. 7 19 44 o Decl. S 29 5-3 Free. + 2-37 S 6-83 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // SMYTH 285 ... 169 ... 1833-82 BURNHAM 285 ... 178.6 ... 1880-03 A star with a distant companion, at the root of the Greater Dog's tail; where an imaginary line from the 3 small stars forming Orion's head, passed through Sirius, will strike it at 17 beyond. A 3, pale red ; B 7^, dull grey ; two small stars following. A is called Aludra, from the Arabian al-adhrd, which is the singular of al-adhdra. (See Canis Majoris.) According to the Megale Syntaods, Hipparchus found that the solstitial colure passed through the caudine star of the Greater Dog, which appears to have occasionally served, by its arrival at the meridian, to indicate the zero for reckoning the hours ; its R.A., which was then exactly 90, rendering it convenient for that purpose. If the longitude assigned by Hipparchus to this star be compared with its present place, the annual precession will be 50-7" ; and both the theory of gravitation and the deductions of modern operations coincide in indicating 50-1" as the mean annual value. This will very nearly agree with the Platonic year, or complete revolution of the equinoxes in 25,920 years, as given by Ricciolus and approved by Flamsteed, at the rate of a degree in about R. A. h - 2i m< 203 72 years. Well may Hipparchus be dubbed the Prseses of ancient astronomers ! (See a Leonis.) 471. 2801 Lac. PUPPIS. (*h. 3966.) h. m. s. B.A. 7 20 53 Decl. S 37 3'9 Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 140-9 A double star. A 7^; B 7|. Free. + 2-12 S 6-93 Distance. // 7-0 Epoch. 1835-96 472. Decl. 540 Sou. GEMINOBTJM. B.A. 7 21 6 22 22 '2 Position. o SOUTH 275.9 Free. + 3-59 S 6-95 Distance. Epoch. 35.6 ... 1825-09 Webb thus describes this object : " A fine pair, 7$, 9 ; red, blue ; about 40' N. of 63, a 6 th mag. star with a minute attendant, which is 2 / 5, a little S." 473. /3 CANIS MINOBIS. CCLXXXIX. h. m. s. s. B.A. 7 21 11 Free. + 3-26 Decl. N 8 30-6 S 6-94 Position. Distance. Epoch. NHAM i AB 7 6 ' 6 - (AC 310-1 ... 122.3 ) 138.8 I ... 1880-00 A wide triple star, on Procyon's neck ; rather better than 4 to the N.N.W. of its lucida, where its magnitude readily points it out. A 3, white ; B 12, orange ; C 10, flushed; the last is coarsely double with one of the same magnitude, and there are other stars in the field, of which the white one preceding is that alluded to by Piazzi, " Alia 8 ae mag- nitudin. prsecedit 43" temporis, 2-' circiter ad boream." The large individual is named Gomeisa, from al-ghomeisd, watery-eyed ; and it is Al-Mirzam, one of the " roarers," mentioned under /3 Canis Majoris. 204 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 474. 63 GEMINORUM. CCLXXXVIII. h. m. s. B.A. 7 21 13 o Decl. N 21 40'4 Free. + 3-57 S 6-90 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // SMYTH 325-0 ... 50 ... 1831-95 MAIN 324.3 ... 44-6 ... 1863.17 A wide double star on the back of Pollux ; following 5 Geminoruin, within 2, about E. by S. A 6, yellow; B [n], reddish, and with two telescopic stars in the sp quadrant they form a regular curve. The results lead to the inference that these stars are only optical neighbours. 475. 44 $. VIII. CANIS MINOBIS. (H. 1533.) b. m. s. s. R.A. 7 22 39 o Decl. N 7 15-5 Prec. + 3-23 S 7-07 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "Cl; L; P; vlC; stL;" which means: '-a cluster; large; poor; very little condensed ; the stars are large/' 476. 45 $. IV. GEMINOBUM. (h.450; H.1532; &.) CCXC. li. m. s. s. B.A. 7 22 41 Decl. N 21 8-1 Prec. + 3-56 S 7-09 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // KNOTT 2-4 ... 100- ... 1864-96 A star enveloped in an atmosphere, with a distant companion on the loins of Pollux. A 7^, greyish white; B 8, dusky blue; ["a third star I2j mag. in np quadrant." Knott\\ other stars following. This was observed by IjjL in 1787, as a "star of the g^ magnitude, with a pretty bright nebulosity, equally dispersed all around. A very remarkable phenomenon." H. describes it as "a star of the 8 tn magnitude, exactly in the centre of an exactly round bright hemisphere 25" in diameter." The beauty of this is, in great measure, lost to my instrument, for I could only bring it to bear as a burred star : it lies about 2 to the E.S.E. of 8 Geminorum, whose alignment is already treated of. ( See No. 463.) [Webb finds the nebulosity to be much easier than Smyth's account led him to expect. The Earl of Eosse saw the star surrounded by a small circular nebula in which, close to the star, was a little dark spot. This K.A. h - 2i m -- h - 2 m - 205 nebula was encompassed first by a dark and then by a luminous ring, bright and nickering. Brodie simply says : " Very curious in 8^n re- fractor." Knott reverses the magnitudes of A and B. Fletcher asserted confidently that A is variable. In April, 1865, he saw it no brighter than a io th mag. star.] [Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1850, PI. xxxviii. Fig. 15; Lassell, Mem. R.A.S., vol. xxiii., PI. ii. Fig. 6.] 477. 116 P. VII. MONOCEROTIS. (2. 1097.) CCXCI. b. m. s. s. R.A. 7 22 42 Prec. + 2-82 f ff Decl. S 11 20-O S 7-09 Position. Distance. Epoch. o a STRUVE, W. AC 312-2 1O-2 1832-15 MAIN AC 311-2 20-5 1863-14 DEMBOWSKI AB 166.3 0.80 ... 1875.52 BUBNHAM j AD ( AE 157-3 41.4 ... 23-4 \ ... 31-05 1878.14 A delicate [quintuple] star, under the Unicorn, where a line from ft Canis Majoris, led through Sirius about 11 to the E.N.E., will meet it. A 7, yellow; [B 8; C 9; D. 10; E. 13]. This object is close to the gap in the fanciful boundary which marks out Argo's northern limb on our maps ; which gap cuts a narrow slice of about 13 long by i broad, right through the body of Monoceros, in order to catch up a star pertaining to Canis Minor, which Flamsteed, by some mistake, registered as 13 Navis. A and C point upon a distant telescopic group in the np. [AB = /3 332.] 478. 11 ^. VIII. GEMINORTJM. (H. 1534; .) h. m. s. s. B.A. 7 22 53 o Decl. N 13 59-6 Prec. + 3-38 // S 7-10 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " Cl ; p Ri ; C ;" which means : " a cluster ; pretty rich ; compressed." On Feb. 22, 1867, at Parsonstown there were counted 70 stars nearly contained in one field 16' in diameter, about 10 of them being of the II th mag. and the rest smaller. 479. 36 #. VIII. PUPPIS. (h. 451; H. 1535.) h. m. K.A. 7 23 2 C Decl. S 11 31-1 Prec. + 2-82 // S 7-n A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: 206 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. "Cl; vL; vlC;" which means : " a cluster ; very large; -very little compressed." 480. h. m. s. B.A. 7 24 22 1104 2. PUPPIS. Free. + Decl. S 14 45-1 Position. STRUVE,W. 292-4 ... DEMBOWSKI 3*2-3 WILSON and SEABROKE 314-0 STONE, 0. 318-3 ... A double star. A 7, white ; B 9, white. An increase in the angle seems certain. 2-74 S 7-22 Distance. 2-35 2-21 2-55 2.29 Epoch. 1834-88 1864-50 1874-17 1878.44 481. 124 P. VII . PUPPIS. h. m. s. s. B.A. 7 24 38 Free. + 2-30 1 M Decl. 3 31 37'6 S 7' 2 5 Position. Distance. Epoch. o M HERSCHEL, J. 51-8 9.6 ... 1836.91 STONE, 0. 5i-9 9'4 1877.20 A double star. A 6J ; B 7! 482. 1108 S. GEMINOBUM. b. m. s. B.A. 7 26 15 Decl. N 23 7'8 Free, -f 3- 6 1 S f 38 STEUVE, W. BURNHAM Position, o 179-1 179-5 Distance. n "5 11.5 Epoch. 1827-27 1879.23 A double star. A 7, yellowish white; B 9, bluish. 483. S. CANIS MINOBIS. h. m. s. B.A. 7 26 45 Decl. 1ST 8 33-2 Free. + S 3*26 7-40 A red and variable star discovered by Hind in 1856. The magnitude ranges from 7^ to below 12. As regards colour, Hind terms it "fiery;" E. A. 207 Winnecke " stark roth ;" Vogel simply " roth/' Schonfeld thinks that the period, which is usually set down at 332 d , is diminishing. 484. a GEMINORUM. (2. 1110.) s. Free. + 3-85 S 7-48 CCXCII. B.A. 7 27 35 Decl. 1ST 32 7'8 Position, o HEESCHEL.W. AB 302-8 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH AB 267-1 SMTTH JAB ,58-8 MADLEB JOHNSON MAIN TALMAGE DOBERCK JEDBZEJEWICZ {AC 162-0 AB 252-8 AB 245.7 AB 240-8 AB 240-5 AB 235-1 ( A B 234-6 ( A C 164-0 Distance. 5-35 47 72-9 4-88 5-07 5-65 5-55 5-64 73-28 Epoch. 1778-27 1821-21 1830-95 1841-11 1850.21 1861-13 1870-35 1878-11 1878-21 A Nautical Almanac star, and well-known binary, in the head of Castor, and about half way between a Leonis and a Tauri. A 3, bright white ; B 3^, pale white ; C [9], dusky, and there is another very small acolyte at a distance, in the sp quadrant of the field, [which however appears to have no physical connection with the primary : at least the alteration in angle and distance are so small in J a century as to seem accidental]. In order to arrive at some deductions, Sir J. Herschel gathered together all the observations he could rely upon, it being a question he was deeply interested in, because, he says, Castor is " the largest and finest of all the double stars in our hemisphere, and that whose unequivocal angular motion first impressed on my father's mind a full conviction of the reality of his long cherished views on the subject of the binary stars." By the alignments of Pound and Bradley, he was able to carry the angle back for upwards of 100 years; and by computations as careful as the then state of the subject would allow, he deduced a period of 253^^. "This star," he added, " seems on the point of undergoing, within the ensuing twenty-four years [from about 1830], a remarkable change similar to that of which y Virginis has already furnished a striking instance during the last century, and passing from a distant double star of the second class to a close one of the first, and ultimately to one of extreme closeness and difficulty, such as only the very finest telescopes, with all the improvements we may expect in them, will be capable of showing 208 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. otherwise than single." But there are some orbital anomalies still in the way. [The orbit of Castor has been subjected to the careful attention of a large number of experienced observers and computers since Admiral Smyth wrote the foregoing paragraph. A very full statement of the work done is given by Gl eel hill in the Handbook of Double Stars, Suffice it to say here that Thiele's orbit in Ast. Nach., No. 1227, vol. li., appears to be the best yet arrived at. His period is 996?. Moreover it may be mentioned that all the more recent results ascribe to Castor a period much in excess of that assigned by the earlier investigators. For instance, Wilson gives 98 2y, and Doberck iooiy. I give Thiele's and Doberck's orbits side by side for comparison : Thiele. Doberck. TT Longitude of peri-astron . 6 Longitude of Ascending Node = 31 58 . 27 46 A Peri-astron from Node on orbit =294 o . 267 13 7 Inclination . . . . = 42 5 44 33 Eccentricity .... =0-34382 . 0-3292 n Mean Annual Motion . . = 21-66" a Semi-axis major . . . =7.53" (for 1850) 7-43" (for 1850) T Peri-astron passage . . =1750-326 . 1749-75 Period =996-85?" . iooi-2iy rs The distance of A B seems to have reached its maximum about 1872, and a diminution is probably now going on.] Using Herschel's bow, albeit with hardly vigour to bend it, I attempted an orbit of this revolver, notwithstanding I soon found that the values of its annual changes are violently discordant. The projection brought out an ex-centricity of 0-7781, an inclination =70 36', and a period of 240 years; the last condition being obtained by H.'s novel and ingenious process of cutting out the graphic orbit from card-board, and weighing both it and its requisite sectors in a balance. These are the previous angles used : Position. Epoch. o / Bradley and Pound .... 355 53 . 1719-84 Bradley and Maskelyne . . . 323 47 . 1759^80 Herschel, W 293 3 178364 Herschel, W 284 19 . 1800-27 Struve 272 52 . 1813-83 Herschel, J. 270 o . 1816-97 Herschel, J., and South . . . 264 59 . 1823.11 Bradley appears to have made his estimations upon the parallelism of the line of direction of the pair, to that joining Castor and Pollux, in I 759> " a ^ all times of the year," evidently intending to notice whether any annual oscillation might be observed. This induced Roger Long, Lowndes's Professor of Astronomy at Cambridge, to attack Castor with E. A. 7 fl . 27- 209 telescopes of i4 ft and i7 ft in length, with a view to carrying out Galileo's suggestion on parallax; but the prospect of success soon became so hopeless, that he was " persuaded the stars would always be found to appear the same." This gentleman was more happy in the construction of an enormous astronomical machine the very A 1 of orreries at Pembroke College. It is a hollow sphere, about eighteen feet in diameter, with its polar axis parallel to the mundane axis, upon which it is readily turned by a winch and rack -work ; thus it can be made to revolve, while about 30 persons conveniently attend a scientific lecture in the interior, and contemplate the orderly march of the constellations painted on the moving concavity above them, the stars being pierced through the metal according to the several mag- nitudes, so that the light penetrates and each assumes a curious radiated, or rather stellated form. This sphere was completed, with considerable expense as well as ingenuity, in 1758; but although 6 per annum is allowed to a keeper, who is generally an undergraduate, it was suffered to fall so much out of order as to mar the projector's intention of popularising astronomy ; and many a good man and true lias lived and learned in Cambridge, without even being aware of its existence. Of this I could tell a story or two, but shall only add, that it was lately brushed up a bit ; and I had the satisfaction of being^ on its floor with a party of Cambridge savants of the first magnitude, in whom the shade of Long must have delighted. Ai'8v/ioi, Gemini, Tindaridae, or Gemelli, is the third constellation of the zodiac, and one of the ancient 48; lying nearly mid-way between Orion and the Great Bear, in a region long viewed as the centre of the heavens. Among the Orientals it was represented as a pair of kids, denoting that part of spring when these animals appear ; but the Greeks changed them to two children with their feet on the Galaxy ; and the Arabians, whose tenets prohibited the human form in delineations, afterwards altered them to a couple of peacocks. Paulus Yenetus, and the early Venetian illustrators of Hyginus, represent them as two winged angels. Among the ancients every sign had its tutelary deity, and Phoebus had charge of Gemini, which gave rise to the astrological jargon about the connection between the sun and this asterism ; to the disparage- ment of the latter, for many inuendos are on record, and we are told, in the manuscript Almanac of 1386, that whoever happens to be born under the aerial triplicity of the Twins, shall be " ryght pore and wayke, and lyf in mykul tribulacion." Astronomers, however, view it in a different light ; for though it is not splendidly conspicuous nor thickly studded, it is fine, and contains bright individuals, which, with its numerous double stars, clusters, and nebulae, render it interesting and important ; and, from its being the sign, 210 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. of St. Paul's ship, we see that it was esteemed propitious by ancient mariners. It has been thus tabulated : Ptolemy ... 25 stars. Bayer .... 33 stars. Copernicus . . 25 Hevelius ... 38 ., Tycho Brah^ . 29 Flamsteed ... 85 Kepler ... 30 Bode 190 To know this star by alignment is easy, as a ray from (3 Orionis, led through , the middle star of Orion's belt, and under a Orionis, will, at about twice that distance further on, rest upon Castor : or, if taking the poetaster's advice : From gamma on the Great Bear's flank let a long ray be cast, Conduct it under Merak's blaze to south-west regions vast; Across the Lynx to Gemini this line will thus be led, And carried further on will reach bright Betelgeuze the red. 485. 37 IjjLVIII. PUPPIS. (h. 455; H. 1545.) h. m. a. K.A. 7 28 10 o Decl. S 15 12-5 Free. + 2-73 S f 5 a A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " Cl ; P ; 1C; st 9 &c. ;" which means : " cluster ; poor ; little com- pressed ; consists of stars from mag. 9 downwards/' 486. 52 $. VIII. MONOCEBOTIS. (H. 1544; &.) CCXCIII. h. R.A. 7 28 12 Decl. S 12 48-3 Prec. -\- 2-79 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STBUVE, W. BC 140-2 ... 12-4 ... 1830-71 The principal star of a loose Galaxy cluster, under the Unicorn, and pointing to a double star in the np t on an angle 288 and A R. A. i4'5 s . A 7, faint yellow; B and C, both 10, and both dusky; the two latter point to a 9 tn magnitude star preceding them by about 6 s , and the field contains the cluster and its outliers, with several 8 th magnitudes grouped near the centre. It may be fished up by dropping a line from Geminorum close by the "W. side of Procyon, and extending it 19 to the S., where it stands 12 E.N.E. of Sirius. [BC form 2. 1115.] R. A 7 h - 27- -- 211 487. 149 P. VII. PUPPIS. CCXCIV. h. B. A. 7 29 4O Prec. S. + 2-54 / -y Decl. S 23 14-1 S 7-64 Position. Distance. Epoch. o H SOUTH 284.9 .. . 9-0 1825-01 SECCHI 108-8 . 8-7 . . 1856-2 STONE, O. 107.9 .. . 9-0 . . 1879.1 A neat double star in the Galaxy, over the aplustre of the Argo's poop; where a line sent from ft Geminorum through Procyon, and 28 beyond, will hit it; as will a cross line from Orion's sword-cluster carried through Sirius, and 14 into the S.E. quarter. A and B, both 6, and both topaz-tinted. [Webb notes the p star to be the larger of the two.] 488. 38 . vni. PUPPIS. R.A. Decl. 7 31 33 Star = 2. 1121.) Prec. (h. 459, 3O88 ; H. 1551 ; CCXCVI. S HEBSCHEL.W. STRUVE,W. SMYTH STONE, O. Distance. 6.5 + 7-4 8.0 7-3 2.76 7-80 Epoch. 1782.78 1831.44 1834.21 1878.65 14 14-3 Position. o 3002 304-7 303-8 304.4 A double star in a loose cluster of the Milky "Way, over the Argo's stern ; and one of those seized by Bode to make his Officina Typogra- phica. A 7-J, and B 8, both bright bluish white. It inhabits a very splendid field of large and small stars, disposed somewhat in a lozenge- shape, and preceded by a 7 th magnitude with a companion about 20" nf it. A is otherwise known as 34 Omcinae Typographic^. To fish this object up, run a line about 12 E. by N. from Sirius, and intersect it by another from /3 Geminorum through Procyon, and con- tinued 20 lower down. It is in a very rich vicinity. 489. CARING. R.A. 7 31 35 Decl. S 54 55-8 Position. HERSCHEL J i A B 3 J 7-3 (AC 258.0 A triple star. A 7 ; B 14 ; C 8. p 2 (*h. 3984.) Prec. + i S'L 32 80 Epoch. 1 Distance. .'.'.' 64-5 ' 1835-16 18^7-54 212 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 490. 1 $. VI. GEMINORUM. (h.458; H. 1549 ; .) CCXCV. h. R.A. 7 31 55 o Decl. N 21 49-3 Free. + 3-57 S fpo A compressed cluster under the left shoulder of Pollux; and rather more than one-third of the distance from /3 Geminorum to /3 Canis Minoris, following 8 Geminorum nearly on the parallel, at about 4. This was described by l[. as a "beautiful cluster of many large and compressed small stars, about 1 2' in diameter." My telescope only shows a faint mass of very small stars, inclining from sp to nf, but of indistinct figure, the objects being from the 10 th to the i6 tb magnitude. [Sir "W. Herschel's diameter would seem to have been exaggerated, for at Parsonstown it was only described as " perhaps 5' or 6' in diameter."] 491. a CANIS MINORIS. CCXCVIII. h. m. s. s. R.A. 7 33 33 Decl. N 5 30-5 Prec. + 3-19 S 7-96 A Nautical Almanac star with companions, on the loins of the Lesser Dog. A ij, yellowish white. A is a splendid star, though very con- siderably less bright than Sirius, which accounts for the latter being called the Greater Dog, quite as well as the assigned reason, as to rising time. Authorities have differed as to Procyon's magnitude ; Ptolemy and Hevelius designating it i, Tycho Brahe 2, and most of the others i|. [Astronomers have detected several companions to Procyon. The oldest is Flamsteed's, observed in 1692. Of the other companions the following particulars are on record : Position. Distance. Epoch. o LAMONT AB 262.3 ... 56-5 ... 18367 ROMBERG 294-9 ... 45.8 ... 1863-2 NEWCOMB 311-8 ... 44.5 ... 1874-0 BURNHAM 320-7 ... 44-7 ... 1879-7 SMYTH AC 85-0 ... 145 ... 1838-8 POWELL 83-8 ... 326-6 ... 1855-9 SECCHI 83-6 ... 333-2 ... 1856-2 DEMBOWSKI 81-2 ... 342-3 ... 1874-2 FLAMMARION 80-5 ... 346-5 ... 1877-2 POWELL A D 282-1 ... 384-3 ... 1855-9 DEMBOWSKI 285-3 373' 2 1877-2 FLAMSTEED AE 116 ... 588 ... 1692 POWELL 99.7 ... 643 ... 1860 DEMBOWSKI 98-5 ... 650 ... 1874 FLAMMARION 96-8 ... 652 ... 1877 The nearest star, B, was discovered at the Munich Observatory nearly half a century ago, and independently in later times by Dawes and . A. *. i- fc- m. 213 others. The distance of the Smyth star, like many others of this class in the " Bedford Catalogue," is largely in error, and at one time it was thought to furnish an instance of the disappearance of a star, but the detection of many similar errors on the part of Smyth has rendered this very improbable. This star was found by Bird of Birmingham in 1864 to be a close double star, with a minute distant attendant, of mag, 13. Position. Distance. Epoch. c DEMBOWSKI C a 182-6 ... 0-79 ... 1872-90 BURNHAM 187-6 ... 0-86 ... 1879-10 BURNHAM C b 335-2 ... 36-53 ... 1880-18 The distant star, E, is 2. 1126 (No. 492). The change shown by the measures of all these distant stars is due to the proper motion of Procyon. Some American observers have suspected other companions to Procyon. The following are particulars of the stars noted at Washington : Position. Distance. Epoch. o // American A 10 ... 6 ... 1876-03 American B 36 ... 8-8 ... 1876-03 American C 50 ... 10 ... 1876-03 Two more were suspected, one of them at Pos. 325+ with a distance of 10". I pass over 0. Struve's " star," found afterwards by its " discoverer" to be a " ghost." Gledliill, who has gone very fully into the history of Procyon in the Handbook of Double Stars, gives a good deal of information which will not be found to square very well with what is stated here, but I have Burnham's authority for all that I have said.] Hunters after parallax will recollect that this is one of those stars upon which Piazzi bestowed such labour to detect the angle which the mean diameter of the Earth's orbit subtends from them, as related in the xiith volume of the Italian Society's Memoirs ; and that an infinity of observations induced him to assign 3"+ as the value of Procyon. It has also a large proper motioii in space; which Argelander values at 0-69" in R. A., and 1-05" in Decl. Canis Minor, though a small asterism, is one of the old 48, and, as well as its lucida, was called IfyoKiW, the precursor-dog, because it appeared in the morning dawn before Sirius : though Jacob Bryant persists that the Greek filched the word from the Egyptian Pur Cohen. Hence also its name of Ante-Canis ; and it was popularly considered as Orion's second hand, or Canicula. The Arabians recognised its quality of forerunner to the Dog-star in al-kelb-al-imitekaddem, the antecedent dog. The constellation was one of much interest, and the regard of the ancients descended to the astrologers of later ages. " What meteoroscoper," 214 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. demands old Leonard Digges, "yea, who learned in matters astronomical, noteth not the great effects at the rising of the starre called the Litel Dogge ?" This constellation stands to the N.E. of the Greater Dog, so that the Milky Way passes between them; and under Gemini. They were anciently in closer connection, but the intrusion of Monoceros between them, by Hevelius, has parted them. The number of stars given to this asterism, in successive Catalogues, has been as follows : Ptolemy .... 2 stars. Bayer .... 8 stars. Hyginus .... 3 Hevelius. ... 13 Tycho Brahd . . . 5 Flamsteed ... 14 Kepler 5 .. Bode 55 .. Procyon is a member of the magnificent equilateral triangle formed in conjunction with Sirius and a Orionis, as well as a right-angled one with a Orionis and ft Geminorum. A perpendicular raised at Sirius to a line drawn from that star to Orion's belt will also pass through Procyon to the northward ; or, as the alignment is expressed : Orion's belt from Taurus' eye, leads down to Sirius bright, His spreading shoulders guide you East, 'bove Procyon's pleasing light. 492. 170 P. VII. CANIS MINORIS. (2. 1126.) CCXCIX. h. m. s. s. R.A. 7 34 17 Decl. N 5 29-1 Prec. + 3-19 8 8-14 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J. 130-7 ... 1-40 ... 1826-18 SMYTH 132-9 ... 1-4 ... 1833-22 STRUVE, 0. 138-2 ... 1-13 ... 1850-26 WILSON and SEABROKE 139-9 **59 1876-22 A close double star, in a fine vicinity on the loins of the Lesser Dog, closely sf Procyon. A 7, white ; B 8, ash- coloured, with a minute blue star preceding it about 2', and another of the n tn magnitude in the sp quadrant. This very pretty star resembles 77 Coronse, but is smaller ; and to see it well, we are directed by 1$. to observe it when Procyon is near its meridian altitude. The components of this object are both close and oblique, which may account for the results of the several astrometers being rather discordant. Though a direct and increasing angular motion must be inferred, [the distance seems unchanged in 50 years]. 493. 46 $. VIII. PUPPIS. (H. 1557.) CCC. h. m. s. s. R.A. 7 34 25 Decl. S 16 7'0 Prec. + 2-72 S 8-16 A loose cluster outlying the Galaxy, over the Argo's stern, where a R A. j- 35 215 ray led from a Leporis between ft Canis Majoris and Sirius, and as far again beyond, will strike upon it ; and a line from a Geminorum parsed i to the W. of Procyon, and extended 22 beyond, also picks it up. It comprises a rich field of scattered stars, with occasional glows of star- dust, so that the magnitudes may range from 9 to 16, and smaller still; and the stragglers run into the S.S.E. quarter, where is the crowded group 47 Ij]L VIII. [=H. 1556]. It was discovered by $. on the last evening of the year 1785. About a minute preceding this object, and i^ to the N. t is a small faint cluster, which is probably 87 1$. VIII. [H. 1553], described by Sir "William as consisting of small stars, and not rich. [A locality abounding in stars, but I cannot see any "cluster" properly so called." BrodieJ\ 494. 175 P. VII. PUPPIS. CCCI. B.A. Decl. DUNLOP IACOB STONE, ( h. 7 S ). 34 30 26 33-1 Position. o 3I5'8 318-9 318-1 Free, -f Q s. 2.46 ff 8.17 Epoch. 1826-5 1846-2 1878-2 O Distance. // 8-7 ... 10-0 9-9 A neat double star, in the corymbus of the Argo's oupa, or poop ; where it may be picked up by a line from the lowest star in Orion's belt, through Sirius, and 19, or nearly as far again, beyond. A and B, both 6, and both topaz-yellow ; but the tinge which it exhibited under observation may be owing to its low altitude. [Webb suggests that these 2 stars are brighter than the components of 170 P. "VTI. Argo Navis, as if the mags. had. been accidentally trans- posed.] 495. 159 P. VII. CAMELOPARDI. (S. 1122.) s. Prec. + 5-78 S 8-18 K.A. h. m. s. 7 35 26 Decl. N 65 24 '9 STRUVE, W. SMYTH Position. o 4-8 4-7 Distance. J5-4 15-6 Epoch. 1830-59 1839-27 CCXCVII. A neat double star, in front of the Greater Bear's head ; where a line run from a Aurigse through 5 in Auriga's head, and extended 15 to the N.E., will meet it. A and B, both 8, and both white. In a rich neighbourhood. This is a fine object, and its fixity is established. 216 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 496. 46 M. PUPPIS. (h. 463 ; H. 1564.) CCCII. h. m. s. B.A. 7 36 47 o Decl. S 14 27-3 Free. + 2.75 S 8-21 Position. Distance. Epoch. o SMYTH 90 ... 15 ... 1836-24 A very delicate double star in a fine cluster, outlying the Galaxy, over the Argo's poop. A 8^-, and B n, both pale white. A noble though rather loose assemblage of stars from the 8 th to the 1 3 th magni- tudes, more than filling the field, especially in length, with power 93 ; the most compressed part trending sf and np. This was discovered by Messier in 1769, who considered it as being "rather enveloped in nebu- lous matter ;" this opinion, however, must have arisen from the splendid glow of the mass, for judging from his own remark, it is not likely that he perceived the extremely faint planetary nebula on the N. (39 Ij. IV. =h. 464, 3093 ; H. 1565). !., who observed it in 1786, expressly says, " no connection with the cluster, which is free from nebulosity." Such is my own view on attentively gazing ; but the impression left on the senses, is that of awful vastness and bewildering distance, yet inducing the opinion, that those bodies bespangling the vastness of space may differ in magnitude and other attributes. In the following field there is a coarse pair of 7 tJl magnitude stars, lying sf and np of each other. [The planetary nebula mentioned above is " annular" according to the Earl of Rosse and Lassell. Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1850, PI. xxxviii. Fig. 15; Lassell, Mem. B.A.S., vol. xxiii. PI. ii. Fig. 5.] 497. 1127 2. CAMELOPARDI. b. m. s. R.A. 7 36 49 Decl. N 64 19 Prec. -f 5-65 S 8-22 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE.W. \ A B 34-3 ... 5 (AC 174.9 ... ii A triple star. A 6, very white ; B 8, ashy ; C 10. E. A. 36 m - 7 h - 37 111, 217 498. 64 . IV. PUPPIS. b. m. s. H.A. 7 36 59 Decl. S 17 56-6 (h. 3095; H. 1567; &.) CCCIII. 8. Free, + 2-67 - S 8.24 A bright planetary nebula, pale bluish- white, over the poop, and on an outlying wave of the Milky Way. This fine object exactly precedes a 7 th magnitude, and is followed by some small stars, as in the annexed dia- gram ; by which it is very readily identified when fished up. This was registered by 1$. in March, 1790, and was only estimated at about 12" or 15" in diameter. But the inference from such a supposition is vast ! " Granting," says H., " these objects to be equally distant from us with the stars, their real dimensions must be such as would fill, on the lowest computation, the whole orbit of Uranus." [" With power 64, like a dull 8 mag. star : with more power, small, brilliant, undefined, surrounded with a little faint haziness." Webb.] [" Though small this is a bright object." Brodie.] [Engraved, Lassell, Mem. R. A.S., vol. xxiii. PI. ii. Fig. 7.] FIG. 12. 64 9. IV. PCPPIS. 499. K GEMINORUM. CCCIV. h. m. s. R.A. 7 37 48 Decl. N 24 39 '7 STRUVE, W. SMYTH SMYTH DUXER Position. o 2.96 231.9 232.3 235-7 Free. + 3-63 S 8-31 Distance. Epoch. 6-19 1828-27 . 6-0 1838-98 5-8 ... 1851.21 6-39 1874-06 A very delicate double star, on the left shoulder of Pollux, and about 3| to the S. of (B. A 4, orange ; B 10, pale blue. H. expressly calls the attention of astronomers to this object, on the ground that possibly the comes is shining by reflected light [Possibly in motion. Dembowski thinks B is variable.] 218 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 500. /8 GEMINORUM. h. m. s. B.A. 7 38 35 Prec. + Decl. MT o / 28 17'5 S Position. Distance. o ff HERSCHEL, W. AC 65-9 116-7 SOUTH (AC 64-4 IAE 72.7 ... !32-3} 198-0) STRUVE, 0. AE 74.4 .,- 213.5 /AC 72-1 ... !75-0) FLAMMARION ]AD 90.4 ... 205.5 [ (AE 75.2 ... 228-9) / AB 274.9 43- \ A C 70.9 ... 174-6 BURNHAM < A D 90-0 206.3 AE 75-3 229-2 ^C c 128-0 1-4 cccv. 3'73 8-36 Epoch. 1781-90 1825-10 ... 1850-71 1877-08 ... 1877.95 ... 1879-73 ... 1879.24 ... 1879-24 1*78-15 A Nautical Almanac star, in the eye of Pollux. A 2, orange tinge ; [for the magnitudes of the other stars Burnham gives: B 13^; CH ; D 9-5 ; E 9 ; 013. The pair forming Cc (=/3 580) were first seen with an i8^ in refractor, and are very difficult, even with that aperture. The changes in the position of the old companions are due to proper motion.] This star has been suspected of varying in lustre, since it is recorded as having at times been brighter than Castor, whence Bradley rated it of the I st magnitude ; others have classed it in the 3 rd rank ; but Ptolemy, Tycho, La Caille, Zach, and all the best authorities, classify it 2. Nor is this the only anomaly of Pollux, for the ancients represented it in colour viToKippos, subrufa, reddish ; Lichtenstein says, Quce trahit ad ceram, et est cerea ; and certainly, in 1832, its tint was as I have mentioned. This star is well known as Pollux, the brother of Castor ; but in the Alphonsine Tables and in other old astronomical works it is called Ras-al-geuze, the twin's head, from the doubtful word jauzd or juzd. Pollux may generally be known by his connection, with Castor ; but for further identity, a line drawn from the Pleiades through /3 Tauri on the Bull's horn passes to it. If Betelgeuze and Procyon with Pollux bright be cast, Amid the glories of the sky, shines a triangle vast ; To guage with practised studious eye the form that shines afar The angle of twice forty-five, shows 'tis rectangular. 501. 93 M. PUPPIS. CCCVII. R.A. 39 51 Decl. S 23 36-1 Prec. 2-54 8-48 A small Galaxy cluster, in the aplustre of the Argo's poop; a line E. A. 7 h - 38 m 7 h - 4o m - 219 from Orion's sword-cluster, led through Sirius, strikes upon it 1 6 beyond, where it will be intersected by a ray from a Geminorum through Procyon. This neat group is of a star-fish shape, the sp portion being the brightest, with individuals of the 7 th to the 12 th magnitudes : it was first registered by Messier, in 1781, as a mass of small stars. The unlucky Chevalier d'Angos, of the Grand-Master's observatory at the summit of the palace at Malta, mistook this cluster for a comet : from which, and some still more suspicious assertions, my excellent friend, Baron de Zach, was induced to term any egregious astronomical blunders 502. 3010 Lac. PISCIS VOLANTIS. (*h. 3997.) h. m. s. s. B.A. 7 39 55 Decl. S 74 1-7 Free. + 1-14 S 8-47 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J. ioc-8 ... 1-75 ... 1836-70 A very close double star. A 8 ; B 8- 503. 7T GEMINORUM. (2. 1135.) CCCVI. s. R.A. 7 40 25 Decl. N 33 41 '2 Prec. -f 3'88 S 8-56 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE, W. AB 211-7 22< 6 ... 1831-25 8 If 5"!* - !5 I '839- A C 340-0 ... 95 A most delicate triple star, just above the heads of Gemini ; where it is reached by a line from Procyon through /3 Geminorum, and extended 5^ to the N. A 5^, topaz yellow; B 13, bluish; C 12, dusky. 504. 2 PUPPIS. (2. 1138.) CCCVIII. h. R.A. 7 40 26 Decl. S 14 25 4 Prec. + 2-76 S 8-52 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, W. 339-2 ... 17-3 ... 1782-78 SMYTH 338-8 ... 16-8 ... 1836-20 STONE 0. 338-9 ... 16-8 ... 1838-18 A neat double star over the Argo's stern, where a line from a Leporis 220 A Cycle .of Celestial Objects. through Sirius, and as far again to the E., will meet it intersected by a ray from a Geminorum over Procyon. A 7, silvery white ; B 7^, pale white ; and another star in the nf quadrant. Its fixity seems to be established. [Almost in the field with this is 4 Argo Navis, a yellow star of mag. 5.] 505. 201 B. GEMINORUM. (2. 1140.) s. Prec. + h. m. s. 7 42 o / R.A. Decl. W 18 36'5 Position. Distance. o // STRUVE,W. 273-8 ... 6-1 A double star. A 7 J-, yellow ; B 9, very blue. 3-48 S 8-64 Epoch. 1829-23 506. 15219 Lalande PUPPIS. R.A. 7 42 45 Decl. S 15 44'5 KNOTT Position. o 311-0 Prec. -f S Distance. 127-8 2-7 8-64 Epoch. 1864-21 Described by Knott as "a fine deep orange coloured pair." A 6|; B 6|> Situated about i 20' S. of 2 Argus. 507. 5 PUPPIS. (2. 1146). h. m. s. s. R.A. 7 42 48 Prec. + 2-82 / // Decl. S 11 55-4 S 8-69 Position. Distance. Epoch. it SMYTH 19-0 3-5 183411 SEABROKE 15-8 ... 3-7 1874-18 STONE, 0. 14.4 3-3 1878-10 CCCIX. A close double star, over the Argo's stern, rather more than 2 N. by E. of No. 504. A 7^, pale yellow ; B 9, light blue. [Colour of B uncertain or changeable according to Knott.] This fine object is 55 Officinge Typographies, an asterism which Bode proposed to make by gathering 100 of the informes between Sirius and the hind legs of Monoceros, in commemoration of the art of printing. E. A. 7 h - 4o m - 7 h * 51 m. 221 508. ^PISCIS VOLANTIS. h. m. s. 8. R.A. 7 44 32 Free. 0.67 o / // Decl. S 72 20-6 S 8-84 Position. Distance. Epoch. // 'EBSCHE L,J. 115- igest. ... 1836-18 iNTIAGC > OBS. 1 10-9 17-9 1850-21 A double star. A 5, yellow; B 10, blue. 509. 535 Dunlop PUPPIS. (h. 3103 ; H. 1593.) B.A. 7 48 23 Decl. S 38 15-7 Free. + S 2-13 /; 9-I4 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "!; Cl; B; Ri; L;1C; sti2;" which means : " remarkable ; a cluster; bright; rich; large; little compressed; stars chiefly of mag. 12." 510. U GEMINORUM. R.A. h. m. s. 7 48 33 Decl. N 22 11*4 Free. 3-52 S A well-known variable star discovered by Hind in 1855. The range of magnitude is from 9 to below 13. The period appears to be subject to variations; Schonfeld thinks that it ranges between 70^ and i5o d . Baxendell has found the star hazy towards its minimum. 511. 23 $. VII. PUPPIS. (h. 470, 3107; H. 1601.) h. m. s. R. A. 7 51 48 Decl, S 29 46 -6 Free. + S 3. 2'39 tt 9-40 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "Cl; pL; cKi; pC; stu ... 13;" which means: "a cluster; pretty large ; considerably rich ; pretty compressed ; it consists of stars from mags, n to 13. 222 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 512. 14 CANIS MINORIS. CCCX R.A. Decl. L,W. h. 7 N m. 52 o 2 39 31-0 Pos] AB 6 Prec tion. 9 3-6 ... + 3" H - S 9- Distance. // 65.4 12 4 6 Epoch. 1782-11 HERSCHE,,J, and SOUTH - ^ l8aa . I5 s- itn,"^ :;; ,^{ - '8 3 ,.i 4 A wide triple star on the boundary of the Lesser Dog, and 6 to the S.E. of Procyon, near where the before-mentioned section or slice of Argo penetrates through the Unicorn. A 6, pale white; B 8, bluish ; C 9, blue. The 3 rd star was stated to form an angle with the other two, in the sf t a little longer than a rectangle. 513. 37 y. VI. PUPPIS. (h.480; H. 1611; &.) CCCXI. h. m. s. B.A. 7 54 45 o Decl. S 10 19-1 Prec. + 2-85 S 9-72 A compressed cluster of stars, from the io th to the i6 tn magnitudes, or even smaller, over the Argo's poop, in a rich vicinity of two or three fields ; a line drawn from 6 Geminorum over Procyon, and carried exactly as far again into the S.E., will strike upon it- It was described by IjjL as having some of the stars " next to invisible } " and H. considers the most compressed part to be 4' or 5' in diameter. In the preceding portion is a very minute double star. [Best with a low power.] This cluster is more influenced by optical power than many of its class, and is apparently congregated by peculiar principles of attraction, inde- pendently of the innumerable outliers scattered around. It therefore offers a province for meditation as well as calculation, and suggests a most sublime conception of the boundless extent of the material universe, in the mysterious vastness which those suns beyond suns, and glorious systems of suns, probably witli attendant planetary bodies, unfold ! Hervey, meditating upon the immensity of the universe, has eloquently observed, "Could we wing our way to the highest apparent star, we should then see other skies expanded, other suns that distribute their inexhaustible beams of day, other stars that gild the alternate night, and other, perhaps nobler, systems established ; established in unknown pro- fusion through the boundless regions of space. Nor do the dominions of E.A. 1. 5 2 m.._ 223 the GREAT SOVEREIGN end there ; even at the end of this vast tour, we find ourselves advanced no farther than the frontiers of Creation, arrived only at the suburbs of the GREAT JEHOVAH'S kingdom." This is inserted rather for the intended than the expressed sentiment ; for the alternate nights, and frontiers, and suburbs, can only be viewed as the worthy rector's maniera di parlare. [" I cannot call this anything more than a faint mass of star dust or a glow." Brodie. At Parsonstown indications of a spiral tendency have been noticed.] R.A. h. m. s. 7 56 24 Decl. S 46 59-7 514. CARING. (*h. 4032.) Free. + 1-82 S 9-76 Distance. Epoch. 30-4 ... 1836-80 A double star. A 7 ; B 9^. About 2^- preceding y Argus, a star cf mag. 2. Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 351-4 R.A. Decl. h. m. s. 7 56 57 S 41 O 3 515. CARING. (*h. 4030.) s. Prec. 4- 2-06 S 9-80 Distance. Epoch. // 40 est. ... 1837-12 A double star. A 7 ; B 9. Sir J. Herschel's note is as follows : " Large star white, small rich ruby-coloured approaching to sanguine. Very remarkable." Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 344-9 516. 17 B. CANCRI. (2. 1177.) R.A. 7 58 52 Decl. N 27 50 2 STRUVE, W. DUNER Position. 3547 353-2 Prec. + 3^9 S 9-94 Distance. // 3-5 3-5 Epoch. 1828-27 1871-67 A double star. A 7, very white ; B 8, ashy white. Evidently these 224 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. stars are fixed. The above places are derived from Sir J. Herschel's General Catalogue, but the Declination given in Lord Lindsay's edition of Struve (corrected for epoch) is greater than the above by 2-3'. 517. CARING. . 4038.' h. m. s. R.A. 7 58 58 Decl. S 40 59-0 Position, o HERSCHEL, J. 345-4 SANTIAGO OBS. 347-3 Free. 4- s. 2-06 9-94 Epoch. 1837.04 1852-22 Distance. rr ... 2 9 -I ... 29-8 A double star. A 7 ; B 81. The Santiago Observers rated the mag- nitudes at 7 and IT, and say, "Assuredly there is a greater difference" than Sir J. Herschel states. 518. 30 . VIII. CARING. (h. 488; H. 1624.) h. m. s. R.A. 80 42 Decl. S 37 51'4 Free. 4- 2-46 S 10-08 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "Cl; vL; pRi; 1C; st io...i5;" which means: "a cluster; very large; pretty rich ; little compressed; its stars range from mag. 10 to snag. 15." 519. R.A. Decl. 1183 2. MONOCEROTIS. s. Free. -f 2-89 h. m. s. 819 S 8 56-0 Position. STRUVE, W. 326-2 Distance. 30-9 10-11 Epoch. 1831-25 A double star. A 6, yellowish white ; B 8J, white. 520. L ARGUS. R. A. 8 1 52 Decl. S 23 59-3 CCCXIV. Free, -f 2-56 S 10-28 Position. Difference of K. A. Epoch. SMYTH 191.0 ... 3.8 ... 1833.82 A Nautical Almanac star, with a distant, companion, in the aplustre RA. 7 h - 58 m - 8* 1 - 2 tt - 225 of the ship's poop ; where an imaginary line from /3 Orionis, passed close under Sirius, will reach it in the S.E. region, by doubling the distance between those stars. A 31, pale yellow; B 10, greyish ; other small stars in the field. This star is called Tureis, the scutulwm or little shield, corresponding to the do-TrioYo-KJ/ of Ptolemy. Argo is one of the old 48 constellations, occupying a very large space in the Southern Hemisphere, but its lucida, Canopus, as well as most of its more important stars, is always hidden from us. There are sound reasons for assigning the highest antiquity to this grand asterism, though the etymologists are crowding on when they derive the English word canopy, or covering, from Canopus, as hath lately been imprinted : such sages would readily see our " son of a gun " in the Greek irais Tvvrp (Dor.) " This constellation," says Sherburne, " sails by our meridian at midnight, in January, she being deified for saving deities ; " but he takes no notice of a strange peculiarity in the good ship's sailing properties. In the apparent motion of the sidereal system this constella- tion actually dips stern foremost, as Aratus remarked, but which the old scholiast, whoever he is, assures us does not really set before the prow. Owing to the great extent of this constellation, it is subdivided into four departments, the hull, the keel, the stern, and the sail, Argo navis, carind, puj)pi, velis. Ptolemy assigned 45 stars to 'Apyo> ; but as a large portion could never be observed in our hemisphere, the number continued small till Bode made it amount to 540, by gathering all those observed by Halley, La Caille, and other southern observers. My friend Sir T. Brisbane, however, registered no fewer than 1330 stars in Argo ; and as the Via Lactea sweeps directly across it, there is yet a rich harvest for astronomers. 521. 11 CANCRI. (2. 1186.) CCCXII. h. m. s. s. B.A. 8 2 6 Decl. N 27 48 '0 Prec. + 3-68 t/ S 10-19 Epoch. 1828-26 1839*70 1874-23 A close double star, between the head of Pollux and the preceding claw of Cancer ; following the former nearly on the parallel, at about 5| distance. A 7, pale yellow ; B 1 2, lilac. This delicate object is not ii Ip. I., as supposed by H. and S., who mistook for it a very neat double Q Position. Distance. // STRUVE, W. 218.9 ... 3-i8 SMYTH 213-5 ... 3- 2 TALMAGE 219.1 ... 3-o-S 226 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. star about 3' preceding, and a little N. of the parallel. On the arrival of the Dorpat Catalogue, it was found that S. had observed both ; H IjjL I, being S.'s 1 177 ; and the one before us, his No. 1 186. 522. 29 MONOCEROTIS. (2. 1190.) CCCXTII. h. m. B.A. 8 3 4 o Decl. S 2 39-7 Prec. -h 3-02 n S 10-26 Position. Distance. Epoch. HEKSCHEL,W. AB 105-2 ... 29.9 ... 1782-80 SMYTH ' '" 1832.14 AC 243-8 ... 66-9 * JMDKZEJEWICZ ' > ... 1877-72 (AC 244-8 ... 67-0 ) A delicate triple star, on the Unicorn's flank ; it is about 1 1 S.E. of Procyon, which is the last of the splendid host that adorns the three pre- ceding hours. A 5^-, light yellow ; B [10], grey; C 9, pale blue, apparently the comes mentioned by Piazzi, Nota 316, Hora VII., "5 s temporis prsecedit ad austrum." A and G point to a distant star of the 8 th magni- tude ; and there are several companions in the field, of which one in the nf is coarsely double. The small star B escaped detection with the instruments of H. and S. ; but their measure of C, together with the observations of 2. on the three, compared with my own, indicate that no appreciable motion occurred iu half a century. [Webb remarks of B, " can it be variable 1 "] 523. 11 #. VII. PUPPIS. (h. 3114; H. 1630.) CCCXVI. b. m. s. B.A. 85 31 Decl. S 12 32-0 Prec. + 2-82 n S 10-44 A compressed cluster, in the space under the haunches of Monoceros, where a line from Arneb drawn through Sirius, and extended rather more than as far again to the E., will find it as the Eastern point of a triangle, equilateral with Sirius and Procyon. It consists of a large and loose, but rich, group of small stars pretty equally strewed over the field, with a close double star in the middle, and a bright yellow one of the 6 th magnitude to the sf. E. A. 8 h - 2 m - 8 h - 227 524. CANCBI. (2. 1196.) CCCXV. h. m. s. B.A. 8 5 54 / Decl. N 18 0'9 Position HERSCHEL, J. SAB 35.6 ( A C 155-9 SMYTH JAB 355.1 (AC 147.2 DEMBOWSKI JAB 306-4 ( A C 140-0 STBUVE, 0. JAB 267-5 (AC 144.2 SCHIAPABELLI JAB 108.1 (AC 130-6 JEDKZEJEWICZ ( A B 89-8 (AC 131-8 Free, -f 3'44 n S 10-47 Distance. Epoch. IOI ) 5-35 J 1830-44 5-o $ 1843.11 1.0 ) 5-63$ 1855-87 0-74} 1862-31 4-95 J 0.8 1 ) 5-26 \ 1877.18 0.8 ) 1880-22 5-29$ A fine triple star, just below the after-claws of the Crab, where a shot from a Geminorum through /3, carried twice that distance to the S.S.E., will strike it ; or it may be found by a ray from Sirius through Procyou extended to half their distance beyond. But there is much shade on the authority which designates it Tegmine. A 6, yellow ; B 7, orange tinge ; C 7 1-, yellowish. This is a very interesting physical object : an extra- ordinary retrograde motion is exhibited by it. This curious and very interesting object has occasioned no little dis- cussion, since Ij]L pronounced it to be a " most minute treble star," and more than forty years afterwards H. and S. had declared A and B to be one " beautifully defined and round." But Sir J. South on a second trial saw A " unquestionably elongated," whence a supposition arose that the star B had come from behind A. Up to 1830, a direct motion of + 1-25 per annum was assigned to the star B; whereas from the accurate measures of Sir John Herschel and Mr. Dawes, it was afterwards considered to have a retrograde one to the surprising mean amount of 6 5 i'. I devoted my best powers to it, and though the near object is difficult from convergence, I was able to assign considerable weights to the results : and from them I drew a scheme of the interpolated positions, angular velocities, and projected distances. Hence it follows, that the two close stars perform a binary revolution in about 60 years, while the outer one accomplishes a grand orbital ellipse in 500 or 600 years. Sir J. Herschel thought, that an entire revolution would have occurred from the epoch of his father's observation to the end of March, 1837, in a periodic time of 55-34 years; which, though not precisely confirmed by ine, will be seen to meet the remarkable phenomenon as nearly as the 228 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. present sidereal knowledge has advanced. " If this be really a TERNARY system," said Sir John, " connected by the mutual attraction of its parts, its perturbations will present one of the most intricate problems in physical astronomy." [During the past 40 years f Cancri has been assiduously observed by a great number of astronomers, and much effort has been made to enlarge our knowledge of its motions. These have been found anomalous and complicated beyond precedent. It seems quite clear however that B revolves round A with a retrograde motion in about 58 years, whilst C revolves round A and B jointly with a direct motion in probably 600 or 700 years. As regards the period of AB, Madler, "Winnecke, and W. E. Plurnmer all concur in making it 58 years, but 0. Struve enlarges it to 62. Plummer's elements based on Winnecke's are : Peri-astron passage . Longitude of Peri-astron . Longitude of Ascending Node . . T = 1872-44 . v = 171 46' . a = 150 if . v - 36 14' Mean annual motion Semi-axis major Period . n = 2-56' . a = 0-90" = e g. 2.^". 525. K PUPPIS. h. m. s. B.A. 8 6 4 Decl. S 42 18-4 Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 80-5 s. 2-03 Prec. S 10-49 Distance. Epoch. 5.9 ... 1836-03 A double star. A 7; B 8J. 526. y ARGUS h. m. s. B.A. 8 6 8 Decl. S 47 0-4 Position. !AB 220-2 HERSCHEL, J. AC 151-6 BC iu.8 SAB 220.4 SANTIAGO OBS. AC 147.5 AD 140-5 Prec. + 1-85 // S 10-49 Distance. 41-1 62-4 not stated 41-8 62.9 94-2 Epoch. 1835.10 ... 1851-15 A multiple star. A 2 ; B 6 ; C 8 ; and besides these there are 3 other E. A. 8 h - 5 m - 8 h - 7 m - 229 stars of mags, u, n, and 13. "Arranged in an exact right line." (Sir J. HerscheL) The Santiago D is rated at mag. 10. The Santiago observers say : " The cluster deserves special attention for its evident changes since H.'s observations." 527. 411 Dunlop PUPPIS. (h. 3117; H. 1636.) h. m. R.A. 8 7 25 c Decl. S 48 56-3 Prec. + 1-77 S 10-58 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "Cl; B; L; 1C; st 7 . . . 16;" which means : " a cluster; bright; large; little compressed; its stars vary from the 7 th to the i6 th magnitudes." 528. 13 P. VIII. CANCRI. (2. 1202.) CCCXVII. h. m. R.A. 87 32 c Decl. N 11 11 Prec. + 3-30 S 10-56 Position. Distance. Epoch. O ft STBUVE,W. 335.9 ... 2.35 ... 1829.55 MADLER 333-6 ... 2-57 ... 1844.21 SKCCHI 325.5 ... 2-07 ... 1856-17 GLEDHILL 325.5 ... a-i ... 1874-10 A close double star, over the Crab's southern leg ; where a line from the upper star in Orion's belt passed under /3 Canis Minoris, and ex- tended 12 beyond, will find it. A 7^-, lucid white; B 12, pale grey, and there are several distant stars in the sf quadrant, with one in the np nearly pointed upon by a line through A and B. [On the whole there seem some slight indications of retrograde motion, but the measures are very conflicting.] 529. 563 Dunlop PUPPIS. (h. 3116 ; H. 1635.) h. m. s. s. B.A. 8 7 32 o Decl. S 37 3-7 Prec. -h 2-21 S 10-59 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " Cl ; B ; L ; 1C; i E ; st 9 . 1 2 ; " which means : " a cluster ; bright ; large ; little compressed ; irregularly extended ; consists of stars from mag. 9 to mag. 12." 230 530. A Cycle of Celestial Objects. PISCIS VOLANTIS. h. m. B. A. 8 7 35 Decl. S 68 18-2 Position. o HEKSCHEL, J. 23- 2 SANTIAGO OBS. 33-0 A double star. A 5i ; B 9}. Prec. + 0-24 S 10-60 Distance. Epoch. 6-7 ... 1835-01 5-0 ... 1850-25 531. 22 y. VI. MONOCEBOTIS. 8 h. m. B. A. 8 8 Decl. S 5 28-0 (h. 496; H. 1637; .) CCCXVIII. S. Prec. + 2-96 // S 10-70 Distance. Epoch. // 6-9 ... 1880-03 A neat but minute double star, in a tolerably compressed cluster on the Unicorn's flank, and lying 14 S.E. of Procyon. A 9^, and Bio, both white. This object is in the midst of a splendid group, in a rich splashy region of stragglers, which fills the field of view, and has several small pairs, chiefly of the 9 th magnitude. Position. o BURNHAM 206-3 532. r PUPPIS. (*h. 4058.) ' h. m. s. B.A. 8 9 21 Decl. S 35 33-9 Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 190 est. A double star. A 6 : B '7. Prec. + 2-26 S 10-74 Distance. Epoch. // 4 est. ... 1838-07 533. 67 P. VIII. CANCBI. B.A. Decl. b. m. s. 8 20 1 o / N 7 55-4 Position. o CCCXXII. Prec. + 3' 2 3 S 11-51 Distance. Epoch. 35.4 ... 1782-85 HERSCHEL, W. 325-0 SMYTH 328-0 BURNHAM 342-2 ... 31.9 ... 1880-03 A white double star, on the Crab's hindmost right leg; it may be E.A. 8 h - 7 m 8 h - 20 ra - 231 found by running a line from the centre of Orion's belt through Procyon and 14, or half as far again, beyond. A 6, pearl white; B 13, violet, with a glimpse star preceding it. 534. v l CANCRI. (2. 1224.) CCCXXI. V 1 CANCRI. (2 . 1224.) C h. m. s. s. R.A. 8 20 7 Free. + 3-58 t H Decl. N 24 53-8 S 11-52 Position. Distance. Epoch. o HERSCHEL, J.. and SOUTH 37-8 6-04 1822-12 SMYTH 40-1 ... 5-8 ... 1843-18 MADLEB 407 ... 5-59 1856-27 WILSON and SEABBOKE 41-6 5-9 1874-18 JEDRZEJEWICZ 42-2 ... 5-8 ... 1880-25 A neat double star, on the Crab's northern middle leg ; where a line carried from Sirius through Procyon, and extended rather more than as far again into the N.E., will reach it- A 7, pale white; B 7^, greyish. From a comparison with the measures of IjJjL it was inferred that a retro- grade annual angular motion of 0-51 had taken place. The subsequent observations, however, of Struve, Sir J. Herschel, and myself, afford no support to this supposed rotation ; consequently some error must exist in . ll .'s register. [If there is any change at all it would seem to be one of increase in the angle. W. Struve, Dembowski, and Webb all note a much greater dis- parity in the magnitudes than Smyth's statement implies. Knott, on the other hand, makes them less unequal.] 535. 2 CANCRI. (2. 1223.) CCCXX. h. R.A. 8 m. s. 20 8 Free. + s. 3-64 o / // Decl. N 27 17-7 S 11-52 Position. Distance, Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, W. 213-3 5-50 ... 1782-09 STRUVE, W. 212-0 4-5 6 ... 1829-45 MADLER 214.4 4-99 ... 1853-59 STRUVE, 0. 215-0 5-01 ... 1874-27 JEDRZEJEWICZ 215-3 4.84 ... 1880-20 A close double star, above the Crab's northern legs. A 6, and B 6^, both silvery white. [Knott and Dembowski make them both equal and of mag. 6.] The substantial agreement of all the measures indicates its fixity. 232 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 536. 72 P. VIII. PUPPIS. CCCXXIII. R,A. h. m. 8 20 s. 18 Prec. + 8. 2-59 Decl. S 23 4T3 S i'i-52 Position. Distance. Epoch. SOUTH o 85-0 ... 40-6 ... 1825-16 SMYTH 85-4 ... 45-0 1830-83 MAIN ... 41-9 1863-2 A coarse double star, close upon the compasa with which the moderns have furnished the Argo. A 6, red ; B 9^, green. A ray from /3 Orionis passed below Sirius, and extended 25 to the E.S.E. (rather more than as far again), will pick it up. The observations yield evidence of fixity. 537. 1228 2. CANCBI. h. m. s. B.A. 8 20 58 Prec. + 3-66 S Ti-57 Decl. N 27 55 '6 Position, o STBUVE, W. 352.0 A double star. A 8J, very white ; B 9, very white. Distance. 8.9 Epoch. 1823-28 538. 81 P. VIII. MONOCEROTIS. (2. 1233.) CCCXXIV. B.A, h. m. s. 8 22 6 Decl. S 2 9'2 Position. o STRUVE, W. 331-5 BURNHAM 331-1 Free. Distance; 17.9. s. 2-O2 S n-66 Epoch. 1828-71 1880-03 A very delicate double star, at the root of the Unicorn's tail ; lying about 1 5 to the S.E. of Procyon, on the line formed by that star and f Tauri, at the tip of the Bull's southern horn. A 7, pale topaz tint; B n, violet ; other stars in the field, of which the brightest and nearest is in the sp quadrant, near the vertical,. E. A. 8 h - 2o m - 8 h - 25 m, 233 539. h. B.A. 8 Decl. N HERSCHEL, J. RNOTT BURNHAM e CAI m. s. 25 20 o / 18 28-1 Position. Q 59-3 - 59-5 - ffCBI. Free. + S 7 S. 3'43 11-89 Epoch. 1830 + 1862-31 1880.05 Distance. tt . 60 . 58.4 -. . 60.7 ... cccxxv. A star with a distant companion, in the middle of the Crab's body. A 5 J, yellow ; B 9, grey, and there are 4 other stars in the preceding part of the field, the nearest of which is of the 8 th magnitude, and about 7 5" distant. [Knott found B much smaller than Smyth states ; say 1 2. But Sir J. Herschel agreed with Smyth, nearly. Knott suggests there- fore that B should be watched.] An imagined line from Sirius passed 3 E. of Procyon, and extended nearly as far again to the N.E., will readily fish the object up. 540. A VELOBUM. (*h. 4104.) B.A. 8 25 35 Decl. S 47 33'6 Position. I A HERSCHEL, J. Free. + 1-89 // - S 11-90 Distance. Epoch. 4-4 20-0 AC 39.9 A triple star. A 6, white; 69; C 10, blue. 1835-76 541. 3366 Lac. VELOBUM. h. m. s. B.A. 8 25 45 Decl. S 44 21-8 Position, o HERSCHEL, J. 350-3 A double star. A 6 ; 69. Free. + 2-02 // S 11-91 Distance. Epoch. // 5-6 ... 1836-11 234 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 542. 3375 Lac. PUPPIS. (*h. 4107.) s. Prec. + 2-21 S 12-03 h. m. R.A. 8 27 22 Decl. S 38 42-1 Position. Distance. Epoch, o // A 13 325*4 3 ^^' f rR-JC nr\ AC 08.7 *>*. - l835 ' 99 A triple star. A 7, white ; Bio; C 9, plum- coloured. 543. 108 P. VIII. HYDB,^. (2. 1245.) CCCXXVI. h. m. B.A. 8 30 1 Becl. N 7 0-5 Prec. + 3-20 // S I2-2I Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 24-0 ... 10-8 ... 1822-64 STRUVE, W. 25-7 ... 10.3 ... 1832-95 SMYTH 25-7 ... 10-4 ... 1849-13 MAIN 24-9 ... 10-6 ... 1862-14 A neat double star, between Hydra's head and Cancer, i np 8 Hydrse, which is the preceding of three nearly equidistant stars in that monster's head, and following Procyon by 16. A 6, pale yellow; B 7, rose-tint; and there are several glimpse stars in the field, preceded by a 9 th magni- tude at some distance in the sp. [Called 1 8 Hydrse by some observers.] 544. 63 $. VII. PYXIS NAUTICA. (h. 516, 3132 ; H. 1678.) CCCXXIX. h. m. s. s. R.A. 8 32 34 o Decl. S 29 33'6 Prec. -f- 2-47 // S 12-39 A compressed cluster, on the Argo's compass-card. The most gathering portion consists of stars from the io tn to the 1 5 th magnitudes, with a glow of star-dust. The shape is aptly likened by H. to a flattened X. This object lying in a region devoid of large stars, is only to be fished up by running a line from the cluster in Orion's sword over Sirius, and ex- tending it twice as far again into the S.E. region. The Mariner's Compass is an introduction of La Caille's ; and as if the needle and card were not a sufficient anachronism, the classic old Argo was supplied by Bode with a log and line : so 68 stars were con- stellated from the informes, and assigned to Pyxis Nautica and Lochium Funis. B.A. 8 h - 2 m - 33 m. 235 545. 118 P. VIII. CANCRI. (2. 1249 rej.) CCCXXVIII. h. m. s. E.A. 8 32 48 o / Decl. N 20 4-0 Position. J o SOUTH 83-5 .- MAIN 84.5 Free. Distance. 57-5 57-2 S 3-46 Epoch. 1825-15 1863-20 A wide double star, on the Crab's body. A 8, and B 8J, both pale white; a third star in the np quadrant, at about 3' distance. In general alignment, it will be seen about one-third of the distance from Pollux towards Regulus. 546. K. A. 124 P. VIII. CANCEL 8. Free. + 3'46 S 12-45 CCCXXX. h. m. s. 8 33 32 Decl. N 19 56-0 SOUTH MAIN Position. Distance. AB 157-0 A C 241.0 AB 156-6 AC 241.7 . 92.2 45-8 ) Epoch. 1825.13 1863-19 A coarse triple star, on the Crab's body ; with an alignment similar to that of 118 P. VIII., before described. A 7, pale yellow; B 7j, dusky; C 6^, lucid white. This, though a wide object, forms a very fair scalene triangle. 547. 44 M. CANCEL (h. 517 ; H. 1681.) s. Free. + 3-46 S 12-48 Epoch. 1831-19 h. m. s. R.A. 8 33 55 Decl. N 20 19'4 SMYTH Position. o 33 1 Distance. CCCXXXI. A very wide double star in the well-known cluster called Praesepe, on the Crab's body, enrolled by Messier on his celebrated List in 1769. A 6J, and B 7^, both white, being the sf extreme of a wavy line represented by nine small stars. The Prsesepe, metaphorically rendered Bee-hive, is an aggregation of small stars which has long borne the name of a nebula, its components not being separately distinguishable by the naked eye; indeed, before 236 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. the invention of the telescope, it was the only recognised one, for though that in Andromeda must have been seen, it attracted but little notice till the days of Simon Marius, in 1612. Whereas the Praesepe in Cancer engaged very early speculation ; insomuch that both Aratus and Theo- phrastus tell us, that its dimness and disappearance during the progressive condensation of the atmosphere were regarded as the first sign of approaching rain. The group is rather scanty in numbers, but splendid from the comparative magnitude of its constituents, which renders it a capital object for trying the light of a telescope. Yet Galileo discovered this cluster to consist of 36 small stars, when it was supposed that there were only 3 iwbulous stars, which emitted the peculiar light. A line projected from a Virginis under a Leonis, and about 22 beyond the latter, runs through the Prsesepe ; or it may be found by a ray from the Pleiades being brought midway between Procyon and a Geminorum, which will pass over e, on Castor's knee. A line from a Geminorum through /3, and continued about three times the distance between them, also reaches this cluster. 548. 129 P. VIII. CANCBI. (2. 1254.) CCCXXXII. h. m. s. B.A. 8 34 6 o Decl. N 20 3-5 Prec. + 3-46 /A S 12-49 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STRUVE,W. 53-8 ... 20-5 ... 1831-31 SMYTH 5,3.4 ... 20-5 ... 1839-16 KNOTT 54-2 ... not given ... 1862-16 A neat double star close to the Praesepe on the Crab's body ; and the " cloudy Prsesepe" group is visible to the inquiring eye, at one-third of the distance between /3 Geminorum and a Leonis. A 7, golden yellow ; B 10, blue. This object is the southern member of a triangle, and is preceded by 3 pairs of stars, all of which were measured by South. 549. 131 P. VIII. LYNCIS. (S. 1258.) CCCXXXIV. h. m. s. s. B.A. 8 35 39 Prec. + 4-30 o / II Decl. N 49 15-6 S 12-60 Position. Distance. Epoch. o n STRUVE, W. 331-4 ... 9-6 183075 MAIN 329-5 ... 9-6 1862-37 A neat double star, close to the fore-paw of Ursa Major being about RA. 8 h - m - 237 2 W.N.W, of t, a bright star in that paw, A and B 8|, and both white. 550. 2153 Brisb. CARING. (*h. 4128.) R.A. 8 36 51 Decl. 3 59 55 '6 Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 221-9 A double star. A 7 J ; B 8. Free. + 1-28 S 12-68 Distance. Epoch. 2-51 ... 183666 551. 8 CANCRI. CCCXXXV. h. m. s. R.A. 8 39 26 Decl. N 18 33-8 s. 3-42 Free. + S 12-85 Distance. Position. o // LAMONT 123-8 ... 27.9 BURNHAM. 113-9 4'9 Epoch. 1836-2 1878-2 A very delicate double star, under the Crab's mouth. A 4%, straw colour; B [12], blue, only seen by glimpses. Situated nearly equatorially between 2 distant stars: I assumed it, from Piazzi, as 4.5 in brightness; but H., in his table of the comparative lustre of the individuals of Cancer, in the Philosophical Transactions, classes both it and y as of the 4 tn magnitude, a degree in which I should rate them myself. A ray from (B Orionis glanced to the N.E. through /3 Canis Minoris, and carried nearly as far again, will find it at about 2^ S.S.E. of the Praesepe. 8 Cancri is the southernmost of the stars called Aselli by the Romans, and ovoi by the Greeks ; y Cancri being the northern one ; and they may very readily be found by their connexion with the Praesepe, which they closely follow in a line, one to the N. and the other to the S. See 44 M, above. (No. 547.) Cancer is one of the ancient 48 constellations ; but as its lucida is only of the 4*h magnitude, it is neither conspicuous nor brilliant, whence it was of old represented of a black colour and without eyes ; but Bartschius, in his Planisj)hcerium Stellarum, 1661, and some others of still later date, converted it to a lobster. Indeed, mythology even seems to apologise for placing so poor an a&terism on the solar railroad, by stating that ox-eyed 238 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. Juno exalted the creature, for the inconsiderable service of pinching the toes of Hercules in the Lernsean marsh : whence Columella designates it Lernceus. Yet, on the whole, there is scarcely one of the signs of the zodiac that has been the subject of more attention than Cancer, nor scarcely any one better determined. For the reason given under Leo, the Lion and the Crab were assigned as mansions of the sun and moon ; and Cancer being also famous, according to Chaldaic and Platonic philo- sophy, as the supposed gate by which souls descended from heaven into human bodies, it, of course, obtained favour among mythologists. But the astrologers saw nothing but its " watery triplicity," and pronounced that all men born under it shall be short, effeminate, and sickly. The successive enumerations of its component members, as optical means have progressed, are : Ptolemy ... 1 3 stars. Kepler 17 stars. Copernicus . . 13 Hevelius .... 29 Tycho Brahe" . 15 Flamsteed ... 83 Chr. Clavius . . 16 Bode 179 Cancer, as the summer solstice, introduces the longest day in our hemisphere, and names the North Tropic ; for as that " aisword beste," the Crab, walks obliquely, it is figurative of the sun's retrogression on arriving at its greatest northern declination in this sign. (See a 2 Capri- corni.) It forms the fourth of the zodiacal signs, and designates one of the quadrants of the ecliptic. In the fine copy of Albumazar's Introductio in Astronomiam, 1489, in the Bibliotheca Lambethana, Cancer is repre- sented as a large Crayfish ; and in Lubienietzki's Theatrum Cometicum, 1667, it is figured as a huge lobster, between the tail of which and Gemini is a small shrimp-like companion, designated Cancer Minor. 552. 160 P. VIII. HYDROS. (2. 1270.) CCCXXXVII. h. m. B.A. 8 39 47 o Decl. S 2 12-0 Free. + 3-03 S 12-87 Position. Distance. Epoch. O It STRUVE, W. 259-0 ... 4.7 ... 1830-98 SMYTH 258.9 ... 4.9 ... 1833-08 STONE, 0. 260-5 ... 4-6 ... 1879-10 A neat double star, in the space interposed between Hydra's head and the Unicorn's tail. A 7, silvery white ; B 8, smalt blue. In RA. it slightly precedes e Hydrse, the middle star in that creature's head, being 9 to the southward of it, and nearly due S. of the Prsesepe. E.A. --8 h 40 m. 239 553. L CANCBJ. (2. 1268.) s. Free. + 3-65 CCCXXXVI. h. m. s. E.A. 8 40 3 Decl. ET 29 9' 7 S 12-89 Position. o HERSCHEL, W. 309 9 STRUVE,W. 37 -I DUNER 307-5 JEDEZEJEWICZ 307-4 Distance. Epoch. 29-9 ... 1782-11 304 ... 182804 30-3 ... 1872-71 30.5 ... 1878-20 A double star, at the end of the Crab's northern claw; Piazzi's No. 158, Hora VIIL, erroneously marked v in the Palermo Catalogue. A 5^, pale orange ; B 8, clear blue, the colours finely contrasted. A line from e Geminorum, carried through {3, and extended something more than as far again to the E.N.E., will find it ; and its identity will be instantly made out by its forming another line to the S.W. with Procyon and Sirius. The several observations show that no material change has occurred. 554. e HYDROS. h. m. s. K.A. 8 40 57 Decl. 6 49-3 Position. e STRUVE, W. AB 195.5 DAWES AB 199-2 SMYTH AB 203-2 SECCHI AB 210.0 PLUMMER AB 216.7 BURNHAM AC 192-0 JEDRZEJEWICZ AB 223.3 (2. 1273.) CCCXXXVIII. s. Prec. + 3-19 S 12-95 Distance. Epoch. 3-21 ... 1830-60 . 3-65 ... 1834-00 . 3-6 ... 1843-14 . 3.33 ... 1856-19 3-67 ... 1876-73 . 2O-O ... 1878-60 3-34 ... 1880.23 A Nautical Almanac star, triple, and the middle one in the head of Hydra. A 4, pale yellow ; B 8J, purple ; C 1 3. A long ray from a Orionis brought over Procyon, and carried nearly as far again, finds it about 14 S. of the Praesepe; and nearly midway between /3 Geminorum and a Hydras. Dawes remarked to me, " Indeed, were the small star visible fifty years ago, as it is now, it never could have escaped the scrutinising eye of Sir W. Herschel." On this appeal, my observations were rigidly attended to, and the results corroborate the orbital motion. [Though the observations are very discordant inter se, a fact which Gledhill's table renders very apparent, there can be no doubt that the angle is increasing. The distance seems not to have altered.] 240 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 555. 288 $. I. DBACONIS. (h. 520; H. 1691; JR.) h. m. s, B.A. 8 41 10 Decl. 78 38-1 Free. + 8-19 S 12-97 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; c L ; IE 90 + ; g, svmb M ;" which means : " very bright ; con- siderably large; a little extended in the direction of 90 with the meridian; gradually, then suddenly much brighter in the middle." 556. 8 ARGUS. (*h. 4136.) h. m. s. B.A. 8 41 39 Decl. S 54 18-8 Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 62 est. Prec. + 1-66 // S 13-00 Distance. Epoch. I835-I7 n 80 est. A conspicuous star, mag. 2\, with a distant companion of mag. n. The difference in R. A. between the 2 stars is 7-o s . 557. 3545 Lac. CABINS. h. m. s. B.A. 8 42 30 Decl. S 58 19-3 Position. o AB 289.7 HEKSCHEL, J. A C 357.3 Prec. + 1-43 S 13-06 Distance. Epoch. 4 est. 60 est. So est. 1837-02 AD 217.6 A double star, with 2 distant companions, making a coarse quadruple object. A7;B7^;Ci2;Di2. 558. 67 M. CANCBI. (h. 531; H. 1712 ; CCCXXXIX. B.A. 8 45 1O Decl. 12 12-7 Prec. + 3*29 S 13-24 A rich but loose cluster, at the root of the Crab's southern claw ; where a line from /3 Orionis through Procyon, into the E.N.E., will find it E. A. 8 h - 41-. 8 h - 45 m. 241 about 5 N. of Hydrse. It consists principally of a mass of stars of the 9^h and io th magnitudes, gathered somewhat in the form of a Phrygian cap, followed by a crescent of strag- glers. It was first registered by Messier in 1780, and resolved by Sir W. Herschel in 1783. The place here given, though differing largely in H. A. from Messier's, evidently is that of his object. Sir "W. Herschel saw above 200 stars at once, in the field of view; with my refractor, of far inferior light, but excellent definition, the object appears as herewith repre- sented. [Visible in finder.] FIG. 13. 67 M. CANCRI. 559. 242. $. I. UES^B MAJOBIS. (h. 530; H. 1711; &.) h. m. 8. B.A. 8 45 36 Decl. N 51 43-8 Free. + 4-35 S 13-28 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " v B ; L ; vg, vsmb M * 10;" which means : " very bright; large ; at first very gradually, then very suddenly brighter in the middle where there is a io tjl mag. star." 560. 200-$. I. LEONIS MINOBIS. (h. 532; H. 1713; .) CCCXL. h. m. s. B.A. 8 45 51 Decl. N 33 49 '7 3'75 Free. + S 13-28 A bright oval nebula, between Lynx and Cancer, but in a confusing gap given to Leo Minor. It trends nf and sp, with a splendid centre, and is closely followed by a 9 th magnitude star, which is in a line with a coarse telescopic pair in the np quadrant, and the preceding of a trio in the sf. 1$. with his powerful eye and instrument saw it " very beautiful, 8' long, and 3" broad." This asterism was formed by Hevelius, from 18 sporades between Leo of the Zodiac and the Great Bear; the constituents of which were increased by Flamsteed to 53 stars, and by Bode to 96. It was first announced as a constellation in the Prodromus of the former, 1691; and the author tells us, that he selected the place in order not to disturb the 242 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. circles, notions, or rules of astrologers: "Since they esteem fne Bear and the Lion as the hottest and fiercest animals, I wished to place there some quadruped of the same nature." [" Scarcely worth the search with 3f ." Webb.] 561. 15 HYDROS. h. m. s. 8. B.A. 8 46 10 Free. + 2-95 o / ff Decl. 8 6 45-9 S 13-30 Position. Distance. Epoch. o H SCHEL, W. AC 340 ... 43 ... 1782.99 IAB 158-8 0.46 ) NHAM A C 356-2 - 457 1878-18 AD 52.2 .... 50-0 J CCCXLI. A most delicate triple star, between the Unicorn's tail and the first bend of Hydra. A 6J, pearl white; [Bf]; C 12, D 13, both purplish ; other stars in the field. It is located in a region utterly destitute of large stars, to the S. of Hydra's head, being about 12 E. of Cor Hydrse ; its place is therefore nearly pointed by a ray passed from /3 Canis Minoris through Procyon, and carried 6 times as far into the S.E. void. [AB constitute (3 587.] 562. I 2 CANCBX (2. 1201.) CCCXLII. h. B.A. 8 m. s. 47 32 Free. / Decl. I^- 30 59-8 Position, Distance, o a HERSCHEL, W. 338-2 0-85 STRUVE, W. 333-3 i-5i DEMBOWSKI 33i-o 1-2 DUNER 332-5 ~ .- *43 JEDRZEJEWICZ 330-0 1.48 3-68 I3-39 Epoch. 1782.27 1829-71 1856.19 1871*02 1880-29 A close double star, over the Crab's northern claw. A 5j, white; B 7, yellow. This star is designated t 2 by Flamsteed, and he is followed by IjjL, H., S. and 2. ; but there is only one star distinguished by that letter in Bayer's Map, which is 48 Cancri, and Piazzi's 158, Hora VIII. To preserve identity it may be mentioned that the object before us is 192 P. VIII; and that Baily has restored the a- in his edition of Flam- fiteed. For want of convenient naked-eye stars in this vicinity, the searcher for the point in dispute must remember that.it is about 18 E. of and on the parallel of a Geminorum ; .where its place is sufficiently RA. 8 h - 45- 8*< 51^- 243 indicated by a long line drawn up from Sirius in the S,W. and passed over Procyon. [I have thought it well to go back to the i and not follow Smyth.] 563. 211 Birm. CANCEL R.A. 8 49 11 c Decl. N 17 39-0 Free. + 3-39 S 13-50 A red star of mag. 6J. Lalande says "rouge," 6\ ; Sir J. Herschel at the Cape, " fine red," " brick red" 8 ; Birmingham, " colour varying in different degrees of red and orange, 7 to 7^;" Webb, under date of March 5, 1872, "rather pale ruby, 8." The above variations in colour and the varying estimates of magnitude seem to imply variability in this star generally. It deserves to be systematically watched. I do not think that I have seen it myself. 564. 17 HYDILE. (2. 1295.) CCCXLIII. 17 HYDB^I. (2. 1295.) h. m. s^ s. B.A. 8 50 6 Prec. + 2-94 o / ^1 Decl. S 7 33-0 S 13-39 Position. Distance. Epoch. o 11 STRUVE ,w. 358-6 ... 4-3 ~ - 1831-59 SMYTH 357-8 4-5 1838-12 SMYTH 358-5 - .- 4-5 1849-21 STONE, 0. 358-3 4-2 1878-50 A close double star, between the Unicorn's tail and Hydra's heart. A and B, both 7^, and both white. To align this object, draw a right angle at Procyon to a line brought from Sirius, and it will meet 17 Hydrse at 11 W. of a Hydrse, or rather a greater distance than that between the two first-named stars. 565. i TJRS;E MAJOBIS. CCCXLIV. h. m. s. - - s. R.A. 8 51 41 Decl. N 48 28 -4 Prec. + 4-18 13-43 Position. Distance. Epoch. SMYTH 348-0 ... 12-0 ... 1839-12 CHALLIS 350.0 ... 10 6 ... 1841-19 MADLEB 350-7 ... 10-1 ... - 1852-27 SrKtJVE, O. 356-9 ... 9-7 ... ' 1871-80 A Nautical Almanac star of 1830, do.uble, and_in the Great Bear's B 2 244 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. right fore-paw; where it may be readily identified by shooting a W.S.W. ray from /3, the southernmost of the two pointers, which will pass through at nearly 12, then at half that distance further on will strike i. A 3^, topaz yellow; B [n], purple. There is a star of the 8 th magnitude preceding, at an angle = 268-7, with A RA.=52'9 S . From strong impressions on his mind, confirmed by what he saw in the Southern Hemisphere, Sir J. Herschel supposed that certain ver^ minute companions to stars may possibly shine by reflected light ; and i Ursse is one of those instanced as having a dull satellite. This star has obtained the name of Talita, the third vertebra, the meaning of which is not clear. [The angle seems increasing and the distance diminishing. The proper motion of this system is however considerable, viz. o-o47 s m R- A. ; and -0-2 8" in Decl.] 566. CANCBI. (2. 1298.) h. m. s. R.A. 8 54 40 DeeL N 32 41'0 STRUTE, W. SMYTH DUNISB Position. 137-8 136.4 137-4 Prec. + 3-70 // : ^ I3-85 Distance. Epoch. // 4-6 ... 1831-16 4-8 I837'I3 4-3 i869-?9 CCCXLV. A close double star, nf the Crab's northern claw. A 6, lucid white ; B 9, sky blue. There being some confusion in identifying Bayer's sigmas, it is as well to state that this is Piazzi's 226, Hora VIII. ; and a' ray from Sirius through Procyon, carried nearly double that distance into the N.N.E., will find it. 567. 3667 Lac. VELOBUM. (#h. 4165.) h. m. a. R.A. 8 58 21 Decl. S 51 45-0 Position . HEBSCHEL, J. 87-9 A double star. A 6 ; B 8. Prec. + 1-86 S 14-08 Distance. Epoch. 1-4 ... 1837-26 R. A. 8 h - i m - 245 568. 249 $. I. UBS^E MAJOBIS. (h. 55O; H. 1750 ; .) B.A. b. m. s. 8 58 49 Decl. N 60 54-6 Free. + 4.' 7 9 S 14-11 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " c B ; c L ; E 90 + ' 3 er ; " which means : " considerably bright ; con- siderably large ; extended in the direction of 90 or thereabouts with the meridian; easily resolveable." Seen at Parsonstown, March 12, 1852, as " an amorphous mass of nebulosity of uneven character." . 569. TTRS^E MAJOBIS. (2. 13O6.) CCCXLVI. B A. Decl. h. m. s. 9 O 44 N 67 35-0 Position. Free. + 5-42 S 14-23 HERSCHEL,W. 283-0 STROVE, W. 263-6 SMYTH 262.4 STROVE, 0. 257.5 DEMBOWSKI 245-2 Distance. H 7-9 4-5 5-o 3-8 2-6 Epoch. 1782-42 1832-14 1835-27 I 85 I -39 1875.21 A neat double star, in the Bear's forehead. A 5^, flushed white ; B 9!, sapphire blue. [The retrograde orbital motion and the diminu- tion in distance are very pronounced.] There is only one star designated by the letter a in Bayer's Map : " but," says Baily, in his notes to the British Catalogue, " as there may be a doubt whether such letter belongs to 1 1 Ursse Majoris, or to the present star, Flamsteed has annexed it to each, which I have therefore retained." It will be /easily fished up nearly midway of a line from Polaris to i Ursse Majoris, where it is the N.E. vertex of a small triangle formed by the aforesaid two sigmas and p. 570. 194 B. CANCBI. (2. 1311.) B.A. 9 m. s. 1 7 Decl. N 23 24 "9 Free. + 3-49 S 14-25 Distance. Epoch. 7-2 ... 1831.31 7-3 ... 1870-62 A double star. A 71, white ; B 7^, white. B is rated smaller than Position. STROVE, W. 200-5 DONER 201-4 246 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. A by Struve, but Struve's fractions of magnitudes cannot be given in the scale which I have adopted generally for my additional objects. 571. 250 y. I. UBS^B MAJOBIS. (h. 555 ; H. 1765 ; &.) h. m. 8. s. B.A. 9 3 2 I Free. + 4 73 Bed. N 60 29*2 | S 14-37 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "cB; cL ; IE; psmbMLBN;" which means: "considerably bright; considerably large ; little extended ; pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle so as to exhibit a bright nucleus." Described at Parsons- town, Jan. 1 6, 1852, as a " lenticular ray trending N. and S. and gradually very much brighter in the middle." On Feb. 19, 1868, the following edge was there seen to be more sharply denned than the preceding edge. In the head of the Great Bear about midway between o and v. 572. 2 I. I. HYDB-3S. (h. 564; H. 1771; h. In. s. B.A. 9 4 27 o Decl. N 7 29-2 Prec. 4- 3-19 S 14-46 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "cB; cL; K; vg, vsmb M ; r?" which means : "considerably bright; considerably large ; round ; at first very gradually, then very suddenly much brighter in the middle ; resolveability uncertain." 573. 66 $. I. VELOBUM. (h. 569, 3147; H. 1777; h. m. s. s. B.A 9 6 15 Decl. S 14 22-2 Prec. + 2-84 S 14-56 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " B ; S ; pmE 90 + ; psmb M ; " which means : " bright ; small ; pretty much elongated in the direction of about 90 with the meridian ; pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle." Noted at Parsonstown, March 12, 1852, to be "more round than elongated." B,A. 9 h. ^m. _ 9 h. gm. 247 574. 167 1$. I. LYNCIS. (h. 568 ; H. 1778 ; b. m. s. B. A. 9 7 11 Decl. N 40 31-3 Free. + 3-86 S 14-62 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; R ; m b MEN ; " which means : " considerably bright ; round ; much brighter in the middle where it exhibits a bright nucleus." 575. 59 1$. I. PYXIS NATJTIOffi. (h. 571, 3148 ; H. 1780.) K. A. 9 7 26 ;l Prec. + 2-67 Decl. S 23 43'9 I S 14-63 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; L ; m E 63.7 ; g m b M ; " which means : " bright ; large ; much extended in the direction of 63.7 with the meridian; gradually much brighter in the middle." 576. 3149 h. VELOBUM. (H. 1783.) b. m. s. B.A. 9 8 18 c Decl. S 41 58'9 Prec. + 2-25 S 14-68 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "!; Oj P B = * 9 ; vS; R ; am st ; " which means : " a remarkable object ; planetary ; about as bright as a 9 th mag. star ; very small ; round ; amongst stars/' 577. 3729 Lac. VELOBUM. (*h. 4188.) h. B. A. 9 8 26 o Decl. S 43 9-6 Prec. -f 2-22 S 1-6 Position. Distance. Epoch. o ft HEBSCHEL, J. 286-9 3' l8 3579 A double star. A 6 ; B 7^. 248 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. -. "-'':. . N> 578. 6 HYDILE. CCCXLVII h. m. s. s. B.A. 9 8 38 Free. + 3-12 Decl. N 2 47-1 S 14-76 P sition. Distance. Epoch. o // BUBNH4 M 175-0 ... 53- 1 ... 1879-25 A wide double star in the fore part of Hydra's neck. A 4^, pale yellow; B [n], ash-coloured. This star will be met from the W. by a line drawn from a Orionis through Procyon, till it meets another from the N.E., running from 6 LeoniS through Regulus. The point of intersection is visible enough. 579. 216 $. I. UBS^E MAJOBIS. (h. 570 ; H. 1781.) h. m. B. A. 9 9 12 o Decl. N 69 40 5 Free. + 5'53 S 14-74 A nebula thus described, in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " B ; p L ; 1 E 90 ; mb M ; r ; v S * sf inv ; " which means : " bright ; pretty large; little extended in the direction of about 90 with the meridian ; much brighter in the middle ; resolveable ; there is a very small star involved in the nebula on the sf side." At the top of the Bear's head. 580. 265 Dunlop CABINS. (h. 3152; H. 1793.) b. m. s. B.A. 9 9 45 o Decl. S 64 24-7 Free. + 1-18 S 14-77 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " 1 ; ; v L ; e Bi ; v g e C M ; 45 s d; st. 1 3 . . . 1 5 ; " which means : "a remarkable object; a globular cluster; very large; extremely rich ; very gradually becoming extremely condensed in the middle ; diameter 45 s in E,. A. j the component stars vary from the 13 th to the 15 th magnitudes." RA. 8 m - 249 581. 564 Dunlop PYXIS NAUTIO5E. (h. 3154 ; H. 18O1.) Free. + b. m. s. B. A. 9 11 33 Decl. S 36 9-3 s. 2-41 S 14-88 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "!; OpB; pL; B,; vglbM; in L, C, Cl;" which means: "a remarkable object; a pretty bright planetary nebula; pretty large; round ; very gradually less bright in the middle ; in a large condensed cluster." Engraved, Cape Obs., PL v. Fig. 8. 582. 18289 Lalande h. m. s. B.A. 9 11 39 Decl. 35 49 '2 Position. o STRUVE, W. 39-4 M ABLER 42-6 MORTON 39-2 DUNEB 41-4 r NCIS. Free. (2. 1333.) s. + 3'73 S 14-89 Epoch. 1828.59 1845-51 1859-27 1872-24 Distance. H 1^42 L 4 6 1-44 i-45 A double star. A 7, very white; B 7j, very white. 583. 38 LYNCIS. (2. 1334.) CCCXLVIII. B.A. 9 12 Decl. N 37 16 '3 Position. o HERSCHEL, J., and POUTH 242-7 SMYTH 241-6 MADLER 241 .7 GLEDHILL 238-6 JEDRZEJEWICZ 237.9 Prec. + 3-76 S 14-91 Distance. 2-89 ... 2-8 2-62 ... 2-92 ... 2-95 Epoch. 1822-46 1832-35 1854.30 1874.18 1880-27 A close double star, in the animal's tail. A 4, silvery white ; B y}, lilac. It is to be found where a line from a Leonis, carried over Leonis, and 23 further to the N.N.W., meets another from f and y Ursa* Majoris. 250 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 584. H3 y. I LYNCIS. (h. 582; H. 1811; h. K.A. 9 13 3 Decl. N 34 13 Free. + 3-68 S 14-96 A nebula thus, described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; c L ; IE; m b f ; 3 st s ;" which means : " considerably bright ; considerably large ; little extended ; much brighter on the following side ; there are 3 stars on the S. side/* 585. h. m. s. B.A. 9 13 51 40 LTTNCIS. Free. + Decl. 34 49'5 3-69 S 15-01 A fine red or orange star of mag. 4, with a 8 or 9 mag. companion, "violet" (Webb). Birmingham rates 40 Lyncis at mag. 3-1, but I find no other authority for that rating. 586. 157 B. LYNCIS. (2. 1338.) H.A. 9 14 7 Decl. N 38 39 I Positioi STRUVE, W. 121-1 STRUVE, 0. 128-1 DAWES 131-9 DEMBOWSKI 1388 TALMAGE 142-6 WILSON and SEABROKE 150-0 Prec. S ance. 76 82 69 73 53 78 3*& 15-0 3 Epoch. 1829-53 1840-33 1850 12 1862-85 1871-40 1876-26 i. " Dist I i i I A binary star. A 7 J, white ; B 8, white. The increase in angle is very marked, but the distance seems unchanged. " The apparent orbit is, therefore, probably nearly circular." (Gledhili.) 587. 205 ^. I. ITRS^J MAJOBIS. (H. 1823 ; .) CCCXLIX. Free. + h. m. s. K.A. 9 14 24 Decl. N 51 28-1 s, 4-19 S 15-04 A bright nebula in the animal's right fore-leg, of a pale creamy whiteness, with several bright stars in. the northern part of the field. It is large, nucleated, and elliptical, with its major axis lying np and sf, and E. A. 9 h - 1 3 m 9 h - 1 7 m - 251 about 4' long. It lies if'fp of 6 TJrsse Majoris, and nearly on the line described by t, 0, ft, and 6 of that constellation. [Noted at Parsonstown as being " in general appearance very like the nebula in Andromeda."] 588. 39 LYNCIS. (2. 1340.) CCCL. 5. H.A. 9 15 2 o Decl. W 50 0-7 Prec. + 4-14 S 15-08 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL.W. 3182 ... 7-1 ... 1782-87 SMYTH ' 319-5 ... 6-2 ... 1839-18 A neat double star, on the Great Bear's right leg, and about 2^ sp in that constellation ; whence, but for the map-makers, it must have per- tained to Ursa Major. A 6^, lucid white ; B 9, sapphire blue. It has required some trouble to trace unequivocally the identity of this object. Baily diminished its R. A. above 3^', in order to correspond with modern observations, as there appeared to be some error in the British Catalogue reduction of Feb. 16, 1704. Piazzi, Note 47 to Hora IX., says that, by Flamsteed and La Lande, the proper annual motion in E,. A. of this star would be 0-8", which he vainly tried to confirm from Bradley, who observed it on March 14, 1757 ; and he therefore concluded that some error of R.A. had crept in here, and at 40 Lyncis. 589. 65 P. IX. HYDR^E. (2. 1347.) CCCLIII. h. m. s. R.A. 9 17 32 c Decl. N 3 58-2 Prec. + 3-13 S 15-22 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE, W. 310-5 ... 21-2 ... 1832-23 MAIN 309-0 ... 20-9 ... 1863-16 A neat double star, at the back of Hydra's neck ; it is 1 2 N.' by W. of a Hydne, and 16 W.S.W. of a Leonis. A 8 and B 9, both white. 590. 137 $. I. LYNCIS. (H. 1837; &.) CCCLII. h. m. s. R.A. 9 17 36 Decl. N 34 59 2 Prec. -h 3-69 S 15-23 A bright nebula, on the fore-paws of Leo Minor.; a line from under 252 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. y and through A. Ursae Majoris, carried 16 beyond, marks its site. It is round, pale white, and sparkling at the centre ; nearly all the stars in the field precede it, especially a yellow 7 th magnitude, which lies on the parallel. This may be liable to error of identity, if 1$. mistook 41 Lyncis for 40. 1$. remarked that the chevelure, or additional faint circular nebulosity surrounding the nucleus, was 3' in diameter: by my equa- torial, of course, such a magnitude could not be inferred, 591. 21 TJRS^E MAJORIS. (2. 1346.) CCCLI. h. R.A. 9 17 51 Decl. 3ST 54 29 '3 Free, -f 4-32 S 15-24 Position. Distance. Epoch. O It HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 309-0 ... 6-4 ... 1822-12 STRCVE,W. 310-9 ... 57 ... 1830-29 SMYTH 310-9 ... 6.3 ... 1839-17 SECCHI 3103 ... 5-8 ... 185698 GLEDHILL 312-0 ... 5-3 ... 1874-26 A neat double star, on the Bear's left fore-knee, where an occult line from Polaris to the W. of will find it nearly on the parallel of decli- nation with "y Ursse Majoris. A 8, silvery white ; B 9, violet tint, with a third star at a distance in the np quadrant. [A slight increase of angle and decrease of distance is perhaps indicated.] 592. 3163 h. CARING. (h. 3163 ; H. 1843.) h. R.A. 9 18 18 o Decl. S 57 50-6 Prec. + 1-69 S 15-27 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : !!; O =*8; vS; E; "15, 59'i3, '3V " which means :" a very remarkable object ; a planetary nebula of the brightness of an 8 th mag. star; very small; round; there is a star of the 15 th mag. at an angle of 59-13, and 13" distant from the centre of the nebula." 593. 260 $. I. URS^E MAJORIS. (h. 596; H. 1848.) h. R.A. 9 20 56 o Decl. W 62 57-9 Prec. + S 15-42 A nebula thus described in Sir J, Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : R. A. 9 h - 17^.-- 9 H. 22 m. 253 "B; cS; R; mbM; amst;" which means: "bright; considerably small ; round ; much brighter in the middle ; amongst stars." It precedes 23 Ursae Majoris, a star of mag. 4, by i m 55 s , and is 34' to the S. of it. 594. 41 LYNCIS. CCCLIV. h. m. s. s. B A, 9 21 27 Decl. N 46 5-3 Free. + 3-97 S 15-44 Position. Distance. Epoch. o SOUTH 161.5 ... 86-6 ... 1824.72 BUBNHAM 161-8 ... 81-6 ... 1880-37 A wide pair of stars under the Great Bear's foot. A 6 J and B 8 J, both bluish. Classed after Piazzi's magnitudes, though A seems to merit a higher rate. 595. a HYDK^I. CCCLVI. h m. s. t. R. A. 9 22 11 Decl. S 8 10 '9 Prec. + 2-95 // S 15- Position. Distances Epoch. o n BUBNHAM 152-8 ... 281-2 ... 1^79-25 A Nautical Almanac star, with a distant companion, in Hydra's heart. A 2, but suspected of variability, orange tint; B 10, pale green. This star has been known as Cor Hydra?, and Lucida Hydra?, among flie Latins; and also as Alphard, i.e. the Arabic Al-fard, the solitary, so termed perhaps, because there is no competitor in brightness near it. It has been most familiarly known as Hydra's heart. It is readily found by drawing a line from y and b Ursa? Majoris, the two last in the square southwards by y Leonis and through Regulus; or, as expressed in galley-stave heroics : Thro' Cancer's sign, whence no bright stars distinguish'd light impart, Pollux from Castor leads you down to hideous Hydra's heart. Hydra, seu Serpens Aquations, the water-snake, with Corvus and the Crater upon it, is figured after the same manner in most of the delineations, from the grand Farnese Globe and the MS. of Cicero's Aratus, down to Mr. Carey's -maps and Miss Whitwell's drawings. While some term it Hydra, others use the designation Hydros, and a third party Anguis. In addition to these, it has been called Asina, Coluber, Anguis, Sublimatus, Furiosus, in a word, all manner of names. 254 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. It is indeed a strange asterism, trailing to such a length, that but for the subdivisions afforded by the Cup and the Crow, it would seem inter- minable : the parts so treated become Hydra, Hydra et Crater, Hydra et Corvus, and Hydrce continuatio. The head of the reptile is to the S. of Cancer, from whence its body winds Eastward with many curves, under Leo and Virgo as far as Libra. It was one of the old 48 constellations, and has thus been gradually increased in constituents : Ptolemy ... 27 stars - Tycho Brahd . . 24 Clavius. ... 34 Bayer .... 29 Bullialdus Hevelius . Flamsteed Bode , 33 stars. 3i 60 37 .. 596. a LEONIS. (2. 1356.) CCCLVII. h. m. s. B.A. 9 22 34 Decl. N 9 32-2 Prec., ..+ 3-22 S 15-51 Position. Distance. if HERSCHEL, W. 1 16.9 0-4? SMYTH 160-0 0-5, SMYTH 193-0 ... 0.3 MADLER 350-0 ... ^-47 SECCHI 32.9 0-30 DOBERCK 71-2 .,. 0.54 BURNHAM 79-8 ... 0-51 Epoch. 1783-26 1832.11 1843-14 1852-30 1866-30 1877.21 1879.78 An exquisite close double star, before the Lion's left fore-foot ; being one of the "pervicinse" of 2. A 6J, pale yellow; B 7 i, greenish ; at times both stars look yellow. I am the more particular in stating these colours, as I was drawn to the subject by I[/s remark that it would be curious " if a considerable difference in the colours could have led us to discover which of the two stars is before the other ! But the far greatest part of their diameters being spurious, it is probable that a different coloured light of two stars would join together, where the rays of one extend into those of the other ; and so, producing a third colour by the mixture of it, still leave the question undecided.' 7 To fish up this interesting object by alignment, carry a ray from a Geminorum through the Prsesepe, and extend it just as far again in the S.E., where it is the middle one of Flamsteed's Nos. 6, 2, and 3 ; it lies in an open space about n to the W.S.W. of a Leonis, and 17 due N. of a Hydrae. [In taking the above observations 1$. and Smyth measured one end of the " egg " yielded by the 2 stars in contact, and the other observers the other end of , the "egg." Hence it follows that the discordances are not as great, as they seeni to be. , This is .undoubtedly a binary^ star, but B.A. o h - 22 m - o h - 2i m - 255 the period is uncertain : the latest, and for the present the best, estimate is Doberck's, = noy. The stars are widening, and after another 20 years a better value will be obtainable.] 597. 3 LEONIS. CCCLVIII. h. . 3. -a. R. A 9 22 38 Decl. N 8 4O-2 Free. + 3-20 S 1-1 Position. Distance. Epoch, o // BUBNHAM 79.1 ... 25*1 ... 1878*6* A delicate double star, close to the Lion's left fore-paw, where it will be found by the above alignment. A 6, pale yellow; 613, blue, two or three other stars in the field, of which the nearest is about 2" distant in the sf. This object, one of I$.'s doubles, was looked at by me principally as a focus adjustment for attacking o>, which is within a degree to the due N. of it. 598. 23 UBS^J MAJOBIS. (2. 1351.) CCCLV. h. m. s. -. s. B.A. 9 22 51 c DecL N 63 32 "6 Free, -h 4-82 S 15-52 Position. Distance. Epoch. STBDVE, W. 272-4 ... 22-8 ... 1830-61 SMYTH 271-8 ... 23-0 ... 1833-26 A neat double star, in the Great Bear's neck ; at rather better than one- third the distance between and Polaris. A 4, pale white ; B 9^, grey. [This star is known also as h Urse Major is. It lies at \ the distance from 6 to Folaris,] 599. 7- 1 HYDB^J. CCCLX. 7- 1 HYDB^J. B A. Decl. h. 9 S m. s. 23 34 2 172 Free. -f S . 3-03 // HERSCHEL SMYTH MAIN W Position, o 358*6 2. 9 2.2 Distance n .. 61-6 .,. Epoch. 1782-09 1363.17 A wide double star, in the Serpent's fore-body, and 6 N. of a Hydrse. A 5^, flushed white ; B 8 J, lilac, with a small star preceding it near the *? vertical. ' ,'.1 256 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 600. 56 . I. LEONIS. (h. 604-1; H. 1861; .) h. m. s. R. A. 9 25 57 Decl. N 21 58-4 Prec. + 3-41 S 15-70 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "cB; vL; E; gmbM; r; sp of 2 ;" which means : "considerably bright; very large; extended; gradually much brighter in the middle; resolveable ; the sp of 2 nebulae." The second nebula here spoken of is the next object (No. 60 1). It is mentioned as " very faint," but " considerably large ; round ; pretty suddenly brighter in the middle ; resolveable." Both are engraved to- gether in Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. vii. Fig. 70; and Phil Trans., 1850, PI. xxxvi. Fig. 3. 601. 57 $. I. LEONIS. (h. 604 2 ; H. 1863 ; M.) CCCLXII. h. m. s. B.A. 9 25 57 Decl. N 21 59-1 Prec. + 3-41 S 15-70 A bright-class white nebula, in the Lion's lower jaw ; IjjL described it as a double nebula, each having a seeming nucleus, with their apparent nebulosities run- ning into each other, and this was confirmed - by Sir J. Herschel. It is vertically between two groups, of three small stars each, and it is elongated with a major axis lying sp and nf. To fish it up, run a line from a to y, and there draw another, perpendicular to it, which, car- ried nearly twice the length of the base, will strike it 2 S. of A Leonis. The upper or S. part is better denned than the lower ; it re- quires, however, the closest attention and FIG. 14. 57 I. LEONIS. most P atient watching, to make it a bicentral object, with my means ; but the annexed is something of its aspect under the best vision. [Engraved in Phil. Trans., 1833, PL vii. Fig. 70; Phil. Trans., 1850, PI. xxxvi. Fig. 3.] E. A. 9 h - 25 m 9 h - 2Q m - 257 602. 6 LEONIS. CCCLXIII. h. B.A. 9 26 4 c Decl. N 10 12-1 Prec. + 3-22 S 15-70 Position. Distance. Epoch, o // HERSCHEL, W. 77-0 ... 36.1 ... 1781-14 SMYTH 73-6 ... 37-6 ... 1832-23 DEMBOWSKI 74-3 ... 36-8 ... 1874-05 A double star, in the Lion's left fore-paw ; lying 9 W. by S. of a on the line projected from Leonis through that luminary, and at half the length of that line. A 6, pale rose-tint ; B pi, purple. 603, f ANTLI^E. h. m. s. B.A. 9 26 4 Decl. S 31 25-6 Prec. + 2-56 S 15-70 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J. 210-6 ... 8-3 ... 1836-22 STONE, 0. 211-5 ... 8-2 ... 1877-10 A double star. A 6 ; By. 604. 3917 Lac. VELOBUM. (*h. 4220.) h. B.A. 9 29 48 c Decl. S 48 31-1 Prec. + 2-15 S 15-90 Position^ Distance. Epoch, o // HERSCHEL, J. 202-0 ... 2-99 ... 1836-29 A double star. A 6 ; By. 605. 7 LEONIS. CCCLXIV. b. m. s. s. B.A. 9 29 52 c Decl. N 14 52-3 Prec. + 3-29 S 15-90 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, W. 81-4 ... 42-4 ... 1782-10 SMYTH 80-1 ... 42-6 ... 1832-33 HALL 79-5 ... 41.2 ... 1877-30 A wide but very delicate double star, in the space opposite the Lion's neck ; it is 8 W.N.W. of a, in the line formed by that luminary and j] Yirginis, a bright star lying about twice the distance in the E.S.E. A 6^ flushed white; B 8, violet tint. S 258 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 606. 3179 h. CABINS. (H. 1881.) h. m. s. B.A. 9 31 13 Decl. S 46 26-9 Free. + 2-22 S 15-98 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " Cl ; e L ; v Hi ; st L & S ;" which means : " cluster ; extremely large ; very rich ; the stars are of various sizes, large and small." 607. 114 $. I. LEONIS MINOBIS. (h. 622; H. 1896 ; &.) h. m. s. B.A. 9 36 21 o Decl. IT 32 20 '0 Free. + 3-57 S 16-25 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " B ; v L ; IE; vgb M ; p of 2 ;" which means : " bright ; very large ; little extended ; very gradually brighter in the middle ; the preceding of 2 nebulse." The 2 nd nebula here spoken of (=491 IjjL II.; h. 624; H. 1899) is mentioned as "pretty bright; pretty large; little extended; very gradually less bright in the middle." 608. 61 $. I. SEXTANTIS. (h. 630; H. 1904; .) h. m. s. s. B.A. 9 37 o Decl. S 3 12-0 Free. + 3.03 S 16-28 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "B; cS; iE,; bM; *9sp3 s ;" which means : "bright; considerably small ; irregularly round ; brighter in the middle ; there is a 9 th mag. star in the sp quadrant at a distance of 3 s ." 609. 161 P. IX. SEXTANTIS. (2. 1377.) CCCLXVII. h. m. a. s. B.A. 9 37 45 Free. + 3-12 / jf Decl. N 3 7'9 S 16-32 Position. Distance. Epoch. o |M STRUVE, W. I 4 2 -3 3-3 1830-24 DEMBOWSKI 140.4 3-6 ... 1867-84 STRUVE, 0. M5-9 3-7 1868.29 A delicate double star, just inside the upper frame of the Sextant, but RA. 9 h - 3i m - 9 h - 4o m - 259 also on the more ancient Lion's leg ; where it will be found nearly in mid-distance and closely W. of a line between a Leonis and a Hydrae. A 8, yellowish white; B 13, blue, with two or three other small stars in the field, one of which nearly precedes. 610. 285 ^. I. UBS^J MAJOB1S. (h. 625 ; H. 1905 ; h. m. B.A. 9 38 7 c Decl. N 68 25 '5 Prec. + 5-05 S 16-33 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "B; vL; mE 152-4; stinv;" which means: "bright; very large; much extended in the direction of 152-4 with the meridian; there is a star involved." 611. 282 $. I. DRACONIS. (H. 1906.) h. m. R. A. 9 38 51 Decl. N 75 36 '7 Prec. + 6- 1 1 S 16.37 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B : p L ; i F ;" which means: " considerably bright ; pretty large ; of irregular figure." Not found by D'Arrest, who suggested that the places of all Sir W. Herschel's nebulae discovered on April 2, 1801 (this being one of them), were affected by some common and large error. 612. 78 $. I. ITRS^ MAJORIS. (h. 629; H. 1909.) CCCLXV. m. *. - i. R.A. 9 40 32 e Decl. N 72 47 '7 Prec. + 5-57 S 16-41 A bright-class round nebula, above the Great Bear's ear, with several stars in the field from the 9 th to the 12 th magnitudes; of which a vertical pair precedes the nebula, and it is closely followed by a very minute one, which is caught only by glimpses. It may be fished up by running a line to the N.E.W. from f Ursse Majoris under X Draconis, in the tails of the Bear and the Dragon, and carrying till it is nearly due S. of Polaris. Here the observer will find Flamsteed's 27 Ursae Majoris, a star of the 5j magnitude, and closely following it is the nebula sought. S 2 260 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 613. 50 $. V. ANTLI^I. (h. 3188; H. 1923.) Free. + 2-62 h. m. s. K.A. 9 40 50 Decl. S 30 41-1 S 16-47 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " ! ; v F ; v L ; vg, vsb MN 4" ; I95 S d ;" which means : " a remark- able object; very faint; very large; at first very gradually, then very suddenly brighter in the middle, where there is a nucleus 4" in diameter ; the diameter of the nebula as a whole is 19- 5 s ." 614. B, LEONIS. R.A. 9 41 39 Decl. N 11 56-5 Prec. + 3-24 S 16-52 An old and well-known variable and red star, noted to be variable by Koch in 1782. Eange from 5 th to io th mag. Period, 3i2 d . Criswick, " blood red ;" Dunkin, " very red ;" Birmingham, 1873, " red, with orange cast." I find it mentioned in my own notes under date of Jan. 20, 1865, as " a fine rich ruby star." Hind says : " It is one of the most fiery- looking variables on our list fiery in every stage from maximum to minimum, and is really a fine telescopic object in a dark sky, about the time of greatest brilliancy, when its colour forms a striking contrast with the steady white light of the 6 th magnitude, a little to the N." This was written in 1857 (M. N., xvii. 199). This star is B.A.C. 3345. 615. 26 $. V. LEONIS MINOBIS. (h. 639 ; H. 1931 ; .) Prec. + 3-58 B.A. 9 42 2 Decl. N 33 55'5 S 16-53 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " ! ; c B ; L ; vim E 90 ;" which means : " a remarkable object ; con- siderably bright; large; very irregularly but much extended in the direction of 90 with the meridian." 616. 115 y. I. LEONIS MINOBIS. (h. 645; H.1944; &.) R.A. 9 44 27 Prec. + 3-58 Decl. N 34 4'1 S 16-65 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: E. A. 9 h - 4o m - - - 9 h - 48- 261 " p B ; p S ; vl E ; mb M ; *io sf 100 ;" which means : " pretty bright ; pretty small ; very little extended ; much brighter in the middle ; there is a io th mag. star in the sf quadrant at an angle of ioo." D' Arrest places the star differently. He says it follows at 4'4 8 , in Pos. 141. 617. 81 and 82 M. URS^E MAJOBIS. (h. 1949 and 1950 ; .) CCCLXIX. h. m. R.A. 9 46 23 o Decl. N 69 38 '8 Prec. + 5-06 S 16-74 No. 8 1 (=h. 649) is a fine bright oval nebula, of a white colour, in the Great Bear's ear. Its major axis lies np and sf; and it certainly is brightest in the middle. There are several minute companions in the field, of which a close double star in the sp quadrant is 2. 1386, and by him marked vicince ; the members are both of the 9^ magnitude, and trend np and sf, about 2" apart, forming a fine though difficult object. [Pos. 294; Dist. 1-89"; Epoch 1869-15. Dembowski. The angle is slowly decreasing. Somewhat nearer to the nebula, 81 M., is another double, 2. 1387, formed of two io th magnitude stars. Pos. 272; Dist. 9-0"; Epoch 1864-02. Knott^ With a low power, 82 M. can be brought into the N. part of the same field of view, although they are half a degree apart. It is very long, narrow, and bright, especially at its northern limb, but rather paler than 8 1 M. A line drawn through three stars in the sp to a fourth in the nf passes directly through the nebula. The two nebulae precede A, in the end of Draco's tail, by 25, but as the vicinity is deficient of large stars, they are not readily fished up. The apparent place here taken is that of a small star between the two nebulae. [Huggins finds the spectra of both to be continuous.] [82 M. was described at Parsoustown on May 21, 1871, as "a most extraordinary object, at least 10' in length and crossed by several dark bands/'] 618. 9 SEXTANTIS. CCCLXXI. 9 SEXTANTIS. h. m. S. S. R.A. 9 48 22 Prec. + 3-14 / // Decl. N 5 27'9 S 16-83 Position. Distance. Epoch. // OUTH 292.7 .- 51-0 1825-01 llAIN 292-2 ... 53-i 1863-19 A double star on the right fore-leg of Leo, though crimped into the 262 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. Sextant; it lies at one-third of the way from a Leonis to a Hydra. A 7 and B 9, both blue, and well defined. [Colour of B uncertain or changeable, according to Knott.] Desirous of assigning an asterism to the perpetual remembrance of celestial affairs, and especially wishing to commemorate the instrument so successfully used by Tycho Brahe' at Uranienburg, about the year 1590, Hevelius gathered some informes between the Lion's fore-legs and Hydra, and called them Sextans Uranice. But, with more zeal than taste, he fixed the machine upon the Serpent's back, under the plea that the said Sextant was not in the most convenient situation, but that he placed it between Leo and Hydra because these animals were of a fiery nature, to speak with astrologers, and formed a sort of commemo- ration of the destruction of his instruments when his house at Dantzic was burnt in September, 1679; or, as he expresses it, when Vulcan overcame Urania. He who thus placed it in the heavens only mustered 12 stars, but Flamsteed made out 41, and Bode increased them to 112. This, and some other of Hevelius's denominations, occasioned an ill-natured and groundless sneer from the redoubtable La Lande, himself a wholesale apotheosizer ; but it assuredly speaks more for his flippancy than for his scientific gratitude. The above ebullition is however to be strictly confined to the case in point ; for whatever singularities or failings he possessed and, from the testimony of his own eamarades, these were neither few nor trivial there were not many of his day to whom the "million" were more indebted for scientific supplies than to Jerome Le Franjais La Lande. 619. 213 P. IX. VELORUM. h. m. s. R.A. 9 49 58 o Decl. S 44 45*8 Prec. + 2*35 S 16-91 Position. Distance. Epoch, o // HERSCHEL, J. 239-1 ... 5.9 ... 1836-15 A double star. A 6 ; B gi. 620. 286 $. I. URS^E MAJORIS. (h. 658 ; H. 1982 ; &.) CCCLXXII. h. m. R.A. 9 53 36 o Decl. N 69 16 '3 Prec, + 4-92 S 17-08 A bright-class round nebula, at the back of Ursa Major's left ear, E. A. 9 h - _ 9 h. 59 m, 2f>3 preceding A, at the end of Draco's tail, by 22; it is lucid white, and lights up in the centre. There are two lines of three stars each across the field, of which the one preceding the nebula is of the 7* h magnitude, and that following of the 10 th ; between these the sky is intensely black, and shows the nebula as if floating in awful and illimitable space, at an inconceivable distance. Dr. Derham, whose judgment led him to consider nebulae as vast areae of light "infallibly beyond the fixed stars," thought that some of them might be openings in an opacity surrounding the visible system, which chasms allow us a sight of the empyreal sphere beyond it. The present object, under the favourable conditions in which I viewed it, would have almost countenanced his supposition. IjJL says, that " on the nf side there is a faint ray interrupting the roundness." 621. 47 . V. UES^E MAJORIS. (H. 1983; E. Prec. h. m. s. R.A. 9 54 27 Decl. N 56 13 '0 4-12 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "vB; L; mE 135+ ;" which means: "very bright; large; much extended in the direction of about 135 with the meridian." 622. Decl. 1402 S. URS^E MAJORIS. Prec. S 17-26 h. m. s. R.A. 9 57 31 s. + 4-12 56 6'8 Position. Distance. O H STRUVE.W. 96-0 ... 21-0 MAIN 98.1 ... 23-5 Epoch. 1831-68 1864.47 A double star. A 7^, yellow; B 8%, bluish. Midway between /3 and0. 623. 297 Dunlop CARING. h. m. s. R.A. 9 59 8 Decl. S 59 35'4 (h. 3224 ; H. 20O7.) Prec. + 1-93 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " Cl ; e L ; 1C; B ; st 9 . . . 14 ;" which means : " a cluster; extremely large ; little condensed ; bright ; the component stars vary from the 9 th to the 14 th magnitudes." 264 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 624. 163 y. I. SEXTANTIS. (h. 668, 3223; H. 2008; .) CCCLXXIII. h. m. s. * R.A. 9 59 45 Decl. S 7 li'3 Free. + 2-99 S 17-35 An elongated bright nebula, on the radius or graduated limb of the Sextant, followed by two stars of the II th magnitude, which are the only other objects in the field of view. Its major axis trends towards the vertical of the sp and nf quadrants ; and the extremes appear pointed. It is remarkable that this object was very clearly distinguished in my telescope ; for H. says it was scarcely perceptible in his 2o ft when he gave it only 6 inches of aperture. It follows a Hydrae by about 10, a little N. of the parallel ; where it precedes a knot of small stars, which are a couple of degrees further to the W. [Query, variable ? Seen without the slightest difficulty in a finder of 2 Jin by Brodie. "Webb notes that it " bears magnifying unusually well."] 625. 3228 h. ANTLLffi. (H. 2017.) R.A. 10 2 23 o Decl. S 39 53-8 Prec. + 2-52 S 17-47 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " !! ; O; vB; vL; IE; *g M ; 4-o s d;" which means: "a very remarkable object ; a planetary nebula ; very bright ; very large ; little extended; resembles a 9 th mag. star; it has a diameter of 4-o 8 in R.A/' Engraved, Cape, Obs., PI. vT. Fig. 9; Lassell, Mem. R.A.S. vol. xxiii. PI ii. Fig. 10 ; Secchi, Descrizione del Osserv. Coll. Rom. 1856, PI. iv. Fig. 1 6. 626. a LEONIS. CCCLXXIV. h. m. s. g. R.A. 10 2 30 o Deel. BT 12 30 '3 Prec. -f 3-20 S i Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, W. A B 305-0 ... 168-3 ... 1781-84 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH A B 307-1 ... 174-96 ... 1821.21 JEDRZEJEWICZ A B 306-8 ... 177-0 ... 1877-30 BURNHAM BC88. 5 ... 3-2 ... 1878-10 A Nautical Almanac star, with a distant companion, in the Lion's breast. A i, flushed white ; B 8J, pale purple; [C 1]. RA. 9 h - 59 m -- id*- 2 m - 265 A comparison of the measures of 1$., and J. Herschel and South, induced a belief, that a consi4erable alteration had occurred in the relative places of the two stars, in a lapse of 40 years, showing a physical con- nection between them ; but I am inclined rather to attribute the differences to proper motion and instrumental errors, than to incon- stancy of angle or increase of distance. Indeed, it is a wide object for this system of measuring, and a long run upon the micrometer spring. This star is well known as Kapdia \covros, Cor Leonis, the lion's heart. It is pointed to by a Tauri and y Geminorum, as well as by running a line from Orion's belt through Procyon, and carrying it nearly twice as far again to the E.N.E. The prolongation of the same line, or rather great circle, will lead to Denebola, /3 in Leo's tail. Regulus and Deuebola form the longest side of an extensive quadrila- teral figure, with two other stars to the N. of them ; there is a still more remarkable square adjoining this, y being a corner-stone of each. Regulus is also readily found by drawing a line southwards from y and 5 Ursse Majoris, the last stars in the square; or, with the poetaster, reversing it : From Hydra's pass through Leo's heart, (which marks th' Ecliptic Line,) Youll rise to where, in Ursa Great, the third and fourth stars shine. Ptolemy calls this star Bao-tXto-Kos-, from an opinion of its influencing the affairs of the heavens ; whence comes its Latin name Regulus, a word which appears to have been first used by Copernicus as the diminutive of rex. It is the lucida of the extensive northern constellation Leo, whose stars are well disposed and conspicuous, forming the 5 tb asterism in zodiacal order. The classic star-gazers viewed this as the apotheosis of the Xemsean Lion, and the emblem of heat ; but Stower's celebrated manu- script Almanac of 1386 recognises in it one of Daniel's lions, and there- fore " whoso es born in yat syne he schal be hardy and lytherus." The Arabs called this "fiery trigon" Kalb-al-Asad, or lion's heart, and Meliki, or kingly; for this impression of greatness was as rife among the Oriental astronomers and their successors as among their classic prede- cessors. Thus "Wyllyam Salysbury, treating of the sphere, or frame of the world, in 1552, tells us, "The Lyon's herte is called of some men the Royall Starre, for they that are borne under it are thought to have a royall nativitie;" and in the Tabule Astronomice Alfonsi Regis, 1492, it is written against Regulus, " Que est super cor : et dicit. Rex." Yet after all Horace only sings of it as Stella vesani Leonis. , Leo, Nemeas alumnus, Bacchi sidus, Stella regia, are also names by which the Lion has been designated ; and it is visible to the gazer 266 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. by the large trapezium which it displays. Even should Regulus not be personally known, this trapezium is readily found by the universally- known pointers of the Great Bear ; for as they serve to show Polaris to the northward, so also doth the line produced by them, prolonged south- ward about 45, point to the Lion. It is one of the old 48 constellated groups, and has been thus catalogued : Ptolemy ... 35 stars. Maraldi ... 60 stars. Tycho Brahd . . 40 Flamateed . . 95 Bayer . . . . 43 Hodell . . .176 Hevelius ... 50 Bode . . , . 337 627. 79 $. I. DBACONIS. (h. 674 ; H. 2024 ; .) h. m. s. s. R.A. 10 7 25 Decl. N 73 56 '6 Free. -|- 5-28 S i'v-68 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; L ; R ; v g, v s v m b H ; " which means : " very bright ; large ; round ; at first very gradually, then very suddenly very much brighter in the middle." 628. 3 I. I. SEXTANTIS. (h. 684; H. 2038; h. m. a. B.A. 10 8 3 o Decl. N 3 58'3 Free. + 3- n S i".6 A bright-class round nebula, on the frame of the instrument, thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "B; pS; R; psmbM; p of 2 ;" which means : " bright ; pretty small ; round ; pretty suddenly brighter in the middle ; the preceding of 2 nebulae." This object was discovered by Sir ~W. Herschel in December, 1783, but it is very remarkable that, though he made 4 observations of it, he did not notice that there were 2 nebulae in the field. H., how- ever, saw them both. The place is not very difficult to find, being about 9 S. by E. of a Leonis, and in the line with that luminary and p, Leonis. Engraved, Rosse, Dublin Trans., 1879, PI. iii. Fig. 2038. This object is on or near the spot where the Capuchin, De Rheita, fancied he saw the napkin of S. Veronica, in 1643, with an improved telescope which he had just constructed. In a letter to his friend J. Caramuelis, dated Cologne, 24 th April, 1643,116 mentions having detected K.A. io h 267 most clearly, by means of his binocular telescope, with the greatest surprise, admiration, and delight, the sacred " sudarium Veronicae sive faciem Domini maxima similitudine in astris expressum," in the sign of Leo, between the equinoctial and the zodiacal circles. And this is an accurate reduction of the figure which Zahn gives of it in the Oculus Artificialis : FlG. 15. "A PIOUS FRAUD," A.D. 1643. Padre de Rheita makes very respectable mention of this same appa- rition in his great work, Oculus Enoch et Elice, sive Radius Sidereo- mysticusj the very elaborate engraved title-page of which thus invites us, in the words of the Royal Psalmist, Venite et videte opera Domini. In craving permission to doubt his assertion, Sir John Herschel's words may be applied : " Many strange things were seen among the stars before the use of powerful telescopes became common." 629. 4 #. I. SEXTANTIS. (h. 685; H. 2041; .) CCCLXXV. h. m. s. R.A. 10 8 34 Decl. IT 4 6'4 Prec. + 3-12 S 17-73 This is the second of the two nebulae spoken of under No. 628. Sir J. Herschel's account of it is that it is " bright ; pretty large ; very little extended ; pretty gradually much brighter in the middle ; there is an uto mag. at an angle of 78-2 and distant 80"." 268 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 630. 1415 2. UBS^E MAJOBIS. h. m. s. 8 - Free. + 5'5 B.A. 10 9 5 o / Decl. 3* 71 36'4 S 17-76 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE, W. 167-1 ... 16-7 ... 1832-21 MAIN 167.8 ... 16-8 ... 1864-47 A double star. A 6, very white; B 7j, very white. 63L 3241 h. CHAM^ELEONTIS. (H. 2063.) h. B,A. 10 10 36 o Decl. S 80 19-1 Free. + 0-50 S 17-81 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "!; O; P B ; S; IE; 13-08 d; sSstnr;" which means : "a re- markable object ; a planetary nebula ; pretty bright ; small ; little extended; has a diameter of 13 s in R. A. ; there are 3 small stars near it." Engraved, Cape Obs., PI. vi. Fig. 2. 632. 3239 h CABINS. (H. 2067.) h. B.A. 10 12 49 o Decl. S 57 24'6 Free. + 2-13 S 17-90 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " ! ; v B ; v L ; falcate ; * N ; " which means : " a remarkable object ; very bright ; very large ; in shape like a scythe ; there is a double star in the nucleus." Engraved, Cape Obs., PI. iv. Fig. 3. 633. 199 #. I. URS^B MAJOBIS. (h. 695 ; H. 2066 ; .) h. m. s. s- B.A. 10 13 5 Decl. N 46 6'8 Prec. + 3-70 S 17-92 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " p B ; v L ; m E 45 + ; v g b M ; " which means : " pretty bright ; very large ; much extended in the direction of about 45 with the meridian ; very gradually brighter in the middle." K. A. io h - 9 m ---io h * i4 m - 269 634. 445 Dunlop CARING, (h. 3238 ; H. 2068.) b. m. s. R.A. 10 13 6 o / Decl. S 45 51-0 Prec. + 2-45 S 17-91 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "; vL; iR; 1CM; gbM; sti3...i6;" which means : " a globular cluster ; very large ; of an irregular roundish outline ; little compressed iu the middle ; gradually brighter in the middle ; the com- ponent stars vary from the 13 th to the i6 th magnitudes." 635. y LEONIS. (2. 1424.) ccc h. m. s. s. R.A. 10 13 54 Prec. -f 3-30 o / m* DecL IN 20 23 '8 S 17-82 Position. Distance. Epoch. o If HERSCHEL, W. 83-5 3-00+ ... 1782.71 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 98-4 ... 3-24 1822.24 STRUVE, W. 103-4 ... 250 1831-51 SMYTH 107.2 ... 2-8 1843.18 STRUVE, O. 109-0 ... 3-02 1857-28 KNOTT 110-5 ,,.. 3-21 1866-21 DOBERCK 1 1 1. 1 ... 3-63 1877-23 JEDRZEJEWICZ \ II 4' 2 ( 292-6 ... 3-6i } ... 231.46$ 1880-40 A splendid double star, close to the Lion's mane, about 7^ to the N.N.E. of a, and nearly in the middle of the constellation. A 2, bright orange ; B 4, greenish yellow, and there are two other stars in the field. This most beautiful object has a slow progressive angular acceleration, with an annus magnus of about 40 7 y (Doberck). [Both the angle and the distance are, it will be seen, slowly increasing.] This star has been improperly called Algieba, from Al jeb-bah, the fore- head ; for no representation of the Lion which I have examined will justify that position. 636. 266 $. I. URS^J MAJORIS. (h. 697; H. 2073.) h. R.A. 10 14 31 c Decl. N 57 28 '9 Prec. + 4-01 S 17-97 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "pB; cL; E; vglbM;" which means : " pretty bright ; con- siderably large ; extended ; very gradually less bright in the middle." 270 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 637. 2955 Brisb. CARING. (*h. 4306.) R.A. 10 Decl. S HEBSCHEL, J. SANTIAGO OBS, m. s. 15 11 64 8'0 Position. 139.8 145-5 Prec. + 1-85 S 1 8. oo Epoch. 1836-50 1850-28 Distance. 1-4 2-8 A close double star. A 7 ; B 7. 638. T VELORUM. R,A. 10 16 49 Decl. S 55 29-2 Position. HEBSCHEL, J. j f "3-5 ( AC 191-4 A triple star. A 5^ ; B to ; C 10. Prec. +' 2-22 S 18-06 Distance. Epoch. 7-0 ... 183671 6-1 ... 1836-31 639. 283 y. I. DRACONIS. (H. 2081.) h. m. R.A. 10 17 Decl. 75 13 '1 Prec. s. 5-30 S 18-07 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; c L ; e E ; " which means : " considerably bright ; considerably large ; extremely round." D* Arrest failed to find this. (See No. 61 1, ante.} 640. 386 Dunlop CARING. (h. 3245 ; H. 2090.) h. m. s. R.A. 10 17 21 Decl. S 51 10 -0 Prec. + 2-35 S 18-08 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " Cl ; 9 L & a few S s-t ; " which means : ^"a cluster consisting of 9 lai-ge and a few small stars." K. A. IO&- is m io h - i9 m - 271 641. 705 h. LEONIS. (H. 2091; ift.) b. m. s. 9. B.A. 10 17 52 Prec. + 3-20 o / // Decl. N 13 6'6 S 18-10 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " ! ; * or ** in neb. ; " which means : " a remarkable object ; a double or triple star in a nebula." Or, as Sir John elsewhere calls it, " a nebulous wisp." The double star is *h. 2529. 642. 58 P. X. TFRSJE MAJORIS. (2. 1428.) CCCLXXVII. B.A. 10 19 4 o / Decl. N 53 11 "0 Prec. + 3-86 S 18-17 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE.W. 84-5 ... 3-84 ... 1831-69 SMYTH 85-0 ... 3-6 ... 1832.49 MADLER 86-7 ... 3-99 ... 1844-21 DEMBOWSKI 85-5 ... 3-69 ... 1858-00 DUN6B 88-2 ... 3-36 ... 1871-32 A neat double star, on the Great Bear's right shoulder. A 8, and B 8 J, both white. The juxtaposition seems to be only optical. To find this pair by alignment, run a line from the Lesser Bear's leading guard, /3, through a Ursae Majoris, and the mid-distance on the N.E. of that lucida will mark the place of K Draconis, while a similar extent to the S.W. of Dubhe will strike upon 58 P. X. 643. 27I^.IV.HYDR^I. (h. 3248; H. 2102; M.) CCCLXXVIII. b. m. a. s. R.A. 10 19 25 o Decl. S 17 35-6 Prec. + 2-88 S 18-15 A planetary nebula, pale greyish-white, nearly 2 S. of /u, about 20 S.W. by W. of Regulus, and in the middle of Hydra's body. From its size, equable light, and colour, this fine object resembles Jupiter; and whatever be its nature, must ^_ O"'' be of awfully enormous magnitude. It was discovered by 1$. in February, 1785, and has four telescopic stellar companions, two .--'' N of which are posited at nearly equal dis- , - f ,, J , , A FIG. 16. 27 #.1V. HYDR*:. tances, np and sf, from the nebula. As a line passing from a star in the -Tip quadrant ta another in the /*just touched its disc, it was diagrammed as above. 272 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. Though this curious nebula escaped H., his remarks on planetary nebulae are so applicable to it, that they should be here transcribed: " Granting these objects to be equally distant from us with the stars, their real dimensions must be such as would fill, on the lowest computation, the whole orbit of Uranus. It is no less evident that, if they be solid bodies of a solar nature, the intrinsic splendour of their surfaces must be almost infinitely inferior to that of the Sun's. A circular portion of the Sun's disc, subtending an angle of 20", would give a light equal to 100 full moons ; while the objects in question are hardly, if at all, discernible to the naked eye. The uniformity of their discs, and their want of apparent central condensation, would certainly augur their light to be merely superficial, and in the nature of a hollow spherical shell; but whether filled with solid or gaseous matter, or altogether empty, it would be a waste of time to conjecture." [Secchi, in the clear Italian sky with which he was blessed, seems to have seen this nebula to great advantage : according to him, within a circular nebulosity there are 2 clusters connected by 2 semicircular arches of stars, forming a sparkling ring, with one star on the hazy ground of the centre. At Parsonstown something of the same kind has been noted. Huggins finds a gaseous spectrum.] [Engraved, Cape Obs., PI. vi. Fig. 5; Lassell, Mem. R.A.S., vol. xxiii. PI. ii. Fig. n, and vol. xxxvi. PI. iii. Fig. 14; Secchi, Descrizione del Osserv. Coll. Horn. 1856, PI. iv. Fig. 5; Rosse, Dublin Trans., 1879, woodcut.] 644. 67 P. X. LEONIS. (2. 1431.) CCCLXXIX. b. m. s. s. TLA. 10 19 47 Decl. N 9 20-2 Prec. + 3-17 S 18-17 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // SOUTH 64-0 ... 3-6 ... 1825-20 STRUVE, W. 65-9 ... 3-2 ... 1832-56 SMYTH 65-3 ... 3-5 ... 1843-16 SMYTH 67.5 ... 3-5 ... 1853-22 A very neat double star, on the Lion's right shoulder ; about 5^ to the S.W. of a, and exactly on the line described from that luminary to a Corvi. A 8, white ; B 9 , pale blue. This beautiful but delicate object is [perhaps in motion], [Closely / 44 Leonis, an orange star of mag. 6, which itself is 2 p p Leonis of mag. 4.] K.A. io h - i9 m io h - 27- 273 645. 86 y. I. LEONIS MINOBIS. (h. 711; H. 21O4; &.) CCCLXXX. b. m. s. s. B. A. 10 21 6 Decl. + 29 4-0 Free. + 3-39 S 18-22 A bright-class nebula, beneath the animal, but pretty close to the old Lion's mane; where a N.N.E. ray from a Leonis carried closely before y l Leonis, and extending rather more than as far again, will find it in the centre of a trapezium of 4 stars, of which the 2 southern ones are the largest. This fine object is of an oval shape, with a palpable central nucleus. 646. 72 $. I. LEONIS MINOBIS. (h. 714; H. 2112; &.) h. m. s. B.A. 10 23 8 c Decl. S 30 3-4 Free, -f 3-39 S 18-29 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; L ; E 45 + ; p s m b M N ; " which means : " considerably bright; large; extended in the direction of 45 or more with the meridian ; pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle, where it exhibits a nucleus." Described at Parsonstown, Jan. 27, 1852, as a "long lenticular ray/' but " suddenly brighter in the centre." This last remark however was made on a later date. 647. 94 P. X. SEXTANTIS. (2. 1441.) h. m. s. B.A. 10 25 28 Decl. S 7 4-3 Free, 4- 3-00 S 18-37 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STRUVE, W. 169.3 ... 2-59 ... 1830-12 STONE, 0. 166-3 ... 2-46 ... 1878.75 A double star. A 7, golden ; B u. 648. S VELOBUM. b. m. s. s. B.A. 10 27 13 Decl. S 44 30-4 Prec. -f 2-54 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, J. 37-8 ... 13.8 ... 1836-55 A double star. A 6 J ; B 6 J, 274 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 649. 49 LEONIS. (2. 1450.) CCCLXXXI. h. B.A. 10 29 16 o Decl. N 9 13-1 Free. + 3-16 S 18-50 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUTS, W. 161-1 ... 2-39 ... 1830-76 SMYTH 158-1 ... 2-5 ... 1838-37 SECCHI 157-1 ... 2-3 ... 1856-74 GLEDHILL 156-6 ... 2-8 ... 1874-70 HALL 159-8 ... 2-40 ... 1878-33 A close double star, under Leo's right shoulder, close to p and about 8 W.S.W. of Regulus. A 6, silvery white ; B 9, pale blue. [The above results may imply a very slow retrograde angular motion.] 650. 164 $. I. LEONIS MINORIS. (h. 724; H. 2145; h. m. s. s. B.A. 10 29 57 Decl. N 37 53 5 Free. + 3-47 S 18-53 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1 864 : " c B ; L ; m E 135 + ; g 1 b M ; " which means : " considerably bright; large; much extended in the direction of about 135 with the meridian ; gradually less bright in the middle." 651. 60 $. IV. URS^J MAJORIS. (h. 731; H. 2158; .) CCCLXXXII. h. m. s. s. R.A. 10 31 53 o Decl. N 54 5'0 Free. + 3-77 S 18-57 A planetary bluish-white nebula, in the Great Bear's right shoulder, having two stars of the io tn magnitude nearly between it and an orange- coloured companion in the sf quadrant. It is a small object but well defined, with a palpable unattenuated round disc ; this I note the more particularly as denoting the limit of my means upon such bodies, for I saw no symptom of the " very feeble atmosphere " with which H. says it is surrounded. It bears about 4 S.W. of /3 Ursae Majoris, and is nearly on the same parallel with y. Sir ~W. Herschel considered the indistinctness on the edges sufficiently extensive to make this a step between a planetary nebula and those bright in the middle. [Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. v. Fig. 40.] E. A. io h - 29 m - - - loh- 37 m - 275 652. 322 (?) Dunlop CARIN^E. (h. 3286 ; H. 2167.) h. R.A. 10 33 11 c Decl. S 58 3-1 Prec. + 2-28 S 18-64 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " p b ; vv L ; IF; inv. ; " which means : " pretty bright ; unusually large ; irregular in figure ; there is a double star involved in it." Precedes TJ Argus 7 m 36 s , and is i 3' to the N. thereof. 653. 272 y. I. LEONIS. (H. 217O.) h. m. a. R.A. 10 33 39 Decl. N 9 5O'5 Prec. -I- 3-16 S 18-67 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "B; S; iR; mbMBN;" which means : " bright ; small; of an irregularly round outline ; much brighter in the middle where it exhibits a bright nucleus." Position given by Schonfeld and Vogel, and perhaps not very exact. 654. 81 $. I. LEONIS. (h. 739; H. 2178 ; &.) RA. 10 37 27 c Decl. 1ST 25 3O'3 Prec. -f 3-29 S 18-77 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; L ; gb M ; * inv ; 2 st f ; " which means : " considerably bright ; large ; gradually brighter in the middle ; a star is involved in the nebula ; 2 stars follow it." Seen at Parsonstown as a " very faint spiral with a bright centre." 655. 35 SEXTANTIS. (2. 1466.) CCCLXXXIV. 35 SEXTANTIS (2. 1466.) CC h. m. s. s. R. A. 10 37 38 Prec. 4- 3.12 o / Decl. N 5 19 6 QJ 18-77 Position. Distance. Epoch. o ft STBUVE, w. 240-8 67 ... 1825.20 SMYTH 239-6 6-8 1839.19 DUNER 240.0 6-6 1872-62 JEDRZEJEWICZ 240-3 6-7 ... 1877-49 A neat double star, on the N. extreme of the graduated limb of the instrument, and three-fifths of the distance between a Hydra? and ft Leonis. A 7, topaz yellow ; B 8, smalt blue. T 2 276 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 656. 95 M. LEONIS. (h. 743; H. 2184; .) CCCLXXXV. h. m. K.A. 10 38 10 o Decl. N 12 16-3 Free. + 3-18 S 18-79 A lucid white nebula, on the Lion's ribs, with only two small stars, np and n/, in the field. Its place is almost due E. of a Leonis, with a distance of 9, where it forms the southern vertex of a triangle nearly equilateral with y and 5 Leonis. This nebula is round and bright, and perhaps better denned on the southern than on the northern limb, a phenomenon worthy of remark, and observable in the great nebula of Andromeda, and other wonderful masses. It was discovered by Mechain in 1781, and registered by Messier as a " feeble nebula, without a star." Nearly a degree to the E. of this object follows another round but not equally well-defined nebula, large, and of a pale white colour, 96 M. (= h. 749; H. 2194), also discovered by Mechain in 1781; it constitutes the intersecting point of a rectangle formed by five stars, of which the nearest is in the sp quadrant, and of the i I th magnitude. 657. 80 $. I DRACONIS. (h. 738; H. 2182; h. m. s. B.A. 10 38 48 o Decl. N 73 25 2 Free. + 4-65 S 1 8-8 1 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "B; S; ilE; psbM; *n, 281-8, 2O-os;" which means : " bright ; small ; irregularly extended ; pretty suddenly brighter in the middle ; there is an II th mag. star at an angle of 281-8 and distant 2O-o 8 inKA." 658. 77 ARGTJS. (h. 3295 ; H. 2197.) h. B.A. 10 40 47 o Decl. S 59 6-5 Prec. + 2-31 S 18-87 " The great nebula in Argo" which surrounds the star 77, thus described by Sir J. Herschel in his Outlines of Astronomy : " This star is situated in the most condensed region of a very extensive nebula or congeries of nebular masses, streaks and branches, a portion of which is represented in Fig. 2. PI. iv. [of the Outlines]. The whole nebula is spread over an area of fully a square degree in extent, of which RA. io h - 38 m ---io h - 40^- 277 that included in the figure occupies about one-fourth, that is to say, 28' in polar distance, and 32' of arc in R.A., the portion not included being, though fainter, even more capriciously contorted than that here depicted, in which it should be observed that the preceding side is towards the right hand, and the southern uppermost. Viewed with an 1 8 in reflector, no part of this strange object shows any signs of resolution into stars, nor in the brightest and most condensed portion adjacent to the singular oval vacancy in the middle of the figure is there any of that curdled appear- ance, or that tendency to break up into bright knots with intervening darker portions which characterise the nebula of Orion, and indicate its resolveability. The whole is situated in a very rich and brilliant part of the Milky Way, so thickly strewed with stars (omitted in the figure), that in the area occupied by the nebula, not less than 1200 have been actually counted, and their places in R.A. and P.D. determined. Yet it is obvious that these have no connection whatever with the nebula, being, in fact, only a simple continuation over it of the general ground of the galaxy, which on an average of 2 hours in Right Ascension in this period of its course contains no less than 3138 stars to the square degree, all, however, distinct, and (except where the object in question is situated) seen projected on a perfectly dark heaven, without any appearance of intermixed nebulosity. The conclusion can hardly be avoided, that in looking at it we see through, and beyond the Milky Way, far out into space, through a starless region, disconnecting it altogether from our system. ' It is not easy for language to convey a full impression of the beauty and sublimity of the spectacle which this nebula offers, as it enters the field of view of a telescope fixed in Right Ascension, by the diurnal motion, ushered in as it is by so glorious and innumerable a procession of stars, to which it forms a sort of climax,' and in a part of the heavens otherwise full of interest. One other bright and veiy remarkably formed nebula of considerable magnitude precedes it nearly on the same parallel, but without any traceable connection between them." The nebula alluded to at the close of the foregoing paragraph appears to be H. 2167, which precedes rj Argus 7 m 34 s , and i 3' to the N., and which has already been described. (See No. 652, ante.) A keen controversy sprang up some years ago as to whether any sufficient proofs existed of this great nebula having undergone changes of figure within the previous century. The balance of testimony was against the idea. For particulars of the arguments adduced I must refer the reader to my Handbook of Astronomy, 3 rd edition, p. 546. Engravings of this nebula will be found in the Cape Obs., PI. ix. Fig. I ; in Sir J. Herschel's Outlines of Astronomy, as mentioned above; Month. Not. R.A.S. vol. xxiv. p. 2, (Abbott) ; vol. xxviii. p. 200, (Abbott) ; vol. xxix. p. 82, (Capt. J. Herschel); vol. xxxi. p. 234, (Abbott.) 278 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 659. 17 IjJ. I. LEONIS. (h. 757; H. 2203; .) s. Free. + 3-18 h. m. s. B.A. 10 42 1 Decl. N 13 9-4 S 18-90 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "vB; cL; E; psbM; r;" which means : " very bright; consider- ably large; round; pretty suddenly brighter in the middle; resolve- able." 660. 1474 2. HYDR^I. h. m. s. B. A. 10 42 12 Decl. S 14 40-9 Position. Free. + 2-95 S 18-91 Distance. STBUVE, W. STONE, 0. A triple star. A 7 22-2 Epoch. 1822-16 1878.23 , very white ; B 9, very white ; C 8J. AB C B 193.9 CB 196-4 6-9 i 6-6 v Crateris, alias v Hydrse. N. of 661. 159 P. X. HYDROS. B.A. 10 42 13 Decl. S 15 2-7 Position. STRUVE, W. SMYTH MAIN o 9-7 IO-O (2. 1473.) Free. + 2-95 S 18-91 Distance. Epoch. 31-4 CCCLXXXVI. 1822.16 1836-22 9-3 . 3 J -9 ... 1863-19 A double star, near the cup on the Hydra's back, where an E.S.E. ray from a Hydrse towards the middle of the little square that constitutes Corvus will meet it in the half-way. A 8, paje white ; B 9, light blue. 662. 18$ I. LEONIS. (h. 758 ; H. 2207; &.) CCCLXXXVII. R.A. 10 42 28 Decl. N 13 12-3 Free. + 3-18 S 18-92 A pair of bright-class nebulse, sp and nf of each other, on the Lion's R.A. io h - -- io h 279 body ; while at a small distance to the nf is a neat but minute double star. These are two of the three nebulae described by both the Her- schels ; but the third I cannot distinguish, unless it be a glow in the sf, in a vertical line with two small stars. We now approach a region where these mysterious luminous masses are scattered over the vast concavity of the heavens, in truly boundless profusion. The objects here treated of are among the nebulae included within a round patch of about 2 or 3 in diameter, in the apparently starless space of the Lion's loins. The field may be found, under a moderate ]>ower, S. of the line which joins a and 6 Leonis about 10 E. of, and nearly on the parallel with, the former. [" The 3 rd nebula forms nearly an equilateral triangle with the other 2 : Query, variable." Brodie] 663. 116 ^. I. LEONIS MINORIS. (h. 765; H. 2216; K.) h. m. s. R.A. 10 43 42 Decl. N 33 33 9 Free. + 3-36 S 18-95 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " c B ; p S ; il E ; I st of 2 ;" which means : " considerably bright ; pretty small ; irregularly extended ; the I st of 2 nebulae." The other nebula here mentioned (=117 1$. I. ; h. 766 ; H. 2217) is situated at an angle of 20 in the nf quadrant at a distance of 80", and is the fainter of the 2. Both are engraved in Lord Rosse's paper in Phil. Trans., 1861, PI. xxvii. Fig. 15. 664. 41 SEXTANTIS. b. CCCLXXXVIII. R.A. 10 44 47 Decl. S 8 18-9 Position. BUEKHAM Prec. + 3-01 S 18-99 Distance. Epoch. n _ f _ \ ... 1879-34 AC 72.3 ... 233.4 A most delicate triple star below the Sextant, of which the third is not seen by me, though I have measured a distant companion in the same quadrant. A 6, white; B 16, dusky; C 10, bluish. It lies exactly 280 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. on the parallel, and 20 to the E., of a Hydroe, nearly "alone in its glory," so that, like an oasis in a desert, it is tolerably visible to the inquiring eye. A line from e, in the Lion's head, through a Leonis prolonged more than as far again to the S.E., strikes upon it. This object was forwarded to me by Sir J. Herschel, as an experimentum crucis of my optical power, on mounting the large telescope, there being a minute point in the sf of the 17 th or i8 th magnitude, which baffled all my endeavours to detect it. Indeed the one in the np quadrant, B, is only caught by transient glimpses and keen gazing, so that the estimated angle and distance are mere guesses. 665. 27 I. LEONIS. K.A. Decl. h. m. s. 10 45 5 N 13 59'7 (h. 774; H. 2229; &.) Free. + 3'i8 S 18-99 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "B; S; IE 135+; smbMN;" which means : " bright ; small; little extended in the direction of about 135 with the meridian; suddenly much brighter in the middle where it exhibits a nucleus." 666. 362 $. II. LEONIS MINOKIS. (h. 773; H. 2227; &.) CCCLXXXIX. a. Free. + h. m. s. E.A. 10 45 12 Decl. N 28 33 '4 3-31 a S 19-00 A faint round nebula, pale white, on the ham of the Little Lion's hind-leg ; it is preceded nearly on the parallel by an 8th magnitude star, and there are several other small ones in the field, of which four following ones cross the parallel in a neat arc. It may be fished for nearly in mid- distance between y Leonis and f Ursse Majoris. 667. 172 $. I. LEONIS MINOBIS. (h. 780 ; H. 2238; h. m. s. B.A. 10 46 16 Decl. N 37 12 Free, -f- 3'39 // S 19-03 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: R A. io h - 44 m - io h - 49 m - 281 "pB; pL; vmE 42-5; *inv?;" which means: "pretty bright; pretty large; very much extended in the direction of 42-5 with the meridian ; a double star is seemingly involved in the nebula." Engraved, Cape Obs., PI. iv. Fig. 10. 668. 179 P. X. LEONIS. (2. 1482.) CCCXC. R.A. h. 10 m. s. 46 26 Prec. + s. 3' 13 Decl. IM- 8 2-8 S 19 03 STRUVE, W. SMYTH Position. 305-3 305-6 Distance. "7 n.8 ... Epoch. 1831-97 1836-26 A neat double star, under Leo's body. A 8J, and B 9, both bluish white. It is to be picked up about 13 on a line from a Leonis to a Virginis. 669. 267 I. I. URS^E MAJORIS. (h. 787; H. 2245; h. B.A. 10 47 50 Prec. + 3-73 Decl. N 57 34*2 | - S ig-o^j A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "cB; pL; iR; vglbM; * 10^/2';" which means: "considerably bright ; pretty large ; of an irregular round outline ; very gradually less bright in the middle; there is a star of mag. 10 is the nf quadrant at a distance of 2'." Precedes /3 Ursae Majoris 7 m 22 s ; and is 35' to the N. of it. Engraved, Rosse, Dublin Trans., 1879, PI. iii. Fig. 2245. 670. 268 #. I. URS^E MAJORIS. (H. 2257.) h. R.A. 10 49 15 o Decl. ]ST 57 42'4 Prec. -f 3-72 H S 19-11 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "vB; vS; R; stellar;" which means: "very bright; very small; round ; stellar." Precedes /3 Ursee Majoris 5 m 57 s ; and is 44' to the N. of it. 282 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 671. 54 LEONIS. (2. 1487.) CCCXCI. R.A. 10 49 39 Decl. N 25 20' 2 Position. o HERSCHEL,W. 99.2 STRUVE, W. 102-8 SMYTH 102-7 SECCHI IO 4'3 DOBERCK 104-9 JEDRZEJEWICZ 106-3 Prec. + 3-27 S 19-12 Distance. 6-2 6-3 6-5 6-3 Epoch. 1781.14 1830-35 I839-33 1856-59 1877-30 1878-35 A neat double star just over the Lion's back, where it is preserved from the Lesser Lion by one of the map-maker's nooks ; it will be found about 15 N.E. of a Leonis, on the line produced towards r? Ursse Majoris, at the end of the Great Bear's tail. A 4^, white ; B 7, grey. This is a beautiful object. [A slow increase in angle seems certain.] 672. 4531 Lac. CABINS. (*h. 4383.) h. m. s. R.A. 10 50 6 Decl. S 70 7'9 Position. o HERSCHEL, J. 285-8 A double star. A 7 ; B 8|. Prec. + 1-95 // S 19-12 Distance. Epoch. 1-42 ... 1837.18 673. 1495 2. TJRS^E MAJORIS. h. m. s. B.A. 10 53 5 Decl. 3ST 59 29 '9 Position. STRUVE, W. 38-2 Prec. + 3-77 S 19-21 Distance. // 34-4 Epoch. 1833-07 A double star. A 6 J, yellowish ; B 9, white. About midway between a and /3. RA. io h . 49 m io h - 54*- 283 674. 87 $. I. LEONIS MINORIS. (h. 805; H. 2274; &.) CCCXCII. h. m. R.A. 10 54 12 c Decl. N 29 34 "0 Free. + 3-29 // S 19-24 A large bright-class orbicular nebula, on the Little Lion's haunch, lying 4 on a line from Ursae Majoris into the S.W. space towards a Leonis. This remarkable object, with the exception of a 7 th magnitude star in the N., is in a field strewed with glimpse stars, from the most remote of which it may still be inconceivably remote, proceeding by analogy. H. observed it closely, and says, " no doubt a distant globular cluster j" in other words, not only suns beyond suns, but glorious systems of suns arranged in harmonious order. Where facts are still wanting, we can only form our opinions upon general principles. Now, when the dot which includes our system occupies a range of 3,600,000,000 of miles in diameter, besides a larger space which it controls, should it be taken for an average among the millions of suns around, what imagination can grasp the immensity of creation ! Indeed, where system thus stretches beyond system, the space must be infinite, or infinitely near it ; and in such contemplation we become conscious of our own littleness. But no subject whatever, except Revelation, can give a more exalted conception of the Eternal Fountain of all Intelligence. 675. a CRATERIS. CCCXCIII. R.A. h. m. s. 10 54 27 Free. + Decl. S 17 42-9 S i Position. Difference of R. A. 5A1YTH JAB 9 7 ... 42-1) ( B C 268 ... 4.9 i Epoch. 1835-38 A star with two very distant companions in the sf, on the base of the Cup. A 4, orange tint ; B 8, intense blood colour ; C 9, pale blue, a fourth star away in the sf quadrant. This object may once have been brighter, since it acquired a name Alkes and was lettered a; but 8 is now the lucida, and wears the Nautical Almanac honours. It may be found by carrying an occult line from Arcturus, though 8 Yirginis, and rather more than the same distance to the S.W. The large star has a very considerable proper motion. [B is the well-known variable R Crateris. See No. 677,^0^.] 3, Crater, though a small and inconsiderable asterism, is one 284 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. of the old 48 ; and is easily made out by 6 stars of the 4 th magnitude in an annular form, on Hydra's back, forming Cicero' sfulgens Cratera. The scholiast on Germanicus termed it Urna, and the Arabians Bdtiyah, a large cup, and al-Khas, the shallow basin ; which last was corrupted to Alhas by the framers of the Alphonsine Tables, but Scaliger properly suggested that the word should be Alkes, the name now used for the star a. The number of its constituents have been thus stated : Ptolemy .... 7 stars. Hevelius . . . . 10 stare. Tycho Brahe* . . 8 Flamsteed ... 31 Bayer 1 1 Bode 95 676. 101 !. II. LEONIS. (h. 806; H. 2276; .) b. m. s. B.A. 10 54 31 o Decl. N 14 29-4 Free. + 3-17 // S 19-24 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " v B ; pL; 1 E 8o+ ; smb MN ;" which means : " very bright ; pretty large ; a little extended in the direction of about 80 with the meridian ; suddenly much brighter in the middle where it exhibits a nucleus," 677. B. CRATERIS. h. m. s. B.A. 10 55 8 o Decl. S 17 37-6 Prec. + 2-94 S 19-26 A fine red star, variable, from about the 8* to the 9 th magnitude. Sir J. Herschel, "scarlet;" Webb, 1874, "very intense ruby," 9! ; Birmingham, 1876, "red, not so deep as formerly." Later on in 1876 Birmingham marked it " good red," and "crimson." On March 6, 1880, its colour was to me by no means striking. 678. /3 URS^J MAJORIS. CCCXCIV. h. B.A. 10 55 12 o Decl. If 56 58-3 Prec. + 3-65 S 19-26 Position. Distance. Epoch. BURNHAM 353.9 ... 245+ ... 1879-29 A bright star with a distant companion, on the Greater Bear's body. A 2, greenish white; B n, pale grey, other stars in view. R. A. io h - 54 m i o 11 - 56 m - 285 Although the name He! ice, a winding spiral figure in geometry, per- tained to the whole asterism of the Greater Bear as will presently be seen it was also specially applied to ft, the southernmost of the two pointers ; this star has always been a favourite with ancient and modern seamen, because, by a line from it through a both stars being the farthest from the tail the Pole-star is always readily found. It has since then obtained the name of Herak, from the Arabian Merdk al- dubb-al-akbar, the loins of the Greater Bear : Where Charles's Wain adorns the sky, if Merak you would know, The Pole-star led through Dubhe's light will mark it just below. 679. a URS^J MAJOBIS. CCCXCV. b. m. s. s. R.A. 10 56 56 a Decl. N 62 20 '7 Free. + 3-77 S 19-30 Position. Distance. Epoch, o // SMYTH 203-8 ... 380-6 ... 1832.41 A Nautical Almanac star, with a distant companion, on the Great Bear's back. A i J, yellow; B 8, yellow. A, the northern pointer, which was marked /3 or 2 n <* magnitude by Ptolemy, was suspected by H. of being variable, and he asked me in October, 1838, to compare it with in the same asterism ; but my slight examination was res infecta. [It was Lalande who suggested the variability of this star, but the question has made no progress since Smyth wrote his remarks above. B violet in 1850 according to Webb.] *AP apex, and an 8 th magnitude preceding it at double the distance; there is also a brightish group in the np quadrant. It is easily found, since it lies only about i S.E. of /3. This object is faint but well defined, being much elongated with an axis-major trend- ing sp and nf across the parallel, and a small star, like a nucleus, in the centre. As ll. considers this star to be unconnected with the nebula, it follows that it is between us and it, and therefore strengthens to confirmation our belief in the inconceivable remoteness of those mysterious bodies. 689. 9 P. XI. LEONIS. (2. 1517.) B.A. 11 7 56 Deci. N 20 44-0 Prec. -f- 3-19 S 19-54 Position. o STRUVE, W. 287-8 SMYTH 288-6 SECCHI 287-4 DOBERCK 284-8 BUKNHAM 2Sl.I Distance. 1-05 1-2 0-78 0-6 1 0-83 COCCI. Epoch. 1829-70 1833-5* 1856-98 1877.26 1879.22 A neat double star, on the Lion's loins ; and closely sp 8, a star of the 3 r <* magnitude. Both f, and both faint yellow. This is a beautiful object, resembling rj Coronae. [According to the observations of the two Struves and Secchi one or other of these stars is certainly variable. Perhaps both the angle and the distance are decreasing. "Common proper motion; and undoubtedly a binary system." flurnhamJ] 690. 1516 2. DBACONIS. R.A. 11 8 7 Prec. + 4-23 / // Decl. N 74 4-5 STQ 55 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE, W. AB 298.7 // ... 9-9 .- 1831-54 STBUVE, O. AB 310-6 ... 6-1 ... 1841-92 STBUVE, O. AB 341-7 ... 2-9 ... 1850-92 STRUVE, O. |AB 64.4 1861.33 ( A C 297.0 8o ) DUNEB ( AB 87-3 ... 7-3 ... 1871-49 (AC 299.4 ... 7-4 ... I875-54 , FLAMMARION AB 910 ... 9-5 .- A triple star. A 7^, yellowish ; B 8, ashy yellow ; Cu. O. Struve discovered C in 1858. "The star B is therefore fixed, and has u 2 no 292 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. physical relation with A. The star C, on the contrary, participates in the large proper motion of A." Gledhill. 691. d LEONIS. B.A. h. m. s. 11 8 15 Prec. + t. 3' J 9 Decl. / N 21 7'6 Position. Gj 19 A. 54 Epoch. Difference of B o a. i JAB 50 f A C 345 4-9 1 2-9 i ... 1836-21 Position. Distance. HAM JAB 44-2 ... (AC 344-7 ... 95-5 I not stated j ... 1879-28 CCCCIII. SMYTH A Nautical Almanac star, with companions forming a coarse triple object, in a black field, at the root of the Lion' tail. A 3, pale yellow ; B 13, blue; C 9, violet; a fourth and most minute star is suspected Dearly in the line of C, and about a third of the distance, but this was not confirmed by Dawes, who also examined the object for me. 8 Leonis and 6 Yirginis are the stars which Flamsteed observed, in 1690, with the object which has since proved to be Uranus. This star is called Zosma, from >/*a, a tunic or girdle, but why so designated, deponent sayeth not : it is not mentioned by Ideler. Zosma will be readily distinguished 18 N.E. of a Leonis, and 5 due N. of 0, where it forms a fine scalene triangle with and {3. 692. 97 M. UBS^J MAJOBIS. (h. 838; H. 2343; &.) CCCCII. R.A. 11 8 19 Decl. N 55 36 '7 Free. + 3-51 S 19-55 A large planetary nebula, or globular collection of nebulous matter, FIG. 1 8. 97 M. URS.E MAJORIS. found by M. in 1781 on the Great Bear's flank, with several stars in R.A. 8 m - - - n h - 293 the field, one of which is pretty close. It lies about 2 to the S.E. of /3, and just S. of an imaginary line from /3 to y. This very singular object is circular and uniform, and after a long inspection looks like a condensed mass of attenuated light, seemingly of the size of Jupiter. This diagram was sketched. Sir W. Herschel discovered this orb in 1789, and found it a globular body of equal light throughout : he also says, " From the observation of the 2O ft telescope, it appears that the profundity of this object is beyond the guaging power of that instrument ; and as it must be sufficiently distant to be ambiguous, it cannot well be less than of the 980^ order." The 980^ order ! [Sir J. Herschel assigned to this object a diameter of 2' 40" ; the light equable, with only a softened edge ; but the Earl of Rosse found a good deal of structure in it, that is to say, 2 large perforations and a resolveable spiral arrangement. Webb points out that of 2 stars, one in each opening, one only has been seen since 1850. Huggins finds the spectrum to be gaseous.] 693. 29 $. I. LEONIS. (h. 840; H. 2347; &.) R.A. 11 8 50 Decl. 13 24-8 Free. + 3-14 S 19-56 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "B: cL; 90+; psmbM;" which means: "bright; considerably large ; extended in the direction of about 90 with the meridian ; pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle." Engraved, Vogel, Nebelflecken, 1876, PI. i. Fig. 2. 694. 234 B. URS^J MAJORIS. (2. 1520.) R.A. 11 9 43 Decl. N 53 22-5 Position. o STRUVE, W. 345-3 MAIN 344-o Prec. + 3-49 S 19-58 Distance. n 13-0 Epoch. 1831-71 1864-46 A double star. A 7, white; B 8J, bluish. 294 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 695. 50 fij. II. LEONIS. (h. 845; H. 2358; &.) CCCCIV. h. m. R.A. 11 11 6 o Decl. N 18 38-7 Free, -f 3-17 S 19-60 A fine round white nebula, at the root of the Lion's tail, well-defined, and with a brightish centre. A little to the N. of it is another rather smaller, which is 51 1JL II. [H. 2359]; and there are some telescopic stars between them. They are followed by a triangle of three stars, and the whole forms a field of high interest. This object was described by 1$. as a " triple" nebula, but I can only see the above-mentioned. It bears about 2 J to the S.S.E. of 6 Leonis. 696. 270 $. I. URS^I MAJOBIS. (h. 847; H. 2360; .) h. m. B.A. 11 11 57 c Decl. N 59 22 -7 Free. + 3-55 // S 19-60 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " v B ; p S ; IE 90+ ; vsvmb MSN ;" which means : " very bright ; pretty small; a little extended in the direction of about 90 with the meridian ; very suddenly very much brighter in the middle where it exhibits a small nucleus." 697. 271 1$. I. URS^E MAJORIS. (h. 848; H. 2362; h. R.A. 11 12 6 c Decl. N 58 35" 5 Free. + 3-53 S 19-62 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " v B ; c L ; m E 305-0 ; smb MN ; " which N means : " very bright ; considerably large ; much extended in the direction of 305-0 with the meridian ; suddenly much brighter in the middle where it exhibits a nucleus." 698. URS^I MAJORIS. (2. 1523.) CCCCVI. h. m. R.A. 11 12 20 Decl. N 32 9'5 Free. + 3-25 S 19-62 RA. n h - n m - - - ii 1 *- i2 m - 295 Position. Distance. Epoch, HERSCHEL, W. 143-8 ... 3-50 ... 1780-33 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 258-5 ... 2-81 ... 1823-29 SMYTH 2 7*5 ... Iw 8 ... 1830-94 KAISES 152-2 ... 2-08 ... 1840-25 STROVE, 0. 124-1 ... 2-67 ... 1850-39 MORTON 105-3 - 2 ' 8 4 1860-08 DUNER 53-8 ... 1-16 ... 1870-43 WILSON and SEABROKE 295-0 ... 1-50 ... 1877-41 JEDRZEJEWICZ 2720 ... 1-81 ... 1880-48 A binary star of the most interesting description, in the Bear's left hind-paw, directly under v, or Al ula Borealis ; the two forming a miniature of b and Leonis, which are 10 due S. of them. A 4, subdued white ; B 5!, greyish white, and both very bright. It is usually designated Al Ula Australia, from the Arabian Al-kafzali-al-ulq, the gazelle's first spring or leap. This extraordinary pair forms an object of the gravest importance, since its motion is so rapid as to admit of being demonstrated by measurements at short intervals. So far back as 1825, H. most strongly recommended it for constant and careful observation. "This done," said he, " there is no doubt of our arriving at a precise know- ledge of the elements and position of the orbit described by each about their common centre of gravity ; and the question of the extension or non-extension of the NEWTONIAN law of gravity to the sidereal heavens the next great step which physical astronomy has yet to make will be effectually decided." The effect of such a call was to animate exertion ; and its consequence has been a series of excellent measures by various astronomers. There is not a binary star which goes further to prove that there is yet much to be accomplished in the art of measuring, than f ; for the discordances in the value of its annual movement in orbit are great. This, and the gap in the period of the starting points, make it difficult to investigate the elements by the process of gathering the radii vectores of the revolver from the angle of position a method founded by Herschel on the condition, that they are equal to the square roots of the apparent angular velocities. Still I essayed it, and brought out a period of 65?. Sir John Herschel had also predicted that, between 1839 an( i l8 4 x > this star would have completed a full revolution from the epoch of the first measurement of its position in 1780, in a periodic time of about 59 years. M. Savary elaborately computed its orbit in 1830, making its period to be 58 J years, and in his acute discussion of the details, adduces an equation due to the finite velocity of light. Indeed, of all the stellar orbital periods yet discussed, this of f Ursae Majoris is admitted to be the most rigorously determined; and did we but know its parallax, and 296 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. thence its absolute distance from the Earth, we might readily decide upon the linear extent of its orbit. [The rapidity with which the position angle of this star changes has enabled a vast number of observations to be accumulated since Admiral Smyth's epoch. But notwithstanding this, our knowledge of its orbit is less precise than might be expected. There can be no doubt however that the period does not sensibly differ from 60 years. DuneYs elements are as follows : Peri-astron passage . . Longitude of peri-astron . Longitude of Ascending Node Inclination . . . Eccentricity . . . Mean Annual Motion . . Semi -axis major . Period T = 1875.29 * = 132 33' 6 = 101 30' (Equinox, 1850-0) 7 = 56 54' = 0-395 2 /* = -5-92 a = 2.549" = 60.79^- 699. v URS^I MAJORIS. (2. 1524.) s. Prec. + 3-26 S 19-63 CCCCVII. h. m. . B.A. 11 12 32 Decl. N 33 41-7 STBUVE, W SMYTH WILSON BURNHAM Position. I46-5 H7-2 I47' 1 146-0 Distance. 7-8 Epoch. 1830-69 7-i ... 1873-25 7-o ... 1878.26 A delicate double star, on the Bear's left hind-foot, immediately above f, and therefore called Al Ula Borealis. A 4, orange tint; B 12, cerulean blue, preceded exactly on the equatorial line by a 7* ma g. s t ar) with A B. A. = 2 1 -5 s . It is mentioned under No. 698 that this star with forms a miniature of 6 and 6 Leonis, 10 to the S. of them; and for further identity it may be added that a W.S.W. ray from Cor Caroli to e Leonis passes them in mid-difctance. 700. 241 $. I. CBATEBIS. R.A. Decl. h. m. s. 11 12 57 S 32 12-5 (h. 3337; H. 2371.) s. Prec. + 2-90 S 19-63 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; v L ; E 160+ ; am 4 st ;" which means : " considerably bright : very large; extended in the direction of about 160 with the meridian; amongst 4 stars." This is 617 Dunlop. R A. n h - i2 m ---nh. 101. 297 701. 339 B. LEONIS. (2. 1527.) h. m. s. s. R.A. 11 13 14 Pi-ec. + 3-i5 1 H Decl. N 14 52-4 S I9-64 Position. Distance. Epoc n STRUVE, W. 9 7 3-7 -. 1822- DAWES 10-2 40 1840- MORTON n-6 3-9 1855- TALMAGE 12-8 3-6 ... 1866- DUNEB 14-4 3-4 I875- A double star. A 7, yellow ; B 8J, blue. A may be variable : at least South puts it at 8 ; Dawes at 8, 7-2 ; Struve at 8, 6-9; Duner at 6-5, 6. A slow increase in angle and decrease in distance seems prob- able. 702. 39 P. XI. CRATERIS. (2. 1530.) CCCC1X. h. R.A. 11 14 1O Decl. S 6 17-7 Prec. + 3-04 S 19-65 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STRUVE, W. 314-6 ... 7-6 ... 1830.23 SMYTH 315-0 ... 8-0 ... 1836-29 WILSON and SEABBOKE 313-4 ... 7-4 ... 1874-22 BURNHAM 313-3 ... 7-9 ... 1880.22 A neat but minute double star, between the Cup and the Lion's hind- feet ; and exactly 8 due N. of 8 Crateris : a ray projected from 8 Crateris to B Leonis passes over it at nearly one-quarter of the distance. A 8J, and B 9, both bluish white ; other small stars in the field. 703. 66 M. LEONIS. (h. 857; H. 2377; &.) CCCCX. m. s. R.A. 11 14 22 Decl. N 13 34-9 Prec. + 3-14 S 19-66 A large elongated nebula, with a bright nucleus, on the Lion's haunch, trending np and sf. This beautiful specimen of perspective lies just 3 S.E. of Leonis. It is preceded at about 73 s by another of a similar shape, which is 65 M., and both are in the field at the same time, under a moderate power, together with several stars. They were pointed out by Mechain to Messier in 1780, and they appeared faint and hazy to him. The sketch on the next page represents their appearance in my in- strument. 298 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. The two preceding of these singular objects were examined by Sir W. Herschel, and his son also ; and the latter says, " The general form of elongated nebulae is elliptic, and their con- densation towards the centre is almost in- variably such as would arise from the super- position of luminous elliptic strata, increas- ing in density towards FIG. 19. 65 and 66 M. PERSEI. the centre> In many cases this increase of density is obviously attended with a diminution of ellipticity, or a nearer approach to the globular form in the central than in the exterior strata." He then supposes the general constitution of those nebulae to be that of oblate spheroidal masses of every degree of flatness from the sphere to the disc, and of every variety in respect of the law of their density, and ellipticity towards the centre. This must appear startling and paradoxical to those who imagine that the forms of these systems are maintained by forces identical with those which determine the form of a fluid mass in rotation ; because, if the nebulae be only clusters of discrete stars, as in the greater number of cases there is every reason to believe them to be, no pressure can be propagated through them. Consequently, since no general rotation of such a system as one mass can be supposed, Sir John suggests a scheme which he shows is not, under certain conditions, inconsistent with the law of gravitation. " It must rather be conceived," he tells us, " as a quiescent form, comprising within its limits an indefinite multitude of individual constituents, which, for aught we can tell, may be moving one among the other, each animated by its own inherent projectile force, and deflected into an orbit more or less complicated, by the influence of that law of internal gravitation which may result from the compounded attractions of all its parts." [Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. vi. Fig. 54; Phil Trans., 1861, PI. xxvi. Fig. 16; Vogel, Nelelflecken, 1876, PL i. Fig. 5.] 704. 226 $. I. URS^E MAJORIS. (h. 858; H. 2379; h. B. A. 11 14 44 o Becl. N 53 46 '0 Prec. + 3-43 S i"-6 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : RA. n h - i4 m n h - i8 m - 299 " p B ; L ; R ; svmb M r N ;" which means : -" pretty bright ; large ; round; suddenly very much brighter in the middle where there is a resolveable nucleus.'* Engraved, Rosse, woodcut, Phil. Trans. 1861. 705. 5 $. I. LEONIS. (h. 873 ; H. 2396 ; &.) b. m. s. s. R.A. 11 17 7 I Prec> + i>eci. N 17 ire s 19-71 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " p B ; pS: iB; b M ; r;" which means : " pretty bright ; pretty small ; irregularly round ; bright in the middle ; resolveable." 706. i LEONIS. (2. 1536.) CCCCXI. h. m. s. s. R.A. 11 18 11 Free. + 3' 12 o / M Bed. l^- 11 8'4 S 19-72 Position. Distance. Epoch. H STRUVE, W. 97.0 2.30 1827.28 SMYTH 86-0 2-5 1843-38 SECCHI 76-4 ... 2-26 1856-26 DEMBOWSKI 74-9 2^56 1866-10 JEDRZEJEWICZ 66-7 ... 2-69 1878-33 A binary star on the Lion's flank; 7 S.W. of ft Leonis, with which star and it forms a neat scalene triangle, of which it is the southern vertex. A 4, pale yellow; B 7^, light blue. A binary system. 707. 4737 Lac. CABINS. (*h. 4432.) h. m. R.A. 11 18 36 Decl. S 64 21-3 Free. + 2-55 S io-7q Position. Distance. Epoch. o n HERSCHEL, J. 288.5 ... 2.37 ... . 1836-27 SANTIAGO OBS. 202.2 ... 4.5 ... 1850-28 A double star. A 6 ; B 8. A considerable change of angle and distance would seem to have taken place, but no other observations are known to me. 300 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 708. 219 1$. I. URS^J MAJORIS. (h. 881; H. 2404; &.) CCCCXII. h. m. R.A. 11 18 44 o Decl. N 39 21 "8 Free. + 3-27 S 19-73 A bright-class nebula, before the animal's left hind-leg, nearly in a line with 4 telescopic stars to the S. from the 9 th to the II th mags. two of which precede, and two follow ; the latter are the smallest and by far the nearest. It is small/ round, and lucid white; and H. says it is resolveable. Assuredly it is most wonderful that this object apparently about 40" or 50" in diameter should present a remote universe ; yet the resolveability implies the existence of an immense number of stars at a proximity apparently much greater than those in our own Via Lactea. Indeed it has been shown that clustering collections of stars may easily contain upwards of 50,000 of them ! This nebula is nearly in mid-distance between c Ursse Majoris and a Leonis, and exactly between Flamsteed's 55 and 57 Urcse Majoris. [" A faint nebula in 7^ in refractor." rodie.] 709. y CRATERIS. CCCCXIII. h. m. s. s. R.A. 11 19 23 o Decl. S 17 4-7 Free. + 2-99 S 19-74 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // SMYTH 102-5 ... 3 ... 1838-26 STONE, 0. 98-3 ... 5-1 ... 1877-21 A close double star, in the centre of the Goblet, and 3 S.S.E. of 6", the present lucida. A 4, bright white; B [10], grey, a star of the n th mag. following nearly on the parallel, in the line of A and B, at about 25 s ; and the 8th mag. star mentioned by Piazzi, Note 62, Hora XL, is at H distance in the np. This fine but delicate object, erroneously lettered x in the Palermo Catalogue, was discovered by H. in his 2O ft Sweeps: the acolyte was sufficiently visible in my telescope for the rock-crystal, or for exact estimation, but was utterly " obnubilated" under the slightest artificial light. 710. 131 y. I. CRATERIS. (h. 886; H. 2411; .&.) h. R.A. 11 19 28 Decl. S 9 11 -7 Prec. + 3-03 s 19-75 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : E.A. n h - i8 m ---n h - 2i m - 301 " p B ; L ; E 0+ ; gb M " which means : " pretty bright ; large ; ex- tended in the direction of the meridian or thereabouts ; gradually brighter in the middle." 711. 194 $. I. URS^J MAJOBIS. (h. 887; H. 2413; &.) CCCCXIV. h. r m. s. R.A. 11 20 6 Decl. N 44 11 '5 Free. + 3-30 S 19-75 A large elongated nebula, between the Greater Bear's hind knees, with two minute stars about twice as far to the S. of it, as they are from each other. This nebula is pale white, and brightish towards the centre, and its axis of extension is preceded by star-dust; but it presents an ill-defined surface, and has the appearance of a flat stratum seen obliquely. About Ursse. 712. 481 Dunlop CENTAURI. (h. 3342; H. 2418.) R.A. 11 20 23 c Decl, S 42 37'7 Free. + 2-86 S 19-76 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: ' Cl ; c L ; p R i ; 1C; st 10 . . . 1 4 ;" which means : " a cluster ; con- siderably large ; pretty rich ; little compressed ; the component stars vary from the i o th to the 1 4 th magnitudes." 713. 262 y. I. MUSCLE. (h. 890; H. 2420) B.A. 11 21 7 Free, + 3-62 Decl. N 67 11'6 | S 19-77 A nebula thus described in Sir J, Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " c B ; S ; i R ; spmb MN ;" which means : " considerably bright ; hinall ; irregularly round ; suddenly pretty much brighter in the middle where there is a nucleus." 302 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 714. 83 LEONIS. (2. 1540.) CCCCXV. h. m. 8. 8. R.A. 11 21 13 Prec. + 3.09 o / // Decl. N 3 36-7 S 1977 Position. Distance. Epoch. o n HERSCHEL, W. 144.9 ... 2 9- .-. 1780-27 HERSCHEL, J.,and SOUTH 151-1 ... 29-5 1821.20 STRUVE, W 150-0 ... 29.5 1832-71 SMYTH 150-8 ... 29-8 ... 1839-22 MAIN 149-3 ... 29.9 ... 1862-25 JEDRZEJEWICZ 150-5 ... 29.5 ... 1878-80 A neat double star, on Leo's right hind-leg, closely np r Leonis, which lies 21 E.S.E. of a. A 8, silvery white; B 9, pale rose-tint. A com- parison of the several measures, while it shows the distance to be stationary, does not confirm the suspected direct change in the orbital angle. The difference, therefore, between 1$. and recent observers must be attributed to instrumental error. The object is of very easy measurement, and therefore its fixity may be deemed to be established. 715. 246 $. I. URS^J MAJORIS. (h. 892; H. 2421; .) h. m. s. . s. HA. 11 21 16 o Decl. N 57 29 2 Prec. + 3-43 S 19-77 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; p L ; E ;" which means : " considerably bright ; pretty large ; extended." 716. 247 $. I. TTRS^E MAJORIS. (h. 896; H. 2425; h. m. s. R.A. 11 22 28 Decl. N 59 9 3 Prec. + 3-44 S 19-80 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " p B ; p S ; vl E 80 + ; p gb M ; S st sf nr ;" which means : " pretty bright ; pretty small ; very slightly elongated in the direction of about 80 with the meridian ; pretty gradually brighter in the middle ; there is a small star on the sf side, near." B. A. n h - 2i m - 25 m. 303 717. 57 URS^J MAJORIS. (2. 1543.) b. m. 3. 8. R.A. 11 23 9 Prec. + 3^6 o / n Decl. N 39 56-5 ," S 19-80 Position. Distance. Epoch. o ff )UTH IO 3 5-86 1825-25 "RUVE, W. 1 0-7. ___... 5-3 1831-9! iITTH 9-9 .,. 5-9 1835.42 XJCHI 6-5 5.16 1857-89 DBNHAM 7- T 5.4^ 1878-42 CCCCXVI. A neat double star, on the Bear's left hind-leg, nearly midway on a line produced between 6 Ursse Hajoris and a Leonis. A 6, lucid white ; B 9, violet. This is a beautiful object. A slight orbital change was inferred, [and this is confirmed by recent observations]. Another remark is called for : I$L says that the small star is " a red point without sensible magnitude;" and S., upwards of half a century afterwards, rated it of the 10 th lustre, as shown by his 7 ft telescope. In the summer of 1835 it was very distinct, being a bright 9 th size, bearing illumination admirably. Is it variable 1 718, 81 P. XI. C h. m. . B.A. 11 23 16 Decl. S 42 4-1 Position. HEESCHEL, J. 166.9 JENTATJBI. Prec. + 2-86 n STfi'Ro Distance. Epoch. // 12.9 ... 1835-26 A double star, A 6 ; B 8. 719- 91 P. XI. LEONIS. (2. 3072.) h. m. s. s. R.A. 11 25 15 Prec. + 3-05 o f Pf Decl. 8 6 6-7 S 19-8^ Position. Distance. EI n STRUVE, W 33 1 8 9-3 18 SMYTH 330-2 9-5 -. 18 STONE, O. 328 -7 9-4 18 BURNHAM 330-4 9-5 18 CCCCXVIII. A fine but very delicate double star, in a barren field, under the Lion's hind-paw ; it lies S. of a line from 17 Yirginis to a Hydrse, and one-fourth of the way, where it is also two-thirds of the distance between ft Leonis 304 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. and 6 Crateris. A 8, creamy white ; B 1 1 , greenish, and rather more difficult under illumination than its magnitude quite warrants. 720. 88 LEONIS. (2. 1547.) CCCCXIX. s. Free. + 3-13 S 19-84 h. m. s. B.A. 11 26 5 Decl. N 14 58-8 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHKL, W. 317-5 14-6 1782-11 STRUVE, W. 319-9 15-3 1829.02 SMYTH 319-8 14-9 1835-38 MAIN 320-5 14-7 ... 1861-33 JEDRZEJEWICZ 323-8 15-3 1878.31 A neat double star, on Leo's flank, nearly midway between /3 and 0. A 7, topaz yellow; B 9, pale lilac; a third star of the io th mag. follows in the sf quadrant. This is a good object, although it rather weakens under illumination. [According to Struve both stars are endowed with a common proper motion.] 721. 221 $. I. UBS^l MAJOBIS. (h. 908 ; H. 2443 ; .) h. R. A. 11 26 26 Decl. 3ST 53 40'7 Free. + 3-34 S 19-84 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " p B ; v L ; R ; vgl b M ;" which means : " pretty bright ; very large ; round ; very gradually less bright in the middle." 722. 17 CBATEBIS. CCCCXX. h. m. s. K. A. 11 26 49 o Decl. S 28 39-6 Free. + 2-96 S 19-85 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL,W. 205.5 ... 9.7 ... 1783-03 SMYTH 207.8 ... 10.1 ... 1833-21 HERSCHEL, J. 30-2 ... 8-9 ... 1835-11 WROTTESLEY 211.4 8-8 ... 1857-29 STONE, 0. 31.3 ... 8-7 ... 1877-10 A neat double star, of which A is 5^, lucid white; and B 7, violet R A. 305 tint. This object is situated in the far S., about 15 S. by E. of b Crateris, its lucida; find there it is also pointed to by a ray from a Virginis through a in the Raven's beak. Though on Hydra's back, it is in the Crater's boundary, and albeit Bayer's stars in that asterism do not exceed n, Flamsteed numbered it as above, in the British Catalogue, having carried his numeration up to 31. The observations are as coincident as can be expected, under the variable refractions with which the place of this star is troubled. Now had not B been physically connected with A, it seems clear that their situations regarding each other ought to have varied in 40 years owing to proper motion. Even Baily's reduced value, although it would let the position alone, would have increased the distance to 15-7". [Magnitudes much more nearly equal than stated by Smyth, according to Sir J. Herschel at the Cape, 1835, Webb, 1852, and Lord Wrottesley, I857-] 723. 222 ^. I. URS^J MAJOBIS. (h. 911; H. 2447; h. m. s. R.A. 11 27 42 Decl. N 53 44' 3 Free, -f 3-33 S 19-86 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " p B ; p L ; 1 E o + ; g b M ; * 1 2 nr ; " which means : " pretty bright ; pretty large ; slightly elongated in the direction of the meridian or there- abouts ; gradually brighter in the middle ; there is a 1 2 th mag, star near." 724. 00 LEONIS. (S. 1552.) CCCCXXI. R.A. 11 28 59 Decl. N 17 24-4 SMYTH SECCHI Position. o AB 209-1 AC 233.9 ( AB 214.1 1 A C 234.5 Free. + 3-13 Q 19-87 Epoch. Distance. 3-5 I 58.8! 1835-38 3-5 1 63-3 5 1865.33 A triple star in the root of Leo's tail, infra eductionem caudce, where it will be found 4 W.N.W. of (3 Leonis, nearly on the line shot from that star towards d Leonis. A 6, silvery white ; B 71, purplish ; C 9^, pale red. This is a fine object. [" A B, probably binary : in A C, rectilinear motion." Gledhill.~] 306 A Cyele of Celestial Objects. 725. 287 $. I. DRACONIS. (h. 914; H. 2452.) h. R.A. 11 29 32 Deel. N 71 8-5 Free. + 3'6o S 19-88 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " p B ; L ; m E 130-4 ; m b M ; " which means : " pretty bright ; large ; much extended in the direction of 130-4 with the meridian; much brighter in the middle." 726. Ill P. XI. UBS^J MAJOBIS. (2. 1555.) CCCCXXII. li. m. s. R.A. 11 30 30 Decl. N 28 23 '5 Free. + 3-17 S 19-89 Position. Distance. Epoch. o / STRUVE, W. AB 339-3 ... 1-25 ... 1829-12 SMYTH ( AB 340-1 -4 j 1834-31 \ A C 145.0 ,.. 17 ) SECCHI A B 339-0 ... 080 ... 1855.95 ENGELMANN AC 142.4 13-4 ... 1865.27 DOBERCK A B 337.1 ... 0.71 -. 1877.33 A fine and delicate triple star, under the left hind-leg of Ursa. A 6, and B 7, both pale blue ; C [12], plum colour. Here a typographical error has crept into H/s first series of y tt measures, 1 1 1 Piazzi being designated 3. At a distance in the sf is the star mentioned in the Palermo Catalogue : "Alia 8* magnitud. sequitur 57" temporis, 20" circiter ad austrum." It is situated in a very vacant space to the eye, about 8 from 8 Leonis, in a N.N.E. direction towards f Ursse Majoris ; but, to the powerful reflectors now in use, is in a very ocean of nebulae. 727. 289 Dunlop CBNTAUBI. (h. 3352 ; H. 2468.) h. m. s. R. A. 11 31 4 o Decl. S 60 59-4 Prec. + 2-76 H S 19-90 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " Cl ; p L ; p Bi ; p C ; st 8 . . . 1 3 ; " which means : " a cluster ; pretty large ; pretty rich ; pretty condensed ; the component stars range from the 8 th to the 13 th magnitudes." R A, nh. 29- n h - 33^- 307 728. 284 B. UBS^S MAJOBIS. (2. 1559.) B.A. b. m. s. 11 32 39 Free. + 3-46 o / // Decl. N 64 57-1 S 19-91 Position. Distance. Epoch. o H STBUVE, W. 322.7 2-05 ... 1831.50 MAIN 318.6 2.38 ... 1866-53 A double star. A 7, white ; B 8, white* 729. 126 P. XI. VIBGINIS. (2, 1560.) CCCCXXIII. h. m. s, s. B.A. 11 32 47 c Decl. S 1 49-6 Free. + 3-06 S 19-92 Position. Distance. Epoch. STBDVE, W. 280.5 - 5-i 1831.58 SMYTH 280-9 5 . 1833-27 STONE, O. 280-5 ... 5*i ... 1878-96 A fine but very delicate double star, between Leo's hind-paw and the Virgin's wing. A 7, pale orange ; B 12, reddish, with a distant dull star in the sf. This beautiful object, far too delicate for a small in- strument, was discovered by 2. This star may be fished up about 5 S.S.~W. of (3 Virginis. 730. 290 B. UBS^I MAJOBIS. (2. 1561.) b. m, s. B.A. 11 33 2 Decl. N 45 43 '1 Free. + 3-25 S 19-92 Position. Distance. Epoch. STBUVE, W. 266.0 ... 10.4 1831-68 * IBC^ ::: ltl\ - "** A double star. A 6, yellowish white ; B % ash. X 2 308 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 731. ANTLI^E. (*h. 4463.) h. m. s. R.A. 11 35 4 o Decl. S 32 58-0 Free. + 2-96 n S 19-94 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J. 248-3 ... 2| est. ... 1835-09 A double star. A 6, yellow; B 8. Sir J. Herschel calls this " fine star," but he gives no micrometrical measures of its distance. 732. 21 $. I. LEONIS. (h. 943 ; H. 2499 ; &.) h. m. s. R.A. 11 35 19 o Decl. N 12 4-9 Prec. + 3*10 // S 19-94 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; L ; v 1 E ; " which means : " bright ; large ; very little extended." 733. 94 y. I. URS^I MAJORIS. (h. 945; H. 2501; ,) CCCCXXIV. h. m. s. R.A. 11 35 27 o Decl. N 37 9' 4 Prec. + 3-18 // S 19-94 A nebula, at the back of the Bear's hind-leg, of a pale white tint. It is elliptical, and though large, is so faint as not to be readily made out, till the equatorial clock fixes the telescope upon it, when it rises to view, lying slightly across the parallel, with a following star. The space around- is apparently blank and starless. IjjL and H. contradict one another as to the direction in which the elongation shows itself. The former says N. to S. ; the latter, " in the parallel." 734. 201 $. I. TJRS.E MAJORIS. (H. 2545.) h. R.A. 11 40 32 Decl. N 48 6'0 Prec. + 3-20 - - S 19-98 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "B; L; mE 25 + ;" which means: "bright; large; much extended in the direction of about 2 5 with the meridian." Rumker's R. A. is less by 14". R A. ii 11 - 35*1. _ nh. 43 m. 309 735. 120 $. I. CRATERIS. (h. 979, 336O ; H. 2554; h. m. R.A. 11 41 28 Decl. S 16 14'9 Free. + 3-04 // S 19-99 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "pB; L ; i R ; vgpmbM;" which means : " pretty bright ; large ; irregularly round ; very gradually pretty much brighter in the middle." 736. 248 $. I. URS^E MAJORIS. (h. 983 ; H. 2560 ; h. B.A. 11 42 56 o Decl. N 60 1-3 Free. + 3-25 8 19-99 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; p L ; i R ; pgmbM; pof2;" which means : " bright ; pretty large ; irregularly round ; pretty gradually much brighter in the middle ; the preceding of 2 nebulae." The other nebula here spoken of follows at a distance of 1 1 8 , and about i' to the N. It is described as " pretty faint ; pretty large ; very little extended ; gradually brighter in the middle." 737. 1573 2. DRACONIS. h. m. s. R.A. 11 43 11 Decl. N 67 56-0 Free. + 3-36 H S 20-00 Position. Distance. Epoch. c STRUVE, W. l 77-9 ... n*i ... 1832-71 MAIN 177-2 ... 1 1-3 ... 1864.45 A double star. A 7, white ; B 8, white. 738. 228 $. I. URS^l MAJORIS. (h. 985; H. 2564; .) h. m. R.A. 11 43 22 c Decl. N 56 41 "6 Free, -h 3-22 // S 20-00 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "B; pL; IE; svmbM;" which means : " bright ; pretty large ; little extended ; suddenly very much brighter in the middle." 310 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 739. 82 $. I. ITRS^E MAJOBIS. (h. 988; H. 2566; .) R.A. 11 43 26 o Decl. W 27 38'3 Free. + 3' 12 // S 20-00 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " B ; p L ; vl E o+ ; b M N ; " which means : " bright ; pretty large ; a very little extended in about the direction of the meridian ; brighter in the middle where there is a nucleus." 740. /B LEONIS. CCCCXXV. /3 LEONIS. B.A. Decl. h. m. 11 43 N 15 s. 27 11-2 Free. + S s. 3-10 19-99 SMYTH Position. Distance. o n 114 ... 298 Epoch. I833-47 A Nautical Almanac star, with several companions, on the switch of Leo's tail. A 2j, bluish; B 8, dull red; preceded by a 7* magnitude star in the np. [Knott's account of the companions of A is hopelessly at variance with Smyth's. Knott finds : A 2-|, bluish ;B8;Cio;D7;Ei2;Fn; with angles and distances as follows : o / // TAB 206-2 ... 4 42 1 .| A C 186-9 ... ii 30 I KNOTT -{ AD 201-6 ... 19 30 }- 1864-37 | AE 116.1 ... 5 3 [_ AF 120 est. ... 10 est. J If Knott's E is identical with Smyth's B there is an enormous dis- crepancy in the estimates of magnitude. On the other hand, if Knott's B is identical with Smyth's B there is an enormous discrepancy in angle and some in distance. However, in a letter to Fletcher dated June 6, 1864, Smyth states: "It seems that by some stupidity or other I may have read the angle of position short by a quadrant, for adding 90 will place it sufficiently near." [Burnham has found another companion in Pos. 345; Dist. 77"; Epoch 1878-24. The same observer has also discovered that Knott's D is a close double: Pos. 337; Dist. 1-52"; Epoch 1878-21 ; Mags. 6| and n.] This star is named Denebola, from the Arabian dhanab-al-asad, the lion's tail. A line from Procyon through a Leonis passes 0, and over ft E,A. n h - 43 m nt- 47^. 311 Leonis, the latter being about 25 from a ; or, for eye measurement in aligning, half as far from a, as the latter is from Procyon. If seeking it from the E., drop a line from 77 Ursse Majoris, lead it through Cor Caroli, and extend it about double the distance between those two stars into the S.W. The brackish rhymes point out a nearly equilateral figure, thus : From Deneb, in the Lion's tail, to Spica draw a line, Then will these two with Arcturus a bright triangle shine. 741. 3365 h. CENTAURI. (H. 2581.) h. m. s. K.A. 11 44 51 o Decl. S 56 34-1 Free. + 2-93 S 20-01 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: ''O> -J S; R; blue; =*7m; i5s=d;" which means: " a planetary nebula ; remarkable ; small ; round ; blue ; resembles a 7 th mag. star ; diameter i 5 S of R.A." 742. 259 $. I. CRATERIS. (h. 2366 ; H. 2586.) h. m. s. B.A. 11 45 28 Decl. S 28 13-1 Prec. + 3-02 S 20-01 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 :~ " B ; p L ; IE; gmb M ; r ; v s * sp inv ; " which means : " bright ; pretty large ; little extended ; gradually much brighter in the middle ; resolveable ; there is a very small star involved on the sp side." 743. 203 y. I. ITIIS^E MAJORIS. (h. 1002; H. 2597; .) h. m. s. s. R.A. 11 47 4 c Decl. N 44 44 "4 Prec. + 3-15 // S 20-02 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; v L ; R ; b M p B N; er ; " which means : " bright ; very large ; round ; brighter in the middle where it exhibits a pretty bright nucleus ; easily resolveable." Engraved, Rosse, woodcut, Phil. Trans., 1861. 312 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 744. 170 P. XI. LEONIS. h. m. s. B.A. 11 47 6 Decl. 16 3-2 Position. o HERSCHEL, W. 19-2 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 14-1 SMYTH 13-4 STONE, 0. 14-6 Free. + 3-10 S 20-02 Distance. .. 37-2 35-Q 39'4 CCCCXXVII. Epoch. 1782-09 1823.28 1832-99 1879.34 A double star, in the brush of Leo's tail, and following /3 at about i to the N.E. A 7^, pearl white ; B 9^, livid. 745. 173 $. I. URS^E MAJOBIS. (h. 1005; 2600; &. CCCCXXVIII. h. m. s. B A. 11 47 12 Decl. N 37 36 '2 Free. + 3-13 S 20-02 A bright-class nebula, of a pale white tint, with a central blaze, between the Bear's hind-legs and the Hounds. When seen by strong moonlight, it looks like a star in a burr ; but in dark nights has a very large apparent diameter [4' by 3" at Parsonstown]. Its site is known by glancing from 77 Ursse Majoris, at the tip of the Greater Bear's tail, towards a Leonis, and it is passed at rather less than half the distance. But the immediate vicinity is very poor to the unassisted eye. 746. /3 CBATEBIS. (*h. 4478.) B.A. 11 47 22 Decl. S 33 18 Position. HERSCHEL, J. HERSCHEL, J. STONE, O. 339' 6 342.2 344-6 Prec. + 3-01 S 20-03 Distance. Epoch. 2-03 ... 1835-85 not stated ... 1838-09 1-98 A double star. AS; 65. The above and some other angles by Sir J. Herschel which I do not give imply an increase of angle, though the intervals of time are too short to be very conclusive. E.A. u h - 47 m - --n h - 48- 313 747. 251 $. I. URS^E MAJORIS. (h. 1006; H. 2602; h. m. s. 3. R.A. 11 47 26 o Decl. N 61 16-8 Free. + 3-21 // S 20-03 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "B; pL; gmbM; r; *f;" which means: -"bright; pretty large; round ; gradually much brighter in the middle ; resolveable ; a star follows." Rumker and D' Arrest say that the star precedes. 748. 202 I. I. TJRS^E MAJORIS. (h. 1009 ; H. 2604; h. R.A. 11 47 56 o Decl. N 48 28 Free. -f 3-15 // S 20-03 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; p L ; pm E ; vgb M ; " which means : " considerably bright ; pretty large ; pretty much extended ; very gradually brighter in the middle." 749. 45 $. V. URS^J MAJORIS. (h. 1011; H. 2606; &.) CCCCXXX. h. m. s. R.A. 11 48 4 c Decl. N 53 57 '0 Free. -|- 3-18 n S 20-03 A large pale-white nebula, on the Bear's right haunch, about ij S. of y. It has a peculiar appearance in the field, from there being a coarse small double star to the N. of it, and from its being followed by a vertical line of 5 equidistant telescopic stellar attendants. This object is fine, but, in my instrument, faintish; it brightens towards the middle; and 1$. says there is, in that part, an unconnected star, the which I cannot make out. [But Brodie " glimpsed" it clearly with 8J in refractor. " It precedes the nebula, say 2' or 3' of arc/'] From every inference this nebula is a vast and remote globular cluster of worlds, for H. assures us it is actually resolveable. By its blazing towards the centre, proof is afforded that the stars are more condensed there than round its margin, an obvious indication of a clustering power directed from all parts towards the middle of the spherical group. In other words, the whole appearance affords presumptive evidence of a wonderful physical fact, the actual existence of a central force. [Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1861, PI. xxvi. Fig. 17.] 314 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 750. 349 Dunlop CENTATTRI. (h, 3369 ; H. 2614.) R.A. 11 48 68 o Decl. S 55 6-4 Prec. - 2-98 20-03 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "Cl; pL; pRi; gplmbM; st 13;" which means: "a cluster; pretty large ; pretty rich ; gradually pretty much brighter in the middle ; the stars are of mag. 13." The " 1" in the 4 th member of the above abbre- viated sentence appears to have been inserted by mistake. 751. 67 $. I. CRATEBIS. (h. 3370 ; H. 2616 ; .) h. m. s. B.A. 11 49 3 c Decl. S 13 21-5 Prec. -f 3-06 // S 20-03 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; p L ; i R ; gmb M ; A 2 st ;" which means : " considerably bright ; pretty large ; irregularly round ; gradually much brighter in the middle ; forms a triangle with 2 stars." 752. 65 URS^E MAJORIS. (2. 1579; 20 App. I.) CCCCXXXI. h. m. s. s. Prec. + 3'i5 Decl. N 47 5'4 R.A. 11 49 23 S 20-03 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL.W. if * s6 ' 3 - * { ... 1782-89 ( A C 112-3 ... 60-0 } SMYTH j * 35-8 ... 3*1 ... r837 . 39 ( A C 115-0 ... 63-5 ) MAIN AC 113-2 ... 62-9 ... 1866-53 JEDKZEJEWICZ S AB 3 6 '9 " 3 8 { 1877-44 (AC 113-9 6 3' ' A triple star, on the Bear's left thigh. A 7, bright white ; B 9^, pale purple; C 7, white. The various measures hitherto taken indicate fixity. The magnitude which I have assigned, on mature comparison, to B, does not altogether quadrate with IjjL's description of its being a mere point, which would hardly be suspected. It may be variable; and I have reason also to think C is. Probably all three are physically con- nected, in which case they will partake of the slow proper motions of A. R. A. u h - 48 lib- 5401. 315 There is therefore reasonable ground for supposing that this object will increase in interest. It is easily fished up by carrying a ray from the Pole-star, between K and A. Draconis, through y Ursse Majoris, and 7 S. of it, where it will meet a cross line from \(f to TJ. [Or it may be said to be 2 sf X-] 753. 62 1$. IV. URSJE MAJORIS. (h. 1017; H 2620; &.) CCCCXXXII. h. m. *. R.A. 11 50 41 Decl. N 55 44 '1 Free. + 3-16 // S 20-04 A planetary nebula, in a barren field, on the Bear's hind-quarter. It is small, and uniformly of a pale bluish-white colour, but exceedingly well-defined, without the haziness mentioned by H. in Phil. Trans., 1833, (in which it is No. 1017); but I certainly had a splendid night for the examination, with the instrument in capital working order. There is a lilac-tinted io th magnitude star on its S. vertical. It is only about i| N. by E. of y Ursse Majoris. ["There is another nebula about 30' to the N. of this one." Brodie. But I cannot feel sure whether Brodie refers to H. 2634 or H. 2637. Both follow the present object about 2 m and both are 20' to the N.] 754. 223 %I. I. URS^I MAJORIS. (h. 1047; H. 2660; &.) h. m. s. s. R.A. 11 53 40 Decl. N 51 34-2 Free. + 3-12 // S 20-05 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; c L ; m E 160+ ; vsvmb MBN ;" which means : " very bright ; considerably large ; much extended in the direction of about 160 with the meridian ; very suddenly very much brighter in the middle where there is a bright nucleus." 755. 121 $. I. VIRGINIS. (h. 1048; H. 2663; .) h. m. R.A. 11 54 44 o Decl. S 29-1 Prec. + 3-07 S 20-05 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; L ; vl E ; psmb M ; B st nr ;" which means : " considerably bright ; large ; very little elongated ; pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle ; there is a bright star near." 316 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 756. 253 $ . I. TJBS.E MAJOBIS. (h. 1050 ; H. 2668.) h. m. B.A. 11 55 45 Decl. N 62 30 '0 Free. -f 3-12 S 20-05 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; v L ; E ;" which means : " very bright ; very large ; extended." But Sir J. Herschel's own account is very different from his father's, being as follows : " p B ; 25" ; R ;" = " pretty bright ; 25" in diameter ; rpund." D' Arrest and Schultz however both agree with Sir William Herschel, and as the places of all 4 tally, Sir J. Herschel must have viewed the object under some specially unfavourable conditions. 757. 252 $. I. UBS^E MAJOBIS. (h. 1054; H. 2672.) h. m. s. s. K.A. 11 56 32 Decl. N 62 44-8 Free. 4- 3-12 S 20-05 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : - " B ; c L ; R ; g, psvmb M r N ;" which means : " bright ; considerably large ; round ; at first gradually, then suddenly very much brighter in the middle where there is a round nucleus." 758. 174 $. I. COHOE BERENICIS. (h. 1066 ; H. 2687; h. m. B.A. 11 58 25 o Free. + 3-08 Decl. N 32 30'4 S 20-06 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "pB; vL; mE97; vgb M ;" which means: "pretty bright; very large; much extended in the direction of 97 with the meridian; very gradually brighter in the middle." 759. 2 COM^J BEBENICIS. (S. 1596.) CCCCXXXIII h. m. s. R.A. 11 58 39 o Decl. N 22 4'5 Free. + 3-08 // S 20-06 55 m * l2 ^' m< 317 Position. Distance. Epoch. HEESCHEL, W. 242-3 ... 4-00+ ... 1782-30 STRUVE, W. 239-9 ... 3-82 ... 1837-28 SMYTH 239-9 ... 3-6 ... I 839-37 GLEDHILL 239-8 ... 3-6 ... 1874-30 A neat double star just over the Lion's tail ; and nearly mid-way between its own lucida and /3 Leonis, but preceding the imaginary line so produced. A 6, pearly white ; B 7^, lilac tint. This is a beautiful object, and having been rigidly examined, is concluded to have no motion appreciable. My last measures of this star were so satisfactory, that I place the greatest reliance on them. The night was truly superb, and the defini- tion of the objects so exquisite, that they resembled two jewels fixed in the field. Indeed, under the Claude Lorraine illumination, they were admirably sharp and tranquil ; the vision therefore might almost be styled perfect. Under such circumstances, with the instrument in the finest working order, and the eye so turned, by inclining my head, as to have its principal section parallel to the wires, the results could hardly fail of being among the best I ever obtained. [The coincidence of the above measures, extending as they do over 47 years, is very remarkable.] 760. 224 $. I. URS^B MAJOBIS. (H. 2707; B.A. 12 12 Decl. N 50 53-9 Free. + 3-07 // S 20-06 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; p L ; pm E ; vsb M ;" which means : " bright ; pretty large ; pretty much extended ; very suddenly brighter in the middle." 761. 206 $. I. UBS^E MAJOBIS. (H. 2708 r B.A. 12 14 Decl. N 51 7'6 Free. + 3-07 S 20-06 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " B ; c L ; pm E 1 35+ ; lb M ;" which means : " bright ; considerably large; pretty much extended in the direction of about 135 with the meridian ; a little brighter in the middle." "318 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 762. 207 $. I. UBS^E MAJOBIS. (h. 1O81; H. 2711; h. m. . s. B.A. 12 O 24 o Decl. N 48 5'4 Free. + 3-07 S 20-06 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " p B ; v L ; m E 32-0 ;" which means : " pretty bright ; very large ; much extended in the direction of 32 with the meridian." 763. 3918 Brisb. CENTAUBI. (*h. 4495.) h. B.A. 12 O 26 o Decl. 8 32 20*6 Prec. + 3-06 S 20-06 Position. Distance. Epoch. o HERSCHEL, J. 313.8 ... 7-1 ... 1836-21 STONE, O. 315-7 ... 6-7 ... 1877.11 A double star. A 7 ; B 9 J. 764. 3921 Brisb. MUSCLE. (*h. 4498.) h. m. s. B.A. 12 38 o Decl. S 65 5-9 Prec. + 3-04 // S 20-06 Position. Distance. Epoch. o HERSCHEL, J. 58-8 ... 15 est. ... 1835-33 SANTIAGO OBS. 68-0 ... 9.6 ... 1850-28 A double star. A 7 ; B 9. 765. 225 $. I. UBS^E MAJOBIS. (h. 1085 ; H. 2717; h. m. t. . B. A. 12 47 o Decl. N 53 19 '4 Prec. -f 3-07 // S 20-06 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "B; ps; R; bMBrN; *i2sp, v, nr;" which means: "bright; pretty small; round; brighter in the middle where there is a bright round nucleus ; there is a 12 th mag. star on the sp side very near." R. A. I2 h ' O m ' I2 h - 2 m 319 766. 291 Dunlop CBUCIS. (h. 3377; H. 2718.) b. m. s. R.A. 12 1 O Decl. S 60 38-0 Free. + 3-07 // S 20-06 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue, of 1864 : " Cl ; p L ; p C ; i R ; st 10 . . . 14 ;" which means : " a cluster ; pretty large; pretty condensed; irregularly round; the component stars vary from the io th to the 14* magnitude." 767. 195 [. I. UBS^E MAJOBIS. (h. 1088 ; H. 2723 ; ft.) CCCCXXXIV. Prec. R.A. 12 1 8. 24 Decl. N 43 40 '6 S. + 3-07 S 20-06 A bright-class nebula, in a poor field, behind the Greater Bear's left hind-leg, at rather more than one-third of the distance from 6 Ursae Majoris towards ft Leonis, where it is within a degree to the E. by N. of 67 Ursse, a star of 5^ magnitude. It is of a lucid white colour, and narrow, being elongated in the direction of np and sf. In the nf quadrant is a fine wide double star, the individuals of which point exactly to the centre of the nebula, FIG. 20. on a line forming an angle of about 230 with T 95 .I.UBSJS MAJOBIS. the meridian. The annexed was its appearance in the field of view. 768. 33 #. I. VIBGINIS. (h. 1094; H. 2734; ft.) h. m. s. B.A. 12 2 33 Decl. N 10 59-4 Prec. + 3-07 // S 20-06 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " p B ; p L ; m E 1 20 ; b M ; r ;" which means: "pretty bright ; pretty large; much elongated in the direction of 120 with the meridian; brighter in the middle ; resolveable/' 320 769. A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 1603 2. URS^E MAJORIS. h. R.A. 12 m. s. 2 38 Free. + s. 3-07 / ff Decl. N 56 5-0 S 2O-O6 Position. Distance. Epoch. // STRUVE, W. 80-5 ... 22-4 1832.18 DAWES 81-4 ... 22-4 1851-29 MAIN 78-7 ... 22-9 .. 1863.25 A double star. A 7^, white; B 8, white. About midway between y and 6\ h. R.A. 12 m. s. 3 3 770. 263 y. I. DRACONIS. (H. 2738.) s. Free. + 3-03 S 20-05 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; IE; b M ; " which means : " considerably bright ; little extended ; brighter in the middle." Decl. N 69 24 '9 771. 278 $. I. DRACONIS. (h. 11OO ; H. 2742.) s. Free. + 3-00 S 20-05 h. m. s. R.A. 12 3 29 Decl. N 75 30 '7 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " p B ; c L ; R, ; gmb M ; " which means : " pretty bright ; considerably large ; round ; gradually much brighter in the middle." 772. 59 B. VIRGINIS. (2. 1604.) R.A. 12 m. s. 3 46 Decl. S 11 14-0 Position, o Free. + 3-07 S 20-05 Distance. Epoch. // "' 9 { 1831-95 AC 93.1 ... 41-9 A triple star. A 7, white; B 9^.; C 8. In AB there seems to be R. A. i2 h - 2 m - 12^- 4 m - 321 going on a very slow decrease of angle and distance, though Duner doubts this. He says : " La faiblesse de 1'etoile B explique parfaitement les ecarts sans qu'on ait besoin de supposer qu'un changement reel a eu lieu." The motion of C is rectilinear. Duner calculates that the minimum distance of AC, namely 10", will be attained in 2008 A. D. As a telescopic object this is not very interesting. 773. 196 y. I. CAJNTTM VENATICORTTM. (H. 2745 ; h. m. s. s. H.A. 12 3 54 o Decl. N 44 17 '4 Free. + 3-05 S 20.05 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; p L ; IE; vgb M ; * np ;" which means : " bright ; pretty large ; little extended ; very gradually brighter in the middle ; there is a star on the np side." 774. 169 y. I. CANUM VENATICORUM. (h. 1105; H. 2750; &,) h. B.A. 12 4 25 Decl. N 40 29-4 Prec. + 3-05 S 20-05 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; v L ; vglb M ;" which means : " bright ; very large; very gradually less bright in the middle/' 775. 19 J$. I. COM^E BERENICES, (h. 1106 ; H. 2752 ; h. m. s. R.A. 12 4 27 Decl. N 19 9-7 Prec. + 3-06 S 20-05 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "; vB; pL; R; gbM ; rrr;" which means: "a globular cluster; very bright ; pretty large ; round ; gradually brighter in the middle ; well resolved, so as clearly to be seen to consist of stars." Y 322 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 776. 73 1$. I. COM^I BERENICES, (h. 1110 ; H. 2755 ; h. m. s. s. B.A. 12 4 58 o Decl. N 31 0-9 Prec. -f- 3-06 S 20-05 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: . "B; S; R; pgmbH;" which means: "bright; small; round; pretty gradually much brighter in the middle." 777. 165 $. I. CANUM VENATICORUM. (h. 1111 ; H. 2756 ; &.) R.A. 12 4 58 o Decl. N 40 0'5 Free. + 3-05 // S 20-05 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; S j R ; vsmb M B N ; p of 2 ; " which means : " very bright ; small ; round ; very suddenly much brighter in the middle where there is a bright nucleus ; the preceding of 2 nebulae." The second nebula mentioned above ( = 642 IJI. II. ; h. 1 1 13 ; H. 2760) is described as " p F ; S ; E ; vgb M ; " which means : " pretty faint ; small; extended; very gradually brighter in the middle." Both are engraved, Phil. Trans., 1861, PI. xxvii. Fig. 2. 778. 11 1$. I. COM^E BERENICES. (H. 2758.) h. m. s. R.A. 12 5 9 o Decl. N 18 57-9 Prec. -f 3-06 H S 20-05 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "B; pL; E; bM;" which means: "bright; pretty large; extended; brighter in the middle." 779. 1606 2. CANUM VENATICORUM. h. m. s. R.A. 12 5 14 o Decl. N 40 30'0 Prec. + 3-06 S 20-05 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, J. 348-4 ... 0-89 ... 1830 87 MADLER 349.3 ... j. 43 ... 1843-21 DEMBOWSKI 346-8 ... i-i ... 1856-46 DUNBR 344.3 ... i. 2 1 ... 1869-38 JEDRZEJEWICZ 337-2 ... 1-17 ... 1880-48 A double star. A 6J, white ; B 7^, white. The angle is certainly RA. T2 h - 8 m - 323 decreasing, and the distance may be increasing. Grledhill says : " Prob- ably binary." 780. 9 $. I. VIKGINIS. (h. 1126 ; H. 2776.) h. m. a. R.A. 12 7 15 Decl. 1 54-5 Free. + 3-07 S 20-05 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "pB; pS; pm E 135+ ; bMN;" which means: "pretty bright; pretty small; pretty much extended in the direction of about. 13 5 with the meridian ; brighter in the middle where there is a nucleus." 781. 15 P. XII. CENTAUBI. h. m. s. B.A. 12 8 17 Decl. S 45 7-0 Position, o HEBSCHEL, J. 247-2 Prec. + 3-10 H S 20-04 Distance. n 4 est. Epoch. 1837-17 A double star. A 5! ; B 7. "Both stars yellow; a very fine object" (Sir J. HerscM) 782. 98 M. VIRGINIS. (h. 1132 ; H 2786 ;&.) CCCCXXXV. h. m. s. R.A. 12 8 34 Decl. N 15 30-5 Prec. -f 3-06 // S 20-04 A fine and large, but rather pale nebula, between Virgo's left wing and Leo's tail ; with the bright star, 6 Comse Berenicis, following in the next field exactly on the parallel. M., who discovered it in 1781, merely registered it as " a nebula without a star, with an extremely faint light ;" but on keeping a fixed gaze it brightens up towards the centre. It is elongated, in the direction of two stars, the one np and the other sf of the object; with another star in the nf quadrant pretty close. It follows /3 Leonis by 6| in the direction of a Bootis; it lies on the outskirts of the vast region of nebulae that adorns the Virgin's wing. [Engraved, Vogel, NebelflecJcen, PI. i. Fig. 7.] Y 2 324 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 783. 1615 2. COM^J BERENICES. h. m. s. s. Free. 3-05 // S 20-04 R.A. 12 8 35 Decl. N 33 24-0 Position. Distance. Epoch. o STRUVE, W. 88-3 ... 26-9 ... 1831-90 MAIN 87-5 ... 26-9 ... 1864.30 A double star. A 6, yellowish ; B 9, ashy. 784. 171 I. I. COM.EJ BEBEinCIS. (h. 1140 ; H. 2796 ; B.A. 12 9 32 o Decl. N 33 48 '5 Free. + 3-04 // S 20-04 A nebula thus described in Sir J. HerscheKs Catalogue of 1864: 11 v B ; S ; R ; psmb M ; " which means : " very bright ; small ; round ; pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle." 785. 8 TJRS^E MAJORIS. CCCCXXXVI. h. m. s. R.A. 12 9 58 Decl. W 57 38-6 Position. BUENHAM 124-1 Free. + g s. 3-00 20-04 Epoch. 1879-30 Distance. 188-6 A fine star suspected of variability with a distant companion, on the Greater Bear's stern-frame. A 3, pale yellow; B 9, ash-coloured, other stars in the following part of the field. This was enrolled by Ptolemy, Ulugh Beigh, Hevelius, La Caille, Bradley, and Piazzi, of the 3 rd magnitude ; but Tycho Brahe" and the Prince of Hesse designate it of the 2 nd . Flamsteed records it of 2^, Pigott of the 4 th , and I have, 011 careful comparison, sometimes thought it too bright for a 3 rd rank. It may therefore prove to be variable from the 2 nd to the 4 th lustre ; and that at long periods. This star, the N.E. one of the brilliant square, is Megrez of the Falmero and other Catalogues; a word abbreviated from the Arabian Maghrez-al-dubb-al-akbar, the root of the Great Bear's tail, since it is " a la naissance de la queue," rather than " in radice caudse," a berth given sometimes to the neighbouring star Alioth, with its little compa- nion, called the Fox, to the nf. e Ursse Majoris was also called Al- hawar, intensely bright, and Al-jaun, the black horse; but its most usual E.A. i2 h - 8 m i2 h - io m - 325 name, Alioth, first appears in the Alphonsine Tables. This being also the reported site of Hevelius's nebula of 1660, and Messier' s No. 40, of 1764, I searched for them by fishing, but found only a couple of small stars lying np and sf, with gleams of others. This group, however, resolved by my telescope, may have been the one seen by those astronomers. [M., though entering this place in his list as if he were actually dealing with a nebula entitled to be termed No. 40, admits that he could find no nebulous object in the place,] 786. 95 $. I. CANUM VENATICORUM. (h. 1146 ; H. 2804; &.) CCCCXXXVII. h. m. s. B.A. 12 10 7 o Decl. N 36 56 '2 Prec. + 3-04 rt S 20*04 A fine white nebula, between the two Hounds. It is in a very poor field, with two small stars preceding, one on each side of the parallel, and a io th magnitude one pretty closely sf. On attentively gazing, especially when the equatorial clock is applied, the nebula comes up very fairly defined, and is of a slightly oval shape., with its elongation from np to sf ; but despite of all my coaxing, I was unable to see the two remarkable nuclei, so beautifully figured by H. in Phil. Trans., 1833, PL vii. Fig. 71. This object is one of a nebulous group located between a Canum Venaticorum and f Ursse Majoris, and bearing W.S.W. from the former, distant about 8. 787. 35 #. I. VIRGINIS. (h. 1148 ; H. 2808 ; .) CCCCXXXVIII. h. m. R. B.A. 12 10 10 c Decl. N 13 46-2 Prec. + 3-06 // S 20-04 A long pale-white nebula, among some telescopic stars, on the upper part of Virgo's left wing ; announced in the preceding verge of the field by a 9 th and a io th magnitude star, closely on each side of the parallel. It is No. 1148 of H.'s Catalogue in Phil. Trans., 1833, where it is erroneously synonymed as 109 IjjL I. ; but it is delicately figured at No. 59 of the engraved illustrations. This is a very curious object, in shape resembling a weaver's shuttle, and lying across the parallel; the upper branch is the faintest, and the centre exhibits a palpable nucleus, which in my instrument brightens at intervals, as the eye rallies. It is an outlier of the vast and wonderful nebulous region passing through L 326 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. Virgo, and is one-third of the way from /3 Leonis to 6 Virginia. [Engraved, Phil Trans., 1833, PI. vi. Fig. 59 ; Vogel, Nebelflecken, PI. i. Fig. 7.] Nearly $ following this, and i to the N., is the nebula 99 M. 788. 2 CANUM VENATICORTJM. (2. 1622.) CCCCXXXIX. h. m. R.A. 12 10 37 Decl. N 41 16-5 Pree. + 3-03 // S 20-03 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL,W. 259-0 ... 12-2 ... 1782-87 SMYTH 259.5 ... 11-3 ... 1839-31 WILSON and SEABBOKE 260-3 ... 11-5 ... 1874.26 A neat double star, near Chara's mouth, and in a barren naked-eye spot, about 9 S.W. of a, and one-third of the distance between that star and b Leonis. A 6, golden yellow ; B 9, smalt blue. This is a very fine object, and notwithstanding the supposed connection between strong colours and motion, its fixity is fully established, for all the recorded observations are eminently coincident. 789. 209 $. I. TJRS^E MAJOR-IS, (h. 1151 ; H. 2811 ; h. m. s. R.A. 12 10 43 Decl. N 48 29 '4 Prec. -f- 3-00 - S 20-03 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "cB; pL; pmE 134-4 ; psb M ; " which means : " considerably bright; pretty large; pretty much extended in the direction of 134-4 with the meridian ; pretty suddenly brighter in the middle." 790. 1625 2. DRACONIS. h. m. s. R.A. 12 11 28 o Decl. N 80 44-0 Prec. + 2-75 // S 20-04 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // STBUVE, W. 218-7 1 4'3 1832-24 MAIN 217-5 ... 14-3 ... 1863-73 A double star. A 7, very white; B f-J, very white. This star is sometimes considered as belonging to Camelopardus. E. A. 12 h< IO m * I2 h< I2 m ' 327 791. 74 $. I. COM^E BEBENICIS. (h. 1168 ; H. 2832 ; .) h. m- s. B.A. 12 12 2 Decl. N 30 13 '0 Free. + 3-03 // S 20-03 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "cB; pL; vlE; smbM; r;" which means: "considerably bright; pretty large; very little extended; suddenly much brighter in the middle; resolveable." 792. 264 $. I. DBACONIS. (h. 1170; H. 2835.) h. m. s. B.A. 12 12 22 Decl. N 71 24-7 Free. 2-86 H S 20-03 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1 864 : " p B ; S ; R ; pgb M ; " which means : " pretty bright ; small ; round ; pretty gradually brighter in the middle." 793. 32 P. XII. VIBGINIS. (2. 1627.) CCCCXL. B.A. 12 12 30 Decl. S 3 20-5 Free. s. 3-07 S 20-03 Position. Distance. Epoch. o n HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 197-0 ... 21-0 ... 1823.33 SMYTH 198-6 ... 20-6 ... 1836-27 MAIN 196-1 ... 19-5 ... 1861-30 JEDBZEJEWICZ 196-1 ... 20.1 ... 1878-32 A fine double star, near the centre of Virgo's right wing, 3 due S. of rj Virginia, and one-third of the way from a Virginis to a Leonis. According to Piazzi they are both ^ magnitudes, though I cannot but say that B is certainly smaller than A. They are both of a silvery white tinge. It was under the following circumstances that my measures in 1836 were made. In September, 1835, I received a letter from M. Caccia- tore, the successor of Fiazzi at Palmero, of which this extract is literally translated : " One important thing I must communicate to you. In the month of May I was observing the stars that have proper motion a labour that has employed me several years. Near the 17* star, 12 th 328 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. hour [not far from No. 32], of Piazzi's Catalogue, I saw another, also of the 7 -8 th magnitude, and noted the approximate distance between them. The weather not having permitted me to observe on the two following nights, it was not till the third night that I saw it again, when it had advanced a good deal, having gone further to the eastward and towards the equator. But clouds obliged me to trust to the following night. Then, up to the end of May, the weather was horrible ; it seemed in Palermo as if winter had returned; heavy rains and impetuous winds succeeded each other, so as to leave no opportunity of attempting any- thing. When, at last, the weather permitted observations at the end of a fortnight, the star was already in the evening twilight, and all my attempts to recover it were fruitless : stars of that magnitude being no longer visible. Meanwhile the estimated movement, in three days, was 10" in R.A., and about a minute, or rather less, towards the N. So slow a motion would make me suspect the situation to be beyond Uranus. I was exceedingly grieved at not being able to follow up so important an examination." Though this notification arrived after the apparition of Virgo had pnssed for the season, I lost no time in advising the astronomical world of its tenour ; and bestirred myself, on the reappearance of the constel- lation, by making reticle diagrams of all the 7^ magnitude objects which I could find hereabouts. My endeavours proved fruitless; and after much good time lost in the search, I became convinced it would not be my fortune to rediscover a planet there. An extract from my letter being read to the Academy of Sciences at Paris, 1 5 th February, 1836, it was printed in the Comptes Rendus of that seance, with this sensible but severe animadversion by M. Arago : " II y a dans cette communication une circonstance que les astro- nomes auront beaucoup de peine a comprendre. Loreque le temps rede- vint favorable a Palerme, a la fin de Mai, 1'etoile mobile n'etait plus visible, dit M. Cacciatore, a cause de la lumiere crepusculaire du soir. L'explication est admissible lorsqu'il s'agit du passage de 1'astre au meridien ; mais deux, mais trois heures apres le coucher du soleil, mais a nuit-close, rien ne pouvait empecher de comparer la planete soup- gonnee aux etoiles voisines, soit avec une machine parallactique, soit, a son defaut, avec le grand cercle azimuthal qui occupe le premier rang parmi les instruments de I'Observatoire de Palerme. II nous parait incon- cevable qu'un observateur du merite de M. Cacciatore, contrarie comme il 1'etait, comme il devait Tetre, de ne pouvoir constater de realite une decouverte aussi capitale, ne se soit pas avis de suivre 1'astre hors du meridien," E.A. i2 h - i2 m i2 h - i m - 329 794. 89 $. I. COM^E BERENICES, (h. 1171; H. 2836 ; R.A. 12 12 33 Decl. N 28 47 3 Prec. + 3'3 // S 20-03 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; S ; E ; vs vmb M N ; " which means : " very bright ; small ; extended ; very suddenly very much brighter in the middle where there is a nucleus." 795. 99 M. VIBGINIS. (h. 1173 ; H. 2838 ; S. Prec. + 3-05 S 20-02 h. m. s. B.A. 12 13 13 Decl. N 15 6-9 One of the Earl of Rosse's " spiral " nebulae. Sir J. Herschel gives the following summary account of it : " !! (H. h.) ; B ; L ; B, ; gb M ; r (L) 3-branched spiral ;" which expands into " very remarkable (observed by Sir W. and Sir J. Herschel) ; bright ; large ; round ; gradually brighter in the middle ; resolveable (large) 3-branched spiral." Smyth says : " Though pale it is well defined in my instrument." i sf 6 Comae Berenicis, a 5 th mag. star and the next considerable star / /3 Leon is, at nearly 7. Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1850, PL xxxv. Fig. 2 ; Lassell, Mem. R.A.S., vol. xxxvi. PI. iv. Fig. 16; Vogel, Nebelflecken, PI. i. Fig. 8. 796. 43 $. V. TTBS^ MAJOBIS. (h. 1175 ; H. 2841 ; .) CCCCXLI- h. m. s. B.A. 12 13 33 c Decl. N 47 54 '5 Prec. + 2-99 // S 20-03 A large white nebula, closely following the haunches of the Greater Bear. It is a noble-sized oval, trending rather from the vertical in a direction np and sf, with a brightish nucleus in its southern portion ; the lateral edges are better defined than the ends. It is preceded by two stars of the io th mag., and followed by two others; and there are also some minute points of light in the field, seen occasionally by glimpses. Its place will be indicated by running a diagonal line across the square of Ursa Major, from a through y, and carrying it 7^ into the S.E., that is, a little less than the distance between those stars. [This object yields a continuous spectrum. Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PL vi. Fig. 55. 330 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 797. 75 $. I. COMJE BEBENICIS. (h. 1185 ; H. 2851 ; b. m. s. s. B.A. 12 14 17 o Decl. N 30 13-7 Free. + 3-02 // S 20-02 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "vB; vL; E 90+ ; mbMN;" which means: "very bright; very large ; extended in the direction of 90 or thereabouts ; much brighter in the middle where there is a nucleus." 798. 90 $. I. COM^l BEBENICIS. (h. 1186 ; H. 2855 ; h. m. B.A. 12 14 33 o Decl. "N 29 53 '6 Prec. 4- 3-02 // S 20-02 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " v B ; p L ; E, ; mb M ; r ; p of 2 ; " which means : " very bright ; pretty large ; round ; much brighter in the middle ; resolveable ; the preceding of 2 nebulae." This is identical with 322 IjJ. II. The other nebula here mentioned (=323 1$. II.; h. 1188; H. 2858) is described as "B; S; R; bM;" which means: "bright; small; round ; bright in the middle." 799. 20 B. CANUM VENATICOBUM. (2. 1632.) h. B.A. 12 14 46 o Decl, N 38 31 '0 Prec. 3-01 /f S 20-01 Position. Distance. Eppch. o // STEUVE, W. 193.4 ... 10 ... 1831-38 BUENHAM 192-2 ... IO-2 ... 1878-32 A double star. A 7, yellow; B 10. 800. 275 IjL I. DBACONIS. (h. 1192 ; H. 2868.) b. m. s. s. B.A. 12 15 26 Decl. N 75 58 "9 Prec. 4- 2-72 H S 2O-OI A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "pB; vS; R; IbM; sstf;" which means: "pretty bright; very small ; round ; a little brighter in the middle ; 3 stars follow." Engraved, D' Arrest, Siderum Nebulosorum, p. 207. E. A. i2 h - i m i2 h - i6 m - 331 801. 61 M. VIBGINIS. (h. 1202 ; H. 2878 ; .) CCCCXLII. h. m. a. B.A. 12 16 18 c Decl. N 55-1 Prec. 4- 3-06 // S 20-00 A large pale-white nebula, between the Virgin's shoulders. This is a well-defined object, but so feeble as to excite surprise that Messier detected it with his 3^ telescope in 1779. Under the best action of my instrument it blazes towards the middle; but in H/s reflector it is faintly seen to be bi-central, the nuclei 90" apart, and lying sp and nf. It is preceded by 4 telescopic stars, and followed by another. It bears about S. by W. from, and is within a degree's distance of 17 Virginis. This object is an outlier of a vast mass of discrete but neighbouring nebulae, the spherical forms of which are indicative of compression. [Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PL vii. Fig. 69; and Phil. Trans., 1 86 1, PL xxvii. Fig. 21, where h. 1196 is a misprint for h. 1202.] 802. 76 1$. I. COM^J BERENICES, (h. 1204; H. 2881; &.) h. m. s. B.A. 12 16 53 c Decl. N 30 30-2 Prec. + 3-02 S 20-00 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " c B ; L ; E 150 + ; sb M ; * n p ; " which means : " considerably bright ; large ; extended in the direction of about 150 with the meridian ; suddenly brighter in the middle ; there is a star on the np side/' 803. 276 $. I. DBACONIS. (h. 1210 ; H. 2888.) h. B.A. 12 16 56 c Decl. N 75 56-0 Prec. + 2-68 S 20-00 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : *'pB; pS; vlE; sbH;" which means: "pretty bright; pretty small ; very little extended ; suddenly brighter in the middle." 332 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 804. 17 VIBGINIS. (2. 1636.) CCCCXLIII. h. m. s. B.A. 12 16 57 o Decl. N 5 55-2 Free. + 3-06 // S 20-00 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, W. 328-3 ... 20-1 ... 1782-10 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 339-6 ... 20-9 ... 1823-20 STRUVE, W. 336-7 ... 19-3 ... 1829-26 WILSON, &c. 336 ... 20-0 ... 1874-26 JEDRZEJEWICZ 336-6 ... 19-8 ... 1878-70 A neat double star, between the Virgin's shoulders ; lying at nearly one-third of the distance from /3 Leonis to a Virginis, and nearly N. of r] Virginis. A 6, light rose tint ; B 9, dusky red. From a difference between the first observations and those of H. and S., the change was suspected to be owing to the proper motions of the large star. But I am inclined to suppose that an error of 10 in the angular position may be imputed to the original entry at Slough, as the measures of comparison would then be pretty coincident for a star of such disproportion. 805. 12 COIOE BERENICES. CCCCXLIV. h. m. s. a. B.A. 12 16 59 o Decl. N 26 27 '5 Prec. + 3-03 // S 20-00 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, W. 163-0 ... 58-9 ... 1783-00 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 168-8 ... 65-9 ... 1821-39 SMYTH 168-2 ... 66-1 ... 1831-28 A bright star, with a distant companion, in the middle of the Tresses ; about i-| S.W. of its lucida, and nearly mid- way between a Canum Venaticorum and /3 Leonis. A 5, straw-coloured yellow ; B 8, rose-red ; a third star of the same magnitude in the sf quadrant. Relative fixity is implied. Berenice's Hair was intruded into the constellated host many ages ago, but was only confirmed between the time of the old 48 asterisms, and the gathering together of some clustered amorphotce, in the sixteenth century; for Ptolemy did not include it as a distinct asterism, but designates it only as TrXoKa/zos- ; and Ulugh Beigh enrols it as an extra of Leo, under the name of al dafiraTi, the tresses. Niebuhr heard it called al-huzmeh at Cairo, the which signifies a bundle of wood or RA. 12*- i6 m - i2 h - 17^. 333 corn ; but the Arabs in general termed it al-kelba, and the Trica of the Alphonsine Tables is recognised as being from rpixes, a head of hair. It was anciently believed that the Tresses had been snatched into the heavens, because Conon the astronomer had so asserted, in order to console the lady for the loss of a lock of her hair, which she had dedicated to Venus, on account of a victory obtained by her husband, Ptolemy Evergetes; but it was Tycho Brahe who first fixed it. Old Thomas Hill, in his Schoole of SMI, 1599, calls these sacred tresses by the homely designation of Berenice's Bush. It is readily found by running an imaginary line from 77 Ursse Majoris, the outer horse of the wain, or tip of the Great Bear's tail, through a Canum Venaticorum, and thence to ft Leonis, in the Lion's tail ; midway between which two last stands this fine though diffused cluster. The numbers have suc- cessively been : Tycho Brahe . . 14 stars. Flamsteed ... 43 stars. Hevelius ... 21 Bode . . . . . 117 806. 100 M. VIBGINIS. (h. 1211; H. 2890; &.) CCCCXLV. h. B.A. 12 17 24 c Decl. W 16 26-0 Free. + 3-04 ^ S 20-00 A round nebula, pearly white, off" the upper part of the Virgin's left wing, and certainly at a great distance from Virgo's ear of corn, where Messier in the Connaissance des Temps placed it : indeed, the true site will be hit upon one -fifth of the way from /3 Leonis towards Arcturus. This is a large but pale object, of little character, though it brightens from its attenuated edges towards the centre; and is therefore proved to be globular. It was discovered by Mechain in 1781, and is accompanied by 4 small stars, at a little distance around it; besides minute points of light in the field, seen by occasional gleams. We are now in the broad grand stratum of nebulae, which lies in a direction almost perpendicular to the Galaxy, and passes from the S., through Virgo, Berenice's Hair, Canes Venatici, and the Great Bear, to the Pole, and beyond. This glorious but most mysterious zone of diffused spots, is an indisputable memorial to all future times, of the unwearied industry and indomitable scientific energy of Sir W. Herschel. Yet has this unrivalled contributor to knowledge been disparagingly described, as a man indulging in "speculations of no great value to astronomy, rather than engage in computations by which the science can really be benefited." Save the mark ! This is said of a philosopher of zeal and application hitherto unequalled: one whose contributions 334 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. to the Philosophical Transactions prove the bold but circumspect grandeur of his conceptions, his consummate mechanical resources, and the exactness of his elaborate calculations. Herschel's labours, however, transcended those of the age in which he was cast, although he gave such animation and bias to sidereal astronomy that his mantle was caught at. [Engraved, Lassell, Mem. R.A.S. vol. xxxvi. PI. iii. Fig. 17.] 807. 292 Dunlop CBUCIS. (h. 3389 ; H. 2912.) h. B.A. 12 18 27 o Decl. S 61 17-2 Free. + 3-26 S 19-99 A cluster thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " Cl ; v B ; v L ; 1C; at 1 2 . . . 14 ;" which means : " a cluster ; very bright ; very large ; little condensed ; the component stars vary from the 12 th to the 14 th magnitudes." 808. 123 y. I. VIBGINIS. (h. 1228. H. 2915 ; B.) h. m. s. K.A. 12 18 40 o Decl. 1ST 5 32-5 Free. + 3-06 S 19-99 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "B; S; *8'9sf3'j" which means: "bright; small; there is a star of mag. 8 J in the sf quadrant, at a distance of 3"." Dreyer states that the true R.A. is i m greater than that here given. 809. 65 1$. I. CO1VLE BEBENICIS. (h. 1231; H. 2917; &.) h. m. B.A. 12 18 50 o Decl. S 18 10-0 Free. + 3' S 19-99 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; L ; B ; vsmb M n ; r ; " which means : " very bright ; large ; round; very suddenly much brighter in the middle to the north [? n an error for N= nucleus] ; barely resolveable." 810. 3O y. I. VIBGINIS. (h. 1232 ; H. 2921 ; &.) h. m. s. s. B.A. 12 18 52 o Decl. N 7 55-7 Free. + 3-06 S 19-92 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 :- E.A. I2 h - lym. _ I2 h. I9 m. 335 "c B; p L; vl E ; gl [should be "b"] smb M ;" which means : " considerably bright ; pretty large ; very little extended ; at first gradually brighter, then suddenly much brighter in the middle/' 811. 166 I. I. CANTTM VENATICORTJM. (h. 1234; H. 2024.) m. s. B.A. 12 19 9 o Decl. N 39 58 '9 Free. + 2-98 S 19-98 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; S ; R ; mb M N ; r ;" which means : " considerably bright ; small ; round ; much brighter in the middle where it exhibits a nucleus." 812. 22 $. I. VIRGINIS. (h. 1235 ; H. 2925.) h. m. s. s. R.A. 12 19 17 Decl. N 12 18 4 Free. + 3-05 S 19-98 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " B ; p s ; R ; gb M ;" which means : " bright ; pretty small ; round.; gradually brighter in the middle," 813. 84 M. VIRGINIS. (h. 1237; H. 2930; &.) h. m. s. R.A. 12 19 29 Decl. N 13 29-9 Free. + 3-04 S 19-98 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : . "vB; pL; R; psbM; r;" which means: "very bright; pretty large; round; pretty suddenly brighter in the middle; scarcely re- solveable." 814. 12 $. I. COJOE BERENICIS. (h. 1239 ; H. 2942 ; &.) h. m. s. R.A. 12 19 38 Decl. N 15 22-3 Free. + 3.04 S 19-98 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " B ; S ; R ; smb M ;" which means : " bright ; small ; round ; suddenly much brighter in the middle." 336 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 815. 85 M. COM^B BERENICES. (h. 1242; H. 2946; 3ft.) h. m. B.A. 12 19 49 o Decl. IT 18 47-9 Free. + 3-03 S 19-98 A bright and rather large nebula brightening in the middle. 1 1 Comae Berenicis, a star of mag. 5, precedes, a little to the S. 816. 277 $. I. DBACONIS. (h. 1247; H. 2948.) h. m. s. B.A. 12 19 55 Decl. N 76 8'0 Free. + 2-61 S 19-98 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; c L ; 1C; psmb M ; " which means : " bright ; considerably large ; little compressed ; pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle." 817. a CBTJCIS. B.A. 12 20 28 o Decl. S 62 29-3 Prec. + 3.27 S 19-98 Position. Distance. Epoch, o // TAB 120-6 ... 5 .6 ... 1835.83 I AC 201-5 ... 90-7 ... 1836-59 HERSCHEL, J. { AD 147 ... 60 est. \ | AE 119 ... 100 est. > ... 1834-22 L AF 105 ... 125 est. J A Nautical Almanac star. A ij; B 2; C 5; D 13; E 14; F 13. 818, 86 M. VIBGINIS. (h. 1253 ; H. 2961; h. m. B.A. 12 20 31 o Decl. N 13 32*9 Prec. + 3-04 S 19-98 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; L ; B, ; gb M N ; r ;" which means : " very bright; large; round; gradually brighter in the middle where it exhibits a nucleus ; scarcely resolveable." E. A. i2 h - i9 m i2 h - 22**' 337 819. 77 $ . I. COM^E BERENICIS. (h. 1258 ; H. 2972 ; &.) h. m. s. E.A. 12 20 58 o Decl. N 31 49-7 Free. -F 2-99 S 19-97 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Hersehers Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; L ; E ; g, vsmb M * ;" which means : " very bright ; large ; ex- tended; at first gradually, then very suddenly brighter in the middle where there is a star." The Decl. is as corrected by Dreyer. 820. 28 a 1$. I. VIBaiNIS. (h. 1274; H. 2991.) h. m. s. 8. B.A. 12 22 5 Decl. 3ST 13 40'8 Prec. -h 3-04 // S 19-96 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "vB; cL; R; pofa;" which means: "very bright; considerably large ; round ; the preceding of 2 nebulae." The second object (=28b 1$. I. ; h. 1275; H. 2994) is mentioned as "B; cL; vlE; r ;" which means : "blight; considerably large ; very little extended ; scarcely resolveable." 821. 91 1$. I. COJOJE BEBENICIS. (h. 1280 ; H. 3001 ; &.) .h. m. s. s. R.A. 12 22 45 c Decl. N 29 13 '5 Prec. -f 3-00 // S 19-96 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; L ; E 90 ; sb M ; " which means : " bright ; large ; elongated in the direction of 90 with the meridian ; suddenly brighter in the middle." 822. 213 $. I. CANUM VENATICORUM. (h.1281; H.3002; h. m. s. B.A. 12 22 45 Decl. N 44 41 "9 Prec. + 2-94 S 19-96 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; c L ; m E 15; rrr ; * 9, 5' ; " which means : " very bright ; considerably large ; much extended in the direction of 1 5 with the meridian; well resolved, clearly seen to consist of stars; there is a 9^ mag. star at a distance of 5'." 838 A -Cycle of -Celestial Objects. 823. 17.C01LE BERENICIS. (2. 21 App. I.) h. m. s. . R.A. 12 23 25 o Decl. W 26 30-4 Prec. -f 3 oo S 1- Position. Distance. Epoch. ~,-J> ' O ff STRUVE,W. 250-6 ... 145-3 ... 1836-43 JEDBZEJEWICZ 250-4 ... 145*4 ... 1877-77 A 4 , white ; B 6, bluish white. B is 96 P. XII. Webb remarks that " the smaller star, by averted vision, seems more surrounded than the other with scattered light/' 824. 161 1$. I. VIBGINIS. (h. 1288 ; H. 3012.) h. m. s. B. B. A. 12 23 25 Decl. N 14 35-1 Prec. + 3-04 19-95 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "pB; pL; iK; bM; r; *8sf2';" which means : " pretty bright; pretty large ; irregularly round ; brighter in the middle ; scarcely re- solveable; there is an 8 th mag. star in the sf quadrant at a distance of 2'." 825. 49 M. VIBGINIS. (h. 1294 ; H. 3021; &.) CCCCXLVII. h. m. B.A. 12 24 8 o Decl. N 8 36-3 Prec. + 3-05 ft S 19-94 A bright, round, and well-defined nebula, on the Virgin's left shoulder ; exactly on the line between 8 Virginis and (3 Leonis, 8, or less than half-way, from the former star. With an eyepiece magnifying 93 times, there are only two telescopic stars in the field, one of which is in the sp and the other in the sf quadrant ; and the nebula has a very pearly aspect. This object was discovered by Oriani in 1771, and registered by Messier as a "faint nebula, not seen without difficulty," with a telescope 3j ft in length. It is a pity that this active and assiduous astronomer could not have been furnished with one of the giant telescopes of the present day. Had he possessed efficient means, his useful and, in its day, unique Catalogue, for which sidereal astronomy must ever remain indebted to him, would no doubt have been greatly augmented. [" Inconsiderable, but beautifully situated between two 6th ma g. stars. Bright open pair. S. " Webb.] K. A. i2 h - 23 m - i2 h - 25 m - 339 826. <5 COBVI. CCCCXLVI. b. m. . . B.A. 12 24 11 o Deel. S 15 54*1 Free, -f 3-10 H S 19-94 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, W 216-0 ... 23.5 ... 1782-87 HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 213-5 2 4' 1823.29 SMYTH 210.9 ... 23-5 ... 1831-34 MAIN 213-6 ... 22-9 ... 1862-31 A fine double star, on the Raven's right wing. A 3, pale yellow ; B 8 J, purple. This object was thus noticed by Piazzi, No. 101, Hora XII. : "Duplex. Socia summe exigua 0-5" temporis prsecedit, paruraper ad austrum." Discordant as the angle of position seems to be, I am more inclined to attribute the differences to instrumental and accidental over- sights, than to orbital movement ; moreover, there is a minus quantity of proper motion imputed to the large star by Piazzi, and the observations at so low an altitude are teased with variable refraction. The Palermo and other Catalogues have dubbed this star Algorab, from the Arabian Al-ghordb, the raven, though the star is less brilliant than /3. Wherefore a, which is usually the brightest star in an asterism, has here less brilliance than /3, y, or 6", and is recorded as Minkdr-cd-ghordb, the raven's beak ; and it is also called Al-khibd, the tent, a name given by some of the Arabs to Corvus. In the Alphonsine Tables the name Algorab is applied to y. The alignment of Algorab is easy. To the W.S.W. of a Virginis two stars of the 3 rd magnitude, and 3 apart, will be seen prolonging the line. These are 8 and y Corvi; 5, the nearest to a Virginis, is 15 from it, and it forms with that star and y Virginis an exact equilateral triangle. 827. y CRUCis. h. m. . R.A. 12 25 3 Decl. S 56 29-6 Prec. + 3-26 S 19-93 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, J. 38-0 ... 120 est. ... 1834-26 A conspicuous star of mag. 2, with a distant companion of mag. 5. " The colour of y Crucis is a clear orange-yellow. Its magnitude has been variously estimated from 1*8 to 2*4 even by the same observer, and it is probable that the brightness of the star really changes by a considerable amount." (Gould.} Z 2 340 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 828. 197 and 198 $. I. CANUM VENATICOBUM. (h. 1306, 13O8; H. 3041, 3042; &.) b. m. s. B.A. 12 25 10 o Decl. N 42 18 '6 Prec. + 2-94 S 19-93 A pair of nebulae. The preceding one is thus described in Sir J. Herschel's General Catalogue of 1864: "B; p S; iR;" and the following one: "v B; v L; m E 130; rr;" which phrases mean re- spectively : " bright ; pretty small ; irregularly round ; " and " very bright; very large; much extended in the direction of 130 with the meridian ; partially resolved, some stars visible." The place given above is D'Arrest's of the preceding nebula : the other follows at a distance of 6 s , and lies 3' 12" to the S. The pair are engraved, Phil. Trans.,. 1861, PL xxvii. Fig. 23. 829. 87 M. VIBGINIS. (h. 1301; H. 3035; &.) b. m. s. B.A. 12 25 15 o Decl. N 12 59-4 Prec. + 3-04 H S 19-93 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; v L ; R ; mb M ; " which means : " very bright ; very large ; round ; much brighter in the middle." 830. 83 #. I. COM^J BEBENICIS. (h. 1307; H. 3043 ; fc.) h. B.A. 12 25 54 o Decl. N 26 23 '1 Prec. + 3-00 S 19-93 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; p L ; R ; vsmb M N ; " which means : " very bright ; pretty large ; round ; very suddenly much brighter in the middle where there is a nucleus." Sir J. Herschel sets against this object the note, " Not found by Lord Rosse when once looked for," yet in the Rosse Catalogue of 1880 it is given as seen on April 3, 1861, and is marked " v B ; R; fades off gradually." 831. 88 M. VIBGINIS. (h 1312 ; H. 3049 ; 2$ .) CCCCXLVIII. h. B A. 12 26 26 o Decl. N 15 19 Prec. + 3-03 // S 19-92 A long elliptical nebula, on the outer side of Virgo's left wing. It is pale-white, and trends in a line bearing np and sf ; and with its R A. i2 n - 25- i2 h - 26*- 341 attendant stars, forms a pretty pageant. The lower or N. part in the inverted field is brighter than the S., a circumstance which, with its spindle figure, opens a large field for conjecture. This is a wonderfully nebulous region, and the diffused matter occu- pies an extensive space, in which several of the finest objects of Messier and the Herschels will readily be picked up by the keen observer in extraordinary proximity. The following diagram exhibits the local disposition of the immediate nebulous neighbours N. of 88 Messier; they being preceded by M. 84, and followed by M. 58, 89, 90, and 91, in the same zone ; thus describing a spot only 2 | from N. to S., and 3 from E. to W., as the micrometer shows it. And it will be convenient FIG. 21. GROUP OF NEBULA itt VIRGO. to keep in mind, that the situation of the extraordinary conglomerate of nebulae and compressed spherical clusters which crowd the Virgin's left wing and shoulder is pretty well pointed out to the practised naked eye by e, 8, y, 77, and ft Virginis forming a semicircle to the E., whilst due N. of the last-mentioned star, (3 Leonis marks the N.W. boundary. Reasoning upon the Herschelian principle, this may reverently be assumed as the thinnest or shallowest part of our firmament, and the vast laboratory of the segregating mechanism by which compression and insulation are ripened in the course of unfathomable ages. The theme, however imaginative, is solemn and sublime. [Engraved, Lassell, Mem. R.A.S., vol. xxxvi. PI. iv. Fig. 20; Vogel, Xebelflecken, 1876, PI. i. Fig. 9.] 342 A Cycle of Celestial Objects, 832. 31 $. I. VIBGINIS. (h. 1329 ; H. 3075.) h. m. s. s. B.A. 12 28 28 o Decl. N 8 18-1 Free. + 3-05 // S 19-90 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; v L ; m E 1 20 + ; psmb M ; L * f ; * 9 p ; " which means : " very bright ; very large ; much extended in the direction of about 120 with the meridian ; pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle ; a large star follows ; a star of mag. 9 precedes." 833. 8 CANTJM VENATICOBUM. (h. 1332 ; H. 3079 ; .) CCCCL. b. m. s. s. B.A. 12 28 34 Decl. JSf 42 57-1 Prec. -f 2-92 S 19-90 Position. Distance. Epoch, o BURNHAM 220-5 ... 276-2 ... 1879-26 A bright star with a distant companion, in the eye of Chara, the southern dog. A 4^, but suspected of variability, pale yellow; B 10, bluish; and there is another star in the sp, nearly on the parallel, at A K.A. 28-5 8 , as well as a very minute one in the nf quadrant. The large star is involved in a nebulous photosphere, as described by H. (Phil. Trans., 1833, No. 1332); but the nebulosity is no further apparent in my instrument than in giving the object an apparent derangement of focal definition. [Dreyer says : " Is probably to be struck out. Not seen as a nebulous star by anybody except h., who seems to have had some doubts on the subject." The Eosse observations also pronounce against the idea of nebulosity, and therefore Smyth's " apparent derangement " seems true in another sense from that in which he used it.] 834, /3 COBVI. CCCXLIX. h. m. s. 8. B.A. 12 28 36 Decl. S 22 47-3 Prec. -f 3-14 H S 19-92 Position. Difference of K. A. Epoch. S !^:L 9 - !!l 1 '88-34 1 AC 306 ... 280 BUENHAM J AB I2 9'7 ... not stated} (AC 2920 ... not stated ) A Nautical Almanac star of the second grade, elected in 1830. It is in the Raven's right claw, and lies nearly midway between the two distant companions, whose position and distance are here estimated. A 2 J, ruddy yellow ; B 7, greenish yellow ; C 8, dull grey. This is a fine E. A. i2 h - 28 m - i2 h - 2^ 343 star, and has unquestionably the precedence of lustre in Corvus, which could hardly have been the case in Bayer's time ; and what is singular, it has no trivial Arabian designation. Ptolemy gave y, or third degree of brightness, to a, /3, y, 8, and ; but Tycho and Hevelius both rated a and of the 4 th magnitude, and ft has latterly been elevated to 2-3. Such discrepancies should be closely watched, for though the low altitude of the asterism may be against precision in this country, it must be recollected that Ptolemy, Ulugh Beigh, Alphonsus, and Piazzi had a smaller South Polar Distance. The comparative lustre of the stars in Corvus, in the year 1796, was ably tabulated by !$., in Phil. Trans., vol. Ixxxvi. p. 468. [Webb in various years found the order of bright- ness to be y b /3 a. The question of the brightness of the bright stars in Corvus was examined in detail by Argelander in the Bonn Obs., vol. vii., and more recently by Gould in the Uranometria Argentina, p. 314 et seq. The discordances in the records are such as to render the variability of some of the stars certain.] Kopa, Corvus, is one of the constellated groups of the southern hemisphere, and though poor, is one of the ancient 48 asterisms. It is immediately to the E. of Crater, and between a Virginis and a Hydrae, but considerably nearer to the former, where it is readily made out by a lozenge of four stars of the 3 rd and 4 th magnitudes. As it contains a part of the body of Hydra, on which the bird rests, it is sometimes designated Hydra et Corvus. It was piously regarded as Noah's raven j but this not being quite satisfactory to the Mosaicists, Columba Noachi was instituted by Royer, in 1679. (See a Hydrse.) The constituent members of Corvus have been thus numbered : Ptolemy .... 7 stars. Hevelius . . . . 10 stars. TychoBrahe" . . 8 Flamsteed ... 9 Kepler .... 7 Bode ..... 61 A long occult line from a Lyrse through a Virginis, and carried about j 5 beyond, enters among the 4 principal and well-known stars of Corvus : Mark in the space along the sky, where Hydra's volumes are, And 'twixt the Cup and Virgin's spike, you'll find the Raven's square. 835. 24 COBLE BERENICES. (2. 1657.) CCCCLI. h. B.A. 12 29 36 Decl. N 18 58-9 Free. -f 3-01 S 19-89 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, W. 273.5 ... 18-4 ... 1781-16 SMYTH 272-1 ... 20-5 ... 1836-38 DUNR 371-1 ... 20-3 ... 1869-41 JEDRZEJEWICZ 271.0 ... 20-0 ... 1877-35 A neat double star, between the Tresses and Virgo's left wing ; lying 344 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. at two-fifths of the distance from Arcturus to Kegulus. A 5^, orange colour ; B 7, emerald tint, the colours very brilliant. 836. 160 $ . I. VIBGINIS. (h. 1339 ; H. 3092 ; h. m. s. B.A. 12 29 50 Decl. S 3 11 Prec. + 3-08 S 19-89 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " v B ; c L ; pm E 63 + ; vsmb M N ;" which means : " very bright ; considerably large ; pretty much elongated in the direction of about 63 with the meridian; very suddenly much brighter in the middle where it exhibits a nucleus." 837. 36 y. I. VIBGINIS. (h. 1343 ; H. 3095 ; &.) h. m. s. B.A, 12 29 54 o Decl. N 12 49-3 Prec. + 3-03 S 19-89 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "pB; S; vlE;" which means: "pretty bright; small; very little extended." There follows this at a distance of 8 s and 2' 8" to the N. another nebula (=37 1$. I; h. 1349 ; H. 3096), which is thus described : "pB ; S ; b M ; " that is to say : " pretty bright ; small ; brighter in the middle." 838. 89 M. VIBGINIS. (h. 1348 ; H. 3097.) h. m. s. B.A. 12 30 6 o / Decl. N 13 9-5 Prec. + 3-03 S I-S A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " p B ; p S ; R ; gmb M ; " which means : " pretty bright ; pretty small ; round ; gradually much brighter in the middle." 839. 92 1$. I. COM^E BEBENICIS. (h. 1352; H. 3101; &.) h. B.A. 12 30 29 o Decl. N 28 33 -9 Prec. -f 2.98 S 19-88 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: B. A. I2 n - 29* I2 fl - 31**' 345 "vB; vL; mEi5o; gbM; 3stf;" which means: "very bright; very large ; much extended in the direction of 1 50 with the meridian ; gradually brighter in the middle; there are 3 stars following the nebula." Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. viii. Fig. 83. 840. 24 $. V. COM^E BEEENICIS. (h. 1357; H. 3106 ; &.) CCCCLII. b. m. s. . B.A. 12 30 5O Decl. N 26 35 '7 Free, -f 2-99 S 19-87 A large white nebula, in the centre of the Tresses, and 2 S.E. of the lucida, or 1 6 Comae Berenicis. It is a curious, long, and streaky object, lying np and sf across the field, in somewhat of a weaver's shuttle shape, and preceded by four telescopic stars in a vertical curve. From the description which I received viva voce from H., my attention was intently fixed upon this nebula; and, after long and patient gazing, a parallel patch on the following limb was rather inferred than made out, by a peculiar glow on that part. The parallel appendage to this nebula is a most extraordinary pheno- menon, and is very beautifully figured in the Phil. Trans., 1833, by H. ; who considers the two as constituting a flat annulus seen at a great obliquity, but having very unequal breadths and densities in its two opposite semicircles. " Or," asks he, " must we admit the appendage to be a separate and distant nebula, dependant, by some unknown physical relation, on its brighter neighbour 1 " [Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. iv. Fig. 37 ; Lassell, Mem. R.A.S., vol. xxxvi. PI. v. Fig. 21.] 841. 32 $. I. VIRGINIS. (h. 1361 ; H. 3110.) h. m. s. a. R.A. 12 31 17 c Decl. N 7 51-0 Prec. + 3-05 S 19-87 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; p S ; m E o + ; sb M r N ; " which means : " considerably bright ; pretty small ; much extended in the direction of the meridian or thereabouts ; suddenly brighter in the middle where there is a mottled nucleus, hardly resolveable." A Cycle of Celestial Qljects. 842. 90 M. VIBGINIS. (H. 3111 ; h. K.A. 12 31 24 o Decl. N 13 45-8 Free. + 3-03 S 19-87 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "pL; bMN;" which means: " pretty large ; brighter in the middle where it exhibits a nucleus." h. mi . B.A. 12 32 8 Decl. N 12 25-2 843. 58 M. VIBGINIS. (h. 1368 ; H. 3121 ; &.) 8. Free. + 3/ 3 S 19-86 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "B; L; iR; vmbM; r;" which means: "bright; large; irregularly round ; very much brighter in the middle ; hardly resolveable rather, mottled as if with stars/' 844. 143 P. XII. VIBGINIS. CCCCLIII. h. m. s. s. B.A. 12 33 4 Decl. S 3 46-0 Prec. + 3-08 S 19-84 Position. Distance. Epoch. O H SOUTH 105.4 ... 50.5 ... 1825.36 SMYTH 104.5 ... 500 ... 1833-31 A wide double star, on the centre of Virgo's right wing ; on the line and exactly two-thirds of the distance between Spica and t] Virginia. A 61, pale yellow; B [10], greenish; several small stars in the field. 845. 68 M. HYDROS. (h. 3404 ; H. 3128.) CCCCLIV. b. m. s. B.A. 12 33 34 Decl. S 26 7'6 Prec. -h 3-16 S 19-84 A large round nebula on Hydra's body, under Corvus, discovered in 1780 by Mechain. In 1786, Sir W. HerscheFs 2O ft reflector resolved it into a rich cluster of small stars, so compressed that most of the components are blended together. It is about 3" broad, and 4' long ; E. A. i &' 3 f m i &- 34: 347 and he estimated that its profundity may be of the 344* order. It is nearly mid-way between two small stars, one in the np and the other in the sf quadrant, a line between which would bisect the nebula. It is very pale, but so mottled that a patient scrutiny leads to the inference that it has assumed a spherical figure in obedience to attractive forces. It bears S. by E. from and is within 3 distance of /3 CorvL 846. 43 $. I. VIBGINIS. (h. 1376 ; H. 3132.) CCCCLV. b. m. s. s. R.A. 12 34 15 Decl. B U 0*2 Free. + 3-10 S 19-83 A lucid white elliptical nebula, between the Virgin's right elbow and the Haven, in an elegant field of small stars. It lies nearly parallel to the equatorial line of the instrument, and on intense attention may be seen to blaze in the middle. The half dozen principal stars form a great Y, with the nebula as the centre. But it seems a mere wisp of subdued light, insomuch that my telescope does not afford me even the doubts inspired by the 2o ft re- flector; for Herschel remarks that there is a faint, diffused oval light all about it, and that he is almost FlG - 22 - positive that there is a dark interval or stratum, 43 . I- VIBGINIS. separating the nucleus and the general mass of the nebula from the light above it. " Surely no illusion." "The general form of elongated nebulae is elliptic/' says H., "and their condensation towards the centre is almost invariably such as would arise from the superposition of luminous elliptic strata, increasing in density towards the centre." This must be another of those vast flat rings seen very obliquely, already spoken of, and is an elegant example of that celestial perspective ; it bears due "W. from a Virginis, and is 1 1 from that star, forming nearly a right angle with ft Hydras, which lies 1 2 to the S. ["Beautiful low-power field/' Webb. Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. vi. Fig. 50; Lassell, Mem. R.A.S., vol. xxxvi. PI. v. Fig. 22.] 847. 21 $. I. VIRGINIS. (h. 1378; H. 3134; R.A. 12 34 22 c Decl. N 10 47-2 Prec. + 3*03 S i'o-8q A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: 348 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. "B; pS; R; gmbM; r; sstf;" which means: "bright; pretty small; round ; gradually much brighter in the middle ; hardly resolveable ; there are 3 stars following the nebula." 848. 254 $. I. UBS. MAJOBIS. (h. 1381 ; H. 3142.) h. m. 8. B.A. 12 35 3 Decl. N 62 13'3 Prec. + 2-69 S 19-82 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "B; L; vmEn8-6; glbM;" which means: "bright; large; very much extended in the direction of n8-6~; gradually less bright towards the middle." 849. CENTAUBI. (*h. 4539.) h. m. s. B.A. 12 35 28 Decl. S 48 21-5 Position. o HEBSCHEL, J. 354.3 A double star. A 4 ; 64. Prec. -f S 3-28 19-81 Distance. it o-75 Epoch. 1835-89 850. 58 B. COBVI. (2. 1669.) . Prec. + 3' i S 19-81 h. m. s. B.A. 12 35 33 Decl. S 12 24-8 'osition. 298-9 298-9 302.4 301-5 304-4 Distance. // 5*4 5-4 5-7 5-9 ... 5-7 Epoch. 1828-66 1835.50 1856-53 1863.30 i87 9 .' 9 STRUVE, W. SMYTH SECCHI MAIN STONE, 0. A double star. A 7, yellowish white; B 7, yellowish white. Smyth's measures as above are taken from Gledhill, but I have not found any such measures in his books or in any of the papers which have come into my possession. K. A. i2 h - 36 m, 349 851. y VIRGINIS (2. 1670.) 8. Prec. + 3-07 S 19-81 h. m. 8. R.A. 12 36 5 Decl. 8 50-8 HERSCHEL, W. HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH STRUVE, W. SMYTH DAWES STRUVE, O. KNOTT DEMBOWSKI JEDRZEJEWICZ Distance. 5-7 3-79 2.28 i-o o-5 round elongated 1.24 2-73 4-05 4-61 CCCCLVI. Epoch. 1 78006 1822-25 1825-42 1831-38 1834-20- 1835-40 1836.15 1836-39 1840-38 1850-39 1860.44 1870-25 1880.45 A fine binary star, in Virgo's right side. A 4, silvery white [or yellow] ; B 4, pale yellow, but though marked by Piazzi of equal magnitude with A, it has certainly less brilliance ; and the colours are not always of the same intensity, but whether owing to atmospherical or other causes, remains undecided. They are followed by a minute star nearly on the parallel, [of which Burnham gives: Pos. 88-0; Dist. 102-8'"; Epoch, 1880-27.] This most instructive star bears N.W. of a Virginis, and is 1 5 distant, in the direction between a and y Leonis. A very sensible proper motion has been detected in A, and there can be no doubt of B standing on in the same course. It was with much gratification that I watched this very interesting physical object through a considerable portion of its superb ellipse. It is rather singular that, brilliant as these two stars are, various occultations of y Virginis by the Moon have been recorded without allusion to its being double. So lately as the 20 th March, 1780, the phenomenon was watched by nine astronomers ; yet at Paris only, on that occasion, is mention made of one star being occulted io s before the other. On the 2i st January, 1794, the occultation was observed by four astronomers ; yet no one mentions duplicity. This is passing strange, because Cassini had, in 1720, perceived and recorded the two stars, noting that the western disappeared 30" before the other, behind the Moon's dark limb, but they emerged nearly together. He could not divide them with a telescope of n ft , but with one of 16^ they were well severed, and of equal magnitudes. He watched the immersion, which was oblique, with great care, hoping by refraction or 350 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. discoloration to detect a lunar atmosphere; but though the circum- stances were favourable, he perceived no symptom. Yet the observation was held to be of importance, for, by enlisting that able astronomer and Bradley, Sir J. Herschel considered that he gained some useful points in the orbital departure. As the rigorous observations and computations of this object must be deemed a sort of eapetimentum crwcis of the sidereal connected systems, I may be excused for entering into rather fuller details of the detection and establishment of so wonderful an elliptic motion, than I have yet indulged in among the binaries ; and it will thereby serve as an example of the method of procedure with those interesting objects. The various observations were most ably and zealously discussed by Sir John, and treated in a straightforward, geometrical mode, so as to be widely available ; as will be seen on consulting the Menwirs of the Royal Astronomical Society, vol. v. The method is equally novel and ingenious. Assuming that the motions of binary stars are governed by the universal law of gravitation, and that they describe conic sections about their common centre of gravity and about each other, he was bent on relieving their discussion from the analytical difficulties attending a rigorous solution of equations, where the data are uncertain, irregular, and embarrassing. Measures of position were to be the sheet-anchor; for distances, with the exception of the major semi-axis, were peremptorily excluded from any share of consideration in the investigation, because of their notorious looseness and insecurity. "The process (said he) by which I propose to accomplish this, is one essentially graphical ; by which term I understand, not a mere substitution of geometrical con- struction and measurement for numerical calculation, but one which has for its object to perform that which no system of calculation can possibly do, by bringing in the aid of the eye and hand to guide the judgment, in a case where judgment only, and not calculation, can be of any avail." Under the assumption, therefore, that gravitation governs, and that one of the components revolves, while the other, though not necessarily in the focus, is at rest, the curve is constructed by means of the angles of position and the corresponding times of observation ; and tangents to this curve, at stated intervals, yield the apparent distances at each angle, they being, by the known laws of elliptical motion, equal to the square roots of the apparent angular velocities. Thus armed, Sir John proceeded with the orbit of y Virginis. From the above positions and epochs, with interpolated intermediates, a set of polar co-ordinates were derived, and thence elliptical elements for the apparent ellipse. The next process was to obtain the elements of the real ellipse, and the whole consequent investigation is so succinctly described in the paper K.-A. 12' im. 351 alluded to, that any zealous tyro may tread in the same steps, with a little attention. The results, together with a comparison of the elements and observations up to the period of the computation, and an ephemeris of the system for the years 1832, 1833, I ^34, and 1835, were inserted in the Supplement to the Nautical Almanac for 1832. But finding a discrepancy between the measures then obtained and the places predicted, Herschel* nothing daunted, again took the field, and recalculated the orbit, as described in Memoirs R. A. S., vol. vi, In giving his remarkable results to the astronomical world, Sir John said : "If they be correct, the latter end of the year 1833, or the beginning of the year 1834, will witness one of the most striking phenomena which sidereal astronomy has yet afforded, viz., the perihelion passage of one star round another, with the immense angular velocity of between 60 and 70 per annum, that is to say, of a degree in 5 days. As the 2 stars will then, however, be within little more than half a second of each other, and as they are both large, ami nearly equal, none but the very finest telescopes will have any chance of showing this magnificent phenomenon. The prospect, however, of witnessing a visible and measurable change, in the state of an. object so remote, in a time so short (for, in the mean of a very great number of careful measures with equal stars, a degree can hardly escape observation), may reasonably be expected to call into action the most powerful instrumental means which can be brought to bear on it." And this was Sir John's projected ellipse : 90 1740 1730" 1720 FIG. 23, OBBIT OF 7 VIEGINIS AS TOUSD BY SIB J. HEBSCHEL IN 183.2. 352 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. From tbe extreme delicacy of so novel a case, all the conditions were not yet met, so that this bold prediction was not circumstantially verified, although it was admirably correct in substance. Whilst rushing towards the nearest point of contact, or shortest distance of the revolving star from its primary, and the proximity became extreme, the field was left, as far as I know, to Sir John Herschel at the Cape of Good Hope, Professor Struve at Dorpat, and myself at Bedford. Our measures afforded unquestionable proofs of the wonderful movement under dis- cussion; yet they certainly exhibited greater discrepancies than might have been expected, from the excellence of the instruments employed. But the increased angular velocity which so excentric a star acquired, when gaining its periastre, and the closeness of its junction, rendered the operations extremely difficult : added to which, the brightness of two such stars was sufficient to call forth that disadvantage, arising from the inflection of light, which the wire micrometer labours under, and which interferes in the exact contact between the line and the luminous body. The accelerating velocity of angular change was thus vigilantly watched, until the commencement of the year 1836, when an unex- pected phenomenon took place. Instead of the appulse which a careful projection, drawn from the above elements, had led me to expect, I was astonished, on gazing at its morning apparition in January, to find it a single star ! In fact, whether the real discs were over each other or not, my whole powers, patiently worked from 240 to 1200, could only make the object round. I instantly announced this singular event to my astro- nomical friends, but the notice was received with less energy than such a case demanded ; none of the powerful refractors in this country were pointed to it in time; and it is to be regretted, that we had not the benefit of the unexcelled Dorpat telescope's evidence, at the critical epoch in question. This state of apparent singleness may have existed during the latter part of 1835, for when I caught it, it was very near a change. At length, about the beginning of June, 1836, a letter arrived from Sir J. Herschel, addressed to Baily, wherein he detailed his obser- vations on the single state of this star, at the villa of Feldhausen, Cape of Good Hope, in his 2o ft reflector. Under the date of February 27 th , that unwearied astronomer says : "7 Virginia, at this time, is to all appearance a single star. I have tormented it under favourable circumstances, with the highest powers I can apply to my telescopes, consistently with seeing a well-defined disc, till my patience has been exhausted ; and that lately, on several occasions, whenever the definition of the stars generally, in that quarter of the heavens, would allow of observing with any chance of success, but I have not been able to procure any decisive symptom of its consisting of 2 individuals." The companion now took such a movement, as quite to confute a E.A. I2 n - 36- 353 large predictive diagram I had constructed, showing that the orbit was extremely elongated, more like a comet's than a planet's ; which gave me a suspicion that we had been looking at the ellipse the wrong way. Hereupon I returned to the Herschelian process to obtain the elements of the apparent and the true ellipse, with my new measures, but could neither accommodate the period, nor arrive at any satisfactory conclusions. When therefore M. Madler's masterly computations appeared in the AstronomiscTie Nachrichten, 363, my views were greatly countenanced; but with a full value for the talent and zeal of that astronomer's process, I was still anxious for Sir John Herschel to return to his own field, and meet the apparently unaccountable informalities which still remained. Having made a request to this effect, he replied : " Maugre I cannot yet send you any finalities about 7 Virginia, yet to prove that I have not been quite idle, I will state one or two general conclusions that a projec- tion of the observations has led me to, preparatory to exact numerical computation, i. We are all wrong, Madler and all of us, and it is the early observation of Bradley in 1718 which has misled us. That observation is totally incompatible with any reasonable ellipse, and must be absolutely rejected. Had it not been for my respect for that single observation I should have got very near the true ellipse in my first approximation. 2. The period is short of 150 years. My conjecture, antecedent to any exact calculation from my projection, is 1 43, which is considerably less than the least of Madler's, and beyond his assigned limits of error. 3. I suspect Madler's perihelion to be half a year too early, and that the true perihelion passage took place at 1836-6, or thereabouts. We shall get on better now that we have found out the black sheep." Thus duly authorised, I attacked the orbit again, rejecting, with some regret, Bradley, Pound, Cassini, and Mayer, and assuming IjjjL's observations of 1780 as the point of departure. Taking, therefore, the epochs from that date to 1843 for abscissae, and the observed angles for ordinates, a fresh set of periods was obtained, through which the inter- polating curve was led, on a very large scale *. From the interpolated positions corresponding to the assumed dates between 1780 and 1843, the intervals being first decennial, then quinquennial, and afterwards more rapid still, the angular velocities were concluded, and by their aid the distances as radii vectores. These positions and distances were laid down from the central star as an origin of polar co-ordinates. Now, though this is a simple and merely graphic process of obtaining the elements of both the apparent and true ellipse, and is liable to shakiness, it undeniably shows the physical fact of a highly elongated orbit ; and * Sir John Herschel informs me, that curve, equalising the differences on paper, he has disused the method of drawing and thence deducing the angular velo- tangents for the angular velocities. The cities by first and second differences (if substitute is a closer reading off of the needed) ; but first will generally suffice. A a 354 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. several of the conditions prove that, notwithstanding the present anoma- lous differences, we are arriving near the mark. It is singular how all the determinations of the excentricity have agreed, thus : First Orbit. Second Orbit. Encke . . . 0-890 0-860 I Madler . Herschelll. . 0-887 0-834 I Myself . As the ellipse projected by Sir John Herschel, under all the epochs, has been given, the reader may like to see the figure produced by the Bedford observations, which yields a period of about 180 years : First Orbit. Second Orbit. 0-864 0-868 0-883 0-872 FIG. 24. OEBIT OF 7 VIRGINIS AS FOUND BY ADMIRAL SMYTH IN 1843. As the resulting elements, though better, were still unsatisfactory, I was about to take another point of departure, and try again, when I received a letter from Sir John Herschel, dated Collingwood, 9 tn July, 1843, f which the following is an extract : " I wrote to you last, that I could not make Bradley's observations agree with any ellipse consistent with the later observations, and that Madler's elements, which assume the correctness of that observation, are inadmissible. I have now satisfied myself that this is really the case, and that Madler's period admits of being yet E.A. i2 h - 6 m - 355 reduced. But still it is necessary to suppose materially greater errors in one direction over the whole interval 1828, 1820, 1830, 1831, than I quite like. The mean of Dawes's and my own measures, however, is on the whole exceedingly well repre- sented in all the critical and puzzling part of the orbit corresponding to 1830 1834 inclusive. Your observations of 1831, 1832, and 1833, offer discordancies of +2, + 22, and + 3, which are, considering the then considerable closeness of the stars, not more than might well be committed. But Struve's are quite inexplicable ; his errors, supposing the orbit correct, run thus : 1825 1828 1829 1831 1832 1833 1834 + 1 +3 + 3i + 4* +5, +7 +6 + 7| after which the deviation ceases. " On the whole I consider the proofs of gravitation afforded by this star quite satisfactory. It is true that I am forced to admit an error of 3! in my father's measure of 1781, and an error exceeding 2 in the same direction in his subsequent mean result for 1 803 ; but when I recollect what sort of micrometer and apparatus he used, I am not disposed to quarrel with these. " I am not satisfied with my inclination and node, and there is still a tendency in the curve of the star, if your measures of thia year be correct, to run away from its proper course, to bolt ; which leads me to believe that these elements are not yet so well determined as I hope to get them. Your ellipse from the Bedford observations is a very beautiful one, but I have not yet compared your elements with the obser- vations. I am somewhat surprised at the length of your period, as I find 1 26 years represents the mean of all the observations (including Struve's) on the whole well- I have been chiefly attending to improving the method as a working one, and I am preparing a paper on the subject, in which the orbit of 7 will occur in exemplifica- tion. What I aim at is, a direct process leading to the separate correction of each element, in place of a turmoil of calculus on the principle of least squares, which in cases of such discordant observations is, if not illusory, at least unnecessarily troublesome." [It does not appear that of late years much attention has been paid to this star by computers, and we still remain a good deal in the dark as to its orbit. "We can say now little more than Smyth said above, namely, that its period is "about 180 years." Thiele says 185?, Adams 174?.] 852. 59 M. VIKGINIS. (h. 1386 ; H. 3155 ; h. B.A. 12 36 28 Decl. TT 12 16 '1 Free, -f 3-03 S /'8o A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "B; pL; IE; vsvmbM; 2stp;" which means: "bright; pretty large ; little extended ; very suddenly very much brighter in the middle ; 2 stars precede." Engraved, Lassell, Mem. E. A . S., vol. xxxvi. PI. v. Fig. 23. A a 2 356 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 853. 42 $. V. C01VLE BERENICES, (h.1397; H. 3165; h. m. 8. B.A. 12 36 50 Decl. N 33 8" 8 Free. + 2-93 S ip-79 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : "!; vB; vL; eE7o; bMN; B*nr;" which means: "a re- markable object ; very bright ; very large ; extremely extended in the direction of about 70 with the meridian; brighter in the middle where there is a nucleus; there is a bright star near." Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. vii. Fig. 76; Phil. Trans., 1850, PI. xxxvii. Fig. 9; Lassell, Mem. R.A. S., vol. xxxvi. PI. v. Fig. 24. 854. 274 $. I. DRACONIS. (h. 1410 ; H. 3181.) h. R.A. 12 37 41 Decl. N 75 T5 Prec. -f 2-26 // S 19-79 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " p B ; c S ; R ; gb M ; * p ; " which means : " pretty bright ; con- siderably small ; round ; gradually brighter in the middle ; a double star precedes." 855. 10 y. I. VIRGINIS. (h. 1404; H. 3176; .) h. R.A. 12 37 44 o Decl. N 2 35-3 Prec. + 3-06 S 19-78 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; p S ; IE; mb M ; " which means : " considerably bright ; pretty small ; but little extended ; much brighter in the middle." 856. 60 M. VIRGINIS. (h. 1408 ; H. 3182 ; .) CCCCLVII. S. R.A. 12 38 4 o Decl. N 12 97 Prec. + 3-02 S 19-78 A double nebula, in the centre of Virgo's left wing, lying np and sf, about 2' or 3' from centre to centre, the preceding one being extremely E. A. i2 h - 36 m - -- i2 h - 38- 357 faint. The following, or brighter one, is that seen and imperfectly described by Messier in 1779, and is nearly between two telescopic stars vertically posited. [Engraved, Phil. Trans.,- 1833, PI. vii. Fig. 74.] A fine field is exhibited under the eye-piece, which magnifies 93 times, just as this object enters, because the bright little nebula 59 M. is quitting the np verge, and another small one is seen in the upper part, H. 3171: in fact, four nebulae at once. The hypothesis of Sir J. Herschel, upon double nebulae, is new and attracting. They may be stellar systems each revolving round the other : each a universe, according to ancient notions. But as these revolutionary principles of those vast and distant firmamental clusters cannot for ages yet be established, the mind lingers in admiration, rather than compre- hension of such mysterious collocations. Meantime our clear duty is, so industriously to collect 2 facts, that much of what is now unintelligible may be- come plain to our succes- sors, and a portion of the grand mechanism now be- yond our conception, re- vealed. Sir J. Herschel exclaims, " How much is escaping us ! How un- worthy is it in them who call themselves philoso- phers, to let these great phenomena of nature, these ii, . ,. FIG. 25. 60 M. VIRGJNIS. 4 slow but majestic mani- festations of the power and the glory of GOD, glide by unnoticed, and drop out of memory beyond the reach of recovery, because we will not take the pains to note them in their unobtrusive and furtive passage, because we see them in their every-day dress, and mark no sudden change, and conclude that all is dead, because we will not look for signs of life ; and that all is uninteresting, because we are not im- pressed and dazzled To say, indeed, that every individual star in the Milky Way, to the amount of eight or ten millions, is to have its place determined, and its motion watched, would be extravagant ; but at least let samples be taken, at least let monographs of parts be made with powerful telescopes and refined instruments, that we may know what is going on in that abyss of stars, where at present imagination wanders without a guide!" Such is the enthusiastic call of one, whose father cleared the road by which we are introduced to the grandest phenomena of the stellar universe, 358 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. This mysterious and shadowy doublet will be found 5 W. of Virginis, in the direction of a Leonis, where there is a very large and wonderful nebulous region. [Brodie describes No. I of the woodcut as " faint ; " 2 and 4 " very faint;" and 3 "medium bright." No. i.=H. 3155; No. 2 = H. 3171; No. 3 = H. 3182; No. 4 = H. 3180. Lord Rosse found No. 2. to be bi- nuclear.] 857. 176 $. I. COM^I BERENICIS. (h. 1414; H. 3189 ; h. m. s. K.A. 12 38 45 o Decl. N 32 48 "7 Free. + 2-93 S 19-77 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "!; pB; L; vmE34'3; spof2;" which means: "a remarkable object; pretty bright; large; very much extended in the direction of 34' 3 with the meridian ; this is the sp of 2 nebulae." The nebula which follows this (=177 IJI. I.; h. 1415; H. 3190) stands described as "!; pF; L; E90+ ;" which- means: "a remarkable object; pretty faint ; large ; extended in the direction of about 90 with the meridian." The former object is engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. vii. Fig. 75; and the latter, Phil. Trans., 1861, PI. xxviii. Fig. 26. According to Lord Rosse these 2 nebulae form one, the joining part being faint in the middle. 858. 142 $. I. VIRGINIS. (h. 1419; H. 3197.) h. m. B.A. 12 39 29 o Bed. N 3 38-9 Free, -f 3-05 S 19.76 A nebula thus described in Sir J, Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "B; pL; iR; mb M ; * ioep;" which means : " bright ; pretty large; irregularly round ; much brighter in the middle; there is a io th mag. star in the sp quadrant." 859. 15 $. I. VIRGINIS. (h. 1420; H. 3198.) b. m. s. R.A. 12 39 31 o Decl. N 8-6 Prec. + 3-07 ^ S 19-76 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: R. A. 359 " B ; v L ; m E 45+ ; psb M ;" which means : " bright ; very large ; much extended in the direction of about 45 with the meridian ; pretty suddenly much brighter in the middle." 860. 1678 2. VIBGINIS. h. m. s. B.A. 12 39 58 o / Decl. N 14 58'2 Position. o SOUTH 213.4 STBUVE, O. 209-1 MADLEB 204.8 DOBEBCK 200-4 . JEDBZEJEWICZ 200-5 Free. + 3-01 S 19-75 Distance. 33-3 32-8 32-7 31-9 32-4 Epoch. 1825.30 1842-41 1858.36 1877.29 1880-37 A double star. A 6 , very white ; B 7 J, yellowish white. Gledhill remarks : " Rectilinear motion. The angle has diminished, but the distance has changed very little, if at all." I would rather say that the distance has certainly diminished. The amount may not be much, but the measures are very harmonious from first to last during a period of 52 years. 861. CRUCIS. h. m. a. R.A. 12 41 17 Decl. S 59 5-2 Free. 4- 3-44 - S 19.73 A conspicuous star of mag. i. In the same field with this, but about i m preceding it, there is a "most intense blood-red" star of mag. 8J. 862. 510 (?) Dunlop CENTAURI. (h. 3424; H. 3226.) B.A. 12 42 50 Decl. S 40 42-3 Free, -f 3-28 S 1.1 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "pB; L; R; gbM; r ;" which means: "pretty bright; large; round ; gradually brighter in the middle ; hardly resolveable mottled as if with stars." 360 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 863. 39 ^. I. VIBGINIS. (h. 1436; H. 3227; h. m. s. a. B.A. 12 42 54 o Decl. S 5 11-0 Free, -f- 3-09 S 19.71 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "vB; L; IE 45+; smbMrN;" which means: "very bright; large; a little extended in the direction of about 45 with the meridian ; suddenly much brighter in the middle where it exhibits a nucleus which shows indications of resolveability." 864. 129 $. I. VIBGINIS. (h. 1437, 3425 ; H. 3229 ; &.) h. m. K.A. 12 43 19 o Decl. S 8 3'9 Free. + 3- 10 S 19-71 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: "vB; E; vmbMrN; r;" which means: "very bright; round; very much brighter in the middle where there is a nucleus which shows signs of resolveability." 865. 84 $ . I. COM^J BEBENICIS. (h. 1451 ; H. 3249 ; &.) b. m. 8. s. B.A. 12 45 Decl. N 26 59 Free. + 2-94 S 19-68 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " v B ; v L ; E ; vg, vsvmb M e B N ; " which means : " very bright ; very large ; extended ; at first very gradually, then very suddenly much brighter in the middle where it exhibits an extremely bright nucleus." 866. 196 P. XII. VIBGINIS (2. 1682.) CCCCLVIII. h. m. s. s. B.A. 12 45 39 o / Decl. S 9 44 4 Free. + 3-11 S 19-64 Position. Distance. Epoch. STRUVE,W. 308-7 ... 33-6 ... 1831-61 SMYTH 307.9 ... 33-5 ... 1834.41 DEMBOWSKI 306-9 ... 32-3 ... 1865.30 A neat but wide double star, between the Virgin's right arm and the tail of the Raven ; about 8 W. J N. of a, and closely sp \ff Virginis, a star of the 5^ magnitude. A 6, topaz yellow ; B 9 J, lucid purple, the colours finally contrasted. E.A. i2 h - 2 m - i2 h - 6 m - 361 867. 94 M. CANUM VENATICORUM. CCCCLIX. (h. 1456 ; H. 3258 ; &.) h. m. . B.A. 12 45 43 Decl. N 41 43-3 Free. + 2-83 S 19-66 A [comet-like] nebula discovered by Me" chain, in 1781, immediately preceding the crown on Charles's Heart. It is a fine pale-white object, with evident symptoms of being a compressed cluster of small stars. It brightens towards the middle, and the gradual augmentation of intensity from the margin to the centre of this apparently orbicular object is a direct proof of the real sphericity of the stellar mass. There are several small stars in the field, of which one in the sf quadrant is double. 2 J N.W. of a Canum Venaticorum. [Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PL v. Fig. 41 ; Lassell, Mem. R. A. S., vol. xxx vi. PL v. Fig. 25.] 868. 202 P. XII. COM^E BERENICIS. (2.1685.) CCCCLX. h. m. s. s. B.A. 12 46 29 Decl. N 20 46-2 Free. + 2-98 // S 19-64 Position. Distance. Epoch. HERSCHEL, W. 202-0 ... 15.8 ... 1782-30 STRUVE, W. 200-8 ... 15.8 ... 1829-87 SMYTH 201-9 ... 16-2 ... 1838-28 MAIN 200-2 ... 15.7 ... 1863-20 A neat double star, between Berenice's Hair and Virgo's left wing : it lies due W. of a Bob'tis, or on its parallel, at the distance of 22, where a line dropped S. from a Canum Venaticorum will intercept it. A 7^, and B 8, both white; other stars in the field, but small and distant. A comparison of the measures affords presumptive proof of fixity. [2 S. of 35 Comae Berenicis.] 869. 25 $. I. VIRGINIS. (h. 1462; H. 3274.) R.A. Decl. N 11 54'6 Prec. + 3*0 1 S 19-65 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " B ; p L ; R ; psb M ; p of 2 ; " which means : " bright ; pretty large ; round; pretty suddenly brighter in the middle; the preceding of 2 nebulae." The other nebula here mentioned is 75 I. II. (see post). About 2j preceding e Virginis, a 3 r <* mag. star. 362 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. 870. K ORTJCIS. (h. 3435 ; H. 3275.) b. m. s. s. R.A. 12 47 7 o Decl. S 59 45-2 Free. + 3-53 S 19-62 A fine cluster of bright stars. This was described by Sir J. Herschel as one of the most beautiful objects of the kind in the heavens. It consists of about no stars from the 7 th magnitude downwards, 8 of the more conspicuous of them being coloured various shades of red, green, and blue. " No nebula is perceptible in any part of the extent of this cluster, which though neither a large nor a rich one is yet an extremely brilliant and beautiful object when viewed through an instrument of sufficient aperture to show distinctly the very different colours of its constituent stars, which give it the effect of a superb piece of fancy jewellery." (Cape Obs. p. 17.) This cluster was very carefully examined and its constituent stars mapped in 1872 by Mr. W. C. Russell of the Sydney Observatory. His paper will be found in Month. Not. R. A. S., vol. xxxiii. p. 66. Russell found 25 stars not mentioned by Herschel ; on the other hand, he could not find 5 stars noted by Herschel. He adds: "Many of the stars have drifted con- siderably since the Cape drawing was made." Engraved, Cape Obs., PI. i. Fig. 2 ; [in which the N. and S. points are erroneously reversed] ; and Russell, Month. Not., ubi supra. 871. 75 y. II. VIBGINIS. (h.1466; H. 3278; ft.) CCCCLXI. h. m. s. s. B.A. 12 47 20 Decl. N 12 49-5 Free, -f 3-01 S 19-63 A pale elliptical nebula, in the middle of Virgo's left wing. This is a fine object trending sp and nf, nearly in the vertical, but from its superior brightness at the S., or upper end, it rises while gazing from the dumpy egg-shape to that of a paper kite : over it is an arch formed by three telescopic stars, the symmetry of which is so peculiar as to add to that appear- ance. These stars trend, by two very faint ones, to a round nebula [H. 3274] FIG. 26. 75 #. II. VIBGINIS. in tbe ^ qua drant, preceded bytwo stars of the io th magnitude. 2\ distant from c Virginis on the western parallel. ["The above sketch is very unlike the originals." Brodie. H. 3278 is engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. viii. Fig. 84.] E. A. i2 h - 4 m -- i2 h - 48 m - 363 872. 35 COMiE BERENICIS. (2. 1687.) CCCCLXII. R.A. 12 47 53 Decl. N 21 50-6 Prec. + 2-96 S 19-63 Position. Distance. Epoch. ::: L DOBERCK ( AC 124-1 ... 28-68 A delicate triple star, between the Tresses and the Virgin's northern wing, about 7 S.S.E. of its own lucida, and 20 ~W. of a Bobtis. A 5, pale yellow ; B, indistinct ; C i o, cobalt blue. Of this object A and C were classed as a double star, and registered 130 ll . V. ; but 2. detected B, and rendered it a fine but extremely difficult triple. Indeed, the latter was so involved in the moulds and twirls of the primary, that but for A and B pointing directly upon a 12 th magnitude star in the nf quadrant, the estimation of angle and distance would have been hardly possible. [The close pair are clearly in motion, but there is no evidence of change in the distant star.] 873. 5317 Lac. CENTATJBJ. b. m. s. B.A. 12 48 7 o Decl. S 56 34-6 Prec. + 3.46 S 19-62 Position. Distance. Epoch. O // HERSCHEL, J. 16-0 ... 42 est. ... 1834-25 A double star. A 5 ; B 6. 874. 32 Hev. CAMELOPABDI. (2. 1694.) CCCCLXV. b. m. s. s. R.A. 12 48 16 C Decl. N 84 0'7 Prec. 4- 0-29 S 19-61 Position. Distance. Epoch. o // HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 327-0 ... 21-0 ... 1822-28 EUNER 326-7 ... 21-6 ... 1872-99 JEDRZEJEWICZ 326-4 ... 21-6 ... 1877-62 A neat double star, near the animal's ear; it is nearly 7 S. by E. from 364 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. Polaris, and forms the vertex of a nearly isosceles triangle with that star and 6 Ursae Minoris. A 6 and B 6 J, both bright white ; a third star in the sp, but only of the 1 1 th magnitude. It appears to have no motion either in angle or distance. [Colours "not quite a match," 1863. Webb. Duner terms both "jaune."] [A is 232 P. XII. In the B. A. C. the star marked 232 P. XII. is ascribed to Ursa Minor.] 875. 134 Iff.. I. VIRGINIS. (H. 3292.) h. m. s. . Prec. + 3-12 S 19-61 R.A. 12 48 38 o Decl. S 9 56-4 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864: " c B ; v L ; m E ; " which means : " considerably bright ; very large ; much extended." 876. 221 P. XII. VIBGINIS. (2. 1689.) CCCCLXIII. b. B.A. 12 49 59 o Decl. N 12 5'7 Prec. -f 3-01 S 19-58 Position. Distance. Epoch. O II HERSCHEL, J., and SOUTH 196-3 ... 29-17 ... 1823-40 SMYTH 197-9 ... 29-1 ... 1831-38 A neat double star, near the middle of Virgo's northern wing ; pre- ceding on the parallel by only 2 [and a little N.], and therefore readily fished up by the out-door gazer. A 7|-, pale white; B 9, sky blue. This object is thus described by Piazzi: "Duplex. Socia ib fe magnit. 0-6" temporis prsecedit, 20" circit.er ad austrum." 877. 243 $. I. TJRS^E MAJOBIS. (h. 1483; H. 3315.) h. m. s. . K.A. 12 50 28 Decl. N 58 55 '9 Prec. + 2-59 S 19-58 A nebula thus described in Sir J. Herschel's Catalogue of 1864 : " B ; p S ; vl E ; vgb M ; " which means : " bright ; pretty small ; very little extended ; very gradually brighter in the middle." E.A. i2 h - 48 m - i2 h - 5o m - 365 878. a CANUM VENATICORUM. (2. 1692.) CCCCLXVI. a CANUM VENATICORUM. (2. 1692.) C h. m. 8. 8. R.A. 12 50 53 Free. + 2-8 4 o / tt Decl. N 38 54-7 S 19-57 Position. Distance. Epoch. o U HERSCHEL, W. 228-5 20-00 + 1780-60 SMYTH 227-0 19-8 ... 1837.39 DUNEB 227.7 19-8 ... 1869.44 JEDRZEJEWICZ 227-5 20-0 ... 1877.73 A fine double star, the lucida of the heart placed between Asterion and Chara. A 2\> flushed white; B 6^, pale lilac; a third star at a distance on the N. vertical. This is a Nautical Almanac star, and a fine object. There has been no appreciable alteration in position or distance. This star is the leader of Ptolemy's a/xo'/xa>roi to the Great Bear, and it appears on the Borgian globe. Ulugh Beigh records it by the Arabian designation Kdbd-al-asad, liver of the lion, and there is abundance of evidence to prove that it was pretty notorious among astronomers. But it came to pass that it was named Cor Caroli by Halley, at the suggestion of Sir C. Scarborough, after a worthless man's heart. The popular story, or rather the vulgar one, runs, how Scar- borough, the court physician, gazed upon a star the very evening before the return of King Charles II. to London, the which, as in duty bound, appeared more visible and refulgent than heretofore; so the said star, which Hevelius had already made the lucida of Chara's collar, was thereupon extra-constellated within a sort of Valentine figure of a heart, with a royal crown upon it ; and so the monarch, it would seem, by this extraction, remained heartless. Though this pretty symbol appears as a tail-piece to the preface of the Atlas Ccelestis, Flamsteed has not honoured it with a place on the plate of the Hounds. Cor Caroli is readily found by alignment. With the three stars of the Greater Bear's tail as the head of a paper kite, it forms the tail end ; or a line from the Pole-star over e Ursse Majoris will point upon the heart. Another clue is obtained in the galley-rhyme : When clear aloft, Bootes seek, his brilliance leads the gaze, And on each side its glitt'ring gems the spacious arch displays ; Arcturus east to Wega join, the Northern Crown you'll spy; But west, to Ursa's second star, he marks Cor Caroli. The Canes Venatici form a new constellation, intruded into the heavens in recent times. Tycho Brahe, unfortunately less known by his excellence as a practical astronomer than as the author of an unmecbanical system, had observed a couple of stars here ; but Hevelius scraped together the sporades between the stern of the Bear and Bootes, and figured two Hounds, for the latter to chase the Bear with ; that nearest the Pole he 366 A Cycle of Celestial Objects. named Asterion, because the appellation is poetical, and it pleased him, and the southern one Chara : " Asterionis sociam, Charam appellavi, quod forte Booti, more venaticorum, canis ilia fcemina, ob celeriorem ejus cursum, fuerit admodum grata et chara." These dogs first appeared in the Prodromus of Hevelius, published by his widow, at Dantzig, in 1690. Since then, the number of its constituents has swelled very con- siderably, although, except Cor Caroli, the asterism offers little remarkable to the unassisted eye ; they are thus registered : Hevelius ... 23 stars. Piazzi 45 stars. Flamsteed ... 25 Bode 139 879. E.A. 64 M. C01VLE BEBENICIS. (h.1486; H. 3321; tt.) t. Free. CCCCLXVII. h. m. 12 51 19 Decl. KT 22 16 '0 2-95 19-55 A conspicuous nebula, between Berenice's Hair and the Virgin's left arm ; discovered by M. in 1780, who, however, only saw it very faintly. Yet it is magnificent both in size and brightness, being elongated in a line np and sf, and blazing to a nucleus, Sir J. Herschel examined this nebula very minutely. He considered it to be resolveable, though not resolved ; and adds, "I am much mistaken if the nucleus be not a double star, in the general direction of the nebula; 320 much increases this suspicion ; 240 shows well a vacuity below the nucleus." My utmost endeavours only show it as FIG. 27. 64 M. COMJ; BERENICIS. ...*_'. i in the sketch annexed. [Engraved, Phil. Trans., 1833, PI. ii. Fig. 27 ; Lassell, Mem. ft.A.S., vol. xxxvi. PI. vi. Fig 26.] 880. 417 B. UBS^E MAJOBIS. h. m. a. B.A. 12 51 29 Decl. 1ST 54 41 '4 STBUVE, W. DUN^B Position. 289-1 787-0 (2. 1695.) s. Free. + 2-67 Q . , Distance. Epoch. 3.2 ... 1832-13 3-2 1871-30 A double star. A 6J-, white; B 9, ash. Duner's colours are "Blanche; Azur clair," and his mags. 6J, 8. E.A. i2 h -